Distributed by: [Link].

com

QSS-3300 series

Service Manual

Issued on June 2005

– for service personnel only –

Distributed by: [Link]

CHAPTER DESCRIPTION

[Link] for work

[Link] and adjustment of parts

[Link]

[Link]

[Link] sequence

[Link] parts

[Link] for service personnel

[Link]
Distributed by: [Link]

Notes to service personnel

Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing the
machine.
The printer processor uses both tapping truss head screws and spike truss head screws. When attaching the screws once
removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where grounding is required.

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

SCREW

System program:
• QSS-33 series: Ver. 2
• QSS-33 PRO series: Ver. 2
• QSS-33 DLS series: Ver. 2
• QSS-3300 series: Ver. 3
• QSS-3300 PRO series: Ver. 2
• QSS-3300DLS series: Ver. 2
• QSS-33SD series: Ver. 2

! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to the others except the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Distributed by: [Link]

Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
"UNLHA(32).DLL" is Mr. Micco's free software.
DIGITAL ICE is a trademark of Kodak.
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
MultiMediaCard™ is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG company in Germany and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard
Association).
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Other product and company names mentioned here in may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Symbols of
trademarks, ™ and ®, are not added.
Distributed by: [Link]

System configuration
The machine configurations of the systems are as follows.

System Scanner Laser printer processor

QSS-3300 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 LPP-750
QSS-3300SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 LPP-750SM

QSS-3300 DLS S-2/S-3 LPP-750

QSS-3300SM DLS S-2/S-3 LPP-750SM

System Laser printer processor

QSS-3300 PRO Digital Printer LPP-750
QSS-3300SM PRO Digital Printer LPP-750SM

iii
Distributed by: [Link]

Explanation of manual
Description for each specification

This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
For the different procedures depending on the specifications
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.

Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
SM specification [SM]

There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.

About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations.
Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
" 4. Troubleshooting
Describes how to solve the troubles.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence of machine.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used in this machine.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.

Marks and symbols used in this manual

Definitions of the marks and symbols used in this manual are as follows:

This is called the alert symbol mark.

Text following this mark contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This mark is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the extent of
influence (injury) on persons or damage to physical property.

The Important symbol indicates operations or procedures requiring caution, instructions and supplementary explanations
that need to be followed.

The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.

The Note symbol indicates functions or instructions which are convenient if you know.

iv
Distributed by: [Link]

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.

Processing solutions Abbreviations

Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB

v
Distributed by: [Link]

This page is intentionally blank.

vi
Distributed by: [Link]

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
System configuration ............................................................................................................................. iii
Explanation of manual ...........................................................................................................................iv
Description for each specification ..................................................................................................iv
About the chapters .........................................................................................................................iv
Marks and symbols used in this manual ........................................................................................iv
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ............................................................v

1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................... 10010
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts .................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
Precautions against LED .......................................................................................................................................10060

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers ............................................................................................................... 20010_1
Removing covers 1 (printer) .............................................................................................................................20010_1
Removing covers 2 (printer) .................................................................................................................................20011
Removing the table (printer) .................................................................................................................................20012
Removing covers 1 (Processor section) ............................................................................................................20021_1
Removing covers 2 (Processor section) ............................................................................................................20022_1
Removing covers 3 (Processor section) ............................................................................................................20023_1
Removing covers 4 (Processor section) ............................................................................................................20024_1
Removing covers 5 (Processor section) ............................................................................................................20025_1
Removing covers 6 (Processor section) ................................................................................................................20026
Removing covers (scanner section) ......................................................................................................................20030
Removing covers (film carrier section) ................................................................................................................20040
Adjusting the belt tension ....................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (paper supply unit A, B and exposure advance unit) ..................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (paper advance unit) ...................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ...............................................................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) ...................................................................................................20130
Adjusting the belt tension (dryer section and conveyor section) ......................................................................20140_1
Display monitor section .......................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ..............................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) .............................................................................................20320

vii
Distributed by: [Link]

Scanner section ..................................................................................................................... 20610

Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] ...................................................................................................................20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-4] ..........................................................................................................................20610
Removing the LED light source unit [S-2/S-3] ....................................................................................................20620
Removing the LED light source unit [S-4] ...........................................................................................................20620
Removing the scanner section and adjusting after replacement ...........................................................................20650
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II) ..................................................................................... 20700
Replacing the film carrier .....................................................................................................................................20700
Removing the advance unit ..................................................................................................................................20710
Replacing and adjusting the film feed motor ........................................................................................................20720
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor .......................................................................................................20730
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis .........................................................................................20740
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor ...............................................................................................20750
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit ..................................................................................................20760
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing ...........................................................................................................20780
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II) .................................................................. 20850
MMC auto focus section adjustment ....................................................................................................................20850
Table peripheral section ......................................................................................................... 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate .............................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ................................................................................................................21120
Adjusting the gap of the negative cleaner brush ...................................................................................................21150
Personal computer control section ......................................................................................... 21170
Opening/closing the personal computer control unit ............................................................................................21170
Removing the personal computer control unit ..................................................................................................21180_1
Paper magazine section ......................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the paper magazine ...............................................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ................................................................................................................ 25610
Removing paper supply unit A .............................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ...............................................................................25620_1
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm ..........................................................................................................25630
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP ...........................................................................................................25640
Paper supply unit B ................................................................................................................ 25710
Removing paper supply unit B .............................................................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and the position of paper magazine mount B ......................................................................25720
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B ........................................................................................25730
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ...................................................................................................................25810
Banding shooting ..................................................................................................................................................25820
Paper Advance Section .......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the paper advance unit .........................................................................................................................26610
Removing the processor loading unit ...................................................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit .................................................................................................................... 26710
Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit ..........................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ........................................................................................26810

viii
Distributed by: [Link]

Length between the units ................................................................................................... 26910_1

Length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit ...............................................................26910_1
Drive section ...................................................................................................................... 27220_1
Removing the dryer rack ..................................................................................................................................27220_1
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..................................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension .................................................................................................................27240
Removing the dryer heater ................................................................................................................................27250_1
Order classification section ................................................................................................ 27410_1
Replacing the print conveyor unit belt ..............................................................................................................27410_1
Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................. 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ......................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................27830

3. Mode
Passwords .............................................................................................................................. 30500
Passwords .............................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) .............................................................................................................................30600
Mode structure chart .......................................................................................................... 31000_1
Mode structure chart (Order Display) ...............................................................................................................31000_1
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) ............................................................................................................31010
Mode structure chart (Menu display) ...................................................................................................................31020
Mode structure chart (Setup) ................................................................................................................................31030
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] .......................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] ....................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ...................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] ................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) .....................................................................................................................31060
Mode structure chart (Net Order) .....................................................................................................................31500_1
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer) ........................................................................ 31710_1
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ...........................................................................31710_1
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer] .........................................................................31720
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ...............................................................................31730
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................................................31740
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer] ................................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer] .................................................................................31770
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification) ....................................................................... 32000
DLS mode structure chart .....................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ...........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ............................................................................................................32020
QSS mode structure chart (Setup) ........................................................................................................................32030
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ...............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] ............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ...........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] ........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance) .............................................................................................................32060

ix
Distributed by: [Link]

Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32500

Service Parameters ................................................................................................................................................32500
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup ........................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ..............................................................................................................32561
Area Registration ..................................................................................................................................................32570
Parameter 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................32590
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] ........................................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] .....................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration ....................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ...........................................................................................................................33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33600
Operator Selections ............................................................................................................... 34500
Operator Selections [N] ........................................................................................................................................34500
Operator Selections [SM] .....................................................................................................................................34500
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC-II) .................................................................................................35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC-II) ........................................................................................................35010
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (110 AFC-II) ........................................................................................................35020
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC-II) ...............................................................................................35030
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC-II) ................................................................................................35040
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ...................................................................................................................35050
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135 AFC-II) ........................................................................................................35060
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..................................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) ............................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] .............................................................................................................................35220_1
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..........................................................................................................................35220_1
Output Check (Input Section) ...............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..........................................................................................................................35320_1
Output Check (Processor) [SM] .......................................................................................................................35320_1
Reading and Writing Data ....................................................................................................................................35400
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software .........................................................................................................35450
System Version Check ......................................................................................................................................35500_1
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .....................................................................................................35600_1
Operation Information ..........................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [N] ....................................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [SM] .................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ..................................................................................................................................................35920_1
Media Drive Self-diagnostic .............................................................................................................................35920_1

x
Distributed by: [Link]

Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000

Paper sensor adjustment .......................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction ........................................................................................................................36010_1
Exposure Magnification Correction .....................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment .............................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ............................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ........................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction .......................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction .................................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment ............................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ......................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .............................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization ....................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ...............................................................................................................36710
Scanner Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-2/S-3] .................................................................................................37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4] .......................................................................................................37000
Light Source Registration .....................................................................................................................................37010
Focus Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................37020
Light Source Update .............................................................................................................................................37030
Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information ............................................................................................................ 37500
Saving the Logdata ...............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data .......................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ...................................................................................37520_1
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error .............................................................37530_1
Saving the DLS log file ........................................................................................................................................37600
Flatbed execution display ....................................................................................................... 38000
Flatbed execution display .....................................................................................................................................38000

4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .............................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4190
Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4] ..............................................................4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] ......................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ....................................................................4202_1
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ...........................................................................4203_1
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4] ...................................................................................4240

xi
Distributed by: [Link]

Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4250

Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] ............................................................................4250
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) ........................................................................................4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ...................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. ........................4302
An abnormal print is made .................................................................................................................................4304_1
Checking for media drive defect .............................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start properly. ......................................................................................................................................4306
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print ....................................................... 4400_1
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) .............................................................................4400_1
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ..............................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ...............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ......................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line ............................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ............................................................................................. 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ...........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart ....................................................................... 4600
About the scanner adjustment chart ........................................................................................................................4600
DLS Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 4900
DLS Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................................4900
System Error messages (No. 3-) .............................................................................................. 4910
No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ........................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full .......................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ...................................................................................................................4911
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) .............................................................................................. 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ..............................................................................................................4920
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-) ....................................................................................... 4961
No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ............................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ...............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4962
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ..........................................................................................................4962
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4963
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4963
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4964
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed .............................................................................................................4965
No. 10-20 Busy Modem .......................................................................................................................................4965

xii
Distributed by: [Link]

Uploading Error messages (No. 12-) ....................................................................................... 4970

No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ..........................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error .................................................................................................................................4972_1
No. 12-8 Printing Error .....................................................................................................................................4972_1
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ...............................................................................................................................4974
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error .............................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed ..........................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .........................................................................................................................4977
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) .................................................................................. 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................40502
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ......................................................................................................40502
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ..........................................................................................................40506
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ...................................40508
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. ..........................................................................................................................40514
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. .......................................................................................................................40518_1
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ..........................................................................40518_1
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700
No. 0700-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .................................................40700
No. 0701-####[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ............................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ........................................................................................40702
No. 0703 [SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...............40702
No. 0704 [SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package.
...............................................................................................................................................................................40704
No. 0705-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .................................................40704

xiii
Distributed by: [Link]

Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...................................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ...................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .............................................41002
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B .............................................41002
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ................................................................................41004
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ................................................................................41004
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................41010
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................41010
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ....................................................................41012
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ......................................................................................................................................41012
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ..................................................................41014_1
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? ........................................................................................................41016
No. 1027-#### Profile data was not found. ........................................................................................................41026
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ...................41028
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ........................................................................................41028
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. ..........................................................................................................41030
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...............................................................41030
No. 1032 One moment please. . . ........................................................................................................................41032
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. .......................................................................41034
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ...............................................................................................41038
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ......................................................................................................41038
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. .....................................................................................................................41040
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ..............................................................................................................................................41040
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ............................................................41042
No. 1047-#### Close printer door. .....................................................................................................................41046
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ...............................................................41048
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ...............................................................................................................41064
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ..............................................................................41072
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. ..........................................................................................................................41074
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. .................................41080
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ..................................................................................................41080
Attention message: Scanner .................................................................................................. 41302
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? .......................................................................................................41302
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. ...................................................................................................41304_1
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ...........................................41306
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. ..................................................................................41312
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range. ...............................................................................41314
No. 1315-#### LED Light Source temperature is being [Link] cannot be continued. ......................41314
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed. ....................................................................................................................41316
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction. ........................................................................41316
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. .................................................................41318

xiv
Distributed by: [Link]

Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................. 41400

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................................................41400
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. ......................................................................................................................41400
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. ....................................................................................................................41402
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process. ............................................................................................41402
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ........................................................................................................41404
No. 1405-#### Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. .............................................................................41404
No. 1406-#### Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier. .............................................................................41406
No. 1407-#### Remove the 110 film from the Film Carrier. .............................................................................41406
No. 1408-#### Remove the 120 film from the Film Carrier. .............................................................................41408
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................................41408
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. ........................................................................41410_1
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing? ....................................................41412
No. 1413 Input the frame number .......................................................................................................................41412
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. .....................................................................................................41414
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. .............................................................................................................................41416
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. .......................................................................................................41416
No. 1420 Select the DX code. ............................................................................................................................41420
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed. ..............................................................41420
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. .............................................................................................................................41422
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. ............41423
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. ...............................................................41423
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. ........................................................................41423
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. ...........................................................................................................................41426
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ..41426
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. .........................................................................................41428
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. ....................................................................................41428
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. ......................................................................................................................41430
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC. ...........................................................................................................................41430
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. ................................................................................................................................41432
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. .................................................................................................................................41432
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
...............................................................................................................................................................................41434
No. 1438 Set the attachment. ..............................................................................................................................41438
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan? ...................................................................41438

xv
Distributed by: [Link]

Attention message: Disk/Media .............................................................................................. 41500

No. 1501 The media is write protected. ..............................................................................................................41500
No. 1502 Replace the media.### ........................................................................................................................41502
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.### ..............................................................................................41502
No. 1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. .............................................................................41504
No. 1505 Exif information cannot be read. ........................................................................................................41504
No. 1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? ..........................................................................41506
No. 1508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing? ...41508
No. 1509 Write the data. ##### Order Number .................................................................................................41508
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ..............................................................................................................41510
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. .............................................................................................................41510
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. .....................................................................................................41512
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? .....................................................................41512
No. 1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory. .......................................................................................................41514
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. ....................................................................................................................41514
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. .....................................................................................................................41516
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ..................................................................................................41516
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. ........................................................41518
No. 1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files? .........................41518
No. 1520 Select the template. .............................................................................................................................41520
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. .......................................................41520
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? ..........................................................41522
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. .......................................................................................................41522
No. 1526 Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Do you want to try again? .............................................41526
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. .............................................................................................................41526
No. 1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing. ...................................................41528
No. 1529 Failed to read the bar code. .................................................................................................................41528
Attention message: Disk/Media .............................................................................................. 41530
No. 1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists. ....................41530
No. 1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected. ..................41530
No. 1532 Write the data. .....................................................................................................................................41532
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. .................................................................................................41532
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ........................41534
No. 1535 USB Flash Memory is not set. ............................................................................................................41534
No. 1536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media? ...............................................41536
No. 1537 The appropriate file was not found.#### ............................................................................................41536
No. 1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click the Output Media icon to output. ........................41538
No. 1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media. ...................................................41538
No. 1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting. ........................................41540
No. 1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written. Settings cannot be changed until the data is written to
media. ....................................................................................................................................................................41540
No. 1542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ......................................41542
No. 1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ...41542
No. 1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ......................................................41544
No. 1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
Setting. ..................................................................................................................................................................41546
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. .................................................................41546
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ...........................................................41548
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. ....................................................................................................................41548

xvi
Distributed by: [Link]

Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550

No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ....................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? .............................................................41550
No. 1552-#### The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ............................................41552
Attention message: Pricing unit .............................................................................................. 41600
No. 1601-#### Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. ..................................................................41600
No. 1603-#### The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ...................................................................41602
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check ............................................................................................................41604
Attention message: NMC ....................................................................................................... 41620
No. 1621 Would you like to delete the order? ....................................................................................................41620
No. 1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt? ..................................................................................41622
No. 1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to delete the order? ......................................................41634
No. 1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. ............................41636
No. 1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted. ....................................................................41636
No. 1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted. ..............41638
No. 1639-#### Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted. ......................................................41638
No. 1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print Channel. ............................................................41640
No. 1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel. ..........41642
No. 1643 The appropriate file was not found. ....................................................................................................41642
No. 1644 Exif Information could not be read. ....................................................................................................41644
No. 1645 Data is too large to read. .....................................................................................................................41644
No. 1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ..................................................................................................41646
No. 1647 The appropriate file was not found. ....................................................................................................41646
No. 1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ...41648
No. 1649 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ......................................................41648
No. 1650 Data is too small to read. ....................................................................................................................41650
No. 1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure enough space, then restart processing. ......................41656
No. 1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the calibration? .......................................................................41658
Attention message: Software upgrade ............................................................................... 41800_1
No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. .....................................................................................................41800_1
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 1900-#### It was not registered as an option. .............................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. .........................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ..............................41902_1
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ......................................................................................41902_1
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ..........................................................................................41904
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. ................................................................................................................41904
No. 1909 Title was not set. .................................................................................................................................41908
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ..................................................................................41910
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ...............................................................................................................41910
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ...............................................................................41912
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? .......................................................41912
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ........................................41914
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. .....................................................................41922
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ..................................................41922
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". .......................41926
No. 1927-#### Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. ...............................................41926
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. ............................................................41932

xvii
Distributed by: [Link]

Attention message: Compact archive unit .............................................................................. 43370

No. 3371-#### Could not execute Hold On Save. .............................................................................................43370
No. 3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save. ...............................................................................43372
No. 3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? ................43372
No. 3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. Confirm the setting. .................................................43374
No. 3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process. ..................................43374
Attention message: Edit ......................................................................................................... 44000
No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? ..............................................................................................................44000
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. ..............................................................................44002
No. 4003-#### Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ................................................................44002
No. 4004-#### Graphics are too large to insert. .................................................................................................44004
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. .44006
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. .............................................................................44006
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. ...................................................44008
No. 4010 Specify the image area. .......................................................................................................................44010
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. ...............................................................................44014
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. .................................................................................................................44014
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small. ...........................................44016
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? ...............................................................................................44018
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ............44018
No. 4020-#### Failed to write the file. ...............................................................................................................44020
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. .........................................................................................................................44020
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. .............................................................44022
No. 4024 Select the layer. ...................................................................................................................................44024
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used. .............................................44024
No. 4026 The image size is too large to insert. ..................................................................................................44026
No. 4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ............................................................44026
No. 4028 Failed to export the Image Save File. .................................................................................................44028
No. 4029 The drive is empty. .............................................................................................................................44028
No. 4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data. .................................................................................44030
No. 4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk. ........................................................................................44030
No. 4032 Template size is too large to read. ......................................................................................................44032
No. 4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template. ....................44032
No. 4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area. ...........................................................................44034
No. 4035 Additional phrases could not be saved. ..............................................................................................44034
No. 4036 The image size is too small to insert. ..................................................................................................44036
No. 4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ....................................................44036
No. 4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ...44038
No. 4039 Image size during editing is too large. ................................................................................................44038
No. 4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field. .................................................44040
No. 4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used. ...............................................................................44040
No. 4042 Single Form is not positioned. ............................................................................................................44042
No. 4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area. ...................................................................................44042
No. 4044 Single Form is overlapped. .................................................................................................................44044
No. 4045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned. .................................................................44044
No. 4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled. ............................44046
No. 4047 The selected font was not found. ........................................................................................................44046
No. 4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print. ...............................................................................44048
No. 4049 No more items can be added. ..............................................................................................................44048

xviii
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ..................................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ...................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ................................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ...............................................................................45503
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD ..........................................45504
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ...........................................45504
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB ........................................45504
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .......................................................................45507
No. 5508[N] The processing solution level is too low. ......................................................................................45508
No. 5508[SM] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................45508
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ...............................................................................................45508
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. .........................................................................................................45510
No. 5511[N] The circulation pump has stopped. CD .........................................................................................45511
No. 5513[N] The circulation pump has stopped. BF ..........................................................................................45511
No. 5515[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 .....................................................................................45511
No. 5516[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 .....................................................................................45511
No. 5517[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 .....................................................................................45511
No. 5518[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 .....................................................................................45511
No. 5511[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................45511
No. 5513[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................45511
No. 5515[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5516[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5517[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5518[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ..................................................................................45511
Error: Processor 2 .................................................................................................................. 45519
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD .....................................................................................................................45519
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ......................................................................................................................45519
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ...................................................................................................................45519
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. .................................................................................................................45522
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...............................................................................................45524
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ...............................................................................................45524
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...........................................................................................45524
No. 5527 Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...........................................................................................45524
No. 5528 Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...........................................................................................45524
No. 5529 Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...........................................................................................45524
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ................................................................45532
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .......................................................................................45532
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ...................................................................................45534_1
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ...............................................................................................................45536
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor .............................................................................................................45538
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ...............................................................................................................45542
No. 5549-#### Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ...........................................................45548
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ....................................................................................................................45550

xix
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700

No. 5700-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ....................................................................45700
No. 5701-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ....................................................................45700
No. 5702-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ....................................................................45700
No. 5703-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ...................................................................45700
No. 5704-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .....................................................................45700
No. 5705-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .....................................................................45700
No. 5706-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ......................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45708
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45708
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ......................................................................................45710
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .......................................................................................45710
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...................................................................................45710
No. 5713[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...................................................................................45710
No. 5714[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...................................................................................45710
No. 5715[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...................................................................................45710

xx
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: Printer ........................................................................................................... 46012

No. 6012-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46012
No. 6013-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46012
No. 6014-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .................................................................................46014
No. 6015-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .................................................................................46014
No. 6016-#### Paper Cutter operation error. .....................................................................................................46016
No. 6017-#### Paper has jammed in the printer section. ...................................................................................46016
No. 6021-#### Paper remains in the printer section. .........................................................................................46020
No. 6056-#### Printer system error. ..................................................................................................................46056
No. 6073-#### Synchronous Sensor error. .........................................................................................................46072
No. 6074 B Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46074
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46074
No. 6076-#### Polygon Mirror control error. ....................................................................................................46076
No. 6077-#### Interlock error. ...........................................................................................................................46076
No. 6081-#### Backup data error. Printer .........................................................................................................46080
No. 6082-#### Setup error. ................................................................................................................................46082
No. 6087-#### Laser Control PCB system error. ...........................................................................................46086_1
No. 6101-#### Paper Hold Motor operation error. ............................................................................................46100
No. 6104-#### Printer Door is open. ..................................................................................................................46104
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46104
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46104
No. 6107-#### R Laser temperature is out of range. .........................................................................................46107
No. 6135-#### Arm Unit 1 operation error. .......................................................................................................46134
No. 6136-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .................................................46136
No. 6137-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .................................................46136
No. 6144-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ......................................................46144_1
No. 6146-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. ..............................................................................46146
No. 6147-#### Turn Motor operation error. ......................................................................................................46146
No. 6148-#### Paper End Sensor A error. .........................................................................................................46148
No. 6149-#### Paper End Sensor B error. .........................................................................................................46148
No. 6151-#### Paper Loading Sensor error. ......................................................................................................46151
No. 6152-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ...............................................................................46152
No. 6153-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .............................................................................46152
No. 6154-#### Paper Supply End Sensor error. .................................................................................................46154
No. 6155-#### Exposure Start Sensor error. ......................................................................................................46154
No. 6156-#### Exposure End Sensor error. .......................................................................................................46156
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .......................................................46172
No. 6177-#### Laser Unit temperature is out of range. .....................................................................................46176
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ..............................................................................................................46178

xxi
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: Scanner ........................................................................................................ 46302

No. 6303-#### Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. ...............................................................................................46302
No. 6304-#### Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. ...............................................................................................46304
No. 6305-#### Scanner Focus operation error. ..................................................................................................46304
No. 6306-#### Scanner IRIS operation error. ....................................................................................................46306
No. 6309-#### Scanner change of light error. ...................................................................................................46308
No. 6311-#### Scanner data error. .....................................................................................................................46310
No. 6319-#### Backup data error. Scanner AFC ..............................................................................................46318
No. 6321-#### Focus auto adjustment error. .....................................................................................................46320
No. 6322-#### Scanner input balance error. ..................................................................................................46322_1
No. 6324 F stop value range error. .....................................................................................................................46324
No. 6327-#### Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. ...................................................46326
No. 6329-#### Analog setting communication error. ....................................................................................46328_1
No. 6330-#### Digital setting communication error. .....................................................................................46330_1
No. 6331-#### Line scanning communication error. .....................................................................................46330_1
No. 6332-#### Light Source adjustment error. ..............................................................................................46332_1
No. 6333-#### The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error. ...............................................................46332_1
No. 6336-#### Scanner Zoom operation error. ..................................................................................................46336

xxii
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: Film carrier .................................................................................................... 46400

No. 6400-#### Perforation Sensor error. ...........................................................................................................46400
No. 6401-#### Loading Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46400
No. 6402-#### Ready Sensor error. ...................................................................................................................46402
No. 6403-#### 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ..................................................................................46402
No. 6404-#### 240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ..................................................................................46404
No. 6405-#### 110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ..................................................................................46404
No. 6406-#### 120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ..................................................................................46406
No. 6407-#### Spool Key operation error. ........................................................................................................46406
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. .............................................................................................................46408
No. 6409-#### The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ......................................................................................46408
No. 6410-#### Film Sensor error. ......................................................................................................................46410
No. 6411-#### Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. ................................................46410
No. 6412-#### 135 DX Sensor 1 error. ..............................................................................................................46412
No. 6413-#### 135 DX Sensor 2 error. ..............................................................................................................46412
No. 6414-#### 135 DX Sensor 3 error. ..............................................................................................................46412
No. 6415-#### 135 DX Sensor 4 error. ..............................................................................................................46412
No. 6416-#### 240 DX Sensor 1 error. ..............................................................................................................46416
No. 6417-#### 240 DX Sensor 2 error. ..............................................................................................................46416
No. 6423 Auto focus error. .................................................................................................................................46422
No. 6424-#### Mount Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46424
No. 6425-#### Mount detection error. ...............................................................................................................46424
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ..................................................................................................................46426
No. 6429-#### System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) .........................................................................46428_1
No. 6431 Auto focus error. .................................................................................................................................46430
No. 6432-#### Mount Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46432
No. 6433-#### Mount detection error. ...............................................................................................................46432
No. 6434-#### Mount detection (inlet) error. ....................................................................................................46434
No. 6435-#### Mount insertion operation error. ................................................................................................46434
No. 6436-#### Mount elevator operation error. .................................................................................................46436
No. 6437-#### Mount eject operation error. ......................................................................................................46436
No. 6438-#### 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. .............................................................................................46438
No. 6439-#### The film strip is too short for processing. ..................................................................................46438
No. 6441-#### The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ......................................................................................46440
No. 6442-#### The perforation of the film may be broken. ..............................................................................46442
No. 6443 Move Table operation error. ...............................................................................................................46444
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position. ................................................................................................................46444
Error message: Disk/Media .................................................................................................... 46502
No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. ......................................................................................................46502
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. ...........................................................................................................46504
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. ......................................................................................................46504
No. 6506-#### Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ...........................................................46506
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 6551-#### Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ..............................................................................46550
No. 6552-#### Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit ........................................................................................46552
No. 6554-#### Calibration Plate advance error. ................................................................................................46554

xxiii
Distributed by: [Link]

Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................ 46600_1

No. 6600-#### Pricing Unit communication error. ........................................................................................46600_1
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46600_1
No. 6602-#### Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ......................................................................................46602_1
No. 6603-#### Backup data error. PU ..........................................................................................................46602_1
Error: NMC ............................................................................................................................. 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. .......................................................................................................46620
Error message: Software upgrade ......................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...................................46802
Error: Main ......................................................................................................................... 46900_1
No. 6900-## Main control system error. ........................................................................................................46900_1
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error. ...........................................................................................46900_1
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error. ..................................................................................................46902_1
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ............................................................46906_1
No. 6907-#### The file was not found. ..........................................................................................................46906_1
No. 6908-#### Processing response error. .....................................................................................................46908_1
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. .......................................................................................46908_1
No. 6913-#### System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ................................................................46912
No. 6916-#### PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. .................................................................................46916
No. 6918-#### Failed to start the DLS. ..............................................................................................................46918
No. 6920 Hardware Key could not be detected. .............................................................................................46920_1
No. 6921-#### PCB error. ..............................................................................................................................46920_1
No. 6922-#### Device control error. ..................................................................................................................46922
No. 6925 PC-Laser Interface PCB control error. ...........................................................................................46924_1
Error: Compact Archive Unit .................................................................................................. 48360
No. 8361 Archive File read error. .......................................................................................................................48360
No. 8362 Archive File write error. .....................................................................................................................48362
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. ............................................................................................48362
No. 8364-#### Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. .....................................................................................48364
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
No. 9000-#### Edit mode System error. ...........................................................................................................49000
No. 9001-#### Edit mode Information file error. .............................................................................................49000
No. 9002-#### Edit mode Image data error. .....................................................................................................49002
No. 9003-#### Edit mode Image read error. .....................................................................................................49002

5. Operation sequence
Start up/Closing down sequence ....................................................................................... 50500_1
Startup sequence ...............................................................................................................................................50500_1
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification) ........................................................... 50501_1
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ..............................................................................................................50501_1
PC startup sequence .............................................................................................................. 50510
Startup sequence for PC ........................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ................................................................................................... 50520_1
ARCNET communication flow ........................................................................................................................50520_1
How to use the fiber cutter ................................................................................................................................50520_1
How to use the aspirator ...................................................................................................................................50520_1

xxiv
Distributed by: [Link]

Data flow chart ................................................................................................................... 50700_1

Data flow in printing .........................................................................................................................................50700_1
Data flow in data saving ...................................................................................................................................50710_1
Data flow to the CAU .......................................................................................................................................50730_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) .................................................................................. 50800_1
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] .............................................50800_1
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] ........................................................................................................50810_1
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] ...................................................................................................50820_1
Film carrier section ................................................................................................................. 51010
Film feed operation (135) .....................................................................................................................................51010
Film feed operation (240) .....................................................................................................................................51110
Film feed operation (120) .....................................................................................................................................51310
Film feed operation (110) .....................................................................................................................................51410
Film feed operation (MMC) .................................................................................................................................51510
Film advance operation (AMC) ............................................................................................................................51550
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................ 55000_1
Paper path diagram ...........................................................................................................................................55000_1
Paper advance operation ....................................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation ........................................................................................................................................55100
Paper advance operation (before exposure) ..........................................................................................................55200
Exposure operation ...............................................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation ...................................................................................................................................55400_1
Paper rewind operation .........................................................................................................................................55500
Paper splicing operation .......................................................................................................................................55600
Paper end operation ..............................................................................................................................................55700
Fogged paper operation ....................................................................................................................................55800_1
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................. 56100_1
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................................................56100_1
Print conveyor unit operation ...........................................................................................................................56200_1

6. Electrical parts
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ........................................................................ 61000_1
Printer section (positions of PCBs) ...................................................................................................................61000_1
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) ............................................................................61100_1
Colorimeter unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) ....................................................................................61110
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) ..............................................................61300
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) ................................................................61400_1
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) .......................................................................................61450
Position of electrical parts (scanner section) .......................................................................... 62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2] ...........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-3] ...........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-4] ...........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2] .............................................................................................62050
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-3] .............................................................................................62050
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-4] .............................................................................................62050

xxv
Distributed by: [Link]

Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section) ................................................................... 62100

135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ....................................................................................................................62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ......................................................................................................62150
120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ...........................................................................................................................62200
120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) .............................................................................................................62250
110 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ...........................................................................................................................62300
110 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) .............................................................................................................62350
135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs) ..................................................................................................................62400
135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62450
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62500
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62550
135 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ...........................................................................................................................62600
135 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) .............................................................................................................62650
MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ....................................................................................62660
MFC (position and description of electrical parts) ...............................................................................................62670
Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................. 63200_1
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] .......................................................................................................63200_1
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] ........................................................................................................63200_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section) ................................................................. 63250_1
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] .........................................................................................63250_1
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ......................................................................................63250_1
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ........................ 63260_1
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) ...................................................63260_1
Description of PCB (printer section) ................................................................................... 64110_1
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) ..............................................................................................................64110_1
Colorimeter control PCB (J390801) .....................................................................................................................64130
Printer control PCB (J391071) .........................................................................................................................64140_1
Laser control PCB (J391081) ...........................................................................................................................64150_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390939) ............................................................................................................................64160_1
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390940) ................................................................................................................................64170
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J390941) ............................................................................................................................64180_1
Dual paper magazine PCB (J390942) ...................................................................................................................64190
Laser I/O PCB (J390945) .....................................................................................................................................64200
B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1) .......................................................................................64210
B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1) .......................................................................................64210
AOM driver (I124020) .........................................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J390943) .............................................................................................................................................64240
BZ-PC I/O PCB (J391024) ..............................................................................................................................64245_1
Power supply (printer section) ..........................................................................................................................64250_1
Description of PCB (scanner section) .................................................................................... 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879) ...................................................................................................................65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3] .....................................................................................................65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4] ............................................................................................................65010
LED driver PCB (J390999) ..................................................................................................................................65020
Power supply (scanner) .........................................................................................................................................65060
PM driver ..............................................................................................................................................................65070

xxvi
Distributed by: [Link]

Description of PCB (film carrier section) ................................................................................ 65200

Connecting PCB 1 (J390756) ...............................................................................................................................65200
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) ...............................................................................................................................65210
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) ...............................................................................................................................65220
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) .......................................................................................................................................65230
Driver PCB 2 (J390519) .......................................................................................................................................65240
Sensor PCB (J390757) ..........................................................................................................................................65250
Power PCB (J390755) ..........................................................................................................................................65260
Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051) ..............................................................................................................65270
Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784) ..............................................................................................................65270
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) ...............................................................................................................................65280
Connecting PCB (J390371) ..................................................................................................................................65290
Sensor PCB (J390385) ..........................................................................................................................................65300
Connecting PCB (J390372) ..................................................................................................................................65310
Sensor PCB (J390394) ..........................................................................................................................................65320
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) ........................................................................................................................65330
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ................................................................................................................................65340
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) .........................................................................................................................65350
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779) ...................................................................................................................65360
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) ...........................................................................................................................65370
Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414) ......................................................................................65380
Connecting PCB 1 (J390783) ...............................................................................................................................65390
Connecting PCB 2 (J490291) ...............................................................................................................................65400
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [N] ..................................................................................................................66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM] ...............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N] ....................................................................................................................66210_1
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM] .................................................................................................................66210_1
Main relay PCB (J390976) ...................................................................................................................................66220
Sub relay PCB (J390935) .....................................................................................................................................66230
SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM] ...............................................................................................................................66600
Power supply (processor) .....................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) .................................................................................68050
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 68100_1
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ....................................................................68100_1
Handling the flat cable ..........................................................................................................................................68200
Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 68500
System starting ......................................................................................................................................................68500
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) ....................................................................68550_1

7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) ........................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) .................................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ................................................................................................70022_1
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..................................................70040
Processor setting check [N] ..................................................................................................................................70050
Checking the processor setting [SM] ..................................................................................................................70050

xxvii
Distributed by: [Link]

8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ..................................................................................................... 80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Scanner Section) .....................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) .......................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] ...........................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] ........................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N] .............................................................................................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM] ..........................................................................................80110
Positions of paper jam release labels ................................................................................ 80210_1
Positions of paper jam release labels ................................................................................................................80210_1
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] ..............................................................................................................................80310
Service personnel tool list [SM] ...........................................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ..............................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ................................................ 81020
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ..............................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................... 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] .......................................................................................81510
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ..................................................... 88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ...................................................................................88000
Table of wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................................................89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89010
Wiring diagram table [S-4] ...................................................................................................................................89010

xxviii
Distributed by: [Link]

1000

1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

Description of warning (signal words) ..............................................................................................................10010

1 Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ..............................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
Precautions against LED ...................................................................................................................................10060

1000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

10010
Description of warning (signal words)
Description of warning (signal words)

Description of warning (signal words)

• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

1. Cautions for work

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the machine that pose the indicated danger. If ignored, death or serious injury occurs,
or the machine breaks down. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals or on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information to avoid danger.
• Carefully read and follow the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the machine.

This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.

This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.

This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.

Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)

Symbol mark (warning

indication)

Warning text (warning

indication)

SIGNALWORD

10010 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

10020
Location of warning labels
Location of warning labels

Location of warning labels

The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this machine. Heed the clearly indicated warnings
and operate safely without accidents. If the warning labels on the machine become illegible or peel off, contact your place of purchase and
exchange them with new labels.
Though the machine appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.

1. Cautions for work

Printer processor section
When the dual paper magazine unit (option) has not been attached:

4 2 3 13 9

1
7
5 8
11 6
1
3
10 4
14
3 4 1 G077960

When the dual paper magazine unit (option) has been attached:
4 2 3 13 9

7
5 8
11 6
1
1 10 3
12 4
14
3 4 1
G077961

10020 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

10020
Location of warning labels

Scanner section

1. Cautions for work

1

G074126

135/240 AFC-II

12

G071691

135/240 MMC-II

15

G050548

135/240 AMC-II

16

G061413

10020 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

10020
Location of warning labels

MFC

1. Cautions for work

15

G071916

1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01

3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01

5 6
A023031-01 A022509-01

10020 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

10020
Location of warning labels

7
A234392-01

1. Cautions for work

8
A234350-01

9 10
A022536-01 A023473-01

11 12
A515330-01 A227560-01

13
A022587-01

10020 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

10020
Location of warning labels

14

A063381-01

1. Cautions for work

15 16
A031010-01 A064649-01

10020 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

10030
For safe operation
For safe operation

For safe operation

! General precautions

1. Cautions for work

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure the main power supply is turned off.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, mechanical operation check during it
requires particular attention.

IMPORTANT
• Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).

! Precautions for processing solutions

• This machine uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.

• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.

10030 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

10030
For safe operation

! Precautions against electric shock

• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the machine, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the machine.

1. Cautions for work

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.

! Precautions for operating rotary section

• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the machine during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.

! Precautions for operating heating section

• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. generate high fever.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning OFF the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work [Link] off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.

10030 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

10030
For safe operation

! Precautions for movable units

• There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.

1. Cautions for work

When moving a unit manually, hold the specified parts only.
When working with a unit which automatically moves, or when working around the unit, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker and main power supply.
If your hand is caught and you cannot move, immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker.

! Precautions around cutting parts

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Do not remove the covers from edged tools. Keep hands away from edged tools.
When operating near edged tools, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

When replacing an edged tool with a new one, do not touch the edge.

10030 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

10040
For safe operation

Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electrical parts

If an electronically charged human body touches electronic parts such as PCBs, it may adversely affect the electronic parts.
When handling the electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools to prevent the components on the PCB from being damaged due

1. Cautions for work

to static electricity.
Also use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital-related units or engines.
Static-dissipative tool
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing the electronic parts from the
machine. This kit consists of four items of Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist
Strap, all-in-one Ground Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use this to prevent that sebum on your hand adheres when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking the electronic parts.

• When using the static-dissipative tool, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more to carry out operation.

10040 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

10050
For safe operation

Laser Precautions

The laser machinery is built into the printer.

1. Cautions for work

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels
The labels for the laser are placed on this machine.
1

2
5
G078823

1 2

3 4

10050 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

10060
For safe operation

Precautions against LED

The LED machinery is built into the scanner.

1. Cautions for work

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to LED radiation.
• Do not remove any parts except specified ones.
• Do not take a direct look with optical instruments.
Location of LED labels
The labels for the LED precautions are placed on this machine.
Do not remove those labels.

1 2 G070355

1 2

10060 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

10060
For safe operation

1. Cautions for work

This page is intentionally blank.

10060 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

2000

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers ............................................................................................................. 20010_1

Removing covers 1 (printer) ..........................................................................................................................20010_1
Removing covers 2 (printer) ..............................................................................................................................20011
Removing the table (printer) ..............................................................................................................................20012
Removing covers 1 (Processor section) .........................................................................................................20021_1
Removing covers 2 (Processor section) .........................................................................................................20022_1

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers 3 (Processor section) .........................................................................................................20023_1
Removing covers 4 (Processor section) .........................................................................................................20024_1
Removing covers 5 (Processor section) .........................................................................................................20025_1
Removing covers 6 (Processor section) .............................................................................................................20026
Removing covers (scanner section) ...................................................................................................................20030
Removing covers (film carrier section) .............................................................................................................20040
Adjusting the belt tension .................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (paper supply unit A, B and exposure advance unit) ..............................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (paper advance unit) ................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ............................................................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) ................................................................................................20130
Adjusting the belt tension (dryer section and conveyor section) ...................................................................20140_1
Display monitor section ....................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ...........................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................20320
Scanner section ................................................................................................................... 20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] ................................................................................................................20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-4] .......................................................................................................................20610
Removing the LED light source unit [S-2/S-3] .................................................................................................20620
Removing the LED light source unit [S-4] ........................................................................................................20620
Removing the scanner section and adjusting after replacement ........................................................................20650
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II) .................................................................................. 20700
Replacing the film carrier ..................................................................................................................................20700
Removing the advance unit ...............................................................................................................................20710
Replacing and adjusting the film feed motor .....................................................................................................20720
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor ....................................................................................................20730
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis .....................................................................................20740
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor ............................................................................................20750
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit ...............................................................................................20760
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing ........................................................................................................20780
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II) ................................................................ 20850
MMC auto focus section adjustment .................................................................................................................20850
Table peripheral section ...................................................................................................... 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ..........................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter .............................................................................................................21120
Adjusting the gap of the negative cleaner brush ................................................................................................21150
Personal computer control section ...................................................................................... 21170
Opening/closing the personal computer control unit .........................................................................................21170
Removing the personal computer control unit ..............................................................................................21180_1

2000 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

2000

Paper magazine section ...................................................................................................... 22000

Checking the paper magazine ............................................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ............................................................................................................. 25610
Removing paper supply unit A ..........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ............................................................................25620_1
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm .......................................................................................................25630
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP .......................................................................................................25640
Paper supply unit B ............................................................................................................. 25710

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing paper supply unit B ..........................................................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and the position of paper magazine mount B ...................................................................25720
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B .....................................................................................25730
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ................................................................................................................25810
Banding shooting ...............................................................................................................................................25820
Paper Advance Section ....................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the paper advance unit .....................................................................................................................26610
Removing the processor loading unit ................................................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit ................................................................................................................. 26710
Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit .......................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ....................................................................................26810
Length between the units ................................................................................................ 26910_1
Length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit ...........................................................26910_1
Drive section .................................................................................................................... 27220_1
Removing the dryer rack ...............................................................................................................................27220_1
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..............................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension ..............................................................................................................27240
Removing the dryer heater ............................................................................................................................27250_1
Order classification section .............................................................................................. 27410_1
Replacing the print conveyor unit belt ..........................................................................................................27410_1
Replenishment package unit ............................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ..................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................27830

2000 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20010_1
Removing covers
Removing covers

Removing covers 1 (printer)

! Removing covers (single paper magazine specification)

1. Remove the side cover. (Loosen two screws out of five.)

Single paper magazine specification

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Loosen these screws.

G078410

2. Open the PCB cover. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• For the single paper magazine specification, the PCB cover is left open when the screwdriver is set to the
following position.

Screwdriver

Screws fixing the PCB cover

G078426

20010_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20010_1
Removing covers

! Removing covers (dual paper magazine specification)

1. Remove the table cover. (Loosen three screws out of six.)

Dual paper magazine specification

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Loosen these screws.

G074622

2. Open the PCB cover. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• For the dual paper magazine specification, the PCB cover is left open when the screwdriver is set to the
following position.

PCB cover

Hole that sets the screwdriver

G078411

20010_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20011
Removing covers

Removing covers 2 (printer)

! Removing covers

1. Remove the printer cover. (17 screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Printer cover

G076378

20011 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20012
Removing covers

Removing the table (printer)

! Removing the table

1. Remove the table.

(six screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Table

G074465

20012 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20021_1
Removing covers

Removing covers 1 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the sub-tank top cover.
3. Remove processor cover 1. (Loosen one screw out of four.)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Sub-tank top cover

Processor cover 1

Loosen this screw.

G078412

4. Remove PCB cover 1. (three screws)

PCB cover 1

G078413

20021_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20022_1
Removing covers

Removing covers 2 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the dryer top cover.

Dryer top cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078811

3. Remove processor cover 2. (three screws)

Processor cover 2

G078414

20022_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20023_1
Removing covers

Removing covers 3 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the dryer top cover.

Dryer top cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078811

3. Remove the processor rear cover. (one screw)

Processor rear cover

G078824

4. Remove the dryer cover. (two screws)

Dryer cover

G078868

20023_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20023_1
Removing covers

5. Remove the maintenance cover. (Loosen two screws.)

Maintenance cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078872

20023_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20024_1
Removing covers

Removing covers 4 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the dryer top cover.
Dryer top cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078811

3. Remove the processor rear cover. (one screw)

Processor rear cover

G078824

4. Remove PCB cover 2. (two screws)

PCB cover 2
G078416
NOTE
• PCB cover 2 does not need to be removed when replacing the main relay PCB cooling fan and the processor power supply
3 cooling fan.

20024_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20025_1
Removing covers

Removing covers 5 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the dryer top cover.

Dryer top cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078811

3. Remove the processor rear cover. (one screw)

Processor rear cover

G078824

4. Remove processor cover 2. (three screws)

Processor cover 2

G078414

20025_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20025_1
Removing covers

5. Remove the mounting plate of the hose receiver. (two screws)

Screw

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Mounting plate of hose receiver

Screw
G078415

20025_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20026
Removing covers

Removing covers 6 (Processor section)

! Removing covers

1. Remove processor cover 4. (seven screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Processor cover 4

G076379

20026 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20030
Removing covers

Removing covers (scanner section)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

4
2

3 G068522

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Scanner top cover
2 Scanner front cover 2 Remove this after first removing the scanner top cover.
3 Scanner lower cover 3 Remove this after removing the scanner top cover, the scanner front
cover and the film cleaner mount.
4 Scanner rear cover 3 Remove this after first removing the scanner top cover.
5 Film cleaner mount 2

20030 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20040
Removing covers

Removing covers (film carrier section)

135/240 AFC-II
2
Screws (top cover)

Connecting PCB 2 3

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

6

Cable guide

4 5

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G057591

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3 Remove this after removing PCB cover 2 and the flat cable of
connecting PCB 2.
2 PCB cover 1 2
3 Bottom cover 1 4 On some units, bottom covers 1 and 2 are changed into a set form.
4 Bottom cover 2 3
5 Bottom cover 3 5
6 Maintenance cover -
7 PCB cover 2 2

120 AFC-II
5
2

3 1

4 G051071

20040 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20040
Removing covers

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Drive motor cover 1
2 Belt cover 1 3
3 Belt cover 2 2
4 PCB cover 2
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

110 AFC-II
2 5

1
3

4 G052612

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Drive motor cover 1
2 Belt cover 1 4
3 Belt cover 2 2
4 PCB cover 2
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1

135/240 MMC-II
1

2 G052613

20040 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20040
Removing covers

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 2
2 PCB cover 3
3 Bottom cover 2

135 AFC-II
1 3
5
Rewinding detection unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

6

Rewinding unit 4
G057592

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3
2 Drive motor cover 1
3 Belt cover 1 2 Remove this after removing the rewinding detector unit and the
rewinding unit.
4 Belt cover 2 2 Remove this after removing belt cover 1.
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1

135/240 AMC-II
1

2 G060694

20040 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20040
Removing covers

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3
2 Front cover 5
3 Loading stocker mount cover 2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

20040 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20110
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (paper supply unit A, B and exposure advance
unit)

Description of paper advance unit

• For paper advance unit, refer to ☞ Adjusting the belt tension (paper advance unit).

Paper supply unit B Paper supply unit A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

9
2 3
4,5 8

6 7

10

Exposure advance unit

G074597

Paper supply unit A, Paper supply unit B

No. Name Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper supply motor B belt 1 mm 190±35 g Paper Supply Motor B
(1.9±0.3 N)

2 Paper advance motor 1 belt 1 mm 220±30 g Paper advance motor 1

(2.2±0.3 N)

3 Paper advance motor 2 belt 1 mm 164±26 g Paper advance motor 2

(1.6±0.3 N)

4 Arm move motor (left) belt 4.5 mm 127±21 g Arm move motor (left)
5 Arm move motor (right) belt (1.2±0.2 N) Arm move motor (right)

20110 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20110
Adjusting the belt tension

Exposure advance unit

No. Name Belt width Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
6 Exposure advance motor 1 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 326±40 g Exposure advance
belt 4.0 mm (3.2±0.4 N) motor 1

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

7 Pressure change motor 1 belt 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 280±40 g Pressure change motor
(2.7 ± 0.4 N) 1
4.0 mm 194±20 g
(1.9±0.2 N)

8 Exposure advance drive belt 10.0 mm 1.0 mm 1100±50 g Exposure advance

(10.8 ± 0.5 N) motor 1

9 Exposure advance motor 1 10.0 mm 2.0 mm 950±50 g Tension pulley

belt (9.3 ± 0.5 N)

10 Pressure change motor 2 belt 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 360±50 g Pressure change motor
(3.5 ± 0.5 N) 2
4.0 mm 255±30 g
(2.5±0.3 N)

20110 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20110
Adjusting the belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (paper advance unit)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

5 6
1
3

G074599

No. Name Belt width Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration

1 Paper advance motor 3 belt 6.0 mm 1.0 mm 130 to 200 g Paper advance motor
(1.2 to 1.9N) 3

2 Pressure change motor belt 5.0 mm 4.0 mm 80 to 130 g Paper advance

(0.8 to 1.3N) pressure change
motor

3 Turn motor belt 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 130 to 200 g Turn motor

(1.3 to 2.0N)

20110 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20110
Adjusting the belt tension

No. Name Belt width Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration

*1
4 Lane select motor belt 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 50 to 70 g Lane select motor
(0.5 to 0.7N)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

5 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm 560 to 630 g Paper advance arm
(left) belt (5.6 to 6.3N) motor
6.0 mm 5.0 mm 140 to 190 g
(1.4 to 1.9N)

6 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm 560 to 630 g Tension plate (right)
(right) belt (5.6 to 6.3N)
6.0 mm*2 5.0 mm 140 to 190 g
(1.4 to 1.9N)

*1. Lane select motor belt is not available for 3300, 3301SD, and 3302SD.
*2. 6.0 mm wide belts can only be used with the 3300. 3300 units that can accommodate 6 mm wide belts will be shipped at a later date.

20110 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20125
Adjusting the belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1

G074473

Colorimeter
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper advance motor belt 163±30 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
(1.6±0.3 N) tension pulley

Paper advance motor belt 74±15 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the

(0.73±0.15 tension pulley
N)

NOTE
• There are two types of belt tensions for the colorimeter unit. The strength differs depending on the belt positions.

20125 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20130
Adjusting the belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section)

135/240 AFC-II
3
4
2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1
G051066

135/240 AFC-II
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Film feed belt (135 insertion 0.77±0.17N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
section) (79±17 g) tension pulley

2 Film feed motor drive belt 1.73±0.39N 0.5 mm Mounting position of the
(176±40 g) motor

3 Film feed belt 1.95± 0.34N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the

(66.3±17 g) tension pulley

4 Rewinding drive belt 0.91±0.05N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the

(93±5 g) tension pulley

110 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II

G051067

20130 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20130
Adjusting the belt tension

110 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Winding drive belt (120 AFC- 0.66±0.15N 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
II) (67±15 g) tension pulley

Winding drive belt (110 AFC- 0.66±0.15N 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
II) (67±15 g) tension pulley

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2 Film feed belt 0.27±0.07N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
(28±7 g) tension pulley

3 Film feed motor drive belt 1.16±0.24N 1.0 mm Mounting position of the
(118±24.5 g) motor

135 AFC-II

G057664

135 AFC-II
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Film feed belt 0.28±0.08N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
(28.5±8.3 g) tension pulley

2 Film feed motor drive belt 1.16±0.24N 1.0 mm Mounting position of the
(118±24 g) motor

20130 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20130
Adjusting the belt tension

135/240 AMC-II
2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1

G060695

135/240 AMC-II
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Loading arm drive belt 0.083±0.015N 2.0 mm Mounting position of the
(8.5±1.5 g) motor

2 Ejection roller belt - - -

20130 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20140_1
Adjusting the belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (dryer section and conveyor section)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078457

NOTE
• For adjustment, refer to the reference listed in the following table.
Adjusting the belt tension (dryer section and conveyor section)
No. Name Reference
1 Replacing the print conveyor unit belt ☞ 27410_1
2 Adjusting the drive motor belt tension ☞ 27240

20140_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20310
Display monitor section
Display monitor section

Replacing the display monitor

! Procedure

Replacing the display monitor

1. Remove the maintenance cover from the PC
control unit. (Loosen two screws.)
Maintenance cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G074448

2. Disconnect the connector(s).

RGB connector
Power supply connector (Monitor)

RGB connector

Power supply connector

G074450

! Adjustment after replacement

1. Carry out the monitor setup.

☞ 32530

20310 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20320
Display monitor section

Replacing the display monitor (DLS Replacing the touch monitor (option)
specification) 1. Remove the maintenance cover from the PC
control unit. (Loosen two screws.)
Maintenance cover
! Procedure

Replacing the standard type monitor

1. Remove the maintenance cover from the PC
control unit. (Loosen two screws.)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Maintenance cover

G074448

2. Remove the power cable from the touch

monitor.
3. Disconnect the RGB cable (blue) which
directly comes out from the touch monitor
from the video port on the back of the PC
G074448 control unit.
2. Disconnect the connector(s). 4. Disconnect the serial cable (green) for the
RGB connector touch monitor from the serial port on the
Power supply connector (Monitor) back of the PC control unit.
Power supply connector
Touch monitor
RGB connector Serial cable (green)

G074450

RGB cable (blue)

Power supply cable
G077366

! Adjustment after replacement

1. Adjust the monitor.

For the details about the adjustment, refer to ☞ 88000
Monitor adjustment in the PC Service Manual.

20320 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20610
Scanner section
Scanner section

Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] 5. Remove the scanner unit. (three adjusting
screws)
NOTE
There are different scanner removal procedures for S-2/S-3 and
S-4. • Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw may be
changed to the hex. nut.
• For S-4 details, refer to the following:
Viewed from right side
• Refer to ☞ Removing the scanner unit [S-4].
Film ready J/P60
lamp
! Precautions for scanner unit Adjusting
replacement screws

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the scanner unit, items shown below
are necessary in returning the defective unit.
Scanner unit Defective scanner unit
Scanner unit
Logdata All of the data when the problem occurs
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem
occurs

Viewed from left side

• Save the following data before replacing the
scanner unit. J/P61
J/P62
• Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data. J/P68
☞ 35400
• Logdata ☞ 37500 Adjusting
• Be sure to include the [Link] and screw
[Link] for Logdata.
J/P69

! Procedure
J/P67
1. Remove the film carrier.
2. Remove the scanner top cover and the
scanner front cover. P120 G068521
☞ 20030
3. Disconnect the connector(s). ! Adjustment after reattaching
J/P60 (Scanner unit)
J/P61 (Scanner unit) 1. Attach the film ready lamp. (one screw)
J/P62 (Scanner unit)
J/P67 (Scanner unit)
2. Adjust the swing and tilt/light axis.
J/P68 (Scanner unit) ☞ 37000
J/P69 (Scanner unit) 3. Carry out the light source registration.
P120 (Relay connector) ☞ 37010
4. Remove the film ready lamp. (one screw) 4. Carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
5. Update the light source.
☞ 37030

20610 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20610
Scanner section

Removing the scanner unit [S-4] 6. Remove the scanner unit. (four screws)
Viewed from right side
J/P62
! Precautions for scanner unit Film ready
J/P61
lamp
replacement

IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the scanner unit, items shown below J/P60
are necessary in returning the defective unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Scanner unit Defective scanner unit J/P68, 69
Scanner unit
Logdata All of the data when the problem occurs
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem
occurs

• Save the following data before replacing the

scanner unit.
Viewed from left side
• Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
J/P67
• Logdata ☞ 37500
• Be sure to include the [Link] and
[Link] for Logdata.

! Procedure

1. Remove the film carrier.

2. Remove the scanner top cover and the
scanner front cover.
☞ 20030
3. Remove the LED light source unit. J16 (upper) J17 (lower)
☞ 20620
4. Remove the film ready lamp. (one screw)
5. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P60, 61, 62 (Scanner unit: near top)
J/P67, 68, 69 (Scanner unit: near center)
J16 (Relay connector (AFC): two screws and two
spacers)
J17 (Relay connector (AFC): two screws and three G081997
spacers)
IMPORTANT ! Adjustment after reattaching
• J16, J17: Connecting the relay connector
(AFC) in an incorrect location may damage 1. Attach the film ready lamp. (one screw)
the PCB or AFC.
• Two spacers are attached in order to ground
2. Check that Light Axis Adjustment and
the AFC and scanner main body.
Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right
When reattaching J16 and J17 connectors, positions.
return the spacers to their original positions. ☞ 37000
NOTE
• Swing and Tilt/Light Axis for the S-4 scanner unit
cannot be adjusted because the scanner unit and its
frame constitute a single device.
3. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010

20610 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20610
Scanner section

4. Carry out the focus adjustment.

☞ 37020
5. Update the light source.
☞ 37030

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

20610 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20620
Scanner section

Removing the LED light source unit 3. Disconnect the connector(s).

[S-2/S-3] LED light source unit LED light source unit
Type 0, 1 Type 2, 3
J/P166 J/P175
There are different LED light source removal procedures for S-
2/S-3 and S-4. J/P167 J/P176
J/P168 J/P177
• For S-4 details, refer to the following:
J/P163 J/P163
• Refer to ☞ Removing the LED light source unit [S-4].

IMPORTANT 4. Remove the LED light source unit. (three

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• If an electrostatically charged human body touches the screws)
LED light source unit, it may adversely affect the built-in
electrical parts (LED element).
Use the static-dissipative tool as you work with the
electrical parts such as PCBs.
☞ 10040

! Precautions for replacement

There are several types of the LED light source unit and one of
them is attached.
How to distinguish the type is shown below.
• You can also check it on the System Version Check
display. ☞ 35500_1
Connector of the
• Number seal is attached on the top of LED light source LED light source unit LED light source
unit. unit

G068520

! Warning when replacing the LED light

source unit

IMPORTANT
• If the shield finger has not been attached to the
scanner base panel, attach the shield finger of LED
Number sticker LED light source unit light source unit in the position specified below, then
G074595 attach the LED light source unit.
Shield finger attachment position
LED light source unit Number sticker
Type 0 Without number sticker (no LED cooling fan
longer available)
Type 1 1 (no longer available)
Type 2 2

• For details of the LED light source unit, refer to

☞ 62050.

! Procedure 20 mm

1. Remove the film carrier.

2. Remove the scanner top cover, the scanner
front cover and scanner lower cover.
☞ 20030
Base panel

Shield finger
G082018

20620 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20620
Scanner section

• When replacing the LED light source unit without the plate and pins of the ND filter solenoid to
ND filter solenoid, it is necessary to reattach the ND become 0 to 0.3 mm. (two screws)
filter solenoid used last time for the LED light source
Rotating plate
unit.
Pins of the ND filter solenoid
1. Remove the ND filter solenoid from the LED
light source unit. (two screws)
2. Remove the springs from the ND filter
solenoid. 0 to 0.3 mm
LED light source unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Spring

Part A of the ND filter solenoid

G076398

6. Check that the ND filter turns ON/OFF

correctly by Output Check.
☞ 35320_1
ND filter: ON

ND filter solenoid

G076395

3. Attach the springs of a new LED light source

unit to the ND filter solenoid.
4. Attach the ND filter solenoid to the new LED
light source unit and tighten it up temporarily.
(two screws)
ND filter: OFF
LED light source unit

Spring

G076399

! Adjustment after reattaching

1. Carry out the light source registration.

☞ 37010
2. Carry out the focus adjustment.
ND filter solenoid ☞ 37020
G076397
3. Update the light source.
☞ 37030
5. Adjust the position of the ND filter solenoid
while pressing the part A of the ND filter
solenoid in the direction of an arrow. Then,
adjust the clearance between the rotating

20620 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20620
Scanner section

Removing the LED light source unit ! Warning when replacing the LED light
[S-4] source unit

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• When replacing the LED light source unit without the
• If an electrostatically charged human body touches the ND filter solenoid, it is necessary to reattach the ND
LED light source unit, it may adversely affect the built-in filter solenoid used last time for the LED light source
electrical parts (LED element). unit.
Use the static-dissipative tool as you work with the
electrical parts such as PCBs. 1. Remove the ND filter solenoid from the LED

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 10040 light source unit. (two screws)
2. Remove the springs from the ND filter
! Precautions for replacement solenoid.
S-4 LED light source unit(s) cannot be used with the S-2 or LED light source unit
the S-3.
How to distinguish the type is shown below.
• Examine the connector protruding from the LED light
source unit. Spring
S-4: connected to the AFC/scanner driver PCB
S-2 and S-3: connected to the relay connector
• You can also check it on the System Version Check
display. ☞ 35500_1
• For details of the LED light source unit, refer to
☞ 62050.

! Procedure

1. Remove the film carrier.

2. Remove the scanner top cover, the scanner
front cover and scanner lower cover.
☞ 20030 ND filter solenoid

3. Disconnect the connector(s).

☞ 62000 G076395
J/P56, 70, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144 (AFC/scanner driver
PCB)
3. Attach the springs of a new LED light source
J/P163 (ND filter solenoid connector) unit to the ND filter solenoid.

4. Remove the LED light source unit. (three

screws)

ND filter solenoid
LED light source unit connector

G078476

20620 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20620
Scanner section

4. Attach the ND filter solenoid to the new LED 6. Check that the ND filter turns ON/OFF
light source unit and tighten it up temporarily. correctly by Output Check.
(two screws) ☞ 35320_1
LED light source unit
ND filter: ON

Spring

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

ND filter: OFF

ND filter solenoid

G076397

5. Adjust the position of the ND filter solenoid

while pressing the part A of the ND filter
solenoid in the direction of an arrow. Then, G076399
adjust the clearance between the rotating
plate and pins of the ND filter solenoid to ! Adjustment after reattaching
become 0 to 0.3 mm. (two screws)
Rotating plate
1. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
Pins of the ND filter solenoid
2. Carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
3. Update the light source.
0 to 0.3 mm ☞ 37030

Part A of the ND filter solenoid

G076398

20620 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

20650
Scanner section

Removing the scanner section and 5. Remove the scanner section.

adjusting after replacement
! Precautions for replacement of
scanner section
Scanner section
IMPORTANT
• The scanner unit is very heavy. Be careful in
replacing.
• If you replaced the scanner section, items shown
below are necessary in returning the defective unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Scanner section Defective scanner unit
Logdata All of the data when the problem occurs
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem
occurs

• Save the following data before replacing the

scanner section.
Film cleaner mount • Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data.
G068395 ☞ 35400
• Logdata ☞ 37500
! Procedure • Be sure to include the [Link] and
[Link] for Logdata.
1. Remove the film carrier.
2. Remove the power supply cable from the ! Replacement procedure
scanner unit.
NOTE
3. Remove the scanner top cover and the • The scanner section does not include film carriers and the
scanner rear cover. film cleaner.
☞ 20030
4. Remove the cable clamp and the connector. 1. Backup the data of the machine before
J/P60 (Scanner unit) replacing the scanner section.
J/P20, 21 (AFC/scanner control PCB) ☞ 35400
2. Replace the scanner section.
3. Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
4. Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
J/P20, J/P21 5. Check the serial number of the scanner
section after replacement with the rating
plate and register it on the Machine
Specification display.
6. Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for
each AFC.
IMPORTANT
J/P60 • When the following AFC is set as option,
carry out the adjustment.

135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC

Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
☞ 35000 ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020
G074527

20650 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20650
Scanner section

135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
☞ 35060

7. Adjust the swing and tilt/light axis.

☞ 37000

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

IMPORTANT
• If using S-4, confirm that Light Axis and
Swing and Tilt are properly adjusted.
☞ 37000
8. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
9. Carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
10. Update the light source.
☞ 37030

20650 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20700
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing the film carrier 3. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
4. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
! Replacing the 135/240 AFC-II scanner.
☞ 37020
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the adjustments below for each 135 and
240 lane. • For the 110 AFC-II, carry out the focus
adjustment for each magnification rate.
1. Attach the 135/240 AFC-II. 5. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Correction.
2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment. ☞ 35020
☞ 35000
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard 6. Check the operation of the 110 AFC-II.
adjustment.
☞ 35000 ! Replacing the 135/240 MMC-II or AMC-II
4. Carry out the light source registration. 1. Attach the 135/240 MMC-II or AMC-II.
☞ 37010
2. Check the Emission Lamp and Detection
5. Carry out the focus adjustment of the Sensor Position Adjustment.
scanner.
☞ 35030
☞ 37020 ☞ 35040
IMPORTANT NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, carry out the focus • Check if the filament image on the emission
adjustment for each magnification rate. adjustment chart is in the center of the emission
adjustment chart. When the filament image is in
6. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto the center, the adjustment is not necessary.
Correction.
☞ 35000
7. Check the operation of the 135/240 AFC-II.
! Replacing the 120 AFC-II

1. Attach the 120 AFC-II.

2. Configure the system so that it can "see" the
120 AFC-II diffuser.
☞ 34500
3. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment.
☞ 35010
4. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
5. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
scanner.
☞ 37020
6. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto
Correction.
☞ 35010
7. Check the operation of the 120 AFC-II. Emission adjustment chart Filament image

G052617
! Replacing the 110 AFC-II
3. Carry out the light source registration.
1. Attach the 110 AFC-II. ☞ 37010
2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment. 4. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
scanner.
☞ 35020 ☞ 37020
20700 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20700
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

5. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto

Correction.
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
6. Check the operation of the 135/240 MMC-II
or AMC-II.

! Replacing the 135 AFC-II

1. Attach the 135 AFC-II.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment.
☞ 35060
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard
adjustment.
☞ 35060
4. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
5. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
scanner.
☞ 37020
IMPORTANT
• For the 135 AFC-II, carry out the focus
adjustment for the magnification rate.
6. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto
Correction.
☞ 35060
7. Check the operation of the 135 AFC-II.
! Replacing the MFC

1. Attach the MFC.

2. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
3. Carry out the area registration.
☞ 32570
IMPORTANT
• In case of using the attachment other than the
crop card of MFC, carry out Area Registration
for each attachment.
4. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
scanner.
☞ 37020
5. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto
Correction.
☞ 35050
6. Check the operation of the MFC.

20700 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

20710
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Removing the advance unit • J/P1034 (Driver PCB 2)

Driver PCB 2
attaching plate
! Procedure

1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040
2. Remove the magnetic head PCB cover.
(three screws)
3. Remove the magnetic head PCB. (two

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

screws and one mounting spacer)
Mounting spacer

Driver PCB 2 cover

G068371

8. Remove the driver PCB 1 attaching plate.

(two screws)

Magnetic head PCB

Magnetic head PCB cover
G068370

4. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P1040 (Magnetic head PCB)
• J/P1041 (Magnetic head PCB)
• J/P1042 (Magnetic head PCB)
Driver PCB 1 attaching plate
• J/P1043 (Magnetic head PCB)
NOTE G070721
• Depending on the unit, J/P1041, J/P1042 and 9. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P1043 may not exist.
• J/P1027 (Driver PCB 1)
5. Remove the driver PCB 2 attaching plate. • J/P1028 (Driver PCB 1)
(two screws) • J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1)
6. Remove the driver PCB 2 cover. (two • J/P1030 (Driver PCB 1)
screws) • J/P1056 (Relay connector)
7. Disconnect the connector(s).
• J/P1032 (Driver PCB 2)
• J/P1033 (Driver PCB 2)

20710 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20710
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

10. Remove the advance unit. (six screws) 12. Open the sensor PCB wiring cover to the
Screw A
direction indicated by the arrow, and remove
Screw B
the flat cable. (Loosen one screw out of
three.)
Screw C
NOTE
• The end of the wiring cover can be opened by
removing a screw out of three.

Wiring cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Flat cable

Advance unit
G068373

11. Turn over the advance unit with the film feed G054662
motor on.
Advance unit ! Precautions when reattaching
• Reattach the flat cable carefully to the correct direction.
☞ 68200
• Reattach the advance unit by turning over it with the
advance motor on. Be careful not to give pressure to the
flat cable.
• When reattaching the advance unit, reattach it while
Lay pushing it to the arrow direction (the reference surfaces).
down.
IMPORTANT
• The lengths of the advance unit screws are
different. Be sure to attach the appropriate
Lift. screw.
Refer to ☞ 10.
• Screw A (Socket head bolt M3 × 4)
• Screw B (Socket head bolt M3 × 8)
• Screw C (Socket head bolt M3 × 6)

Reference surfaces Advance unit

Flat cables Film feed motor

G054661

IMPORTANT
• When the advance unit is turned over, be
careful not to apply excessive load to the flat Rail Rail
cable.
G068377

20710 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20710
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

• After reattaching it, check that the lane is switched

smoothly. Also check that the wiring is not caught in the
lane.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

20710 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

20720
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing and adjusting the film ! Adjustment after replacement

feed motor
1. Adjust the drive belt tension.
☞ 20130
! Procedure 2. Using Output Check, check that the Film
Feed Motor operates.
1. Remove the top cover. ☞ 35300
☞ 20040
2. Remove the PCB cover. (two screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3. Disconnect the connector(s).
• J/P1027 (Driver PCB 1)
• J/P1028 (Driver PCB 1)
• J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1)
• J/P1030 (Driver PCB 1)
• J/P1056 (Relay connector)
4. Remove the motor unit. (two screws)
Motor unit

PCB cover

G068372

5. Remove the film feed motor. (four screws)

Film feed motor

Noise reducing
plate

Motor mounting plate

G057593

! Precautions when reattaching

• Reattach the motor mounting plate and the noise reducing
plate in the order shown in the figure above.

20720 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20730
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing and adjusting the spool 6. Remove the guide plate. (two screws)
key motor Guide plate

! Procedure

1. Remove the PCB attaching plate. (two

screws)
2. Remove the PCB cover. (two screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Driver PCB 2
attaching plate

Spool key motor

G057594

! Adjustment after replacement

1. When mounting the motor unit, adjust the

position of the motor mounting plate so that
the drive transfer gear operates smoothly.
2. Using Output Check, check that the Spool
Key Motor rotates smoothly.
Driver PCB 2 cover ☞ 35300

G068371

3. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P1034 (Driver PCB 2)
4. Remove the motor unit. (two screws)

Motor unit

G068374

5. Remove the spool key motor. (two screws)

20730 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20740
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door drive axis

! Procedure

1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040
2. Remove the advance unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 20710
3. Disconnect the connectors.
Cartridge guide
J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1) Roll plate
Spring
4. Remove the powder limiter. (two screws) G051098

5. Remove the cartridge limit switch. (one 8. Remove the light lock door drive axis. (one
E-ring)
screw)
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• When removing the light lock door drive axis,
• When removing the cartridge limit switch, be
be careful not to lose the spring.
careful not to lose the detection pin.
6. Remove the guide plate. (two screws) Spring Light lock door
drive axis
7. Remove the cartridge guide. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
E-ring
• When removing the cartridge guide, be
careful not to lose the spring for the lock
plate.

Cartridge limit switch

Guide plate Detection pin

Cartridge guide

G051099

! Precautions when reattaching

1. When reattaching the cartridge guide, check

that the cartridge guide slides smoothly and
the cartridge holder can be opened and
closed smoothly.
Cartridge holder
Powder limiter
Cartridge guide
G074328

Cartridge guide
G053517

20740 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20750
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door motor

! Procedure

1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040
2. Disconnect the connector(s).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1)
3. Remove the film feed motor unit.
☞ 20720
4. Remove the light lock door motor. (two
screws)
Light lock door motor

G052463

! Adjustment after replacement

1. Adjust the tension on the film feed motor

drive belt.
☞ 20130
2. Using Output Check, check that the Light
Lock Door Motor operates.
☞ 35300

20750 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit

z Precautions for replacement

• As for the following two kinds of magnetic head units, the content of the replacement and the replacement procedures are
different.
• Shape of the magnetic head cover is different when magnetic head units are different.

Magnetic head covers

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ Type not equipped with the ☞ Type equipped with the
magnetic preamplifier PCB
magnetic preamplifier PCB

G078467

z Type not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

IMPORTANT
• The type not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB is no longer manufactured. To replace this type of
magnetic head unit, it is necessary to replace it with the magnetic head unit which is equipped with the magnetic
preamplifier PCB.
• For replacing the magnetic head unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB, prepare all the parts as detailed
below and replace all of them completely.

Description Part No. Q'ty

135/240 AFC-ll (R/W) HFI unit (R/W) Z023309 1
PCB attaching plate (1) A081369 1
Shield plate A075824 1
135/240 AFC-ll (R) HFI unit (R) Z023307 1
PCB attaching plate (1) A081369 1
Shield plate A075824 1

20760 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

z Replacing the type of unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

NOTE
• Replacing methods are different between the R/W type and the R type.
For the R/W type, refer to ☞ For 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W).
For the R type, refer to ☞ 135/240 AFC-ll (R).

z Type equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

• If the magnetic head unit is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB, replace the HFI unit only.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Description Part No. Q'ty
135/240 AFC-ll (R/W) HFI unit (2) Z023310 1
135/240 AFC-ll (R) HFI unit (1) Z023308 1

z Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
• Refer to ☞ Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB.

z Replacing the type of unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

z For 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W)

1. Remove the advance unit.

Refer to ☞ 20710.
2. Disconnect the connector (J/P1015) of the writing head from the sensor PCB.

Sensor PCB

J/P1015

G078329

3. Remove the magnetic head PCB attaching plate. (three screws)

IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head PCB attaching plate must be replaced in reassembling.
4. Remove the two mini clamps.
IMPORTANT
• The removed mini clamps are not used in reassembling.
• When reassembling, wiring must be fixed to the holes (which were used for mounting the mini clamps) with the
mini band. Refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.

20760 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Mini clamps

Screws

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Magnetic head PCB attaching

G078330

5. Remove the shield plate. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• In reassembling, the shield plate must be replaced.
6. Remove the magnetic head unit together with the angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head unit and the angle bracket must be replaced as a set in reassembling.
• For assembly, refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.

Shield plate

Magnetic head unit

Screws

Angle bracket

G067399

7. Reassemble by reversing the above-mentioned procedure.

IMPORTANT
• The parts below must be replaced in reassembling.
• Magnetic head PCB
• Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
• Shield plate
• Magnetic head unit and angle bracket (assembly)
• When attaching the advance unit, connect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1043) to the magnetic head PCB.

20760 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

z 135/240 AFC-ll (R)

NOTE
• You do not need to remove the advance unit because it has no write head.

1. Remove the upper guide (1) cover. (three screws)

2. Disconnect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1042) of the magnetic head PCB and remove the magnetic
head PCB. (two screws, one coupling nut)
IMPORTANT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• The flat cable is connected to the connector (J/P1040) on the magnetic head PCB. Be sure to read Handling
the flat cable described in Service Manual chapter 6., then work properly.
• The magnetic head PCB must be replaced in reassembling.
• When assembling, connect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1043) to the magnetic head PCB.
3. Remove the magnetic head PCB attaching plate. (three screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head PCB attaching plate must be replaced in reassembling.
4. Remove the two mini clamps.
IMPORTANT
• The removed mini clamps are not used in reassembling.
• When reassembling, wiring must be fixed to the holes (which were used for mounting the mini clamps) with the
mini band. Refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.

Mini clamps

Coupling nut Screw

Screws J/P1040
Screws

J/P1042

Upper guide (1) cover Magnetic head PCB Magnetic head PCB attaching
G078327

5. Remove the shield plate. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• In reassembling, the shield plate must be replaced.
6. Remove the magnetic head unit together with the angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head unit and the angle bracket must be replaced as a set in reassembling.
• For assembly, refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.

20760 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Shield plate

Magnetic head unit

Screws

Angle bracket

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G067399

7. Reassemble by reversing the above-mentioned procedure.

IMPORTANT
• The parts below must be replaced in reassembling.
• Magnetic head PCB
• Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
• Shield plate
• Magnetic head unit and angle bracket (assembly)

z Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

1. Remove the advance unit. (Only for 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W)

Refer to ☞ 20710.
2. Disconnect the connector (J/P1015) of the writing head from the sensor PCB. (Only for 135/240 AFC-ll
(R/W)

Sensor PCB

J/P1015

G078329

3. Remove the magnetic head cover and the magnetic preamplifier PCB. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not lose small parts.
4. Disconnect the connectors (J/P1041 and J/P1042) of the magnetic preamplifier PCB. [There is no
J/P1041 in 135/240 AFC-ll (R).]

20760 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

5. Remove the magnetic head unit. (two screws)

J/P1041
Magnetic head cover Screws J/P1042 Screws

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Magnetic preamplifier PCB Angle bracket Magnetic head unit
G078326

6. Reassemble by reversing the above-mentioned procedure.

IMPORTANT
• Attach the magnetic preamplifier PCB temporarily with the long spacer and screw, and attach the magnetic
head cover.
After attaching the magnetic head cover, insert the short spacer in the direction of the arrow and fix it with the
screw.

Long spacer Magnetic head cover

Magnetic preamplifier PCB Short spacer

G078328

20760 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20760
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

z Precautions when reattaching

• When reattaching the magnetic head unit, push it on the reference surface.
Reference surfaces

Angle bracket

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Magnetic head unit

G078325
• Fix the wiring of connector (J/P1043) to the hole (which was used for mounting the mini clamp) with the mini band. (1)

Mini-band

G078323

20760 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

20780
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)

Adjusting the light lock door drive

timing

! Procedure

1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040
2. Remove the advance unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 20710
3. Remove the cartridge guide.
☞ 20740
4. Remove the holder. (one screw)
IMPORTANT
• When removing the holder, be careful not to
lose the nut.
5. Turn idle gear 1 in the direction indicated by
the arrow until it touches the baffle.
6. While idle gear 1 is in contact with the baffle,
engage idle gear 2 with the drive axis gear
and leave as only one tooth is unengaged.

Holder

Drive axis gear

Leave one
tooth of the
gear open.

Idle gear 2

Idle gear 1

Cartridge guide
G051100

7. Reattach the holder. (one screw)

IMPORTANT
• Reattach it carefully not to change the gear
engagement position.

20780 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

20850
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II)
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II)

MMC auto focus section adjustment swing is within the tolerance level. (four
screws)
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the LM guide installation block so as
• Carry out this adjustment when the auto focus error not to give pressure to the LM guide.
occurs, or when the worm wheel does not swing within
the tolerance level of 4 mm (± one tooth) after adjusting 5. After adjusting it within the tolerance level,
the position of the emission lamp and detection sensor. carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
! Procedure 6. To check the operation, scan the mount in

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

normal process.
! Worm wheel adjustment
! When it cannot be adjusted
1. Bring up Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
display. 1. Operate AF Motor via Output Check.
NOTE ☞ 35300
• Bring up Film Carrier Unit Adjustment display NOTE
before removing the top cover, or Mount • When the worm wheel operates, check that it
operation error appears and adjustment cannot moves smoothly near the upper and lower death
be performed correctly. point.
Bringing up the display 2. Loosen the screws of the LM guide
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various installation block. (four screws)
Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
☞ 35030 3. Adjust the installation position of the bearing
holder so that the worm wheel moves
2. Remove the top cover, and set the MMC. smoothly. (two screws)
☞ 20040 Screws
3. When the worm wheel does not swing within
the tolerance level of 4 mm (± one tooth),
carry out the auto focus operation in
Detection Sensor Position Adjustment and
loosen the screws of the LM guide
installation block. (four screws)
LM guide installation blocks

Bearing holder

G060704

4. Repeat the procedure 1 to 3 in Worm wheel

adjustment.
5. Carry out Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
(MMC).
☞ 35030
6. Carry out the focus adjustment.
LM guide screws
☞ 37020
LM guides
7. To check the operation, scan the mount in
G060702 normal process.
4. While checking the swing of the worm wheel,
fix the LM guide installation block so that the

20850 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

21110
Table peripheral section
Table peripheral section

Replacing the colorimeter and the ! Replacing the colorimeter unit

calibration plate
1. Remove the table.
(six screws)
The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here.
Table
# Replacing the colorimeter unit

# Replacing the colorimeter

# Replacing the calibration plate

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit

G074465

2. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P156 (Relay connector)
J/P157 (Relay connector)
J/P156
J/P157

FD for Calibration plate

Colorimeter calibration data

G068540
• When replacing the colorimeter, remember that the
colorimeter, the calibration plate, and the FD for
calibration make a set. Replace them as one set.
• When replacing the calibration plate, remember that the
G074470
calibration plate and the FD for calibration data make a
set. Replace them as one set.

21110 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

21110
Table peripheral section

3. Remove the colorimeter unit with its cover. 5. When attaching the colorimeter unit with its
(Loosen four screws.) cover, push it toward the arrow direction.
(four screws)
Colorimeter unit
Colorimeter unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G074471

4. Remove the colorimeter from its cover. G074542

(two screws) 6. Upgrade the colorimeter unit.

IMPORTANT ☞ 35600_1
• When attaching the colorimeter unit to its 7. Follow the procedures in Replacing the
cover, push the colorimeter unit toward part A calibration plate.
on the cover. ☞ Replacing the calibration plate
8. Adjust the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35100

! Replacing the colorimeter

1. Remove the colorimeter unit.

☞ Replacing the colorimeter unit
2. Remove the colorimeter top cover.
(two screws)
Part A of the cover
NOTE
• Depending on the machine, the colorimeter top
cover is not attached.

Colorimeter top cover.

Colorimeter unit

G074472

G068537

3. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter.

(Loosen two mounting nuts.)

21110 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

21110
Table peripheral section

4. Disconnect the connector of the colorimeter (8) Click YES: OK.

and replace the colorimeter. The screen returns to the Colorimeter
Calibration display.
Connector 2. Check if updating has been performed
Fixing plate properly.
NOTE
• Check that the colorimeter data and the calibration
plate data are the same.

(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Calibration display, then click Confirming
the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate
Data.
(2) Click YES: OK since the FD for calibration
data has already been set in step 1 (2).
The confirmation display appears. Check that
the message It matches the Colorimeter Data
appears.
Fixing nuts At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is
G068539
registered.
5. Carry out height adjustment of the
colorimeter. (3) Click YES: OK.
☞ 21120 The screen returns to the Colorimeter
Calibration display.
6. Follow the procedures in Replacing the (4) Remove the FD for calibration data from the
calibration plate.
floppy disk drive.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate

! Replacing the calibration plate

1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the
machine.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various
Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration

(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter

Calibration display, then click Updating the
Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Insert the FD for calibration data into the
floppy disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration
data FD are displayed.
(4) Click YES: OK.
Register the data in the FD to the colorimeter.
(5) Click YES: OK.
Confirm the registration.
(6) Replace the calibration plate stored in the
colorimeter unit with new one.
(7) Click YES: OK.
Data is updated.

21110 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

21120
Table peripheral section

Adjusting the height of the 5. Remove the colorimeter mount and turn it
over. (three screws)
colorimeter
IMPORTANT
• Do not damage the cable(s) since the
IMPORTANT adjustment is carried out with the
• Carry out the height adjustment securely if colorimeter of connector(s) connected.
the colorimeter unit is replaced.
Cable Colorimeter mount

! Procedure

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

NOTE
• If you go on to this adjustment work after you install the
new colorimeter, proceed to step 3.

1. Remove the colorimeter unit.

☞ 21110
2. Remove the colorimeter top cover.
(two screws)
NOTE
• Depending on the machine, the colorimeter top
cover is not attached. J/P188 G072362

Colorimeter top cover. 6. Turn the leading end control holder to adjust
the height of colorimeter leading end so that
it is align with the back face of the
colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter
height adjustment jig.
IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter height adjustment jig is a
service personnel tool. Refer to Service
personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
• Set the colorimeter height adjustment jig on
G068537 groove of the leading end control holder and
3. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end turn it.
control holder of the colorimeter.
Leading end of the measurement part
NOTE
Colorimeter height adjustment jig
• The lock screw is at the lower part of the
colorimeter. Loosen it through the square hole
using a hexagonal screwdriver.

Square hole

Back face of the colorimeter

mount
Hexagonal screwdriver Groove of the leading end
control holder
Leading end control holder Lock screw G072363
G072361

4. Disconnect the connectors of the paper

sensor(s).
J/P188 (Paper sensors 1 and 2)

21120 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

21120
Table peripheral section

! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit

1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end

control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Square hole

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Use the handle side of the jig.

G072364
Hexagonal screwdriver
NOTE
• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height Leading end control holder Lock screw
adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter G072361
leading end.
2. Set the colorimeter mount to the positioning
7. Make sure that the height of colorimeter holes and attach by pushing it in the direction
leading end is align with the back face of the indicated by the arrow. (three screws)
colorimeter mount, and then turn the leading
Positioning holes
end control holder approximately 30 degree
to the lowering direction (clockwise).
NOTE
• This changes the standard value (0) of the height
of colorimeter leading end from the base of the
Colorimeter mount
colorimeter mount to - 0.1 mm. One revolution
(360 degree) of the leading end control holder
makes 1 mm movement.

IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back
face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage
the calibration plate or test prints.

Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree

to the lowering direction (clockwise).

G074587

Colorimeter leading end

Leading end control holder

G072365

8. Reassemble the parts as they were.

21120 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

21150
Table peripheral section

Adjusting the gap of the negative

cleaner brush

! Procedure

1. Remove the negative cleaner.

2. Adjust the position of the negative cleaner
brush to set the film advance force to 35 ± 5

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

g. (two adjusting screws)

35±5 g

Film

Brush

G051138

21150 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

21170
Personal computer control section
Personal computer control section

Opening/closing the personal 4. Remove the screws fixing the personal

computer control unit. (two screws)
computer control unit
PC control unit

! Precautions when opening/closing the

PC control unit

IMPORTANT
• When the back space of the machine is 190 mm or
less, remove the personal computer control unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 21180_1
• When the back space of the machine is 190 mm or
more, open the personal computer control unit.
• Be careful when handling the personal computer
control unit since it is very heavy.
G074457
• The printer becomes unstable if the personal
computer control unit is opened. Be sure not to open 5. Put the full keyboard, the mouse and the
the personal computer control unit when the jack operation keyboard in the rack.
bolts do not touch the ground.
Mouse
• If the personal computer control unit is opened fully,
the cables between units may get damaged or the
unit may get fallen backward.

! Procedure

1. Remove the scanner unit.

☞ 20650
2. Remove the display monitor.
☞ 20310
3. Remove the filter case.
Filter case

Operation keyboard Full keyboard

G057607

G074456

21170 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

21170
Personal computer control section

6. Open the PC control unit and set the stopper

to table cover 2.

PC control unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Table cover 2
Stopper

G074458

21170 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

21180_1
Personal computer control section

Removing the personal computer 4. Remove the control unit cover. (Loosen three
screws out of nine screws.)
control unit
Control unit cover

! Precautions when removing the

personal computer control unit

IMPORTANT
• When the back space of the machine is 190 mm or
less, remove the personal computer control unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• When the back space of the machine is 190 mm or
more, open the personal computer control unit. G072294
☞ 21170
• Be careful when handling the personal computer
5. Disconnect the connector(s) and cable
control unit since it is very heavy.
clamp(s).
J/P159: Relay connector (connector from laser power
supply 1)
! Procedure J/P981: Relay connector (connector from BZ-PC I/O
PCB)
1. Remove the scanner unit. J/P 436, 72 and 71: PC-scanner interface PCB
☞ 20650 J/P 457, 73 and 74: PC-laser interface PCB
J/P955: ATX mother board unit
2. Remove the display monitor. J/P962: ATX power supply
☞ 20310 J/P312: ATX power supply cable
J/P304, J/P305: PU control PCB (Option)
3. Remove the panel. J/P133, 134, 137, 138: ARCNET-HUB PCB (Option)
NOTE J/P173, 174: mouse, full keyboard
• Insert a slotted blade screwdriver straight to the NOTE
slot part indicated by the following figure. • If the optional PCBs such as the ARCNET-HUB
PCB are not attached, the connecting position of
Panel
the connectors will differ.
J/P133, J/P134, J/P137, J/P138

J/P159

J/P981

J/P304, J/P305 J/P962 J/P955

J/P312
J/P436, 72 and 71
J/P457, 73 and 74
G074449

Panel
G074603

21180_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

21180_1
Personal computer control section

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Mouse, full keyboard
G076386

6. Put the operation keyboard on the PC control

unit, hold part A and remove it. (Loosen three
screws out of four.)

PC control unit
Part A

Operation keyboard
G074459

21180_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

22000
Paper magazine section
Paper magazine section

Checking the paper magazine 2. Check that the paper guides are securely
attached.

Check item Paper guides

Paper Check that paper is neat in shape.
magazine Check that paper guides are attached securely.

! Procedure

1. Check that the width regulation guide and

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

the roller guide are securely attached.
IMPORTANT
• For the paper width of 117 mm and 127 mm,
Screws
set the width regulation guide inside the
groove. For 120 mm and 130 mm, set it
outside the groove.
Width regulation guides

G074539
Roller guides
Groove Paper width
G059817 A Unused
Position of the width regulation guide for each paper width B 210 mm
C 203 mm
D Unused
E 178 mm
F Unused
G 165 mm
H Unused
I 152 mm
J Unused
K 130 mm
L 127 mm
M Unused
N 120 mm
O 117 mm
P 114 mm
Q Unused
R 102 mm
* shows a width unused. S Unused
G074538 T 89 mm
U 82.5 mm

22000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

25610
Paper supply unit A
Paper supply unit A

Removing paper supply unit A

! Procedure

1. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction

indicated by the arrow.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper supply unit A
G074446

! Adjustment after reattaching

When the original paper supply unit A is reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.

When the new paper supply unit A is attached

1. Carry out paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Carry out the paper advance length
correction.
☞ 36050
3. Check the right angle adjustment of the
paper cutter unit.
☞ 25620_1
4. Check the zigzagging adjustment for paper
supply unit B.
☞ 25730
5. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for
each paper magazine A, B.
6. Check the paper hold timing adjustment of
the arm.
☞ 25630
7. If the CVP unit is to be attached, replace
paper advance unit A and carry out the CVP
imprint pressure adjustment.
☞ 25640
25610 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

25620_1
Paper supply unit A

Removal and the right angle 3. Remove the loading sensor. (two screws)
adjustment of the cutter unit IMPORTANT
• When replacing the loading sensor, in order
to remove the wiring of loading sensor, it is
! Removing the cutter unit necessary to cut the mini band.

Loading sensor
1. Pull out paper supply unit A.
2. Disconnect the connector(s).
• J/P422 (Cut motor)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• J/P424 (Cut home sensor)
• J/P425 (Cut end sensor)

J/P424 J/P425

Mini-band

Bottom view of paper supply unit A

G078404

4. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws)

" Point
When removing the cutter unit, be careful not to
remove the positioning plate for the cutter unit. If the
positioning plate is removed, right angle adjustment of
the cutter unit must be carried out again.
J/P422 Cutter unit

G074447

Positioning plate

Loading sensor unit

G078405

25620_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25620_1
Paper supply unit A

! Precautions when reattaching

• When attaching the cutter unit, tighten the screws by
pushing them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
• Check that the paper has been cut vertically. If not, carry
out the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit.

! The right angle adjustment of the cutter

unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Loosen two screws for each cutter unit and
positioning plate to adjust the right angle of
the cutter unit.

Loosen these screws.

Positioning plate
Loosen these
screws.
G057512

" Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by
matching up with cut edges as shown illustration
below.
The second print

A B
Paper
advance
direction

The first print

G051111
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the
cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow A as shown in
the previous figure.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B adjust the
cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow B as shown in
the previous figure.

25620_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25630
Paper supply unit A

Adjusting the paper hold timing of (3) Adjust the position of the detection plate so
that the plate is protruded 1.8±0.2 mm from
the arm the paper hold sensor. (Loosen two set-
screws.)
Paper hold motor
! Procedure

1. Pull out paper supply unit A.

2. Remove the mounting plate of the paper hold
motor. (Loosen one of the two screws.)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper hold motor
Set-screw (A)
Arm
Set-screw (B)
Screw

Set-screws of the
detection plate
Cam

Detection plate

Paper hold sensor

Loosen this Paper hold motor mounting Paper hold sensor Hexagonal screwdriver
screw. plate

G057638

3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of View from this side.
the paper hold motor.

(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated

by arrow.

Cam

Detection
1.8±0.2 mm
plate

Paper hold sensor

View from this side.

Viewed from the arrow

G074454

(2) Rotate the detecting plate using a hexagonal G057639

screwdriver to the right so that the bulge of (4) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold
the cam faces below. motor. (two set-screws)
NOTE 4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output
• Set-screws (A) and (B) need not be check to check that the pressure pin is align
loosened. If it is loosened, attach it as it
was.
• Set-screws (A) and (B) fix the cam to the
paper hold motor.

25630 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25630
Paper supply unit A

with the guide when the paper hold sensor

is LIGHT.
☞ 35310

Guide

0.0 mm

Pressure pin

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper hold motor

G074455

25630 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25640
Paper supply unit A

Adjusting the imprint pressure of position of the CVP unit is the same as that
of the head adjustment jig.
the CVP
Head adjustment jig

! Procedure

1. Pull out paper supply unit A.

2. Loosen the two screws fixing the CVP unit. Lock nuts
Loosen these screws.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

CVP unit
Adjusting screws
G074452

3. Set the head adjustment jig to the guide of G074453

paper supply unit A. 5. Tighten the two CVP unit screws.

IMPORTANT 6. Make actual prints, then check the printing
density of the CVP unit.
• The head adjustment jig is the service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel
tool list.
☞ 80310
4. Loosen two lock nuts and turn two adjusting
screws so that the thickness of the attaching

25640 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

25710
Paper supply unit B
Paper supply unit B

Removing paper supply unit B 3. Remove screw(s) from paper supply unit B.
(two screws)
Paper supply unit B
! Procedure for removing paper supply
unit B

1. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P331 (Paper supply motor A)
• J/P335 (Paper supply motor B)
• J/P279 (Dual paper magazine PCB)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P331 J/P335

G074544

4. Remove paper supply unit B. (Loosen two

screws.)

Paper supply unit B

J/P279
G074564

2. Remove two screws from mounting angle

bracket 1.

Mounting angle bracket 1

Loosen these screws.

G074543

G074545

25710 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25710
Paper supply unit B

! Precautions when installing paper 4. Attach paper supply unit B. (two screws)
supply unit B

1. Attach paper supply unit B while pushing it in

the arrow direction. (two screws)

Paper supply unit B

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Mounting angle
bracket 2

G074547
G074548

2. Attach mounting angle bracket 1. (four

screws)
Screws B Mounting angle bracket 1

Screws A
G074546

IMPORTANT
• When attaching original paper supply unit,
tighten screw A only.
• When replacing paper supply unit B, loosen
screw B and pushing it in the arrow direction
to attach screw A, B.
3. Attach mounting angle bracket 2 by pushing
it in the direction indicated by the arrows 1
and 2. (three screws)
IMPORTANT
• Adjustment of mounting angle bracket 2 when
attaching original paper supply unit.
• Only perform it when replacing paper supply
unit B.

25710 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25720
Paper supply unit B

Adjusting the height and the 3. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide
frame. (four screws)
position of paper magazine mount B
4. Check the detection status of magazine
sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210
IMPORTANT If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the
• Adjust the height and the position of paper magazine B position of paper magazine code sensor B.
when paper magazine B is not inserted to paper supply ☞ Adjusting the position of the paper magazine code
unit B smoothly. sensor B
• Check if paper magazine mount B is set to the 5. After the adjustment, check that the paper
positioning pin of paper supply unit B smoothly. does not zigzag.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 25730
Positioning pin

! Adjusting the position of paper

magazine mount B

1. Loosen the screws fixing magazine slide rails

1 and 2. (three screws each)

Loosen this screw.

Magazine slide rail 1

Loosen these screws.

G074552

! Adjusting the position of the paper

magazine mount B

1. Loosen the screws of the magazine slide

frame. (four screws)

Magazine slide frame

Loosen these screws.

Loosen these screws.

Magazine slide rail 2

G059255

2. Change the height of paper magazine mount

B and set the magazine. And continue the
confirmation work of storage condition to

Loosen these screws.

G074553

2. After returning paper magazine mount B to

the original position, change its position and
set the magazine. And continue working to
confirm the storage condition to adjust them.
(two adjusting screws)

25720 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25720
Paper supply unit B

adjust them. (two adjusting screws each left the magazine code can be detected with
and right) paper magazine B inserted.

Adjusting screws Holder 1

Holder 2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper magazine code sensor B

Adjusting screws
Loosen these screws.

G059258

2. Check the detection status of magazine

sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210

G059256

3. After the height adjustment, loosen six

screws of the magazine slide rail.
Adjust the position continuously.
4. Check the detection status of magazine
sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210
If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the
position of paper magazine code sensor B.
☞ Adjusting the position of the paper magazine code
sensor B
5. After the adjustment, check that the paper
does not zigzag.
☞ 25730

! Adjusting the position of the paper

magazine code sensor B

1. Loosen four screws of paper magazine

sensor B, and adjust holders 1 and 2 so that

25720 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25730
Paper supply unit B

Adjusting the paper zigzagging in Example: When the first test print is misaligned in the left.

paper supply unit B First test print 0.5 mm Second test print

! Procedure

A
A
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit
B, make a test print using the maximum size of

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

paper which is in use.
1. Make a test print from magazine B in Arm
Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard.
Check that the difference between lines A on
the first and second test prints is within 0.5
mm.
Example: When the first test print skews to the right

First test print 0.5 mm Second test print

A

Paper advance
A

direction
G072367

3. If difference between lines A on first test print

and second test print is not within 0.5 mm,
carry out zigzagging adjustment for paper
supply unit B.
4. Loosen the screws for the positioning pin of
paper supply unit B, and adjust the pin.
(Loosen two fixing screws.)
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin
is misaligned in the right. leftward.
Step 2
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin
is misaligned in the left. rightward.
Step 2

Paper advance
direction
G074555

25730 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25730
Paper supply unit B

Positioning pin

Right

Left

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Loosen the fixing screws.
G074554

5. After the adjustment of the positioning pin,

check that the positioning pin goes into the
positioning hole of the magazine B smoothly
when the magazine is taken in and out.
6. If the positioning pin does not go into the
positioning hole smoothly, adjust the position
of magazine B to the right and left.
☞ 25720
7. Test prints are made in the maximum paper
size via the paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment
of paper supply unit B, repeat Step 7 via
Step 4.
9. Carry out the zigzagging adjustment for each
magazine of paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060

25730 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

25810
Exposure advance unit
Exposure advance unit

Removing the exposure advance Exposure advance unit

unit

! Procedure

1. Remove or open the personal computer

control unit.
IMPORTANT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• When the back space of the machine is 190
mm or less, remove the personal computer
control unit.
☞ 21180_1
• When the back space of the machine is 190 J/P399 J/P400
G074460
mm or more, open the personal computer
control unit.
4. Remove light-tight cover 1. (two screws)
☞ 21170 Light-tight cover 1
• Be careful when handling the personal
computer control unit since it is very heavy.
PC control unit

G074461

Stopper
Table cover 2
5. Remove the exposure advance unit. (four
screws)

G074466

IMPORTANT
G074458 • Be careful when handling the exposure
2. Remove paper supply unit A. advance unit since it is very heavy.
☞ 25610
3. Disconnect the connector(s).
• J/P399, 400 (Relay connector)

25810 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

25810
Exposure advance unit

• Remove the exposure advance unit by ! Precautions when reattaching

holding its handle.
• Slide the exposure advance unit in the arrow direction
Exposure advance unit
and put it on the near and far stoppers.
Stopper (far)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G057611

6. Remove the exposure advance unit by

sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when removing the exposure
advance unit. It may fall down if it is out of the
stopper.
Stopper (near)
Stopper Stopper G074468
• Adjust the position of the exposure advance unit to the
attaching holes of the laser unit by moving the exposure
advance unit finely.
Attaching holes Attaching holes

Exposure advance unit

G074467

Laser unit
G074469

IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to drop down the exposure
advance unit when moving it. Even a slight
movement may cause it to drop down.

25810 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

25810
Exposure advance unit

• When tightening four screws of the exposure

advance unit, tighten the screw 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
in the same turns in this order.

2
3
4
1

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G074466

! Adjusting the attaching position

1. The exposure advance unit has positioning
pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in
attaching the exposure advance unit.

! Adjustment after reattaching and

setup
When the original exposure advance unit is
reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.

When the new exposure advance unit is attached

1. Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
3. Check the Exposure Advance Adjustment.
☞ 36080
4. Check the Paper Pressure Operation
Correction.
☞ 36090

25810 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

25820
Exposure advance unit

Banding shooting

Exposure position
156 mm
Paper advance direction
93 mm

80 mm

Φ22 74 mm 74 mm

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

17 mm Arm unit 2

Turn unit

Φ25

Pressure roller 2

Exposure advance unit

Φ30

Pressure roller at the inlet side

G074561

25820 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

25820
Exposure advance unit

! Banding shooting
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective Refer to
action
All Front margin: Around 3 The pressure of pressure roller 2 Check the -
mm is not released. condition of
pressure roller 2
and the operation
arm to release
pressure roller 2.
☞ 36010_1

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Front margin: Around 74 Failure in turn unit stop position Adjust the turn
mm correction unit stop position.
Rear end: At about 17 mm The inlet side pressure roller Carry out the ☞ 36090
release amount of the exposure paper pressure
advance unit is too small. operation
Rear end: At about 26 mm The inlet side pressure roller correction.
release amount of the exposure
advance unit is too big.
Whole part of the print The screws of the exposure Tighten the ☞ 25810
(no cycle) advance unit are loose. screws of the
exposure advance
unit.
It is given a vibration from - -
outside.
All jack bolts are effective or - -
not.
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.

Exposure advance unit

Advance drive pulley

Exposure advance drive belt Exposure advance motor 1 belt

Drive roller (2)

Pressure change motor 2 belt Idle pulley

G077143

25820 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

25820
Exposure advance unit

! Banding shooting
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action
All Whole part of the print Dust stuck on the Check each part if there are any problems. If dust or
(5.45 mm cycle) advance drive pulley dirt is on the belt, roller and pulley, handle them by
Whole part of the print Dust caught at exposure cleaning. Adjust the tension of each belt when it is not
(55.5 mm cycle) advance motor 1 belt. appropriate. ☞ 20110If rollers or pulleys shake, it is
The belt tension of necessary to replace the exposure advance
exposure advance motor unit.☞ 25810
1 belt is maladjusted.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Whole part of the print Dust stuck on the idle
(43.7 mm cycle) pulley
Whole part of the print Dust caught at the
(202 mm cycle) exposure advance drive
belt.
Adjusting failure of the
belt tension of the
exposure advance drive
belt
Whole part of the print Dust stuck on drive
(92.4 mm cycle) roller (2)

25820 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

26610
Paper Advance Section
Paper Advance Section

Removing the paper advance unit

! Precautions when reattaching

• The paper advance unit is regulated with the positioning
pin. No need for adjusting when attaching.

! Procedure

1. Pull out the paper advance unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. Remove the paper advance unit. (one screw)
IMPORTANT
• When removing the screw, be careful not to
lose the spacer.

NOTE
• The three parts (bottom of the unit and the upper
and lower parts of the back side) are hung on the
pins.

Spacer

Pin Pin

G074451

! Adjustment after reattaching

When the original paper advance unit is reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.

When the new paper advance unit is attached

1. Carry out Paper Advance Unit Correction.
☞ 36010_1

26610 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

26630
Paper Advance Section

Removing the processor loading

unit

! Procedure

1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the rack stopper.
3. Remove the sprocket unit. (three screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Sprocket unit

G058399

4. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)

5. Remove the processor loading unit. (three
screws)

Ground wire

Processor loading unit

G058400

! Precautions when reattaching

• The position of the processor loading unit is adjusted by
the LH small screw using the jig. Be sure not to touch any
part except for the attaching screws.
• The position of the processor loading unit and the
sprocket unit is adjusted with the positioning pins. No
need for adjusting when attaching.

26630 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

26710
Laser engine unit
Laser engine unit

Replacing and adjusting the • Be careful when handling the personal

computer control unit since it is very heavy.
position of the laser unit
PC control unit

! Precautions for laser unit replacement

IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below
are necessary in returning the defective unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Laser unit Defective laser unit
Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be
checked
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem
occurs
Table cover 2
IMPORTANT Stopper
• Make a backup copy of all the data in Close Down
Checks or Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
• There are two types of laser unit. One is type A1
and another one is type B1. For distinguishing the
type, refer to the following.
☞ 61450
• Basically, when replacing the laser unit, replace it
with same type of laser unit.

! Procedure for removing the laser unit

1. Remove or open the personal computer

control unit. G074458
☞ 21170
☞ 21180_1 2. Remove the exposure advance unit.
☞ 25810
IMPORTANT
• When the back space of the machine is 190
3. Remove cover 1. (seven screws)
mm or less, remove the personal computer Cover 1
control unit.
☞ 21180_1
• When the back space of the machine is 190
mm or more, open the personal computer
control unit.
☞ 21170

G074462

4. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P1516, 1517, 1513, 1515, 1508 (laser control
PCB)
• J/P1526 (Relay connector)
• J/P1653 (B laser driver)
• J/P1663 (G laser driver)
• J/P1624 (Laser control box cooling fan 1)
• J/P1625 (Laser control box cooling fan 2)

26710 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26710
Laser engine unit

• J/P1632 (B AOM driver)

Part A (Disconnect the clamps.)
• J/P1637 (G AOM driver)
• J/P1642 (R AOM driver)
• J/P1540, 1532, 1539 (Laser I/O PCB)
5. Disconnect the ground wire. (Four wires)
(one screw for each)
P1624, 1625
Ground wire
Ground wires P1540

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

P1526 P1539
J/P1632 (B) P1532
P1516

P1517

Table cover 2

Ground wire
J/P1632 P1642 P1508
P1513
J/P1632 (R) P1637 P1515
G074463

6. When removing the PCB plate, disconnect

the cables from the clamps in part A.
7. Remove the PCB plate and stand it against PCB plate
table cover 2.
G074474
IMPORTANT
• Take extreme care of wiring of the laser 8. Remove the fan unit. (Loosen two screws.)
control PCB and laser I/O PCB. Fan unit

Screws

G074475

9. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P855 (Laser unit heater)

26710 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26710
Laser engine unit

• Installation position of the stopper (far) need

J/P855 not be adjusted. (two screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

View from the bottom
G076388 Stopper (far)
10. Remove light-tight cover 2. (Loosen two
screws.)

Screws G074477

12. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P855 (Laser unit heater)
G074479

11. Remove the stopper (far) from the exposure

advance unit. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• When replacing the laser unit, remove the
stopper (far) and attach it to a new laser unit.
(two screws)

26710 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26710
Laser engine unit

13. Remove the laser unit. (four fixing nuts and 2. Attach the light-tight cover by pushing it in
four washers) the arrow direction. (two screws)
Light-tight cover 2
Nuts and washers

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G074480

! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit

position

1. Set the positioning pins to the laser unit.

Nuts and washers 2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that
Laser unit
G074478
the positioning pins move up and down
smoothly. (four nuts and four washers)
NOTE
• Use the socket wrench unit (13 mm) in the service IMPORTANT
personnel tools to remove the laser unit easily. Refer to • The positioning pin is one of the service
Service personnel tool list. personnel tools. Refer to Service personnel
☞ 80310 tool list.
☞ 80310
! Precautions when installing the laser
Positioning pins
unit Laser unit

1. Before attaching the fan unit, connect J/P855

to the connector.

J/P855

G074476

! Adjustment after replacement

When the original laser unit is reattached

1. Carry out the daily setup.
When a new laser unit is attached
1. Initialize the laser operation history.
G076388 ☞ 35700

26710 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26710
Laser engine unit

2. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate

Correction.
☞ 36020
3. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
4. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine
Adjustment.
☞ 36040
5. Check that the slippage of the main scanning

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

direction of the Exposure Position
Adjustment.
☞ 36030
6. Carry out the initial setup.

26710 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment

Adjusting the zigzagging of the IMPORTANT

paper advance section • Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction
for each paper magazine A, B.
• Make test prints via Test Print
Check item
Confirmation (magazine A/B) to check the
All Check if leveling of the machine is completed zigzagging amounts (A - B) of two prints are
correctly. within the tolerance level in the following
Magazine Check that the shutter open/close arm works table.
mount properly. (When the printer door is closed, the When they are within the tolerance level,
shutter open/close arm moves 10 mm and more the adjustment is not necessary.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

at the outlet section of the magazine.)
NOTE
• For example, when the measurement values of
! Procedure the second test print is 120 mm for both lines A
and B
Check that the difference of dimension between
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine. lines A and B on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
☞ 22000
Test Print Tolerance level
2. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. When the test print is 355.6 A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and
mm width B are between 119.5 mm and
☞ 25730 120.5 mm.
NOTE
• If difference between part A on the first test Test print (first) Test print (second)
print and the second test print is within 0.5 mm,
you do not have to adjust it. Line A Line A (120 mm)
Example: When the first test print skews to the right
A

A
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
A
A

Line B Line B (120 mm)

G078474

4. Carry out the master correction of the

exposure center correction.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the
exposure center correction for each paper
magazine A, B.
• Make a test print via Test Print
Confirmation with Master Value to check

Paper advance
direction
G074555

3. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging

Correction.

☞ 36060
26810 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

26810
Zigzag adjustment

the misalignment of the test print. If it is

within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G068463
NOTE
• After master correction of the exposure center
correction, carry out Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) again if
you are also using another paper magazine.

26810 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

26910_1
Length between the units
Length between the units

Length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit

IMPORTANT
• Usually, you do not have to adjust the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit. However, if the
length between the units is improper, the error message No.6017 Paper has jammed in the printer section. may appear
when the paper of which advance length is 320.1 mm or more is processed.

! Length between the units (front side)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

(Top view) Paper supply arm motor (right)

Exposure advance unit

Paper supply unit A (3) 4.0±0.5 mm

(Front view)

Paper supply unit A

(2) 0 +0.5 mm

(1) 15±0.5 mm

Interlock switch
Useful when measuring length (2).

G078442

26910_1 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26910_1
Length between the units

! Length between the units (front side)

No. Illustration Length between the units Corrective action
1 Refer to the front Check that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (front side) and Refer to ☞ Adjusting
view. the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 15±0.5 mm. the position between
2 Check that the height of the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) paper supply unit A and
is 0+0.5 mm based on the plate of paper supply unit A (front side). the exposure advance
unit.
3 Refer to the top Check that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (front side) and Refer to ☞ Procedure
view. the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 4.0±0.5 mm. for adjusting the laser
unit position.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

! Length between the units (back side)

Exposure advance unit

Paper supply unit A

(1) 15.5±0.5 mm

(2) 0 +0.5 mm

Interlock switch
Useful when measuring length (2).

G076424

26910_1 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26910_1
Length between the units

! Length between the units (back side)

No. Length between the units Corrective action
1 Check that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (back side) and the plate of the Refer to ☞ Adjusting
exposure advance unit (back side) is 15.5±0.5 mm. the position between
2 Check that the height of the cutout of the exposure advance unit (back side) is 0+0.5 mm based on paper supply unit A and
the plate of paper supply unit A (back side). the exposure advance
unit.

! Adjusting the position between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Remove or open the personal computer control unit.
☞ 21170
☞ 21180_1
2. Set the positioning pins to the laser unit.
IMPORTANT
• The positioning pin is one of the service personnel tools. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
Positioning pins
Laser unit

G074476

26910_1 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26910_1
Length between the units

3. Loosen the screw of the shim beneath the laser unit, and insert or remove the shim. (Loosen two screws
each.)
When inserting or removing the shim of the back side, remove the printer cover. ☞ 20011

Shim

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Laser unit

Shim

G076426

Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)

4. Check if the laser unit positioning pin is in the position where it moves up and down smoothly.
If necessary, adjust the position of the laser unit. Refer to ☞ Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position.
5. Check the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit again.
6. Check Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Refer to ☞ 36010_1.

! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position

1. Set the positioning pins to the laser unit.

26910_1 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

26910_1
Length between the units

2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (Loosen
four nuts.)
IMPORTANT
• The positioning pin is one of the service personnel tools. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
Positioning pins
Laser unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Nuts

Nuts

G074476

26910_1 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

27220_1
Drive section
Drive section

Removing the dryer rack

! Procedure

1. Remove the dryer top cover.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078651

2. Disconnect the connector (J/P717), release the stopper and remove the dryer rack.

G078646

3. Remove the air duct.

G074198

! Adjustment after reattaching

When the original dryer rack is reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.

When a new dryer rack is attached

1. Check the backlash adjustment of the dryer rack.
☞ 27230

27220_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

27230
Drive section

Backlash adjustment of the dryer

rack

! Procedure

IMPORTANT
• The backlash adjustment is required when you
replace the dryer rack.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Remove the dryer rack.
☞ 27250_1
2. Adjust the backlash so that the backlash
between the dryer rack drive gear and gear 1
is 0.5 mm by moving the plate of the dryer
unit.

Dryer rack drive gear

0.5 mm

Gear 1

Dryer rack

G076389

! Checking after adjustment

1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or
abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.

27230 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

27240
Drive section

Adjusting the drive motor belt

tension

! Procedure

1. Remove processor cover 4. (seven screws)

☞ 20026
2. Adjust the position of the drive motor to fix

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

the drive motor belt so that it bends 1.6 mm
when pressing it by 265 to 296 g (2.6 to 2.9
N). (four screws)
Drive motor belt

Drive motor

Drive motor
G076385

3. Reassemble the parts as they were.

! Checking after adjustment
1. Check if the drive motor operates normally.

27240 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

27250_1
Drive section

Removing the dryer heater

! Procedure

1. Remove the dryer rack.

☞ 27220_1
2. Remove the processor rear cover. (one screw)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Processor rear cover

G078824

3. Remove processor cover 2. (three screws)

Processor cover 2

G078414

4. Remove the duct. (two screws)

5. Remove the wiring cover.
6. Remove the heater cover. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• Depending on the machine, the wiring cover 2 is not installed.

27250_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27250_1
Drive section

• The shape of the wiring holder differs depending on the model.

Duct Heater cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Wiring holder

Wiring cover 2

PCB cover 2

G078417

7. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P719: Relay connector
J/P553, 554 (Main relay PCB)

J/P719

J/P553, 554

G078418

8. Remove the dryer heater. (two screws)

NOTE
• Replace the dryer heater together with the dryer safety thermostat.

27250_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27250_1
Drive section

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Dryer heater

G078419

! Adjustment after reattaching

1. Process some prints to confirm that there is no problem.

27250_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27410_1
Order classification section
Order classification section

Replacing the print conveyor unit 4. Replace the print conveyor unit belt. (two E-
ring, spacer and flanged bushing each)
belt
E-ring, spacer and flanged bushing

! Procedure

1. Remove the print conveyor unit cover.

(seven screws)
2. Disconnect the connector(s).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P716: Manual sorter switch (manual replenisher
switch)

Cover of the print conveyor unit

J/P716
Belt
G078438

5. Replace the print conveyor unit belt.

6. Reassemble the parts as they were.
! Adjustment after replacement
1. Adjust the position of conveyor motor to
horizontal and vertical so that the gap of
connecting position between the shaft of

G078440

3. Remove the conveyor motor. (two screws)

NOTE
• Remove the conveyor motor so that the position of
the connector P713 for conveyor unit cannot be
changed.

Conveyor motor

G078439

27410_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

27410_1
Order classification section

drive roller and the shaft joint is to be same.

(two screws)
Horizontal

Shaft of the drive roller

Drive motor

Same gap

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Shaft joint

Vertical

Drive motor
Same gap

Shaft joint

Shaft of the drive roller

G078441

2. Check that the belt works normally by driving

the conveyor motor in the Output Check.
☞ 35320_1

27410_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

27810
Replenishment package unit
Replenishment package unit

Replacing the replenisher pump and the rating plate will not be determined
properly.
the water supply pump [SM] IN
Caps
(Do not remove them.)
! Procedure

1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount. Poppet valves OUT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G050887
Arrangement for the replenisher pump and
• Be careful not to let the pump rotating part
the water supply pump
come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.

Tray units
1. Push. G050874

8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover

Lift up the cover holding the part

indicated by the arrow.

G050875

9. Take a note of the output amount displayed

G070020
on the new pump's rating plate.
The pump, for which the output amount measurement
4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to is no good, must be replaced.
be replaced.
Output amount
5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of
the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the
pump to be replaced, and then remove the Rating plate
G050888
hoses.
10. Disconnect the connectors, and replace the
IMPORTANT pump.
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B, J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, and STB, do not remove J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
the new caps from the pumps. If they are J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
removed, the poppet valves may be taken off. J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
Then the pump output amount indicated on J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
11. Reassemble the parts as they were.

27810 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27810
Replenishment package unit

12. Enter the output amount. IMPORTANT

Bringing up the display • For measurements of two or more
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output replenishment solutions, use a different
Amount Setting container for each solution.
If no different containers are available,
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, clean the container before using.
BF-B, and STB
Enter the output amount written in step 9.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount
Setting display and select Pump Output
☞ 33030
Amount Setting.
Setting for BF-W and STB-W

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

(5) Select the pump for output.
Carry out pump output amount settings, and then enter
the measurement values. (6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual
sorter switch.
! Adjustment after replacement (7) Check that the air does not remain in the
hose. Then repeat step (5) until the
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and replenishment solution or water comes to the
the water supply pump (except BF-W and exit of the replenisher pipe or the water
STB-W). supply pipe.

IMPORTANT (8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher

pipe.
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be
carried out accurately. Replenisher pipe and water
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, supply pipe
the chemical may undergo oxidation, or
precise values may not be obtained because
air escapes during the measurement.

(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor

cover 1. Air exhaust tool

(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply

pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe from the sub-tank and fix the pipes
G050890
in the vertical position with the output ports
front faced. IMPORTANT
NOTE • When air is exhausted for two or more
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water chemicals, be sure to start from CD-A
supply pipe at the same height as when the pump.
machine is operating. When the output • Before air exhausting from the pumps,
amount is measured, the pipes should be be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is
secured to obtain values correctly. not cleaned, contamination and
chemical reaction may occur.
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment
solution or water to be output. NOTE
Replenisher pipe and water • The air exhaust tool is a service tool. Refer
supply pipe to Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump
and the water supply pump by pulling the
cylinder of the syringe from the air exhaust
tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the
replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and
discharge the air, water, or replenishment
solution.
IMPORTANT
Tape G050889
• When the air is exhausted by using the
air exhaust tool, the float of the
package may fall by the force of

27810 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27810
Replenishment package unit

attraction and the attention messages

such as Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. may be
displayed.
There may be still some replenisher
solution left in the package. Remove
the replenishment package from the
replenishment unit and shake it to
check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the
air exhaust tool, the replenishment

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

solution or water may be splashed.
(10) After air has been exhausted by the air
exhaust tool, check that the air does not
remain in the hose.
2. Check the output amount.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup
Manual -.

IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the
measured value and the output amount
entered in the machine is within ±3%. If the
difference is not within ±3%, check for
damage or clogging of the pipes. When there
is still no problem relating to those items, air
must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air,
and measure output amount securely again.
• When the output amount for each
replenishment package is measured, the
remaining amount of each solution varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output
amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank top cover and processor
cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning
after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be
damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.

27810 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

27820
Replenishment package unit

Replacing the probe [SM] 6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A

! Procedure

1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Protection cover
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A

Probe nut

Probe

O-ring

Probe holder
G050893

G050891
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the
probe nut securely using the probe replacing
4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors. jig.
J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
5. Remove the tray units.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be
2. Lift it up. used properly for each solution.
Tray unit B
For CD-C solution, use the whole black
probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the
resin part is brown and the O-ring marked
with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer
to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
1. Press the lever.
8. Reassemble the parts as they were.
Tray unit A
G050892

27820 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

27830
Replenishment package unit

Adjusting the sensitivity of the 4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)
replenisher solution sensor [SM]
Protection cover

! Procedure

1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the

replenishment solution sensor.
Trays

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Replenishment solution Replenishment solution
package P-1 package P-2
G050891

5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0

PCB counterclockwise fully.

Replenishment solution sensors

G050894

Sensor arrangement

G050898

VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclock Decreases the amount of light.
wise
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.
G050895

2. Attach the replenishment package containing 6. Adjust each VR according to each LED
the replenishment solution. condition which is OFF.
1. If LED turns ON by turning clockwise less than
3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to twice from the left most position, carry out the
ON position.
operation of ☞ If LED turns on by rotating less
than twice .
2. Carry out ☞ If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice if LED turns ON by turning clockwise
more than twice from the position which was fully
turned in the left.
Chemical VR No. LED No.
CD-A VR1 LED1
CD-B VR2 LED2
CD-C VR3 LED3
STB VR4 LED4
BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6

27830 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

27830
Replenishment package unit

! If LED turns on by rotating less

than twice
1. If LED turns on when rotating the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor clockwise less
than twice, return the position of VR to the
left most and turn it three times clockwise
again.
IMPORTANT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• This includes the case when LED turns on
while the VR is at the left most position.
2. Reassemble the parts as they were.
! If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR
of each replenishment solution sensor, turn
the VR clockwise slowly and stop it at the
position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it
counterclockwise to the position where the
LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again
until the LED lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR
of the replenishment solution sensor
clockwise once to the right.
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor
to adjust its sensitivity if total number of VR
rotations of each sensor exceeds 11 in
Step 1 and Step 2.
NOTE
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each
replenishment solution sensor is 13.
• When the float in the replenishment package
blocks off the replenishment solution sensor, the
LED goes off.
Floats Replenishment
solution

Replenishment package

Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)

Replenishment
Probe
solution
Replenishment solution sensor
(LED)
G050897

4. Reassemble the parts as they were.

27830 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

3000

3. Mode

Passwords ........................................................................................................................... 30500

Passwords ..........................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................................................30600
Mode structure chart ........................................................................................................ 31000_1
Mode structure chart (Order Display) ...........................................................................................................31000_1
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) .........................................................................................................31010
Mode structure chart (Menu display) ................................................................................................................31020
Mode structure chart (Setup) .............................................................................................................................31030
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ....................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] .................................................................................................31040

3 Mode
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] .............................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) ..................................................................................................................31060
Mode structure chart (Net Order) ..................................................................................................................31500_1
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer) ..................................................................... 31710_1
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ........................................................................31710_1
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ......................................................................31720
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ............................................................................31730
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer] ..........................................................................................31740
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer] ..........................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer] ..............................................................................31770
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification) .................................................................... 32000
DLS mode structure chart ..................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ........................................................................................................32020
QSS mode structure chart (Setup) .....................................................................................................................32030
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] .........................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] .....................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance) ..........................................................................................................32060
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32500
Service Parameters ............................................................................................................................................32500
Paper Specification Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup .....................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ...........................................................................................................32561
Area Registration ...............................................................................................................................................32570
Parameter 1 ........................................................................................................................................................32590
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] .....................................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] ..................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060

3000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

3000

Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500

Thermosensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ........................................................................................................................33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33600
Operator Selections ............................................................................................................. 34500
Operator Selections [N] .....................................................................................................................................34500
Operator Selections [SM] ..................................................................................................................................34500
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC-II) ..............................................................................................35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC-II) .....................................................................................................35010

3 Mode
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (110 AFC-II) .....................................................................................................35020
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC-II) ............................................................................................35030
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC-II) .............................................................................................35040
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ...............................................................................................................35050
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135 AFC-II) .....................................................................................................35060
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..............................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..........................................................................................................................35220_1
Input Check (Processor) [SM] .......................................................................................................................35220_1
Output Check (Input Section) ............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) ......................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] .......................................................................................................................35320_1
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ....................................................................................................................35320_1
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software ......................................................................................................35450
System Version Check ...................................................................................................................................35500_1
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .................................................................................................35600_1
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [N] .................................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ...............................................................................................................................................35920_1
Media Drive Self-diagnostic ..........................................................................................................................35920_1
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction .....................................................................................................................36010_1
Exposure Magnification Correction ..................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment .........................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment .........................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .........................................................................................................................................36100

3000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

3000

Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................... 36700

Compact Archive Unit Initialization .................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ............................................................................................................36710
Scanner Unit Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-2/S-3] ..............................................................................................37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4] ....................................................................................................37000
Light Source Registration ..................................................................................................................................37010
Focus Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................37020
Light Source Update ..........................................................................................................................................37030
Laser Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information .......................................................................................................... 37500

3 Mode
Saving the Logdata ............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data ....................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ................................................................................37520_1
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error ..........................................................37530_1
Saving the DLS log file .....................................................................................................................................37600
Flatbed execution display .................................................................................................... 38000
Flatbed execution display ..................................................................................................................................38000

3000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

30500
Passwords
Passwords

Passwords

! Explanation

! Service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the
key.
4. Enter the password (2260).

3. Mode
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
NOTE
• After password input display appears, input the password
within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
password, start it over again.

IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
disk drive or the floppy disk.)

! Deleting the service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key, and then press the
key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.

! Deleting the owner password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key while the key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the
key.
NOTE
• After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only
when deleting the password which has been
registered.

30500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

30600
Passwords

Passwords (DLS specification) 2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the
! Explanation key.
DLS mode and QSS mode need their own service personnel 4. Enter the password (2260).
passwords respectively. When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
For DLS mode, the password is used to proceed to the key on each display.
operator mode. For QSS mode, the password makes it
possible to display the service personnel mode and perform NOTE
each setting. • After password input display appears, input the password
NOTE within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
• Quitting the application is performed at the close down
password, start it over again.
checks in the QSS mode.
IMPORTANT
! Service personnel password in DLS mode

3. Mode
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
1. Select Service Operator from the disk drive or the floppy disk.)
Administration menu and press OK.
The password input display appears. ! Deleting the service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key, and then press the
key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.

! Deleting the owner password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

S072403
2. Press the key while the key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
2. Enter the password (2260) and press OK. Password Deletion display.
Key Operator mode appears.
NOTE 3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the
• Service personnel floppy disk is unnecessary.
key.
NOTE
! Proceeding to the QSS mode • After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
1. Select QSS Menu in the Administration The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
menu.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only
It proceeds to the QSS mode.
when deleting the password which has been
NOTE registered.
• The DLS mode can proceed to the QSS Menu
from either Operator mode or Key Operator ! Proceeding to the DLS mode
mode.

IMPORTANT
1. Select NO in the initial menu display of QSS
mode or PASS in the menu display.
• To display the Windows taskbar, it is It proceeds to the DLS mode.
necessary to proceed to the QSS mode from
Key Operator mode.

! Service personnel password in the QSS mode

1. Press the key to select Menu.

30600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

31000_1
Mode structure chart
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Order Display)

3. Mode
S0000-00-SM04

Order Display
Item Reference
Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode ☞ 31500_1
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo
Service Manual.
Help Display

31000_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

31010
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Judgment Display)

3. Mode
S0250-00-SM32

Judgment Display
Item Reference
Screen Saver
Print Size Change
Print Size Copy
DSA
1 Frame Magnification
Cancel 1 Frame Magnification
Setting
Print Image Fine Adjustment
Top-Bottom Information
Change
Top-Bottom Information Copy
Help Display
Image Rotation (only 1 Frame)
[-1] Image Rotation
[N] Correction Value, Counts
and DSA Hold
[Y] Y-correction Copy
[M] M-correction Copy
[C] C-correction Copy
[D] Density Correction Copy
[REPT] Print Counts Copy
[+1] DSA Copy
[PASS] Passed frame copy
Panorama Shutter ON/OFF

31010 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31010
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Reading Test Print Correction
Value
Color Conversion
Photometry Memory
Frame Selection
Change of Front Print Setting
Cropping Operations Copy
Auto Red Eye Correction
Change
Scene Correction
Copy Scene Correction
Copy Correction Data

3. Mode
Auto Correction Change

31010 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31020
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Menu display)

3. Mode
S0003-00-SM00

S0019-01-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks F Quit the Close Down Checks
F Quit The Application
F Power OFF
Pricing Sheet Reissue

31020 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31020
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
*1
Daily Totals F Print Details F Print Out Daily Totals
F Daily Totals Export
F Details for Input Media Extra F Print Out Daily Totals
Charge F Daily Totals Export
F Details for JPEG F Print Out Daily Totals
F Daily Totals Export
F Details for Index Print F Print Out Daily Totals
F Daily Totals Export
F Media Copy Details F Print Out Daily Totals
F Daily Totals Export
F Reset Daily Totals
F Total Counter F Reset

3. Mode
F Daily Totals Export
F Total Counter 2
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning
Cleaning the Focal Plane
Regulating Guide
Clean the Pressure Roller
Extension Setup ☞ 31030
Processor Settings ☞ 31040
Operator Selections ☞ 31050
IX Data Settings Imprint Setting
F Lab ID
Photofinishing Data Utilization
Price Setting Print Price Setting
Input Media Extra Charge
Setting
Index Print Price Setting
JPEG Price Setting
Standard Price Setting
Option Registration Option
Media
Option Software
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ 31060
*1. If pricing unit is not registered as an option, selecting this item is not available.

31020 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31030
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Setup)

3. Mode
S1000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
F Profile Chart Output (SP1)
F Printer Profile Calibration
F Print Check
F Black Balance Adjustment
F Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)
F Setup Switch
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
F Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Paper Setup
Print Channel Print Channel Selection Setting
Cut
Copy
Paste
Export

31030 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31030
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Scanner Setup Scanner Slope Correction (Negative) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Reference Slope
DX Slope
Scanner Slope Correction (Positive) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Scanner Slope
Parameters (Negative) Parameter 1 ☞ 32590
Parameter 2
Parameter 3

3. Mode
Service Parameter (SP1) ☞ 32500
Light Source Update
Light Source Registration (SP1) ☞ 37010
Area Registration (SP1) ☞ 32570
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
DSA
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530
Data Initialization (SP1) All Data ☞ 32550
Main
Auto Film Carrier
Image Processing*1
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
Pricing Unit
LASER
Correction Data for Brightness of the
Edge of Image Field
Scanner
Initial Setup (SP1)
Create Template Package Edit Edit Existing Format
New
New (Use division wizard)
*1. Image Processing of Data Initialization is not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

31030 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31040
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
NOTE
• There are only [N] and [SM] specification for the Stand Alone Printer specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM].

3. Mode
S4000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
F Manual Replenishment
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
(SP1)
F Pump Output Amount
Measurement
F Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
Total Replenishment Amount ☞ 33040
Display (SP2)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
(SP1) Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
FDrive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment

31040 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31040
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM]

3. Mode
S4200-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
(SP2)
F Pump Output Amount
Measurement
F Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
Total Replenishment Amount ☞ 33040
Display (SP2)
F Package Capacity
Setting (SP1)
F SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
Setting (SP1)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
(SP1) Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
FDrive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment

31040 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Judgment Operation
Item Reference
Hold Key Reset
240 Print Counts User Advice (Camera Data)
PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order
Reprint Automatic Order
Sort Function by Each Frame
No. of Frames Setting of the Film Strip (135/120/110)
No. of Frames Setting of the Film Strip (240)
Judgment Display Specification
Display Design
Number of Display Items Switch
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Frame Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Resetting
Selecting Judgment Type for the Input Media
Image Change of Judgment Display Screen Saver

31050 1/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Print Operation
Item Reference
Magazine Auto Change
Remaining Paper Amount Display
Paper Leading Edge Advance
Color Selection of Print Blank of Positive
Color Selection of Print Blank except Positive
PPI Image Decision Time
Net Order Mode
Spooler Place
Spooler Capacity
Spooler Used Space

3. Mode
Data to be sorted
Sort Order
Accept to receive orders in Normal Mode
Auto Printing Start
Wait time for printing

Display/Operation
Item Reference
Buzzer Volume*1 F Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer*1
Buzzer Menu*1

*1. If you set the buzzer menu to other than Normal, you can not set the buzzer volume or keyboard sound.

Additional
Item Reference
Select the Type of Daily Totals reset
Film Carrier Rear Edge Fixed Dimension Frame Number
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Negative)
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Positive)
135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function
135/240 AMC Auto Focus
120 AFC Diffuser ☞ 34500
Paper Temperature Correction

Correction
Item Reference
DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction
DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction
Digital Masking Function
Positive Film Contrast Correction (120)
Positive Film Contrast Correction (others)
Positive Film Color Correction (120)
Positive Film Color Correction (others)
Judgment Image Sharpness Correction
CCD Noise Suppression
JPEG Block Noise Removal
Over Negative/Under Positive Frame Correction

31050 2/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Photometry Memory Function

Image Save
Item Reference
Saving Passed Images
Output Media Image Format
Arrangement by Output Media Frame Number
d-Storage*1
Retention Period
CD-R/RW
Writing Folder Format
Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system*2*3

3. Mode
Viewer Software Selection
DPOF File Output
HD
Destination Folder Selection
Auto Media Output

*1. The d-Storage appears if you register d-Storage TYPE2 in Option Registration. (Not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.)
*2. Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system is available if you register CD-R external writing system or Bravo in Option
Registration.
*3. CD-R external writing system is not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

Viewer
Item Reference
Simple Viewer Software Selection
Viewer Software for Windows
Viewer Software for Macintosh
Selection of Deluxe Viewer Software
Shop Data

Front
Item Reference
240
Imprinting Selection
Imprinting User Advice (Camera Data)
Media
DPOF Printing Specification
Exif Printing Specification
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text

31050 3/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Index
Item Reference
Hold of Index Print Counts
Archive Code Print
Reprint Code Print
135/120/110/Media
Index Print Specification
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Arrangement by Frame Number
Index Print of Passed Frame

3. Mode
Index Print Background Color
240
Index Print Specification
Print of Title
Print Date Setting
Index Print Background Color
Print Counts for each Print Type Display
Print Type Frame Display
Print Type Display Position

Contact Print
Item Reference
Frame F Reading the contact print
Background Color frame
Number of Blank Frames on Long Roll Film
Line Feed per Film Strip
Line Space

NOTE
• The Contact Print tab appears by installing the software for making the contact print in option registration.
Contents of Imprint
Item Reference
Copyright Mark F Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data F CVP Imprinting
Selection
Index/Logo Data
F Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name
PU/Telephone Number

Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection*1 ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)

31050 4/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)
*1. For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].

Archive
Item Reference
Archive Selection
Archive Mode
Saving Passed Images*1
Preferred Code*3*4
Compact Archive Unit Type 2*2

3. Mode
Compact Archive Unit Output Setting*2
Output Image Quality
Output Image Size

*1. Appears if you select the Compact Archive Unit TYPE1 in Option Registration.
*2. Appears if you select the Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 in Option Registration.
*3. Appears if you select both the Compact Archive Unit and the d-Storage in Option Registration at the same time.
*4. Preferred Code is not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

NOTE
• The Archive tab appears if you set Compact Archive in Option Registration.
Lens Aberration
Item Reference
Lens Aberration
Name
Insufficient Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field
Correction Strength
Aspect Ratio
Chromatic Aberration
Strength (Vertical)
Strength (Horizontal)
Deflection
Strength (Vertical)
Strength (Horizontal)

Pricing Sheet Print*1

Item Reference
Background Color
Pricing Sheet Print Counts
Pricing Sheet Image Part
Paper Fitting

*1. Appears if you set Pricing Unit Type to Print at the Option Registration screen.

31050 5/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31050
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM]

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Display items can be supplemented by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
Replenishment Package Error (SP1)
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)

31050 6/6
Distributed by: [Link]

31060
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Maintenance)

3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ☞ 35000
☞ 35010
☞ 35020
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
☞ 35050
☞ 35060
Colorimeter Calibration
F Confirming the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate Data
F Updating the Calibration Plate Data
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
F Test Paper Advance
F Paper Advance Test
F Cleaning Operation
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
F Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment

31060 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31060
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010_1
(SP1) *1
F Arm Unit 2 Test
Operation
F Arm Unit 2 Test
Operation Confirmation
F Arm unit 2 Test
Operation (Left)
F Arm unit 2 Test
Operation (Right)
F Test Operation for the
Turn Unit Stop Position
Correction

3. Mode
F Turn Unit Stop Position
Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
F Test Operation for the
Paper Stop Position
Correction
F Paper Stop Position
Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
Exposure Magnification ☞ 36020
Correction (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Position Adjustment ☞ 36030
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Magnification Fine ☞ 36040
Adjustment (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Paper Advance Length ☞ 36050
Correction (SP1)
F Test Paper Advance

31060 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31060
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
F Test Paper Advance
Confirmation
F Loading
F Rewind
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging ☞ 36060
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation 2

3. Mode
(Paper Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A) without
Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A) with
Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A) with
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B) without
Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B) with
Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B) with
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind

31060 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31060
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Exposure Advance Adjustment ☞ 36080
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper

3. Mode
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Paper Pressure Operation ☞ 36090
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) Swing and Tilt/Light Axis ☞ 37000
Adjustment
Light Source Registration ☞ 37010
Focus Adjustment ☞ 37020
F Magnification Change
F Focus Auto Adjustment
F Result
Light Source Update ☞ 37030
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300

31060 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31060
Mode structure chart

Item Reference
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit ☞ 36700
Initialization
F Initialization of the
Compact Archive Unit
(SP1)
F Defragmentation of the
Compact Archive Unit
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ☞ 36710
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220_1
☞ 35300

3. Mode
Output Check Input Section
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320_1
Reading and Writing Data All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy ☞ 35400
Disk)
Reading Data (Floppy Disk ->
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy
Disk -> CPU) (SP1)
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media)
(SP1)
Reading All Data (Media ->
CPU) (SP1)
Service Data (SP1) Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy
Disk -> CPU)
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media)
Reading All Data (Media ->
CPU)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500_1
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600_1
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Daily Setup History
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
F Program Timer Setting
F Machine Information
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920_1
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) of Functions in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction are not for 3300.

31060 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31500_1
Mode structure chart

Mode structure chart (Net Order)

3. Mode
S0000-00-SM05

Order Display
Item Reference
F Net Folder Registration
Receipt Record
Pricing Sheet Print Out
Management

31500_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

31710_1
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S0000-00-SM06

Order Display
Item Reference
Menu
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode ☞ 31500_1
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo
Service Manual.
Help Display

31710_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

31720
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S0250-00-SM32

Judgment Display
Item Reference
Screen Saver
Print Size Change
Print Size Copy
DSA
1 Frame Magnification
Cancel 1 Frame Magnification
Setting
Print Image Fine Adjustment
Top-Bottom Information
Change
Top-Bottom Information Copy
Help Display
Image Rotation (only 1 Frame)
[-1] Image Rotation
[N] Correction Value, Counts
and DSA Hold
[Y] Y-correction Copy
[M] M-correction Copy
[C] C-correction Copy
[D] Density Correction Copy
[REPT] Print Counts Copy
[+1] DSA Copy
[PASS] Passed frame copy
Reading Test Print Correction
Value

31720 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31720
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Color Conversion
Frame Selection
Change of Front Print Setting
Cropping Operations Copy
Auto Red Eye Correction
Change
Scene Correction
Copy Scene Correction
Copy Correction Data
Auto Correction Change

3. Mode

31720 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31730
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S0003-00-SM04

S0019-01-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks F Quit the Close Down Checks
F Quit The Application
F Power OFF
*1
Pricing Sheet Reissue
Daily Totals
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
Cleaning the Focal Plane
Regulating Guide

31730 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31730
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Clean the Pressure Roller
Extension Setup ☞ 31740
Processor Settings ☞ 31040
Operator Selections ☞ 31760
Network setting
Price Setting*1
Option Registration Option
Media
Option Software
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ 31770

3. Mode
*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

31730 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31740
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S1000-00-SM05
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
F Profile Chart Output (SP1)
F Printer Profile Calibration
F Print Check
F Black Balance Adjustment
F Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)
F Setup Switch
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
F Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Paper Setup
Print Channel Print Channel Selection Setting
Cut
Copy
Paste
Export
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
DSA
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530

31740 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31740
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Data Initialization (SP1) All Data ☞ 32561
Main
Image Processing*1
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
Pricing Unit
LASER
Correction Data for Brightness of the
Edge of Image Field
Initial Setup (SP1)
Create Template Package Edit Edit Existing Format

3. Mode
New
New (Use division wizard)
*1. 3300PRO and 33SDPRO models are not equipped with the Image Processing feature (shown in above table next to Data Initialization.

31740 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

31760
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer].

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM03
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Judgment Operation
Item Reference
Hold Key Reset
PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order
Sort Function by Each Frame
Reprint Automatic Order
Judgment Display Specification
Display Design
Number of Display Items Switch
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Frame Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Resetting
Selecting Judgment Type for the Input Media
Image Change of Judgment Display Screen Saver

31760 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31760
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Print Operation
Item Reference
Magazine Auto Change
Remaining Paper Amount Display
Paper Leading Edge Advance
Color Selection of Print Blank except Positive
PPI Image Decision Time
Net Order Mode
Spooler Place
Spooler Capacity
Spooler Used Space
Data to be sorted

3. Mode
Sort Order
Accept to receive orders in Normal Mode
Auto Printing Start
Wait time for printing

Display/Operation
Item Reference
*1
Buzzer Volume F Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer*1
Buzzer Menu*1

*1. If you set the buzzer menu to other than Normal, you can not set the buzzer volume or keyboard sound.

Additional
Item Reference
Select the Type of Daily Totals reset
Paper Temperature Correction

Correction
Item Reference
Judgment Image Sharpness Correction
JPEG Block Noise Removal

Image Save
Item Reference
Saving Passed Images
Output Media Image Format
d-Storage*1*2
Retention Period*1
CD-R/RW
Writing Folder Format
Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system*1*3
Viewer Software Selection
DPOF File Output
HD
Destination Folder Selection
Auto Media Output

*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, the CD-R external writing system and d-Storage TYPE2 are not set as option.

31760 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31760
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

*2. The d-Storage appears if you register d-Storage TYPE2 in Option Registration. (This function cannot be used with the Stand Alone Printer.)
*3. Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system is available if you register CD-R external writing system or Bravo in Option
Registration.

Viewer
Item Reference
Simple Viewer Software Selection
Viewer Software for Windows
Viewer Software for Macintosh
Selection of Deluxe Viewer Software
Shop Data

Front
Item Reference

3. Mode
Media
DPOF Printing Specification
Exif Printing Specification
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text

Index
Item Reference
Hold of Index Print Counts
Archive Code Print
Reprint Code Print*1
135/120/110/Media
Index Print Specification
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Arrangement by Frame Number*1
Index Print of Passed Frame
Index Print Background Color

*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

Contents of Imprint
Item Reference
Copyright Mark F Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data F CVP Imprinting
Selection
Index/Logo Data
F Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name*1
PU/Telephone Number*1

*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit

31760 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31760
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection*1 ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)
*1. For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer].

Archive
Item Reference
Archive Selection

3. Mode
Archive Mode
Saving Passed Images*1
Preferred Code*3
Compact Archive Unit Type 2*2
Compact Archive Unit Output Setting*2
Output Image Quality
Output Image Size

*1. Appears if you select the Compact Archive Unit TYPE1 in Option Registration.
*2. Appears if you select the Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 in Option Registration.
*3. Appears if you select both the Compact Archive Unit and the d-Storage in Option Registration at the same time.
Preferred Code is not for the Stand Alone Printer.

NOTE
• The Archive tab appears if you set Compact Archive in Option Registration.
Lens Aberration
Item Reference
Lens Aberration
Name
Insufficient Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field
Correction Strength
Aspect Ratio
Chromatic Aberration
Strength (Vertical)
Strength (Horizontal)
Deflection
Strength (Vertical)
Strength (Horizontal)

Pricing Sheet Print*1

Item Reference
Background Color
Pricing Sheet Print Counts
Pricing Sheet Image Part
Paper Fitting

*1. Appears if you set Pricing Unit Type to Print at the Option Registration screen.

31760 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31760
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM03
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Display items can be supplemented by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
Replenishment Package Error (SP1)
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)

31760 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

31770
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Colorimeter Calibration
F Confirming the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate Data
F Updating the Calibration Plate Data
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
F Test Paper Advance
F Paper Advance Test
F Cleaning Operation
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
F Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36010_1
F Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
F Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Confirmation
F Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left)
F Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right)
F Test Operation for the Turn Unit
Stop Position Correction
F Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
Test Operation Confirmation
F Test Operation for the Paper Stop
Position Correction
F Paper Stop Position Correction Test
Operation Confirmation

31770 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

31770
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)

3. Mode
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
F Test Paper Advance
F Test Paper Advance Confirmation
F Loading
F Rewind
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper Magazine B)
F Rewind

31770 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

31770
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
without Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A) with Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A) with Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
without Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper

3. Mode
Magazine B) with Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B) with Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper Magazine B)
F Rewind
Exposure Advance Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36080
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper Magazine B)
F Rewind
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper Magazine B)
F Rewind
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
F Test Print (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit Initialization ☞ 36700
F Initialization of the Compact
Archive Unit (SP1)
F Defragmentation of the Compact
Archive Unit
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ☞ 36710
31770 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

31770
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)

Item Reference
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220_1
Output Check Input Section ☞ 35300
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320_1
Reading and Writing Data All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk) ☞ 35400
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy Disk ->
CPU) (SP1)

3. Mode
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media) (SP1)
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU) (SP1)
Service Data (SP1) Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk)
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy Disk ->
CPU)
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media)
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500_1
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600_1
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Daily Setup History
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
F Program Timer Setting
F Machine Information
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920_1
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) of Functions in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction are not for
3300PRO.

31770 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

32000
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

DLS mode structure chart

3. Mode
S072402

Operator display
Item Reference
Order Picture Package
Custom
Preview Density & Color
Filter
Lighting Correction
Zoom & Crop
Red Eye Correction
Dust & Scratch
Borders & Text
Order Status WIP
Archive
System Status Printer ☞ Printer Status display
Scanner
Media Input
Media Output
System
Output Metering
Help
Manage Operator
Key Operator
Service Operator
QSS Menu

32000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32000
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

3. Mode
S072405

Key Operator display

Item Reference
System Setup Preview Image Setup
Index Print Setup
Disk Drive Management
Print Management
System Defaults
Picture Package Setup
System Diagnostics
KODAK Picture Center Online
Network Management
Device Setup Scanner
Order Status Same as Operator display
System Status

32000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32000
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

3. Mode
S072406

Printer Status display

Item Reference
Replenishment On/Off
Paper Remaining
Version information

32000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32010
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Order Display)

3. Mode
S072404

Order Display
Item Reference
F Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Help Display

32010 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

32020
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Menu display)

3. Mode
S0003-00-SM00DLS

S0019-01-SM00DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks*1 F Quit the Close Down Checks
F Quit The Application
F Power OFF
Daily Totals Totals of paper processing
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning

32020 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32020
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

Item Reference
Cleaning the Focal Plane
Regulating Guide
Clean the Pressure Roller
Extension Setup ☞ 31030
Processor Settings ☞ 31040
Operator Selections ☞ 31050
Option Registration Option
Option Software
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ 31060
*1. When the service personnel password (2260) has been entered, the value of Total Counter in Daily Totals can be reset.

3. Mode

32020 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32030
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Setup)

3. Mode
S1000-00-SM00DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
F Setup Switch
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
F Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Scanner Setup Parameters (Negative) Service Parameter (SP1) ☞ 32500
Light Source Update
Light Source Registration (SP1) ☞ 37010
Area Registration (SP1) ☞ 32570
Master Data Paper Temperature Correction
Data Initialization (SP1) All Data ☞ 32550
Main
Auto Film Carrier
Image Processing*1
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
LASER
Correction Data for Brightness of the
Edge of Image Field
Scanner
Initial Setup (SP1)

*1. Image Processing in Data Initialization is not available for the following models: 3300DLS, 3301SD DLS and 3302SD DLS.

32030 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

32040
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM].

3. Mode
S4000-00-SM00DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
F Manual Replenishment
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
(SP1)
F Pump Output Amount
Measurement
F Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
Total Replenishment Amount ☞ 33040
Display (SP2)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
(SP1) Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
F Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment

32040 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32040
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM]

3. Mode
S4200-00-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
(SP2)
F Pump Output Amount
Setting
F Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
Total Replenishment Amount ☞ 33040
Display (SP2)
F Package Capacity
Setting (SP1)
F SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
Setting (SP1)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
(SP1) Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
F Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment

32040 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32050
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Print Operation
Item Reference
Remaining Paper Amount Display
Paper Leading Edge Advance

Display/Operation
Item Reference
Buzzer Volume F Buzzer Test
Buzzer Menu

Additional
Item Reference
Film Carrier Rear Edge Fixed Dimension Frame Number
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Negative)
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Positive)
135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function
Paper Temperature Correction

Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)

32050 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32050
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM]

3. Mode
S2000-00-SM01DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Display items can be supplemented by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Operator Selections
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
Replenishment Package Error (SP1)
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)

32050 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32060
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance)

3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00DLS
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ☞ 35000
☞ 35010
☞ 35020
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
☞ 35060
Colorimeter Calibration
F Confirming the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate Data
F Updating the Calibration Plate Data
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
F Test Paper Advance
F Paper Advance Test
F Cleaning Operation
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
F Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment

32060 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

32060
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

Item Reference
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010_1
(SP1) *1
F Arm Unit 2 Test
Operation
F Arm Unit 2 Test
Operation Confirmation
F Arm unit 2 Test
Operation (Left)
F Arm unit 2 Test
Operation (Right)
F Test Operation for the
Turn Unit Stop Position
Correction

3. Mode
F Turn Unit Stop Position
Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
F Test Operation for the
Paper Stop Position
Correction
F Paper Stop Position
Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
Exposure Magnification ☞ 36020
Correction (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Position Adjustment ☞ 36030
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Magnification Fine ☞ 36040
Adjustment (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Paper Advance Length ☞ 36050
Correction (SP1)
F Test Paper Advance

32060 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

32060
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

Item Reference
F Test Paper Advance
Confirmation
F Loading
F Rewind
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging ☞ 36060
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation

3. Mode
2 (Paper Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A) without
Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
with Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
with Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B) without
Correction Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B) with
Master Value
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B) with
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind

32060 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

32060
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

Item Reference
Exposure Advance Adjustment ☞ 36080
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper

3. Mode
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Paper Pressure Operation ☞ 36090
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine B)
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) Swing and Tilt/Light Axis ☞ 37000
Adjustment
Light Source Registration ☞ 37010
Focus Adjustment ☞ 37020
F Magnification Change
F Focus Auto Adjustment
F Result
Light Source Update ☞ 37030
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220_1

32060 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

32060
DLS mode structure chart (DLS specification)

Item Reference
Output Check Input Section ☞ 35300
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320_1
Reading and Writing Data All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy ☞ 35400
Disk)
Reading Data (Floppy Disk ->
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy
Disk -> CPU) (SP1)
Writing All Data (CPU ->
Media) (SP1)

3. Mode
Reading All Data (Media ->
CPU) (SP1)
Service Data (SP1) Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy
Disk -> CPU)
Writing All Data (CPU ->
Media)
Reading All Data (Media ->
CPU)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500_1
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600_1
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Daily Setup History
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
F Program Timer Setting
F Machine Information
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920_1
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) of Functions in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction are not for 3300.

32060 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

32500
Setup
Setup

Service Parameters NOTE

• For example, if the value of 2 is not sufficient but the
value of 3 is too much in adjusting the sharpness, set the
Bringing up the display
value to 5 for DSA Sharpness Difference Ratio and set
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → the value to 5 for AS. This means the value of DSA
Parameters (Negative) → Service Parameter Sharpness Difference Ratio is set to 0 and that of AS is
set to 2.5.

! Auto Red Eye Correction Judgment Rate

(Tungsten) (Initial value: 0) (Input range: −99 to
+99)
The strength of the auto red eye correction judgement for the
film that was shot under a tungsten light can be adjusted.
In the case of the film that was shot under a tungsten light, the
area other than eyes may be corrected incorrectly because face

3. Mode
is reddish.
NOTE
• As the setting value gets smaller, the auto red eye
correction for the film that was taken under a weaker
tungsten light will not be carried out.

! Scanner (initial value: ON)

G074621
NOTE This is the scanner correction switch.
• Only the Digital Masking Silverization Assessment Level is ON Normal Print
shown onscreen for DLS specification systems.
D_OFF Only density correction is OFF (Only density
correction is average photometry.)
! Explanation C_OFF Only color correction is OFF (Only color correction
is the average photometry.)
The parameters, which vary automatic correction by the
scanner, can be changed. None Both density and color corrections are OFF (the
average photometry).
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password SetUp This setting is not used.
(2260).
! PJP Analyzer (initial value: 0)
! DSA Contrast Difference Ratio (Initial value: 0) Use this function to collect the correction pattern data at
(Input range: 0 to 10) customer's shop. The correction data of PJP is output to
Adjust the DSA contrast. C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Tmp\[Link].
When the setting value is set to 0 or 10, it is adjusted by the 0 Not output to the file.
default value. When the setting value is set to 1, the whole
area of DSA auto contrast (AC), high light area (ACh) and 1 Output to the file.
shadow area (ACs) are adjusted by the tenth part of the default
value. ! Tungsten Negative Correction Rate (Initial
With the setting value of 2, 3⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10, the default value value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99)
goes like 2/10, 3/10⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10/10.
Set the correction rate when the scanner judges that the
NOTE negative that was taken under a tungsten light. A setting value
• For example, if the value of 2 is not sufficient but the of 80 corresponds to no correction. The smaller the value, the
value of 3 is too much in adjusting the contrast, set the greater the correction.
value to 5 for DSA Contrast Difference Ratio and set the
value to 5 for AC. This means the value of DSA Contrast ! Digital Masking Silverization Judgment Level
Difference Ratio is set to 0 and that of AC is set to 2.5.
(Initial value: 0) (Input range: -75 to +25)
! DSA Sharpness Difference Ratio (Initial value: Setting the Ag removing failure rate is available.
0) (Input range: 0 to 10)
Adjust the DSA sharpness.
When the setting value is set to 0 or 10, it is adjusted by the
default value. With the setting value of 1, the sharpness of
DSA (AS) is adjusted by tenth part of the default value.
With the setting value of 2, 3⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10, the default value
goes like 2/10, 3/10⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10/10.

32500 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32500
Setup

If Ag removing failure rate exceeding the set value is detected, ! Target Value 2 (Negatives) (Initial value: 0)
automatically turns OFF the digital masking function and (Input range: -4 to 0)
prints.

The default value is 0.

IMPORTANT
+25
• Do not change the setting. This function is not in
use.

The smaller the value is set, the keener ! Basic Color Correction Switch (Initial value: 0)
detection of Ag removing failure is.
-75 (Input range: 0 to 1)
Changes how to calculate for the scanner correction according
to the negatives. Different effect can be obtained by
combining with this Basic Color Correction Switch and
! CF (Initial value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99)
Scanner Color Correction Switch in the user mode.
Correction rate for the color failure can be set.
1 The negative color correction used before upgrading
The setting of small value makes a color failure occurs easily

3. Mode
the software (same as Ver. 1.##)
but pure colors can be obtained.
0 The negative color correction after upgrading the
0 The smaller value is set, the more color software
failures occurs. However, pure colors can be
obtained.
IMPORTANT
• Setting the Basic Color Correction Switch to 1
The default value is 80. cannot completely bring back the color correction
99 before Ver. 1.## because the image quality has
been already improved.
• Basic Color Correction Switch is not available for
! Target Value 1 (Negatives) (Initial value: 0) 120 films.
(Input range: -4 to 0) • By combining the setting of Basic Color Correction
Switch and Scanner Color Correction Switch
This mode is to be used only when the image cannot be (Negative), six types of effects can be obtained for
detected by the scanner because the base density of the 135/240/110 films.
negative film is light. ☞ 32590
Usually, do not use this function.
135/240/110 Scanner Color Correction Switch (Negative)
IMPORTANT
Standard Frame Order
• If the setting is changed for the normal negative, the
print quality may be get lower. Also, the image may Basic Color 0 A B C
not be able to be detected. Correction 1 D E F
Switch
• When the negative film that cannot be detected (by
poor Ag removing, etc.) becomes detectable by
setting the D-ICE off, do so and do not use this Detail of effect
function. A As against the color correction: 0, standard color
• In other way, the film stop position can be also correction: 0, the change of the color to the yellow tone
available even it is manual operation. Insert the under the same scene can be controlled.
negative pressing the N key of the operation B As against the correction of A, the change of the color to
keyboard or pressing the F4 key of the full the yellow tone under the same scene can be controlled.
keyboard. C As against the correction of A, the color failure can be
When changing the value, set it from 0 to -1, and carry out the controlled. However, the effect of 1CH decreases.
Light Source Registration and Focus Adjustment. D As against the correction of A, the color correction at the
To check that image can be detected properly, process the under scene can be controlled.
negative film. E As against the correction of B, the color correction at the
If image cannot be read, change the setting value to -2 and under scene can be controlled.
repeat the same procedure.
F As against the correction of C, the color correction at the
0 The default value is 0. under scene can be controlled.

If the value is set to under 0, the image is

detected with the lower sensitivity of CCD.
-4 The image quality may be get lower.

32500 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32510
Setup

Paper Specification
Registration/Setup

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper
Specification Registration/Setup

Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

22-step setup print: 320 mm

G068485

3. Mode
Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm
S1028-00-SM00

Each step length: 12 mm

! Explanation
A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out. 22-step setup print: 320 mm

! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine G068486

Selection
A maximum of three available paper types can be set.

! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the OK The magazine for which paper
like specification is registered
127 (1) or the − The magazine which is registered and
like for which paper specification is not
registered
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered

! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Carry out System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper
Gamma Setup, Black Balance Adjustment, and Printer
Profile Calibration for each paper type.
Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the
exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-step setup print for Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm
adjusting the paper gamma setup, one sheet of 22-step setup
print for adjusting the black balance, and three sheets of test Each step length: 12 mm
prints for the printer profile calibration.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3
times at most.
20-step, 22-step setup prints: 320 mm

G068484

32510 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32510
Setup

! Functions Make two sheets of 22-step setup prints and one sheet of 20-
step test print.
! Profile Chart Output
Make five test prints for creating the printer profile.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.

9.5 mm

89 mm

9.5 mm

3. Mode
9.5 mm
89 mm

9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm G068484

! Print Check
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed.
Then, the machine can be checked using the sample prints.
89 mm
Sample 1: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting ON.
9.5 mm
14.5
Sample 2: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting OFF
89 mm
Sample 3: Letter confirmation print
14.5 A print of letter image.

G052519 Sample 4: Print for banding and laser checks

NOTE The print contains three kind of gray colors.
• There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile. NOTE
• The printer profile need to be created for each paper type. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
! Printer Profile Calibration Sample 5: Print for banding and laser checks
Calibrate the printer profile. A solid gray print.
Make test prints for calibrating the printer profile and calibrate NOTE
them with the colorimeter unit. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
Sample 6: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
Sample 7: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.

32510 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32510
Setup

! Black Balance Adjustment • Normally, set the setup switch to ON.

Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the NOTE

black letters as black. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print. display this.

3. Mode
G068486

! Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)

Adjust each R,G and B color manually so as to show the black
letters as black.
NOTE
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification
Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be
carried out automatically. To carry out the fine
adjustment just a little more, do it by Black Balance
Adjustment (Manual).

Select the most appropriate color (black).

G063985

! Setup Switch
When the setup switch is ON, high density section is
calculated and setup to be the most appropriate Dmax.
When the setup switch is OFF, setup within the range of the
colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setup switch, it is necessary to
carry out the operation from the initial setup again.

32510 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32520
Setup

Magazine Registration/Setup The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine
Registration/Setup

Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

22-step setup print: 320 mm

3. Mode
G068485

IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper
Specification Registration/Setup of the paper
type needs to be completed.

NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
S1035-00-SM00

! Functions
! Explanation
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper ! Paper Specification Registration/Setup
gamma setup is carried out. Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper
Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and
its paper specification is also registered.
☞ 32510
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and
its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine OK The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is
completed.
Magazine − The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
− The magazine not for setup is not
registered and the magazine registration
setup is not completed.

! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5

to 210 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper
type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.

32520 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

32530
Setup

Monitor setup ! Adjustment

Follow the procedure below to setup.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup Working place environment check

Brightness adjustment

Monitor setup

3. Mode
! Brightness Adjustment

Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
of the display monitor.
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
S1030-00-SM00
2. Set the contrast to the maximum.
! Explanation 3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
The display monitor can be adjusted basically and
values 0, 0, 0 and 10,10,10 can barely be
mechanically. Also display monitor color can be adjusted to
the print color according to the operating environment of the
recognized.
machine.
! Monitor Setup
IMPORTANT
• Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the 1. Make a test print.
color can be recognized at your working place. If
NOTE
necessary, change the environment of the working
place. • When Only Color Adjustment Pattern is
selected, one test print for adjustment is made.
! Brightness Adjustment When All is selected, seven prints including a test
print for adjustment are made.
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (button) of
the display monitor. 2. According to the instructions on the display,
adjust the monitor color so that the sample
IMPORTANT
• The brightness adjustment is required according to
the operating environment.

! Monitor Setup
Make a test print and adjust the monitor color by visual check.

32530 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32530
Setup

image on the display monitor matches the ORDER: Save profile

test print color. The monitor profile data that matches the setting is
made and overwritten the data.
D: Detail Setting
Detail setting screen is displayed and the selected
image can be corrected in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select
Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made
and the data is overwritten.

3. Mode
Color pallet

S1241-02-SM00

Image selection section

S1241-02-SM01

Color pallet
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
color pallet using the mouse.
Image selection section
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
sample image.
REPT: Data Initialization
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Check
Images which is adjusted and not adjusted are
displayed.

32530 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32550
Setup

Data Initialization

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM00

! Explanation
The data which is saved in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.

32550 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0300 Auto Film Carrier data
BkData0400 *1 Image Processing data
BkData2700 Printer data
BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data

3. Mode
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data
BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field
Bk0300_SCN Scanner data
BkData2900
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh

• (*1) This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.
*1. BKData0400 (the data of Image Processing) is not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

32550 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup

3. Mode
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
Image Processing BKData0400 *1 Image Processing data
Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration
Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
Parameter (negative)
BkData2900 Scanner data
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8

32550 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Scanner MisregAMC_3 Erasing Scratch data
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh

3. Mode
• (*1) This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.
*1. BKData0400 (the data of Image Processing) is not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

! Data that are not initialized when initialization executed

Basically, data are initialized when initialization is executed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.

Data which are not initialized

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record

32550 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

32561
Setup

Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM02

! Explanation
The data which is saved in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.

32561 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32561
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0400 *2 Image Processing data
BkData2700 Printer data
BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data
*1
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data

3. Mode
BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
*2
Image Processing BKData0400 Image Processing data
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
*1
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
*1
Basic price setting data
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field

*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

*2. BKData0400 (data for Image Processing) is not available for the following models: 3300PRO, 33SDPRO.

! Data that are not initialized when initialization executed

Basically, data are initialized when initialization is executed.

32561 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32561
Setup

Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.

Data which are not initialized

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record

3. Mode

32561 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

32570
Setup

Area Registration 4. After carrying out Area Registration, the

focus adjustment is required.
☞ 37020
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Area
Registration
! Adjustment procedure (for MFC)

1. Set the MFC attachement to carry out the

Area Registration.
NOTE
• In case of other than the crop card attachment of
MFC, area is not registered automatically at the
light source registration.
• In the case of the crop card attachment of MFC,
area is registered automatically at the light source
registration.

3. Mode
2. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• The Area Registration starts automatically.
3. When you continue the operation to set
another film carrier, repeat the steps above.
S1047-00-SM00 4. After carrying out Area Registration, the
focus adjustment is required.
! Explanation ☞ 37020
Register the valid range of CCD.
IMPORTANT
• After carrying out Area Registration, the focus
adjustment is required.
☞ 37020
! Attached Film Carrier
The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly, −
− − − − is displayed.

! Registration
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.

! Adjustment procedure (for other than

MFC)

1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Area

Registration.
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, switch the lane to 135 or
240 securely.
2. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• The Area Registration starts automatically.
3. When you continue the operation to set
another film carrier, repeat the steps above.

32570 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

32590
Setup

Parameter 1 ! Fogged Density Skip Rate (Initial value: 0)

(Input range: 0 to 99)
Bringing up the display Set the judgement level of density to skip the fogged negative.
Menu → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Parameters The smaller the value is, the lower the skip
(Negative) 0
rate becomes.

99 The larger the value is, the higher the skip

rate becomes.

! Fogged Area Skip Rate (Initial value: 0) (Input

range: 0 to 99)
Set the judgement level of area to skip the fogged negative.

3. Mode
The smaller the value is, the lower the skip
0
rate becomes.

99 The larger the value is, the higher the skip

S1051-00-SM00 rate becomes.

! Explanation
Set the reference to judge the scanned film. ! Panorama Film Judgment Rate (Initial value: 0)
(Input range: −10 to 5)
! Under-exposed Negative Skip Rate (Initial Set the judgement level of 135 negative panorama frame.
value: 0) (Input range: 0 to 99)
The smaller the value is, the easier the
Set the judgement level to skip the under-exposed negative. -10 detection as panorama is carried out.

The smaller the value is, the lower the skip

0
rate becomes.
The larger the value is, the more difficult the
5
detection as panorama is carried out.

99 The larger the value is, the higher the skip

rate becomes.

! Scanner Color Correction Switch (Negative)

(initial value: Standard)
! Over-exposed Negative Skip Rate (Initial value: Switch the negative color correction (color tone of the whole
0) (Input range: 0 to 99) image) of the scanner.
Set the judgement level to skip the over-exposed negative. Standard The correction between Frame and Order
Frame The correction using the information of a
The smaller the value is, the lower the skip
0
rate becomes.
frame
Order The correction using the order information

The larger the value is, the higher the skip IMPORTANT
99
rate becomes. • The different effect can be obtained by combining
with the setting of Basic Color Correction Switch
of Service Parameters.
☞ 32500

32590 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

32590
Setup

! Scanner Graduation Correction Switch • It is slow at bringing up the PJP display after
(Negative except for 120) (initial value: ON) scanning the images and also it takes time to show
the next display.
In the case of 135, 240 or 110 negative film, the correcting
procedure of Shadow Area and Highlight Area are switched. NOTE
ON The contrast is corrected by frame with scene • For detecting the face of figure, the face sensing
judgement. technology OKAO Vision by OMRON Corporation is
adopted.
OFF The image is printed as if it is printed using the
analog machine. • The shots on which this correction does not work or
difficult to work are as follows.

! Scanner Graduation Correction Switch (120 When the shot is a portrait in profile or the image size of the
negative) (initial value: OFF) portrait is too small (less than 20 X 20 pixels as a rough standard)
When anything other than a person is shot (the subject is an
In the case of 120 negative film, the correcting procedure of
animal, a scenery, etc.)
Shadow Area and Highlight Area are switched.
When the shot is made in the over/under exposed condition, and

3. Mode
ON The contrast is corrected by frame with scene its subject has no contrast on the face
judgement.
OFF The image is printed as if it is printed using the
analog machine.

! Basic Density Correction Switch (Initial value:

1) (Input range: 0 to 3)
Select the intensity of density correction by scanner.
Detecting the face of the figure in the image corrects the
density or contrast for the shot under electronic flash or
backlighted automatically.
There are four levels of the intensity of density correction.
Setting Details Face
detection
0 The negative density correction that Invalid
the shot under electronic flash or
backlighted is not enhanced.
1 Negative density correction that the Valid
shot under electronic flash or (Standard)
backlighted is enhanced.
2 Negative density correction that the Valid
shot under electronic flash or (moderatel
backlighted is enhanced. y accurate)
3 Negative density correction that the Valid
shot under electronic flash or (highly
backlighted is enhanced. accurate)

IMPORTANT
• When a specific under scene is scanned several
times by setting 1 or 2 or 3 for Basic Density
Correction Switch, the density values read by the
scanner may be uneven.
Selecting 0 for Basic Density Correction Switch
makes the density values even, but correction is not
performed for the shot under electronic flash or
backlighted.
• Highly accurate correction can be obtained with the
large value. But it is slow at calculating the
correction value and takes longer time for the
images to appear after inserting the films.
• The calculation of the correction value is performed
not only for the scene you want but also the every
scanned scene.

32590 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33030
Setup

Pump Output Amount Setting [N] After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time,
the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
Description for each specification
IMPORTANT
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
below for the description for each specification.
operation at machine installation.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Pump Output Amount • When the initial replenishment operation has been
Setting [SM]. carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
! Display using the pump output amount setting of Functions.

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump
Output Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4003-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1

to 200.0 ml)
On Pump Output Amount Setting via Function, each output
amount of replenisher pumps is measured and the
measurement values are compared.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the pump output amount except for
when changing the pump.

! Functions

! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure each output amount of the
replenisher pumps and refilling water pumps.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the
pump output amount measurement of Functions,
amount remaining is subtracted.

! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.

33030 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33030
Setup

Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] IMPORTANT

• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
operation at machine installation.
! Display • When the initial replenishment operation has been
Bringing up the display carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump
using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
Output Amount Setting
☞ 27810

3. Mode
S4202-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1

to 200.0 ml)
On Pump Output Amount Setting via Function, each output
amount of replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and
refilling water pumps are measured and the measurement
values are compared.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the pump output amount except for
when changing the pump.
☞ 27810

! Functions

! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure each output amount of the
replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and refilling water
pumps.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the
pump output amount measurement of Functions,
amount remaining is subtracted.

! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump,
refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in
the hose can be extracted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.

33030 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33040
Setup

Total Replenishment Amount Total Replenishment Amount

Display [N] Display [SM]

Description for each specification

! Display
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See
below for the description for each specification. Bringing up the display
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Total Replenishment Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total
Amount Display [SM]. Replenishment Amount Display

! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total
Replenishment Amount Display

3. Mode
S4203-01-SM00

! Explanation

! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00

to 99999.99 mL)
S4004-00-SM00
The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.

! Explanation ! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity)

(Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
! Total Replenishment Amount
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged
The total replenishment amount can be checked. from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining
amount. When replacing the package before the replenishment
! Replenishment Lack Time package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value.
(Initial value: Package Capacity)
The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full
or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment
Lack Time is accumulated according to the paper amount ! Package Capacity
which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry The package capacity which has been set in the Package
out the replenishment after the error is released. Capacity Setting via Functions is displayed.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message ! Functions
appears and the process stops after the replenishment lack
time reaches 600 seconds.
! Package Capacity Setting
! Clear The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
Clear the value which is accumulated.
NOTE # Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%)
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to (Input range: -50 to +50%)
display the clear button. When the percentage of the replenishment
remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller
than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709

33040 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33040
Setup

Replenishment Package solution remaining

error. occurs.
☞ 45708

# Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to

9999.9 mL)
Set the replenishment solution amounts for the
replenishment packages.

! SM Forced Replenishment Setting

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.

# SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting

(Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input

3. Mode
range: 0.0 to 999.9 mL)
SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
CD-A 42.42
CD-B 42.42
CD-C 60.6
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0

This is the limit amount when carrying out forced

replenishment.
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this
value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the
initial value of the forced replenishment amount.

# Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump
operates replenishment with the value input in
Forced Replenishment Amount Setting is
displayed.

33040 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33060
Setup

Correction Setting [SM]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction
Setting

3. Mode
S4205-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased
depending on the paper process amount.

! Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water
supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without
changing the value of Standard Replenishment Amount
Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by
entering the service personnel password (2260).

! Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating
environment of the machine.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set
in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water
amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount).
Refer to ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].

33060 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

33500
Processor Standard Setting
Processor Standard Setting

Thermosensor Calibration

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration

3. Mode
S3005-00-SM00

! Explanation
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).

! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input

range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and
enter the measured values.

! Correction Value
When the measured temperature is entered, the correction
value, subtracting the displayed temperature from the
measured temperature, will be automatically entered.

! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the
thermosensor is displayed.

33500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

33510
Processor Standard Setting

Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] # Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level
OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling
Description for each specification Water Level is set to ON. (For automatic refilling
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See water during start up checks and normal
below for the description for each specification. processing.)
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Refilling Water Amount
Setting [SM]. # Refilling Water Amount Setting2
Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water
! Display Level ON. (For automatic refilling during start up
checks.)
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4008-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the
machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value:
Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling
Water Water
Amount Amount
Setting 1 Setting 2
CD-W 140.0 81.0
BF-W 173.0 47.0
STB1-W 230.0 41.0
STB2-W 78.0 47.0
STB3-W 76.0 44.0
STB4-W 150.0 72.0

The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling

water pump is set.

33510 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33510
Processor Standard Setting

Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] Water Level is set to ON. (For automatic refilling
water during start up checks and normal
processing.)
! Display
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Bringing up the display Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Level ON. This setting is valid when the Refilling
Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting Water Level 2 of Correction Setting has been set
to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start
up checks.)

# Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low
Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of
Correction Setting for Refilling Water Amount

3. Mode
Setting 2 (Standard).

# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low

Processing Amount)
For Refilling Water Amount 2 (Standard), when
Low Processing Amount is selected for Refilling
Water Level 2 of Correction Setting, each
refilling water amount is set.
Each refilling water amount can be set according to
the amount of evaporation when processing amount
S4204-00-SM00
is low (for each machine or time of year).
! Explanation IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2
! Process Specification (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2
(Low Processing Amount) are the same as that
The process specification which has been registered in the of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not
machine specification is displayed. change them.
☞ 35800 If it is necessary to change the settings, the
setting values are specified.
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value:
Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling Water
Water Amount Setting 2
Amount Refilling Water
Setting 1 Amount 2 (Low
Humidity)
Refilling Water
Amount Setting 2
(Low Processing
Amount)
CD 118.0 60.0
BF 160.0 26.0
STB1 122.0 41.0
STB2 76.0 47.0
STB3 62.0 44.0
STB4 142.0 51.0

The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling

water pump is set.

# Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level
OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling

33510 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

33580
Processor Standard Setting

Cleaning Water Amount Setting

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4009-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial

value: 14.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.

! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial

value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the stopping time of the cleaning pump.

! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input

range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the
cleaning pump starts the output operation.

! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input

range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the
cleaning pump finishes the output operation.

33580 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

33600
Processor Standard Setting

Drive Motor Revolution Count

Setting

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting

3. Mode
S4012-00-SM00

! Explanation

! Drive Motor Setting Value (Standard value: 216)

The setting count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.

! Drive Motor Revolution Count

The present count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.

! Functions

! Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is adjusted
automatically.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine
type registration of the machine specification has been
changed, it is adjusted.

33600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

34500
Operator Selections
Operator Selections

Operator Selections [N] ! Circulation pump error

Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
Description for each specification Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See IMPORTANT

below for the description for each specification. • Normally, use with ON.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Operator Selections [SM].
! Order Classification Section error
NOTE
• There are only [N] and [SM]specification for the Stand Alone Model Details
Printer. QSS-3300 You can choose whether or not you want the
system to display print conveyor unit-related
errors onscreen.
! Onscreen Display (Processor)
QSS-33 You can choose whether or not you want the
Bringing up the display QSS-33SD system to display customer order sorter-
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Operator Selections → related errors onscreen.

3. Mode
Processor
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

! Onscreen Display (Additional)

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Operator Selections →
Additional

S2000-00-SM06

! Explanation
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service
mode are explained.

! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out. S2000-00-SM05

IMPORTANT ! 120 AFC Diffuser

• Normally, use with OFF. The 120 AFC diffuser can be set to "Used" or "Not in use".

! Replenishment error Setting Details

Some If the 120 AFC diffuser is in use
Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF. Using the 120 AFC diffuser increases
scanner accumulation time by a factor of
IMPORTANT 2.5.
• Normally, use with ON. None If the 120 AFC diffuser is not in use
Scanner accumulation time is normal
! Refilling water error
Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

34500 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

34500
Operator Selections

Operator Selections [SM]

! Onscreen Display (Processor)

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Operator Selections →
Processor

120 AFC diffuser

G082013

IMPORTANT
• Perform the following adjustments after changing
the 120 AFC diffuser setting from "In use" to "Not in

3. Mode
use" or vice versa.

Item Reference
Light Source Registration ☞ 37010
Focus Adjustment ☞ 37020
Light Source Update ☞ 37030

• 120 AFC diffuser settings do not affect the MFC 120

attachment.
S2000-00-SM07

! Explanation
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service
mode are explained.

! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with OFF.

! Replenishment error
Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

! Replenishment package error

Replenishment package error can be set to ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

! Refilling water error

Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

34500 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

34500
Operator Selections

! Circulation pump error

Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

! Order Classification Section error

Model Details
QSS-3300 You can choose whether or not you want the
system to display print conveyor unit-related
errors onscreen.
QSS-33 You can choose whether or not you want the
QSS-33SD system to display customer order sorter-

3. Mode
related errors onscreen.

Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.

IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with ON.

34500 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35000
Maintenance
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ! Explanation

(135/240 AFC-II) ! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm)
Bringing up the display
The difference between the prescanning position and the
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment actual scanning position can be corrected.
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
NOTE
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end,
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
• When changing the print position for all frames
intentionally, input the correction value. For example,
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to
left.

3. Mode
Film inserting
direction

Direction of misalignment Print

S3099-00-SM00 when the minus correction is
carried out G057680

! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)

(Input range: 0 to 255)
The standard value is used for gain adjustment of the 135
loading sensor, perforation sensor, ready sensor and DX
sensor.

! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
NOTE
• Only 135 lane has the loading sensor.

! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
S3099-00-SM01
NOTE The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260). ! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to
• * is displayed by entering the service personnel password.
255)
• Carry out the adjustment with the 135/240 film carrier The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
attached to the machine.
• When the (135) lane is selected for the attached film carrier, ! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input
the display for adjusting the 135 film carrier appears. If the range: 0 to 255)
(240) lane is selected, that for adjusting the 240 film carrier
DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that
appears.
the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively.
• When the lane is moved while the display for adjustment is
appearing, the display for various adjustments appears. ! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to
255)
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each

35000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35000
Maintenance

sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor ! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.
1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.
! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input This adjustment is automatically carried out.
range: 0 to 255)
NOTE
The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed. • A film is not used for adjustment.

! Functions ! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

! Scanning Position Auto Correction 1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.

Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
and the actual scanning position can automatically be
adjusted.

3. Mode
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor are
automatically adjusted.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.
• Both lanes are adjusted at the same time regardless of the
lane which is set.

! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

S3099-00-SM02
Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each 2. Insert the film into the film carrier.
sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
simultaneously. NOTE
• Use the film containing two frames or more, of
! DX Standard Adjustment which base density is light.

The standard adjustment of the 135 DX sensor and 240 DX 3. Remove the ejected film.
sensor can be carried out. 4. The adjustment is complete, and the
correction value is input automatically.
! DX Code Reading
DX code reading test for either the 135 lane or 240 lane can be ! DX Code Reading
carried out.
1. Select DX Code Reading.
! DX Sensor Level Display
2. Load the film to the film carrier.
The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed.
3. Remove the ejected film.
! Adjustment 4. The reading is complete, and the result is
displayed.
! Scanning Position Auto Correction NOTE
• Only the reading code, reading count and frame
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction. No. are displayed.
This adjustment is automatically carried out. • The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the
NOTE display frame No.
• A film is used for adjustment. • A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a
maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment.
This adjustment is automatically carried out.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

35000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35000
Maintenance

S3099-00-SM02

3. Mode
! DX Sensor Level Display

1. Select DX Sensor Level Display.

S3099-00-SM02
NOTE
• The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
• The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value
obtained by standard adjustment.

35000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35010
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 ! Scanning Position Correction 1 (Initial value:
100 %) (Input range: 95.00 to 105.00 %)
AFC-II)
The correction amount of the difference between the
prescanning position and the actual scanning position is
Bringing up the display displayed.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to
255)
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Film Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to 255)

The film sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

3. Mode
255)
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
S3004-00-SM00 sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
NOTE sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260). ! Functions
• Carry out the adjustment with the 120 film carrier attached to
the machine. ! Scanning Position Auto Correction
Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
! Explanation and the actual scanning position can automatically be
corrected.
! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm) ! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The difference between the prescanning position and the The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor
actual scanning position can be corrected. are adjusted.
NOTE NOTE
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end, • A film is not used for adjustment.
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode. ! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
• When changing the print position for all frames Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to simultaneously.
left.

! Adjustment

! Scanning Position Auto Correction

Film inserting
direction
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction.
This adjustment is automatically carried out.
NOTE
Direction of misalignment Print • A film is used for adjustment.
when the minus correction is
carried out G057680

35010 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35010
Maintenance

! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

1. By selecting the sensor LED light intensity

adjustment, the value is automatically
adjusted.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

1. By selecting the sensor sensitivity

adjustment, the value is automatically
adjusted.
NOTE

3. Mode
• A film is not used for adjustment.

35010 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35020
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (110 ! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Initial value: 200)
(Input range: 0 to 255)
AFC-II)
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

Bringing up the display ! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment to 255)
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to

255)

3. Mode
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.

! Functions

S3098-00-SM00 ! Scanning Position Auto Correction

NOTE Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password and the actual scanning position can automatically be
(2260). corrected.
• Carry out the adjustment with the 110 film carrier attached to
the machine. ! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor
! Explanation are adjusted.
NOTE
! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0 • A film is not used for adjustment.
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm)
! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
The difference between the prescanning position and the
actual scanning position can be corrected. Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
NOTE sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end, simultaneously.
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode. ! Adjustment
• When changing the print position for all frames
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, ! Scanning Position Auto Correction
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to
left. 1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction.
This adjustment is automatically carried out.
NOTE
• A film is used for adjustment.

Film inserting
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
direction

1. By selecting the sensor LED light intensity

adjustment, the value is automatically
Direction of misalignment Print
adjusted.
when the minus correction is
carried out G057680 NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

35020 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35020
Maintenance

! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

1. By selecting the sensor sensitivity

adjustment, the value is automatically
adjusted.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

3. Mode

35020 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35030
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment 2. Remove the condensing lens unit.

(135/240 MMC-II)

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

Lens unit

3. Mode
G068477

3. Remove the lens unit guide. (two screws)

S3201-00-SM00

NOTE
• Functions appears when the service personnel password is
entered.
• Carry out the adjustment with the 135/240 MMC attached to
the machine.

! Functions Lens unit guide

G068478
! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position
Adjustment 4. Select Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor
Position Adjustment [Remove the Top
Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and
Cover].
detection sensor for auto focus.
NOTE
• Use three types of adjustment jigs for Emission
! Adjustment Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment.
• These are the service personnel tools. Refer to
! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position
Service personnel tool list.
Adjustment
☞ 80310
1. Remove the top cover. Emission adjustment
chart
☞ 20040

Scanner adjustment chart Height

(mount) adjustment jig
G052618

35030 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35030
Maintenance

5. Adjust a height of the mount carrier. the gear counterclockwise moves it

downward.
(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the MMC. Mount carrier sensor light-tight plate
Worm wheel
Height adjustment jig

3. Mode
Adjustment
screwdriver

Projection
Marks
G052616

(3) After adjusting the height, mark the

adjustment position on the worm wheel.
IMPORTANT
G052615
• Mark on the worm wheel which is near
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the the projection.
adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor • Put the marks on the front edge of the
light-tight plate, and adjust a height of the worm wheel tooth and on the projection
mount carrier so that it fits with the height which is right down the tooth.
adjustment jig.
NOTE
NOTE
• The marks are used for position adjustment
• Turning the worm gear clockwise moves
of the AF detection sensor.
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning
(4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the
MMC.

35030 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35030
Maintenance

6. Adjust the position of the AF emission (2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
sensor. emission sensor PCB so that the filament
image is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the AF emission
Loosen these screws.
MMC. sensor PCB

IMPORTANT
• The emission adjustment chart jolts.
Attach the chart so that it comes to the
center of the mount carrier.

3. Mode
G052620

(3) Remove the emission adjustment chart.

7. Adjust the position of the AF detection
sensor.

(1) Set the scanner adjustment chart to the MMC.

Emission adjustment chart Filament image

G052617
NOTE
• Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When the
filament image is in the center, the
adjustment is not necessary.

Scanner adjustment chart Target triangle marks

(mount)
G052621

IMPORTANT
• Set the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
at the far side.
(2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
detection sensor to bring the worm wheel to
the position marked when the height of the

35030 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35030
Maintenance

mount carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two worm wheel to the position before the
screws. Two adjusting screws) rotation.
Screws • Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
alternately. Turning one adjusting
screw fully at a time may cause the
screw to be blocked.
• When the worm wheel does not swing
within the tolerance level (about 4 mm),
adjust the auto focus section.
☞ 20850
IMPORTANT
• The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the

3. Mode
worm wheel to the position before the
AF detection sensor Adjusting screws rotation.
G052622 • Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
alternately. Turning one adjusting
IMPORTANT screw fully at a time may cause the
• The tolerance level of swing is about screw to be blocked.
within 4 mm (corresponds to one
(3) Remove the scanner adjustment chart
tooth).
(mount) from the MMC-II.
8. Attach the top cover, lens unit and lens unit
guide.

The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the

front

One tooth each

(about 2 mm)
for left and
right

The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the

top
G060701
• Check that the marked tooth of the
gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the
projection.
• The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the

35030 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35040
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment 2. Remove the condensing lens.

(135/240 AMC-II) Condensing lens

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

G068479

3. Mode
3. Remove the mount advance guide. (one
screw)

S3327-00-SM00
NOTE
• Functions appears when the service personnel password is
entered.
• Adjust the 135/240 AMC-II attached to the machine.

! Functions
Mount advance guide
! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position
Adjustment G068480

Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and 4. Remove the condensing lens unit guide. (two
detection sensor for auto focus. screws)

! Adjustment

! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position

Adjustment

1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040

Condensing lens unit guide

G068481

5. Select Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor

Position Adjustment.
NOTE
• Use three types of adjustment jigs for Emission
Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment.
• These are the service personnel tools. Refer to
Service personnel tool list.

35040 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35040
Maintenance

☞ 80310 the gear counterclockwise moves it

downward.
Mount carrier
Worm wheel sensor light-
tight plate

Scanner adjustment chart Emission adjustment

(mount) chart

Height adjustment
jig

3. Mode
G060680

6. Adjust a height of the mount carrier.

NOTE
Marks Adjustment
• There are two types of adjustment jigs for AMC-II screwdriver
and for MMC-II. G060679

(3) After adjusting the height, mark the

(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the AMC- adjustment position on the worm wheel.
II.
Height adjustment jig for AMC-II

Block section Marks

G060705
G060677
IMPORTANT
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the
adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor • Put the mark on the worm wheel as in
light-tight plate, and adjust a height of the the illustration.
mount carrier so that it fits with the height • Put the marks on the front edge of the
adjustment jig. worm wheel tooth and on the block
section which is above the tooth.
NOTE
• Turning the worm gear clockwise moves NOTE
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning • The marks are used for position adjustment
of the AF detection sensor.
(4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the
AMC-II.

35040 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35040
Maintenance

7. Adjust the position of the AF emission 8. Adjust the position of the AF detection
sensor. sensor.

(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the (1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (mount) to
AMC-II. the AMC-II.
IMPORTANT Scanner adjustment chart (mount)

• The emission adjustment chart jolts.

Attach the chart so that it comes to the
center of the mount carrier.
Emission adjustment chart

3. Mode
Target
triangle
marks

Filament
image

G060687

IMPORTANT
• Set the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
at the far side.
(2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
detection sensor to bring the worm gear to the
position marked when the height of the
mount carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two
G060678
screws. Two adjusting screws)
NOTE
Loosen these screws.
• Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When the
filament image is in the center, the
adjustment is not necessary.
(2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
emission sensor PCB so that the filament
image is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
Screwdriver
Emission sensor PCB

Adjusting screws G060685

Loosen these screws.

G060682

(3) Remove the emission adjustment chart.

35040 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35040
Maintenance

IMPORTANT
• The tolerance level of swing is about
within 4 mm (corresponds to one
tooth).

3. Mode
One tooth each for
left and right

G060706
• Check that the marked tooth of the
gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the block
section.

IMPORTANT
• The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the
worm wheel to the position before the
rotation.
• Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
alternately. Turning one adjusting
screw fully at a time may cause the
screw to be blocked.
(3) Remove the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) from the AMC-II.
9. Attach the top cover, condensing lens, mount
advance guide, and condensing lens guide.

35040 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35050
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ! Adjustment

! Scanning Position Auto Correction

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
1. Set the attachment to the film carrier.
NOTE
• You can use any attachment.
• A film is used for adjustment.
2. Click the Scanning Position Auto
Correction in the Functions.
3. Set the film to the attachment and press
the Yes key appears.
NOTE

3. Mode
• Use a film of which the image appears properly.
• Set the film and the machine automatically starts
Scanning Position Auto Correction.
4. Set the film to the attachment and press the
Yes key.
NOTE
S3390-00-SM01 • When the machine completes Scanning Position
Auto Correction, Complete appears.
! Explanation

! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0

mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm)
The difference between the prescanning position and the
actual scanning position can be corrected.
NOTE
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end,
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
• When changing the print position for all frames
intentionally, input the correction value. For example,
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to
left.

Film inserting
direction

Direction of misalignment Print

when the minus correction is
carried out G057680

! Functions

! Scanning Position Auto Correction

Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
and the actual scanning position can automatically be
corrected.

35050 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

35060
Maintenance

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135 ! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)
(Input range: 0 to 255)
AFC-II)
It is the standard value to adjust the gain of the DX sensor.

Bringing up the display ! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment to 255)
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

255)

3. Mode
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

! Film Ejection Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
When the 135 AFC-II has already been attached, it is not used.

! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input

S3099-00-SM03 range: 0 to 255)
IMPORTANT DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that
• Do not use the Functions for 240 film carrier, however the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively.
they are displayed because the adjustment mode of the
135 AFC is same as that of the 135/240 AFC. ! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to
255)
NOTE
• The number of setting items increases when the the service The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
personnel password (2260) is entered. value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
! Explanation sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.

! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0 ! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm) range: 0 to 255)
The difference between the prescanning position and the The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed.
actual scanning position can be corrected.
NOTE ! Functions
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end,
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position ! Scanning Position Auto Correction
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
• When changing the print position for all frames Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, and the actual scanning position can automatically be
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to corrected.
left.
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor are
automatically adjusted.
NOTE
Film inserting • A film is not used for adjustment.
direction

Direction of misalignment Print

when the minus correction is
carried out G057680

35060 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35060
Maintenance

• The LED light intensity of each sensor in the following ! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
table is adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value 1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.
Adjustment
135 AFC 135 Loading Sensor, 135 Perforation
Sensor, 135 Ready Sensor, and 135
DX Sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4

! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
simultaneously.
S3099-00-SM02

2. Insert the film into the film carrier.

3. Mode
! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
The 135 DX sensor standard adjustment can be done. NOTE
• Use the film containing two frames or more, of
! DX Code Reading which base density is light.
The DX Code Reading test can be done. 3. Remove the ejected film.
! DX Sensor Level Display 4. The adjustment is complete, and the
correction value is input automatically.
The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed.
! DX Code Reading
! Adjustment
1. Select DX Code Reading.
! Scanning Position Auto Correction
2. Load the film to the film carrier.
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction. 3. Remove the ejected film.
This adjustment is automatically carried out. 4. The reading is complete, and the result is
NOTE displayed.
• A film is used for adjustment. NOTE
• Only the reading code, reading count and frame
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment No. are displayed.
• The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the
1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value display frame No.
Adjustment. • A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a
This adjustment is automatically carried out. maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.

This adjustment is automatically carried out.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.

S3099-00-SM02

35060 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35060
Maintenance

! DX Sensor Level Display

1. Select DX Sensor Level Display.

S3099-00-SM02

3. Mode
NOTE
• The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
• The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value
obtained by standard adjustment.

35060 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35100
Maintenance

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ! Adjustment

! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction,

Bringing up the display
Advance Length Correction
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via
Functions.
2. Open printer doors 1, 2, and then remove the
test paper from the bottom of the paper
advance unit.
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 116 mm
away from the test paper edge, then the
second line at 201 mm away from the first
position.

3. Mode
S3088-00-SM00

! Explanation Second line

First line
Correct the paper stop position and feed error so that each G068475
step, such as 20-step, 22-step test prints, can be measured 4. Execute Paper Test Advance via
correctly by the colorimeter. Functions.
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
5. Insert the test paper with the first line into the
colorimeter.
(2260).
6. Press the key.
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction The test paper stops at the first line.
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +0.5 mm)
7. Press the or key and adjust so that
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the the first line and the front ends of paper
paper front end to the measurement position. loading guide align.
NOTE
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0)
• Press the key to return the test paper to the
(Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
front.
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.

! Functions

! Test Paper Advance

When the test is executed, the paper with 345 mm is advanced
to the bottom of the paper advance unit.

! Paper Test Advance

Adjust the colorimeter unit.

! Cleaning operation
Use the densitometer cleaning sheet and clean the colorimeter
unit advance roller.
NOTE
• The densitometer cleaning sheet is a service personnel
tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

35100 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35100
Maintenance

• Press the key to advance the test paper to the

back.
Front end of paper loading guide

First line

3. Mode
G068476

8. Press the key to advance the test

paper to the second line.
9. Press the or key and adjust so that
the second line and the front ends of paper
loading guide align.
10. Press the key to remove the test
paper.

! Colorimeter cleaning

1. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.

2. Insert the densitometer cleaning sheet into
the colorimeter.
NOTE
• The densitometer cleaning sheet is a service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool
list.
☞ 80310
3. Press the key.
The densitometer cleaning sheet is advanced to the
colorimeter.
4. Press the key again.
The densitometer cleaning sheet is ejected.

35100 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

Input Check (Input Section)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Input Section

S3128-00-SM00

3. Mode
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.

NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-135)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF 135 Lane Limit Switch ON When the 135 lane is detected.
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
6 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
7 DARK/LIGHT Rewinding Sensor LIGHT When the film jam is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT 135 Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT 135 Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT 135 Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
12 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
13 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 2 DARK When the DX code is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 3 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
15 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 3 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
16 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 4 DARK When the DX code is detected.
17 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.

*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
135/240 AFC OFF ON OFF OFF
Not attached ON ON ON ON

*2. This one sensor detects both the DX code and the Film.

35200 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-240)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF 240 Lane Limit Switch ON When the 240 lane is detected.
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
6 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Rewinding Sensor LIGHT When the film jam is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT 240 Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT 240 Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT 240 Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.

3. Mode
11 DARK/LIGHT VEI Sensor LIGHT When the VEI is at the fourth
position
12 ON/OFF IPI Limit Switch ON When the undeveloped cartridge is
set.
13 ON/OFF Cartridge Limit Switch ON When the cartridge is set.
(Turns ON when both switches 1 and
2 detect the cartridge.)
14 DARK/LIGHT 240 DX Sensor 1 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
15 DARK/LIGHT 240 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
16 DARK/LIGHT 240 DX Sensor 2 DARK When the DX code is detected.
17 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.

*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code
Detector 1 Detector 2 Detector 3 Detector 4
135/240 AFC OFF ON OFF OFF
Not attached ON ON ON ON

*2. This one sensor detects both the DX code and the Film.

Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-Others)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF

Film Carrier Section (120 AFC)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
6 DARK/LIGHT Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Film Feed Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Film Sensor DARK Turns DARK/LIGHT repeatedly
while the film is advanced.

35200 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

No. Display Status

10 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
11 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF
14 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.
*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
120 AFC OFF OFF ON ON
Not attached ON ON ON ON

3. Mode
Film Carrier Section (110 AFC)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
6 DARK/LIGHT Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
9 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
10 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
11 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF
13 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.

*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
110 AFC ON ON OFF ON
Not attached ON ON ON ON

Film Carrier Section (135/240 MMC)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
5 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Home Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
6 ON/OFF Mount Insertion Cover Open Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
7 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
8 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Mount Insertion Cover Sensor DARK When the mount insertion cover is
closed.
11 ON/OFF Mount Sensor ON When the mount is detected.

35200 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

No. Display Status

12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF
16 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.
*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
135/240 ON OFF ON ON
MMC
Not attached ON ON ON ON

3. Mode
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AMC-II)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Home Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
6 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
8 ON/OFF Mount Sensor ON When the mount is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Insertion Sensor 1 DARK When the mount is not set.
10 DARK/LIGHT Insertion Sensor 2 DARK When the mount is not set.
11 ON/OFF Mount Sensor (Inlet) ON When the mount is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Mount Elevator Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
13 ON/OFF Ejection Sensor ON When the mount is detected.
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
17 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF
18 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.

*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3
135/240 AMC-II OFF ON ON
Not attached ON ON ON

Film Carrier Section (135 AFC)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
5 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
6 DARK/LIGHT Rewinding Sensor LIGHT When the film jam is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT 135 Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.

35200 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

No. Display Status

8 DARK/LIGHT 135 Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT 135 Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
11 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
12 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 2 DARK When the DX code is detected.
13 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 3 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
14 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 3 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
15 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 4 DARK When the DX code is detected.
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
17 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
18 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
19 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF

3. Mode
20 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.
*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
135/240 AFC ON OFF OFF OFF
Not attached ON ON ON ON

*2. This one sensor detects both the DX code and the Film.

Film Carrier Section (MFC)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 3
4 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 4
5 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 1 When the attachment is set.*2
6 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 2
7 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 3
8 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 4
9 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 5
10 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
11 ON/OFF Film Pressure Switch ON When the film pressure holder is set.
12 DARK/LIGHT Table Home Sensor DARK When the move table is home
position.
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF
17 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.

*1. Film Carrier Code Detector

Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
MFC ON ON ON OFF
Not attached ON ON ON ON

35200 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

*2. Attachment Detection Switch

Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment

Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch
1 2 3 4 5
135F ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
135P OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
135H ON ON OFF OFF OFF
135FP ON ON OFF ON OFF
135FW OFF OFF ON ON OFF
135FPW ON OFF ON ON OFF
110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
240 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
120 (6 × 4.5) OFF ON ON OFF OFF

3. Mode
120 (6 × 6) ON ON ON OFF OFF
120 (6 × 7) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
120 (6 × 8) ON OFF OFF ON OFF
120 (6 × 9) OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Crop Card ON ON ON ON ON
Adjusting OFF ON ON ON ON
Attachment

LED light source unit

No. Display Status
1 ##.#°C LED Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the LED.

Scanner Unit [S-2/S-3]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 1 Pre-Home Sensor DARK Home position
2 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 1 Home Sensor DARK Home position
3 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 2 Pre-Home Sensor DARK Home position
4 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 2 Home Sensor DARK Home position
5 DARK/LIGHT IRIS Sensor DARK Home position
6 ##.#°C Scanner Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the scanner.
7 OK/-*1*2 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached

Scanner Unit [S-4]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Zoom Home Sensor DARK Home position
2 DARK/LIGHT Focus Home Sensor DARK Home position
3 ##.#°C Scanner Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the scanner.
4 OK/-*1*2 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached

*1. 3302 and 3312 display the detecting condition of capacity booster A. The following messages will appear when pressing the F key on the Order
Display to pass through the Input Check display in starting up the machine.
• When the detection of OK has changed to -, the attention message No.1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to OK, the attention message No.1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.
*2. 3302SD displays the detecting condition of capacity booster C. The following messages will appear when pressing the F key on the Order
Display to pass through the Input Check display in starting up the machine.
• When the detection of OK has changed to -, the attention message No.1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to OK, the attention message No.1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.

35200 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35200
Maintenance

Colorimeter unit
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK When the paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF colorimeter control PCB.
☞ 64130
5 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
Be sure to turn OFF.
6 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF

D-ICE control PCB *1

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
D-ICE control PCB.

3. Mode
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF
Refer to 64030.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-3 OFF
Be sure to turn OFF.
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-4 OFF

*1. The D-ICE control PCB is not existed for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

35200 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

35210
Maintenance

Input Check (Printer)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer

3. Mode
S3245-00-SM00

! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A3 DARK When the pin is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A4 DARK When the pin is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A5 DARK When the pin is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A6 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 DARK When the pin is detected.

8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 DARK When the pin is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B3 DARK When the pin is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B4 DARK When the pin is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B5 DARK When the pin is detected.
13 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B6 DARK When the pin is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 DARK When the pin is detected.
15 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
16 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.

Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK When the paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is
opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.

35210 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35210
Maintenance

No. Display Status

7 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Supply End Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.

Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.

3. Mode
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
4 DARK/LIGHT Exposure End Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
5 ##.#°C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.

Engine Section
Display Status
1 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.
2 Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchr Normal
nchronous onous When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
Asynch Abnormal
ronous When the polygon mirror does not
rotate properly
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchr When the polygon mirror is
nchronous onous synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are emitting
Asynch When the polygon mirror
ronous asynchronous
When the polygon mirror is
synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are not emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B laser are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity
whether synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking if there are any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310
4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are
B Laser Light Source Status normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G/B laser driver is not connected
properly, or is damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being
deteriorated, add the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the
current value exceeds the limitation.
5 ##.#°C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the R laser.
6 ##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
7 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
- When the polygon mirror does not
rotate properly

35210 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35210
Maintenance

Display Status
8 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-1 OFF Displays the dip switch setting of the
9 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-2 OFF laser control PCB. ☞ 64150_1
Turn OFF all.
10 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-3 OFF
11 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-4 OFF
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-5 OFF
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-6 OFF
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-7 OFF
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-8 OFF
16 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
17 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
18 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
19 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF

3. Mode
*1
20 ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal
21 ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1 ON (ready for printing)

*1. Laser unit (Type A1) is only displayed.

NOTE
• When B laser judgement signal 1, 2 and G laser judgement signal 1, 2 are all off: Laser unit (Type A1)
• When B laser judgement signal 1, 2 and G laser judgement signal 1, 2 are all on: Laser unit (Type B1)
Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor*1 DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Turn Sensor DARK When the turn unit is in the paper
transfer position.

*1. Lane Select Sensor is not for 3300 and 3300PRO.

35210 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35220_1
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM].

! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor

3. Mode
S3090-00-SM00

! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Processor Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
8 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
9 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
10 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
14 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
15 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
16 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
17 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.

35220_1 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35220_1
Maintenance

No. Display Status

18 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
19 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn OFF all.
20 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
21 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF
22 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the main relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
23 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
24 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
25 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
26 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.
Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)

3. Mode
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

Dryer Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is
turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print sensor DARK When the paper is detected.

Order classification section

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
2 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.

35220_1 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35220_1
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [SM]

! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor

3. Mode
S3090-00-SM00

! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Processor Section (1)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
5 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
8 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
10 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
11 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
12 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
13 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn OFF all.
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
17 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF
18 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the main relay PCB
is connected ☞ 66220
19 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
20 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
21 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
22 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count

*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.

Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.

35220_1 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35220_1
Maintenance

*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

Processor Section (2)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON Home position
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.

3. Mode
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
14 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
15 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON When the replenishment package is set.
16 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.

Dryer Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is
turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print sensor DARK When the paper is detected.

Order classification section

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
2 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.

35220_1 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35300
Maintenance

Output Check (Input Section)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Input Section

3. Mode
S3126-00-SM00

! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC - 135)
No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Film Feed Motor Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Panorama Shutter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC - 240)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Film Feed Motor Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Spool Key Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 Light Lock Door Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Film Carrier Section (120 AFC)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35300 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35300
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Film Carrier Section (110 AFC)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

3. Mode
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AMC-II)
No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Mount Carrier Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 AF Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Mount Insertion Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 Mount Elevator Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
7 Mount Ejection Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Film Carrier Section (135/240 MMC)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Mount Carrier Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 AF Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.

Film Carrier Section (135 AFC)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Film Feed Motor Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Panorama Shutter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35300 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35300
Maintenance

Film Carrier Section (MFC)

No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Table Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Film Pressure Magnet Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Film Viewer Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

LED Light Source Unit

3. Mode
No. Display Operation
1 ND Filter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 LED Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 LED Heater (High) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 LED Heater (Medium) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 LED Heater (Low) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 B LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 G LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 R1 LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 IR LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 LED Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the LED unit.

NOTE
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Cooling Fan, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1
LED, IR LED and LED thermosensor are built in the LED light source unit.
• The heater of the LED light source unit can be changed in the three levels for (H), (M) or (L).
Scanner Unit [S-2/S-3]
No. Display Operation
1 Zoom motors 1, 2 Press the YES/START key to make Zoom 1 Pre-Home
SensorZoom 2 Pre-Home Sensor repeat DARK/LIGHT.
2 IRIS Motor Press the YES/START key to make the IRIS Sensor repeat
the DARK/LIGHT cycle once.

Scanner Unit [S-4]

No. Display Operation
1 Zoom Motor Press the YES/START key to make Zoom Home Sensor
repeat DARK/LIGHT.
2 Focus Motor Press the YES/START key to make the Focus Home Sensor
repeat the DARK/LIGHT cycle once.

35300 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35300
Maintenance

Colorimeter Unit
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Pressure Change Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

D-ICE Control PCB*1

No. Display Operation
1 Buzzer Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

*1. The D-ICE control PCB is not existed for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

3. Mode

35300 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35310
Maintenance

Output Check (Printer)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer

3. Mode
S3246-00-SM00

! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Paper Supply Motor B Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Cut Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
6 Paper Magazine lamp B Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Ribbon Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Dot Head (1st Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Dot Head (2nd Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Hold Motor Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
6 Paper Supply Arm Motor Press the YES/START key to operate forward/backward
operation repeatedly.

Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Operation
1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.

35310 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35310
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.

Engine Section
No. Display Operation
1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press the YES/START key to stop the polygon mirror.
Press the NO/STOP key to start the operation of the polygon
mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press the YES/START key for Laser Unit Heater ON.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn off the laser unit heater.
4 R Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the R laser output.

3. Mode
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the R laser output.
5 G Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the G laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the G laser output.
6 B Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the B laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B laser output.
7 G Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the G laser.
8 B Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the B laser.

*1. Laser unit (Type A1) is only displayed.

Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate
nous properly
• When turning OFF the polygon mirror
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are normal.
B Laser Light Source Status No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G/B laser driver is not connected properly,
or is damaged.
##.#°C Displays the temperature of the R laser.
##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous

35310 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35310
Maintenance

Paper Advance Section

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 3 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper advance pressure change motor Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
3 Lane select motor *1 Press the YES/START key to switch among the selection
sensor position -> left selection position -> selection position
center -> right selection position.
4 Paper advance arm motor Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
5 Turn motor Press the YES/START key to switch between the paper
receiving position and the standby position.

*1. Lane Select Sensor is not for 3300 and 3300PRO.

3. Mode

35310 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35320_1
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM].

! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor

3. Mode
S3210-00-SM00

! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Processor Section (1)
No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 CD Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 BF Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Processor Section (2)

No. Display Operation
1 CD-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35320_1 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35320_1
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

2 BF-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB 2-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 STB 3-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 STB 4-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Dryer Section
No. Display Operation

3. Mode
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Dryer Heater 2 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Dryer Heater 3 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Order Classification Section

No. Display Operation
1 Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

35320_1 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35320_1
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [SM]

! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor

3. Mode
S3210-00-SM00

! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Processor Section (1)
No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 STB 2-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 STB 3-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Processor Section (2)

No. Display Operation
1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.

35320_1 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35320_1
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

5 BF-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
9 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Dryer Section
No. Display Operation

3. Mode
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Dryer Heater 2 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Dryer Heater 3 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Order Classification Section

No. Display Operation
1 Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

35320_1 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35400
Maintenance

Reading and Writing Data This function is very useful when creating a print
channel using the data of other machine.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the
Bringing up the display INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing the user level.
Data • Data related to the main, image processing and
Pricing Unit is written to INITIAL DATA1.
• Data related to the printer, colorimeter unit, LASER
and Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field is written to INITIAL DATA2.
• Data related to the processor is written to INITIAL
DATA3.
• Data related to the scanner and auto film carrier is
written to INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user

3. Mode
level, the data cannot be read individually. All the
data is read from a floppy disk.
• Be sure to update the light source when having
performed Reading Data from the floppy disk
written the data of Back Up DATA of user level or
Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ 6. Scanner data ([Link])
NOTE
S3075-00-SM00 • For the Stand Alone Printer, there is not the INITIAL
DATA4 FD.
! Explanation • 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD do not have image
processing [Link].
! 1. Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading
Back Up DATA FD
Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)
Main (*1) [Link]
The data can be read or written individually when the service
Image Processing (*1) [Link]
personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level) Pricing Unit (*1) [Link]
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service Printer (*2) [Link]
Data, four floppy disks are required to save the data for each Colorimeter unit (*2) [Link]
printer, processor, and scanner section.
LASER (*2) [Link]
NOTE
Correction Data for Brightness roi_SHD.lzh
• The FDs shown below are required. of the Edge of Image Field (*2)
User level Service personnel level Processor (*3) [Link]
Back Up DATA INITIAL DATA1 Auto Film Carrier (*4) [Link]
INITIAL DATA2 Scanner (*4) [Link]
INITIAL DATA3 Misreg135_1.lzh
INITIAL DATA4 Misreg135_2.lzh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5)
Misreg135_6.lzh
IMPORTANT
Misreg240_1.lzh
• When Writing Data is carried out in the user level,
the individual data is written in the same manner as Misreg240_4.lzh
that in the service level. Misreg135_5.lzh (*5)
• When Writing Data is carried out via Service Data, Misreg240_7.lzh
Data which is to be written to the Back Up DATA of Misreg240_8.lzh
user level is separated to the FDs of INITIAL
Misreg110_1.lzh
DATA1, INITIAL DATA2, INITIAL DATA3, and
INITIAL DATA4. Misreg110_9.lzh
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Misreg110_11.lzh
Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator Misreg2B_1.lzh
Selections, IX Data Settings (except serial MisregMMC_3.lzh
number) and Print Channel Setting (except image
data) are read after reading the User Setting Data. MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5)

35400 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35400
Maintenance

Back Up DATA FD IMPORTANT

MisregMMC_7.lzh • Use this mode to read the data into the laser control
MisregMMC_8.lzh PCB.
MisregAMC_3.lzh • The data cannot be read into the laser control PCB
MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5) via All Data Reading or Service Data Reading.
MisregAMC_7.lzh • Some data of BkData2100 is to be read.
MisregAMC_8.lzh
! 4. Writing All Data (CPU → Media), Reading All
MisregCROP_1.Izh Data (Media → CPU)
MisregMFC_1.Izh
Backup the data to the media except FD.
MisregMFC_2.Izh
The data to backup is as follows.
MisregMFC_4.Izh
Data Contents
MisregMFC_6.Izh
BkData###.dat The data saved with the usual
MisregMFC_7.Izh

3. Mode
backup
MisregMFC_8.Izh
[Link]*1 ID photo data
MisregMFC_9.Izh
Template*1 Frame data set in the print
• (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for channel setting
Service Data. [Link]*1 Customer information in the
• (*2) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA2 for edit data
Service Data. [Link]*1 Package frame information set
• (*3) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA3 for by user
Service Data. [Link]*1 Tiling data
• (*4) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA4 for [Link] *1
Data of the tonecurve shape in
Service Data. the Edit Mode
• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending [Link]*1 Data including the standard
on the version of the system program. format of the pricing sheet print
NOTE and the insertion image path
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used [Link]*1 Data including the pricing sheet
after the upgrading the system program. print format that the user
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted created and the insertion image
automatically. So the data which has not been used path
after the upgrading may still be contained in the PuPrt*1 All the image data included in
backup. the pricing sheet print is saved
in this folder.
IMPORTANT
• The data relating to the auto film carrier (Auto gain *1. Not saved as backup data for DLS specification.
standard value and Frame stop position correction)
is stored in the EEP-ROM of the AFC/Scanner ! 5. Data unable to back up
control PCB. Therefore, it cannot be saved to a The following data cannot be saved in the Reading and
floppy disk. Writing Data. When replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be
sure to save the following data beforehand.
! 2. Format Floppy Disk
Data name Save to
Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto
Image data C:\Image
a floppy disk which has been formatted.
Image saved Data in Edit C:\EditData
IMPORTANT mode
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB IMPORTANT
format. • The saving destination of Image data may be
changed. When you back up, check the destination
! 3. Reading the laser history (floppy disk → on the Operator Selections display.
CPU)
If an error occurs on the laser, read the data to analyze it. ! 6. Scanner data ([Link])
When replacing the laser control PCB, read the data that is Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data
saved using function of writing data. updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with
setting the data other than that of the maximum/minimum
magnification to 0.

35400 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35400
Maintenance

IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a
backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after
reading the data. For this reason, the software is set
as follows.
Software contents (after reading FD data)
Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily
setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to
occur by switching the film carrier.

• When the daily setup is not performed after writing

the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light
source. ☞ 37030

3. Mode
NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is
that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of
QSS at that point will be available and will not be
updated to the normal data even though the backup data
has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a
backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source
Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage
capacity and to save in one FD.

! Functions

! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to
save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration
can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).

! Data that will not be replaced by

backup data
Basically, all data are replaced by backup data if read or
written.
Some data are not replaced which are listed below.

Data that are not replaced

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper
remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2
Laser Operation Record*1

*1. Reading the laser operation record is not available from reading
all data or service data but available from reading the laser
history (floppy disk → CPU).

35400 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

35450
Maintenance

Procedures for Backup & Restore 2. The Backup Preferences display appears.
Software

IMPORTANT
• To backup at the recovery when installing, backup the
QSS system data, as well.
☞ 35400

! Backup data
Backup data
DLS system data minilab folder
Index logo data Logos folder

3. Mode
NOTE
• When the data other than above is to be saved, it can be
added optionally.
S072409

! Start procedure 3. Select the destination for saving the data.

For saving the daily data at close down checks, it is
1. Quit the application at Close down checks recommended to save the data to drive U or a storage
media such as MO and Zip. Prepare the storage media
in the QSS menu to switch to the Windows
of 64 MB or more.
desktop display. When changing the setting data, it is recommended to
2. Bring up the DLS Backup & Restore save the data to CD-R.
display. IMPORTANT
Bringing up the display • When making the backup before carrying out
Start → Programs → Administrative tools (common) recovery of the IPW, it is recommended to
→ DLS System Management Software → save the data to CD-R.
BackupRestore 4. Click OK.
5. When you want to save optional data, use
the following procedure.

(1) Put a check mark to the check box next to

Select additional files?
(2) Select the data you want to save in the
Source list. And drag the selected data to the
Destination list.
6. When you save the data to a storage media,
insert the media.
S072408
7. Click Start Backup.
! Backup procedure

1. Select Actions and Preferences from the

menu.

35450 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35450
Maintenance

8. The Backup Process display appears. 4. Make sure that the check boxes of Restore
Registry? and Restore archive database
index file? have not been checked.
When the check boxes have been checked, remove the
checks.
IMPORTANT
• When the Restore archive database index
file? check box is checked, the archive
database index file is returned to the setting
data which have been saved. The changed
data after saving become invalid.

IMPORTANT
• When restoring the data after carrying out
recovery, be sure to put a check mark to the

3. Mode
Restore archive database index file? check
box.
5. Click Start Restore.
6. The Restore Process display appears.
S072410

9. When the message appears, click Yes.

10. Click Start.
Saving the data starts.
11. When the data saving is complete, click Exit.
12. When you finished to save the data to a
storage media, remove the media.

! Restore procedure

1. When the data have been saved to a storage

media, insert the media.
2. Load the TOC file.
(1) Open the drive or directory where the backup
data have been saved.
(2) Right-click the [Link] file. S072412

(3) Click Load TOC. 7. Click Start.

8. When the message appears, click Yes to
All.
Reading the data starts.
9. When the data reading is complete, click
Exit.
10. When you read the data from a storage
media, remove the media.

S072411

3. The data to read to the Destination list

appear.

35450 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35500_1
Maintenance

System Version Check ! Explanation

NOTE
Bringing up the display • The display returns to the Maintenance display by
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version pressing NO: End, but it returns to the Software
Check Upgrade display if pressed it on the Software Upgrade
display.

! Accessories

# CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, pricing unit, NMC and
NMC2 do not appear.

3. Mode
• For the Stand Alone Printer specification, the name
of PC-scanner interface PCB and auto film carrier
are not displayed.

# Version
The system program version number saved on all
control PCBs is displayed.
S3059-01N IMPORTANT
• You can check the type of the laser unit by
checking the version name of the LASER.
Laser unit Display
Type A #.# # # ×1A1
Type B #.# # # ×1B1

• The Auto Film Carrier version name indicates

the LED light source unit used by [S-2/S-3].

LED light source unit Display

Type 0 Not displayed
Type 1 # # # # L1
Type 2 # # # # L2
Type 3 # # # # L3

S3059-01-SM01 • The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the

type of scanner unit used in [S-4].

Scanner type Display

S-4*1 #### S4

*1. To use S-4, upgrade software to the versions indicated

below.

Specification Version
3300 3 or later
33SD 2 or later
DLS specification Not corresponded

NOTE
• If there is an error such as the system program
cannot be executed or read, the boot flash version is
displayed.
S3059-01-SM02

35500_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35500_1
Maintenance

# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is
displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option,
not connected.

! Profile Data
The profile data version is displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password
(2260) has been entered.

! DLL/Driver

3. Mode
The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password
(2260) has been entered.

35500_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35600_1
Maintenance

System update for each control PCB ! Operation

(CPU)
1. Before upgrading, backup the system data.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the • This backup data is stored just incase that the
system of each control PCBs. version upgrade would be failed, and used for
For details about how to perform Software Upgrade, returning to the previous version.
refer to Updating the QSS software in Installation
procedures of the QSS software. 2. When Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) is
☞ 88000 selected, set the program CD.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or QSS Each control PCB (CPU) is upgraded.
printer driver has been connected, do not receive the IMPORTANT
order or make prints before or during software
• Data reading after upgrading is not necessary
upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
as upgrading does not initialize the system

3. Mode
Bringing up the display data.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade Do not read the backup data of the previous
version after upgrading is successfully ended
as it may malfunction.
However, since the procedure differs
depending on the versions, be sure to refer to
the REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTION for
details.
3. Backup the system data after upgrading.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to backup the system data of the new
version, and be careful not to mix the backup
data of the previous version with the new one.

! Data

! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and

S3060-00-SM00 software to be upgraded
At replacing any of the control PCBs, check the check box of
! Explanation the software to be upgraded, and then carry out upgrading
(HD).
NOTE
• When the software upgrade is completed, the alarm Control PCB Software to System file name
informs the completion of the upgrade. After 1 minute, be upgraded
the display changes to the System Version Check Processor control Processor [Link] [Link]
display automatically. Pressing NO: End also changes PCB
the display to the System Version Check display.
PC-scanner PC [Link] [Link]
interface PCB*2
! Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
Printer control Printer [Link] [Link]
Copy the system program from the program CD to the PCB
directory for software upgrade and save it. AFC/scanner Auto film [Link] [Link]
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data control PCB*2 carrier
saved in the directory for software upgrade.
PU control Pricing Unit [Link] [Link]
PCB*1
! Software Upgrade (HD)
Laser control LASER [Link] [Link]
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data PCB
saved in the directory for software upgrade.
Colorimeter Colorimeter [Link] [Link]
The software upgrade is carried out individually for each
Control PCB unit
control PCB (CPU).
NOTE *1. Not displayed for DLS specification.
*2. Not displayed for QSS-3300 PRO.
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password
(2260) has been entered.

35600_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35600_1
Maintenance

! The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
CD-ROM\Sys
Software Upgrade (HD)
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys

3. Mode

35600_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35700
Maintenance

Operation Information ! Functions

! Laser Record Setting

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine When replacing the laser unit, reset each set value to 0.
Specification

3. Mode
S3322-00-SM00
NOTE
S3063-00-SM00
• The date when the data is reset is displayed on the lower
left part of the display.
! Explanation

! Error Record
The error record is displayed in order from the latest one
which has occurred.
The latest 20 errors can be checked.
NOTE
• Up to 500 errors can be checked when the service
personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Any older data than the latest 500 errors will be deleted.

! Daily Setup History

The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data
prior to that will be deleted.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the QSS-Kids, this does not appear.

! Laser Operation Record

Each Laser (R, G and B) Turned ON Time Record, Turned
ON Operation Count, Polygon Mirror Operation Time and
Operation Count are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the QSS-Kids, this does not appear.

35700 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

35800
Maintenance

Machine Specification [N] ! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)

Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine.
Description for each specification
! Processing Solution Display
For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only
gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See Set the display of the chemical solution names by process
below for the description for each specification. specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Machine Specification Processing solution name
[SM]. CD BF STB
P1 P2 PS
! Display P1 P2 P3
Bringing up the display CD BF TCS
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine PS1 PS2 PS3
Specification PJ1 PJ2 PJ3

3. Mode
! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
The language loaded by the system program can be set.

ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
INDONESIAN -

! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

S3066-00-SM00

NOTE The language used to display the HELP messages of

• It can be set by entering the service personnel password Attention/Error can be set.
(2260).
! Installation Date
! Explanation The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.

! Machine Type Registration ! Power Supply Specification

Register the machine type. The power supply specification of the machine can be
checked.
IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following Power supply specification table
adjustment is displayed after changing the machine 1P2W 200 V 3P-3W 220 V
type, carry out following settings. 1P2W 208 V 3P-3W 230 V
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment 1P2W 220 V 3P-3W 240 V
☞ 33600 1P2W 230 V 3P-4W 346 V
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030
1P2W 240 V 3P-4W 380 V
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500
1P-3W 100/200 V 3P-4W 400 V

! Serial Number (Input range: 00000000 to 3P-3W 200 V 3P-4W 415 V

99999999) 3P-3W 208 V 3P3W/1P2W 100/200 V

The serial number of the machine can be specified and

checked for the scanner section, the printer/processor ! Terminal name (Initial value: computer
individually. name)
At the installation, enter the production number.
Setting QSS terminal name is available.

35800 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35800
Maintenance

! Functions Machine Specification [SM]

! Program Timer Setting
The mode can be moved to the program timer setting. ! Display
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer. Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine
! Machine information
Specification
The machine type information is displayed.

3. Mode
S3066-00-SM01

NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).

! Explanation

! Circulation Pump Stand-by Function

Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.

! SM Replenishment Setting
Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.

35800 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

35920_1
Maintenance

Self-diagnostic ! Film Series Image Path

Put a check mark to check when any lines and/or blur can be
Bringing up the display seen on the scanned image.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic Diagnosis
Description for Self-diagnostic Scanner ↔ Main PC
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Scanner ↔ PC-scanner interface PCB
Self-diagnostic. PC-laser interface PCB ↔ Main PC
• For the details of Media Drive Self-diagnostic, refer to Photometry Section Dirt Check
☞ Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
NOTE
• The Film Series Image Path is not displayed for the
Stand-alone Printer.

! Test Print

3. Mode
Put a check mark for Test Print and perform the following
checks, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image
though the scanned image saved to the storage media was
normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are
not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the
setup.
S3348-00-SM00
• The color on the print does not become better by
Image Path Check performing the setup.
Diagnosis
Main PC -> Laser control PCB
Test Print Check Result
Check AOM Setup Value

! Film Series Image Path/Test Print

Put a checkmark for Film Series Image Path and Test Print
to check when it is difficult to point out the problem.
NOTE
• The result of the diagnosis contains all the results of Film
Failed portion display Series Image Path and Test Print.

! Test Print Image selection

Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the
S3408-00-SM01 laser or the files.
NOTE
! Explanation • Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files
only.
! Image Path Check
Transfer the data in each data path to judge the failure part by ! Paper Magazine for Test Print
the CRC check or data comparison. Set the magazine to make a test print.

! Test Print Advance Length

Set the paper advance length to make a test print.

35920_1 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35920_1
Maintenance

! Execution Time Causes of the problem

Displays the expected time for the diagnostics. Failed to diagnose.*1
Laser control PCB
! Start Test R Laser Deterioration
The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start G Laser Deterioration
Test. Click YES to start the diagnostics. B Laser Deterioration
R Laser Failure
! Test Print Check Result
G Laser Failure
Check the test print and put a checkmark to either of Good or B Laser Failure
No Good of Test Print Check Result. Then the result of the
diagnostics appears. Setup failure
R Laser failure or Setup failure
! Save Result G Laser failure or Setup failure
B Laser failure or Setup failure

3. Mode
The result of Image Path Check can be saved in a file.
The processing solution is out of control.
IMPORTANT
LVDS cable between the scanner ↔ PC-scanner interface
• The test result should be saved in
PCB
C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-
##\LogData\[Link]. PC-scanner interface PCB
• Only one file is available to save the result. PC-laser interface PCB
LVDS Cable (PC-Laser interface PCB ↔ Laser Control
! Clear Result PCB)

Delete the result of Image Path Check. *1. When the dirt in the photometry section was not checked
properly, the message "Failed to diagnose." appears.

! Result
IMPORTANT
The result of the test is displayed after Image Path Check is
• The message, Failed to diagnose. (LED light source
completed.
temperature is being adjusted.), Failed to diagnose.
NOTE (Focus Adjustment is not executed.), Failed to
• The AOM setup value may be displayed as Unknown in diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.), or Failed
the following condition. to diagnose. may be displayed when the self-
• When making the test print, Dairy Setup or Initial Setup diagnosis is not performed normally in checking the
has not been performed for the selected paper. scanner unit/light source section.

! Checking procedure

1. Select a Test Item.

NOTE
• When a checkmark is given to the Test Print,
select a test print image.
2. The dialog for the Image Path Check
appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to
start the test.
3. The parts with the problems are shown in the
Failed portion display.
Causes of the problem
Scanner unit
PC-scanner interface PCB
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (CCD Side)
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (Light
Source Side)
Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being
adjusted.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Focus Adjustment is not executed.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.)*1

35920_1 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35920_1
Maintenance

Media Drive Self-diagnostic ! Failed Counts

The denominator shows the number of tests and the numerator
Bringing up the display shows the number of tests failed.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic →
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
! Communication System
Displays the communication type of media drive.
Media Drive Self-diagnostic

! Failed Information
Displays the cause of error when performing the writing test
of media drive.

! Executed Counts (Initial value: 5) (input range:

1 to 60)

3. Mode
Can set how many tests are performed to write the data set to
Data Size into the media drive.

! Data Size (MB) (Initial value: 10) (input range: 1

to 500)
Can set the data size to perform the writing test to the media
drive.

S3406-00-SM00 ! Execution Time

NOTE Displays the time required for performing the writing test to
• For DLS specification, DVD-RAM does not appear. the media drive.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• The Execution Time varies depending on the number of
• For DLS specification, since the five slots card reader drives with the check marks, Executed Counts and Data
media is set to write protected, the diagnosis cannot be Size.
performed.
! Start Writing Test
! Explanation The Media Drive Self-diagnostic dialog appears, click Yes to
start the diagnostic.
! Media Drive Self-diagnostic
Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when reading and ! Save Result
writing from/to the media drive is not performed normally. The result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic can be saved in a
For the media drive diagnostic, the following process is file.
carried out to get result. The fixed data on the hard disk is
written to the specified drive and the data is returned to the IMPORTANT
hard disk. Then the fixed data on the hard disk and the data • The test result of writing to the media drive is saved
returned to the hard disk are compared. in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-
IMPORTANT ##\LogData\[Link].
• Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when the • Only one file is available to save the writing test
following message appears even though the media result of the media drive.
is set to the media drive.
• 1503:The appropriate file was not found.
! Clear Result
• 1510:Read the data. Set the media. Delete the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• 1511:Write the data. Set the media.
! Checking procedure
• 1512:Data was not read from the media.

! Drive 1. Insert the media to perform the writing test

into the media drive.
The media drive with the check mark is performed the writing
test. IMPORTANT
• In the case of CD-R/RW, do not use the
! Name important media since the data is overwritten.

Displays the name of media drive.

35920_1 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

35920_1
Maintenance

• In the case of other than CD-R/RW, when the

data is added then the Media Drive Self-
diagnostic is finished, the data is deleted.
2. Put a check mark for the drive to perform the
writing test.
3. Set the Executed Counts and Data Size.
4. Clicking Start Writing Test displays the
dialog. Click YES to start the test.
5. The cause of error is displayed in the Failed
Information.
Causes of the problem
Media is not set.

3. Mode
The media is write protected.
Capacity error.
Data Comparison error.
Failed to read and write.

35920_1 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper sensor adjustment • The paper end sensor A is not displayed when the dual
paper magazine unit is not attached.

Bringing up the display

! Adjustment
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

1. Check that each printer cover of the printer

section and printer doors are closed.
2. Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not
displayed if the service personnel password has

3. Mode
not been input.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is completed normally, OK is
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
S3370-00-SM00
displayed.
NOTE −: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked 0 or 170 or more
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).

! Explanation

! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5)

(input range: 0 to 255)
It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light
intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each
sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment
was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section
becomes 0 and the status section becomes -.

! Functions

! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
function, the sensors below are adjusted.

Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment
Paper end sensor A or B
Paper loading sensor
Paper supply end sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Exposure end sensor

36000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

36010_1
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Advance Unit Correction ! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value:
0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0)
Bringing up the display Corrects the stop position of the paper rear end where the turn
unit receive the paper from the exposure advance unit.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction Arm unit 2 Paper transfer position

3. Mode
S3386-00-SM00
Turn unit Paper receiving position
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password G074550
(2260).
! Functions
! Explanation
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Carry out each correction for the paper advance unit.
The correction values for Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
IMPORTANT Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
• When the paper advance unit correction is carried Correction are canceled, and arm unit 2 moves back and forth
out by paper magazine A or B, it is complete. between the paper transfer position and the paper receiving
• After replacing the paper advance unit, carry out position.
adjustment by following the procedure below. The following operation starts by pressing YES.
1. Carry out ☞ Turn Unit Stop Position Correction. • First time: Carries out the initial operation and arm unit 2
moves to the paper receiving position.
2. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
Correction. • Second time: Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer
position.
3. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
Correction. NOTE
4. Carry out ☞ Paper Stop Position Correction. • The operation returns to the first operation by pressing
YES, after pressing another key or opening/closing the
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction paper advance door.
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −1.0 to +1.0)
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 is corrected.
To test arm unit 2, apply the following two values: Arm Unit
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction 2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper
Stop Position Correction. If it is functioning properly, test
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0)
arm unit 2 will repeatedly move back and forth between the
The paper transfer position of arm unit 2 can be corrected. paper transfer position and the paper receiving position.

! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction (Initial ! Test Operation for the Turn Unit Stop Position
value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0) Correction
The paper receive position of the turn unit can be corrected. The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
is canceled, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving
position.

36010_1 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

36010_1
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction Test ! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
Operation Confirmation
The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction 1. Carry out Turn Unit Stop Position
becomes valid, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving Correction Test Operation Confirmation
position. via the F: Functions, and stop the turn unit
at the paper receiving position.
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position 2. Input the correction value so that the height
Correction of surface A of the turn unit is 2 mm high
The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction is from surface B of the exposure advance unit.
canceled, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper stop
IMPORTANT
position after the turn unit operates the initial operation.
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation as not to tilt the adjustment position.
Confirmation

3. Mode
The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction
becomes valid, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper
stop position after the turn unit operates the initial operation.

! Adjustment

! Before each adjustment

IMPORTANT
• Check the operation of arm unit 2 and the turn unit
with Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) turned ON
intentionally and paper advance door 2 opened. Be
sure not to put your hands into the paper advance
section.
• Be sure not to pull the paper advance unit out with Surface A of the turn unit
the Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) turned ON. It
may damage the machine. Surface B of the exposure advance unit

Remove the printer door 2 interlock switch, attach it to the −correction

main body, then turn on the switch. (two screws)
NOTE +correction
• Attach the printer door 2 interlock switch to the main
body with tape or the like. G074586

Printer door 2
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction

1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation

Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
move arm unit 2 to the paper transfer
position.
2. Input the correction value so that surface C
of arm unit 2 may come to the position 1 to 2
mm away from surface D of the processor
loading unit.
IMPORTANT
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
Interlock switch (main body Interlock switch (magnet side) as not to tilt the adjustment position.
side) • When + correction value is input too much for
Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
G074549 Correction, it touches surface D of the
processor loading unit. Be careful to avoid it.

36010_1 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

36010_1
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Make a clearance of 45.5 ± 0.5 mm between the surfaces E and F.

Surface D of the processor loading unit

Surface E of arm unit 2

+correction

−correction

Make a clearance of 1 to 2 mm

3. Mode
Surface C of arm unit 2 between the surfaces C and D.

+correction

−correction

G074584

! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction

1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation

Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
move arm unit 2 to the paper receiving
position.
2. Input the correction value so that surface E
of arm unit 2 come away 45.5 ± 0.5 mm from
surface F of the turn unit.
NOTE
• Measure surface E of arm unit 2 from the bottom
edge of the turn unit guide.

Bottom edge of the guide

Surface F of the turn unit

G074579

! Paper Stop Position Correction

1. Carry out Paper Stop Position Correction

Test Operation Confirmation via the F:
Functions, and stop the paper at the turn
unit.

Surface E of arm unit 2

G076391

36010_1 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

36010_1
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

2. Input the correction value so that the front 4. Open the paper advance door, remove the
edge of the turn unit guide (lower) come test paper from the bottom of the paper
away −1 to 0 mm from the paper rear end. advance unit, then press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT Paper advance unit
• Check the paper rear end carefully.
From −1 to 0 mm

3. Mode
Papers

G074529

Paper
Paper rear end
Front edge of the turn unit guide (lower)

−correction +correction
G074585

3. The message Confirm the paper stop

position, then remove the paper. appears.
Press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT
• If one or more of the doors in the printer
section is open, paper is not fed.

36010_1 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

36020
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Magnification Correction ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
Bringing up the display Validate each correction value to make test prints.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment NOTE
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
Correction print.

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 100 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP

3. Mode
A B imprinting.

! Adjustment

1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or
more.
2. Measure length A on the test print.
S3318-00-SM00
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).

! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the
paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is
G074496
carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is
complete. 3. Select the line from part A and input the
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or measured value in part B.
more, make a test print with the maximum paper IMPORTANT
size which you used, then measure the length
• Measure the length of 130 line usually.
between most outside lines of it.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 130.0 width or more, measure the length between
most outside lines of it.
mm) (Input range: 125.0 to 135.0 mm)
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the 4. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
actual measurement value can be entered. Functions.
5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within
! Functions ±0.1 mm of the specified length.
6. Perform exposure center correction.
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
☞ 36070
Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position
NOTE Adjustment.
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 100 mm is ☞ 36030
printed.
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

36020 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Position Adjustment ! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main

Scanning
Bringing up the display Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on
BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
test print BLOCK-B.
Adjustment
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.

! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub

Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line

3. Mode
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.

! Functions

! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 355.6 mm is
S3313-00-SM00 printed.
NOTE • The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password imprinting.
(2260).
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
! Explanation A/B)
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser Validate each correction value to make test prints.
unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the NOTE
positions of the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning. • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
IMPORTANT print.
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
out for any one of magazine A/B, it is complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of G066121
the most outside line of it. • A piece of paper with the advance length of 355.6 mm is
printed.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main • The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line imprinting.
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line
aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B. ! Adjustment

! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main 1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line Correction has been completed.
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line ☞ 36020
aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B. 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main IMPORTANT
Scanning • Make a test print with the paper whose width
is 152 mm or more.
Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines
on BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no 3. Check the number of the part where the cyan
image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the line aligns with the magenta line on the test
test print BLOCK-B. print BLOCK-B. And check the number of the

36030 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

part where the cyan line aligns with the the part where the cyan line aligns with the
yellow line. yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line Magenta line
Yellow line

Cyan line Cyan line

3. Mode
Yellow line G068456

IMPORTANT
G074510
• Check the line using the loupe.
IMPORTANT
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
• Check the line using the loupe. Service personnel tool list.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to ☞ 80310
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310 7. Input each checked number.
4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and input the offset 8. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
value of main scanning and make a Test
Print again if there is no part where the cyan 9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and
line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B
the test print BLOCK-B. make the straightest line comparing with the
other columns.
Check area

Plus correction

Minus correction
G068455

5. Input each checked number.

6. Check the number of the part where the cyan
line aligns with the magenta line on the test
print BLOCK-D1. And check the number of

G074511

10. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) of the column 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1

36030 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

and D2 make the straightest line comparing

with the other columns.
IMPORTANT
• When the print is made via Test Print
(Confirmation), it is exposed on the same
position, 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2.

Check area

3. Mode
G074512

11. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it
is not the straight line, carry out the Exposure
Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
width or more, make a test print with the
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.

G074497

36030 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Magnification Fine NOTE

• A piece of paper with the advance length of 178 mm is
Adjustment printed.
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
Bringing up the display imprinting.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
Fine Adjustment A/B)
Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

3. Mode
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 178 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

! Adjustment

S3329-00-SM00
1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction and Exposure Position
NOTE
Adjustment have been complete.
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
! Explanation 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of
B, G and R on the both sides of a print. • Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
IMPORTANT
width or more, make a test print with the
• When the exposure magnification fine adjustment is maximum paper size which you used, then
carried out for any one of magazine A/B, it is
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of
the most outside line of it.

! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
paper width direction.

! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
paper width direction.

! Functions

! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.

36040 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

check the dimension of the most outside line Correcting direction of the magenta line
of it. Correcting to the right +correction
Correcting to the left −correction

4. Input the correction value.

5. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a
straight line with cyan line in the vertical
direction at 0 on the test print again.
1 dot
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment
again.
☞ 36030

3. Mode
M

+correction −correction

G074513

IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta
and yellow lines make a straight line with
cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on the
test print.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
width or more, make a test print with the
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan
lines make one line, carry out the fine
adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of
the test print.

NOTE
• For the correcting direction of the magenta line,
refer to the list below.

36040 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36050
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Advance Length Correction NOTE

• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
Bringing up the display
• When magazines are positioned at magazine mounts A
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
and B, paper is firstly loaded to magazine mount A.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction
! Test Paper Advance checks
Validate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0
mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
NOTE
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

! Loading

3. Mode
The paper is loaded.

! Rewind
The paper is rewound.

! Adjustment
S3385-00-00 1. Set the magazine to carry out the paper
NOTE advance length correction on the magazine
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password mount A/B.
(2260).
2. Carry out Test Paper Advance of
Functions.
! Explanation
3. Open the paper advance door, remove the
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed test paper from the bottom of the paper
error. advance unit, then press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT
Paper advance unit
• The paper advance length correction is to be carried
out with the basis of magazine A.

! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial

value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: 145.0 to 155.0
mm)
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just
been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the
paper loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance
feed error.

! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial

value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: 180.0 to 220.0
mm)
Papers
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance
roller feed error. G074529

4. Measure each test paper length of the first

! Functions and second paper which are removed.

! Test Paper Advance

5. Enter each measurement dimension.
Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0
6. After correcting, carry out Test Paper
mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second. Advance Confirmation of F: Functions
and be sure to make a print and check if the
IMPORTANT advance length is correct.
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of
the first and second test papers at the same time.

36050 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36050
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

7. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it

according to the following procedure.
When the print advance length of the first paper after
loading is not correct.
When the Carry out +correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is long.
When the Carry out −correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is short.

When the print advance length of the second or later

paper after loading is not correct.
Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper

3. Mode
Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and
adjust them again.

36050 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction NOTE

• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction

G066121
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

The paper is loaded.

3. Mode
! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.

! Adjustment

1. Set the paper magazine to be carry out arm

S3388-00-SM00
unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine
mount A/B.
! Explanation IMPORTANT
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper • For magazine B, check if the zigzagging
because of the paper zigzagging. adjustment for paper supply unit B is
completed.
IMPORTANT ☞ 25730
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each
paper magazine A, B.
2. Check that the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit has been finished.
Refer to ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter
! A − B (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0
unit 25620.
to +2.0 mm)
The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is
3. Select magazine A/B.
necessary. 4. Execute Test Print of Functions.
! Paper Magazine A or B 5. Measure the difference of dimensions of
lines A and B on the second test print. And
You can select paper magazine A or B. input the value to (A−B).
IMPORTANT
! Functions
• Input the correction value in millimeter (mm).
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) • Measure the dimensions of lines A and B on
the test print using a scale.
Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm. • When the measured values of the test print are line
A: 121 mm and B: 120 mm, for example, see the
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
below.
imprinting.

! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
Validate the correction and output two test prints.

36060 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

• Line A (121 mm) − Line B (120 mm) = Correction prints) is the tolerance level in the following
value A − B (1 mm) table.
Line A NOTE
• For example, when the measurement values of the
second test print is 120 mm for both lines A and B

A
Check that the difference of dimension between
lines A and B on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
Test Print Tolerance level
When the test print is 355.6 A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and
mm width B are between 119.5 mm and
120.5 mm.

Test print (first) Test print (second)

3. Mode
Line A Line A (120 mm)

A
B

Line B
B

B
G074514

6. After the correction, make test prints in Test

C

C
Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And Line B Line B (120 mm)
then check that the difference of dimensions G078473
of lines A and B (on the second test print) is IMPORTANT
within the dimension in the following table.
• If the differences of dimensions of lines A and
NOTE B (on the first and second test prints) are out
• For example, when the measurement value of line of the tolerance level, check the following
A (on the second test print) is 120 mm adjustment.
Check that the difference of dimension of lines A
and B (on the second test print) is within the Paper magazine Adjustment
tolerance level in the following table. Magazine A Check the condition of the paper
magazine. ☞ 22000
Test Print Tolerance level
Magazine B Check the condition of the paper
When the test print is 355.6 A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and magazine. ☞ 22000
mm width B are between 119.5 mm and
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit
120.5 mm.
B. ☞ 25730

IMPORTANT
• If the difference of dimensions of lines A and
B (on the second test print) is out of the
tolerance level, input the correction value to
A−B.
Status Correction
A>B Plus correction
A<B Minus correction

7. Check that the difference of dimensions of

lines A and B (on the first and second test

36060 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Center Correction NOTE

• When the correction value is over ±9.9 mm, the
correction value display part turns red and it cannot be
Bringing up the display
registered.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center Correction
! Functions

! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) without

Correction Value
Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
Paper Magazine) to make a test print.

! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B)

with Master Value

3. Mode
Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and
make a test print.

! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B)

with Master and Paper Magazine Values
Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
S3387-00-SM00 Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
! Explanation • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each
paper width and surface. Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
IMPORTANT
• Carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction
Value) and the exposure center correction for each
G066121
paper magazine A, B.
• When making test prints in Functions, a print with the
advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.
Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −
2.0 to +2.0 mm) ! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test The paper is loaded.
paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and
emulsion type).
! Rewind
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm)
(Input range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) ! Adjustment
Input the length from the left end to the center line on the
leading end of the test print. Exposure Center Correction (Master)
NOTE
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center
• When making a test print from magazine mount B, check
− Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input if the zigzagging adjustment for magazine mount B is
range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) completed.
Input the length from the the center line to the right end on the ☞ 25730
leading end of the test print. 1. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction has been completed.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) ☞ 36060
The exposure center correction value which is calculated from
the input values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value
2. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction has been completed.
1) and (Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
☞ 36020

36070 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Set the paper magazine to carry out Master 4. Measure dimension B from the left end to the
(Exposure Center Correction Value) to center line on the test print.
magazine mount A/B.
IMPORTANT
4. Select magazine A/B. • When measuring the test print, use the front
end of the test print.
5. Carry out Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
without Correction Value of F: Functions. Center line
IMPORTANT Front end of the test print
• Make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you use.
6. Measure the length from the left end to the
center line and the length from the center line
to the right end on the leading end of the test
print.

3. Mode
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A

G074516

5. Carry out correction so that dimension B is

half of the paper width.
B > a half of the paper width Minus correction
B < a half of the paper width Plus correction

6. After correcting, carry out Test Print

Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B) with
G074515
Master and Paper Magazine Values of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print and
7. Input each measurement dimension. check if the exposure center is correct.
8. After correcting, carry out Test Print
Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B) with
Master Value of F: Functions and make a
print and check if the exposure center is
correct.

Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper

Magazine)
1. Set the paper magazine for Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) to the
magazine mount A/B.
2. Select magazine A/B.
3. Carry out Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A/B) with Master Value of F:
Functions.

36070 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Advance Adjustment NOTE

• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
A/B)
Adjustment
Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start
Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is
printed.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.

3. Mode
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

S3316-00-SM00 ! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

NOTE
The paper is loaded.
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to bring up this
display.
! Rewind

! Explanation The paper which is being loaded is rewound.

Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance ! Adjustment

Motor Speed Correction are carried out.
IMPORTANT 1. Select and execute Test Print (Paper
• If the exposure advance adjustment is carried out Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
for any one of magazine A/B, the correction is
complete. 2. Measure the length between the paper front
end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper input the measured value in Paper Front
Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) End - 0 mm-line Test Print Measurement
(Input range: 23.4 to 27.4 mm) Value.

The Exposure Start Position is corrected. 3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and
Measure the length between the test print front end and 0 mm- 254 mm line of the test print, then input the
line, then input measured value.

! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm)
(Input range: 244.0 to 264.0 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of
the test print and input measured value.

! Functions

! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure
Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is
printed.

36080 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

value in 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test

Paper Measurement Value.

Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value

Paper advance direction

3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value

G074517

4. Select and execute Test Print Confirmation

(Paper Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
5. Check that each measurement of a test print
that is made is same as followings.
Length between the paper front end 25.4 mm
and 0 mm-line
Length between 0 to 254 mm-line 254.0 mm

Paper advance direction

A

Rear end

G074518

36080 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper pressure operation correction NOTE

• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction

G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

The paper is loaded.

! Rewind

3. Mode
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.

! Adjustment

1. Select and execute Test Print via

F:Functions.
NOTE
S3389-00-SM00
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in
the list below.
! Explanation • When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by print No. and the revolution pulse count are
adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller of the printed on the back print.
exposure advance unit and the paper.
Print No. Revolution pulse Test print
IMPORTANT count (pps) advance length
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for (mm)
each paper type. 1 1733 152
• Copy the paper width correction value that the 2 1600 153
correction is finished to the same paper type paper 3 1545 154
magazine.
4 1502 155
5 1466 156
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial
value: 1) (input range: 1 to 13) 6 1434 157
7 1405 158
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
8 1378 159
9 1353 160
! Functions
10 1329 161
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) 11 1307 162
12 1285 163
Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is 13 1265 164
printed.
NOTE 2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP from the rear end on the test print. Check the
imprinting. table below and input the correction pattern
No. as the correction value.
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
A/B) Banding position Correction
Rear end: At about 26 mm +2
Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a
test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure
operation correction is made.

36090 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end

Banding (26 mm at the rear end)
+2

Test print with no Print No.

banding

3. Mode
Paper advance direction
G068471

Banding position Correction

Rear end: At about 17 mm −2

Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end

−2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)

10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding

Print No.

Paper advance direction

G072389

3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each

paper magazine type.

36090 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

WB width correction ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
Bringing up the display Validate the correction value to make a test print.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → NOTE
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → WB Width Correction • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 216 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP

3. Mode
imprinting.

! WB width correction

IMPORTANT
• When the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the
correction is not necessary.

1. Check that the exposure center correction

S3394-00-SM00

! Explanation has been completed.

☞ 36070
The margin correction can be carried out for each paper width
and surface.
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT 3. Measure the right and left margins on the
test print.
• When the correction is carried out for any one of
magazine A/B, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of
WB and BL, because the image exposure position is
corrected.

! Paper Magazine (Input range: 82.5 to 210 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.

! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

(Input range: 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0
mm.

! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

(Input range: 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0
mm.
G068472

! Functions 4. Input the measured value in each item.

5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F:
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) Functions and make sure that the margin is
Invalidate the correction value to make a test print. 5.0 mm.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 216 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.

36100 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

Compact Archive Unit Initialization sequentially. This reduces the time for the hard disk drive
to access the data.
• Carry out Defrag regularly to improve the performance
Bringing up the display of the computer.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Initialization
! Procedure

IMPORTANT ! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit

• Carry out the Hard disk drive format for Compact
Archive Unit first when the compact archive unit is 1. Click F: Functions.
installed newly or the hard disk drive of the compact
archive unit is replaced.
2. Click Initialization of the Compact Archive
Refer to PC Service Manual ☞ 88000 Unit.
Windows 2000 format dialog is displayed.

3. Mode
S3401-00-SM00

! Explanation
G069963
The compact archive unit can be initialized or optimized.
3. Click Start.
IMPORTANT Initialization starts.
• The backup data of the compact archive unit is not IMPORTANT
made.
• You cannot change the setting of Capacity,
• If the data in the compact archive unit was initialized File system, Allocation unit size, and Enable
accidentally, it cannot be recovered. Compression on the format dialog.
• If you select the Enable Compression, it takes
! Functions approx. 35 minutes.
• If you select Quick Format, it finishes in a few
! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit of seconds.
The image data which is saved in the hard disk drive of the
compact archive unit can be initialized. ! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
1. Click F: Functions.
display this.

! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit

The hard disk drive of the compact archive unit can be
optimized.
NOTE
• A fragmented hard disk drive stores parts of a file in
many different locations. Defrag is placing all data

36700 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

2. Click Defragmentation of the Compact

Archive Unit.
Disk Defragementer is displayed and the optimization
(defragmentation) starts.

3. Mode
G069964

IMPORTANT
• If the fragments is 7%, it takes approx. 25
minutes for defragmentation.

NOTE
• After finishing the defragmentation,
Defragmentation Complete is sometimes
displayed. When the message is displayed, select
Close.

36700 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

Compact Archive Unit Capacity ! Drive

Check You can check the drive and capacity to use the compact
archive.

Bringing up the display Drive

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Select the drive for the compact archive unit.
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Capacity Check
IMPORTANT
• Check the drive letter of the hard disk drive for
When TYPE1 is selected compact archive unit in Windows Explorer.
• The conditions for a compact archive unit are as
follows.
• Hard disk
• Drive other than C drive
• Available 5 GB or more free space

3. Mode
Capacity
All capacity of the drive which is selected is displayed.
Free Space
Free space of the drive which is selected is displayed.

! Save Data
You can check the data saved in the compact archive.
All Order Counts
S3402-00-SM00 All order counts saved is displayed.

When TYPE2 is selected All Frame Counts

All frame counts saved is displayed.
Hold on Save Frame Counts
Hold on save frame counts is displayed.
Hold on Save Used Space
Hold on save used space is displayed.

! Compact Archive Unit Capacity Setting

NOTE
• Appears when Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 is
selected.
You can set the size of the capacity used for the compact
archive unit and that of the space used for Hold on save.
Size to be used for Compact Archive Unit
S3402-00-SM01 Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for the
compact archive unit.
! Explanation Setting from 0.1 GB up to 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
is available.
You can check the compact archive unit capacity.
The size to be used for Hold on Save
! Unit Number Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for Hold on
Save.
You can set the unit number of the compact archive unit.
Setting from 0 GB up to a 50% of the capacity to be used for
NOTE Compact Archive Unit is available.
• If there are some QSS with which are equipped the
compact archive unit, change the unit number in order to Default Size
identify each archive unit. Put the settings of the size to be used to the default as for the
• When TYPE 2 is selected, the archive code (2x−xxxx⋅ ⋅ ⋅ compact archive unit and the Hold on save.
⋅) does not appear. NOTE
• The values are changed to the following.

36710 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

• Size of the space to be used for Compact Archive

Unit: 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
• The size of the space to be used for Hold on save:
50% of the size of space to be used for Compact
Archive Unit

3. Mode

36710 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment
Scanner Unit Adjustment

Swing and Tilt/Light Axis IMPORTANT

Adjustment [S-2/S-3] • The order of priority of the film carriers which are
used for the swing and tilt adjustment and light
axis adjustment is as follows.
There are different Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
procedures for S-2/S-3 and S-4. Priority Film carrier to be set
• For S-4 details, refer to the following: 1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)*1
2 120 AFC-II
• Refer to ☞ Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4].
3 110 AFC-II
Bringing up the display
*1. For the 135/240 AFC-II, use the 135 lane to carry out
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment
! Graph
When the image is scanned, the A/D value of each CCD pixel

3. Mode
is graphed out simultaneously.

! Display
Adjust the graph display area.

# Display Area (Horizontal), Light Axis

Adjustment (initial value: 470) (input range: 1
to 2670)
The horizontal display area of the light axis
adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified.

# Display Area (Horizontal), Swing and Tilt

S3396-01-SM02 Adjustment (initial value: 470) (input range: 1
to 3500)
IMPORTANT
The horizontal display area of the swing and tilt
• After replacing the scanner unit, carry out adjustment adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
following the procedures below.
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified.
1. Carry out ☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or
readjusting the scanner unit). # Display Area (Vertical) (input range: 1 to 4096)
2. Carry out ☞ Adjustment of swing and tilt (when The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
replacing or readjusting the scanner unit). set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis
3. Carry out Light Source Registration . is magnified.
☞ 37010
4. Carry out Focus Adjustment. # Graph
☞ 37020 Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
5. Carry out Light Source Update. boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
☞ 37030 IMPORTANT
• When checking only for the light axis adjustment of the
• When the Light Axis Adjustment and Swing
scanner unit and swing and tilt adjustment, follow the
and Tilt Adjustment are carried out, be sure to
procedure below.
do at G only.
1. Carry out ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
checking). ! Focus value (initial value: 0) (input range: −300
2. Carry out ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when only to +300)
checking).
If necessary, the focus value can be changed.

! Explanation
! Light Axis Adjustment
Adjust the vertical and horizontal tilt of the scanner unit.
! Threshold (input range: 0 to 4096)
For the waveform selected in Graph of Display, Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold, in which the part over the
threshold is added up, is displayed.

37000 1/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

! Light Axis Adjustment Check 3. Adjust the scanner unit position so that the
upper value of waveform comes to the center
Carry out light axis adjustment check.
of trapezoidal graph.
NOTE
(Loosen the three adjusting screws and three fixing
• Check that the difference between the right and left nuts.)
values of Number of Pixels Exceeding the Threshold in
NOTE
the graph for the light axis check is within 4 pixels.
• Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw may be
changed to the hex. nut.
! Result
Same position
The result is displayed as OK or No Good.

! Swing and Tilt Adjustment

! Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check

3. Mode
Check the swing and tilt adjustment.
NOTE
• Change the focus value continuously, check if the focus
best positions are equal at the front and rear.
After completing, the result is displayed on the pop-up
display.

! Result
The result is displayed as OK or No Good.
NOTE
• After the Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check, if the
Trapezoidal graph
deviation of front and rear focus best position is 6 or less,
OK appears. S3396-01-SM01

Fixing nuts
! Resolution
Adjusting
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display screws
is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.

! Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing

or readjusting the scanner unit) Fixing nut

This is the procedure for replacing or readjusting the scanner

unit.
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the
Adjusting
result becomes OK.
screw
IMPORTANT
• OK is displayed when the difference between the
right and left values of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold is within 4 pixels.
• When only checking the light axis of scanner unit,
refer to ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
checking). G074523

1. Remove the scanner top cover and the

scanner front cover.
☞ 20030
2. Set the AFC to the scanner section without
setting the scanner adjustment chart to the
AFC.

37000 2/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

IMPORTANT 1 2
• When moving the scanner unit in the arrow
direction, loosen the fixing nuts and draw in
the arrow direction.

3. Mode
S3396-01-SM02

7. Adjust the light axis of scanner unit so that

G072392 the difference between the Number of
4. When the upper value of waveform on the Pixels Exceeding the Threshold for 0 to
trapezoidal graph comes to the 2670 and 2670 to 5340 becomes within 4
approximately center of four displays after and the Result becomes OK.
adjusting the scanner unit position, attach (Loosen the three adjusting screws and three fixing
the scanner adjustment chart to the AFC. nuts.)
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• Press the scanner unit against left back side
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
to adjust.
refer to ☞ 4600.
• Adjust the adjusting screw so that the
5. Set the AFC securely in the machine. waveform of swing and tilt, and light axis can
be seen on the display.
6. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Display Area, Threshold, and Display Adjusting screw 1 Fixing nut
Area Setting so that the relation between
the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in Fixing nut
both right and left graphs is shown as Adjusting screw
follows.

(1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so

that only the largest waveform for the light Fixing nut
axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen.
(2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Light Axis Adjustment of Display Area Adjusting
(Horizontal) and Display Area Setting so screw 2
that only the largest waveform for the light
axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen
in the display below.
NOTE
• When performing Display Area Setting,
only the image 2 shown in the display
G074523
moves right and left.
• When performing Light Axis Adjustment " Point
of Display Area (Horizontal), the When turning the adjusting screw, the waveform may
waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display be moved, or unnecessary waveform may be displayed.
are enlarged or reduced. In that case, return to Step 6 and adjust again so that
the only necessary waveform can be seen.
(3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of
the peak of the waveform and the red line
which indicate the threshold cross the
positions of 1 and 2 shown in the display.

37000 3/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

" Point Area Setting so that the relation between

Example: In the following case, adjust the adjusting the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in
screws 1 and 2 so that the difference of Number of both right and left graphs is shown as
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold becomes within 4. follows.
Number of Pixels 0 to 2670 2670 to 5340
Exceeding the
(1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so
Threshold that only the largest waveform for the light
axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen.
Value 334 339
Adjusting screw 1 Adjust this in the tightening direction. (2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Light Axis Adjustment of Display Area
Adjusting screw 2 Adjust this in the loosening direction.
(Horizontal) and Display Area Setting so
that only the largest waveform for the light
8. After the difference of Number of Pixels axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen
Exceeding the Threshold becomes within in the display below.
4, tighten the fixing nuts and adjusting

3. Mode
NOTE
screws, then click Light Axis Adjustment • When performing Display Area Setting,
Check. only the image 2 shown in the display
NOTE moves right and left.
• When the Result is OK, carry out swing and tilt • When performing Light Axis Adjustment
adjustment. of Display Area (Horizontal), the
• When the Result is No Good, carry out light axis waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display
adjustment again. are enlarged or reduced.

9. Carry out swing and tilt adjustment. (3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of
☞ Adjustment of swing and tilt (when replacing or the peak of the waveform and the red line
readjusting the scanner unit)Reference which indicate the threshold cross the
positions of 1 and 2 shown in the display.
IMPORTANT
1 2
• After adjusting the light axis, the swing and tilt
adjustment is required.

! Checking the light axis (when only

checking)

IMPORTANT
• This is the procedure for only checking the light axis
of the scanner unit.

1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the

135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for
checking. S3396-01-SM02

Priority Film carrier to be set

4. Check that the differences of Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold for 0 to
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 2670 and 2670 to 5340 become the values
2 120 AFC-II shown in the table below.
3 110 AFC-II
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC-II (135
IMPORTANT lane) is less than the following value,
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
refer to ☞ 4600.
2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Display Area, Threshold, and Display

37000 4/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

checking the Light Axis Adjustment of the between the red lines and the fine waveforms
120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II is not required. are in the center of the blue lines.
Film carrier to be set Difference of G values The range of the blue lines
when checking the
light axis adjustment The range of the red lines
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels
120 AFC-II ±28 pixels
110 AFC-II ±28 pixels

5. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from

the AFC.
IMPORTANT
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the

3. Mode
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the chart gets damaged because the AFC
initial-activated operation starts.

! Adjustment of swing and tilt (when

replacing or readjusting the scanner
unit)
S3396-01-SM02
This is the procedure for replacing or readjusting the scanner
unit. IMPORTANT
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the • If the waveform cannot be seen, check for the
result becomes OK. position to which the scanner adjustment
chart is attached and for Light Axis
IMPORTANT
Adjustment.
• OK appears when the value is 6/54 step or less. ☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or
• When only checking the swing and tilt of scanner readjusting the scanner unit)
unit, refer to ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when
only checking).
5. Adjust the resolution of the right and left
graphs to the approx. maximum.
(Loosen the two adjusting screws and two fixing nuts.)
1. Remove the scanner top cover and the
scanner front cover. IMPORTANT
☞ 20030 • Press the scanner unit against back side to
adjust.
2. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the
AFC. • Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw
may be changed to the hex. nut.
IMPORTANT
Fixing nut
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
refer to ☞ 4600. Adjusting
screws
3. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
4. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and
Standard Position so that the relation
between the waveforms and the vertical red Fixing nuts
and blue lines in both right and left graphs is
shown as follows.

(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so

that the waveform of graph can be seen.
(2) Using Standard Position, carry out
adjustment so that the three waveforms are in

G074523

37000 5/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

" Point IMPORTANT

When turning the adjusting screw, the position
• After adjusting the swing and tilt, the light
between the vertical blue/red lines and the undulation
source registration is required.
may be changed. In that case, return to Step 4, and
adjust the position between the vertical lines and the
waveforms correctly again. ! Checking the swing and tilt (when only
NOTE checking)
• The resolution displays how much percentage the
This is the procedure for checking whether the swing and tilt
height of the 8 small waveforms shares the height
of the scanner unit is normal or not. Carry out the adjustment
of the 3 large waveforms.
when the swing and tilt is not normal.
IMPORTANT
1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the
• Adjust while the unit fixing nut is loosened. If
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
the nut is secured, the adjustment may not be
carried out because of the narrow adjustment IMPORTANT

3. Mode
range. • When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
6. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for
Check. checking.

NOTE Priority Film carrier to be set

• When the result is OK, the swing and tilt 1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
adjustment is completed. 2 120 AFC-II
When it is No good, return to Step 5 to carry out
the swing and tilt adjustment according to the 3 110 AFC-II
instructions on the display. This correction means
the rotation of the adjusting screw.
IMPORTANT
7. Fix the scanner unit. • For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
8. Carry out Light Axis Adjustment Check of refer to ☞ 4600.
Light Axis Adjustment after completing the 2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
adjustment. If there is difference, it is
necessary to adjust again. 3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and
☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or Standard Position so that the relation
readjusting the scanner unit) between the waveforms and the vertical red
and blue lines in both right and left graphs is
9. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from shown as follows.
the AFC.
IMPORTANT (1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the that the waveform of graph can be seen.
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered, (2) Using Standard Position, carry out
the chart gets damaged because the AFC adjustment so that the three waveforms are in
initial-activated operation starts.
10. Attach the scanner top cover and scanner
front cover.
11. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
light axis adjustment and swing and tilt
adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND filter
solenoid heats and malfunctions may occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source registration.
12. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
IMPORTANT
• After adjusting the swing and tilt, the light
source registration is required.
13. Carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020

37000 6/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

between the red lines and the fine waveforms 7. Attach the scanner top cover and scanner
are in the center of the blue lines. front cover.
The range of the blue lines

The range of the red lines

3. Mode
S3396-01-SM02

IMPORTANT
• If the waveform cannot be seen, check for the
position to which the scanner adjustment
chart is attached and for Light Axis
Adjustment.
☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or
readjusting the scanner unit)
4. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Check.
5. Check that the value on the 135/240 AFC-II
(135 lane) is less than the value in the
following table.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC-II (135
lane) is less than the following value,
checking the Swing and Tilt Adjustment of
the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II is not
required.
Film carrier to be set Difference of G
values when
checking the swing
and tilt adjustment
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step
120 AFC-II 27/54 step
110 AFC-II 24/54 step

6. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from

the AFC.
IMPORTANT
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the chart gets damaged because the AFC
initial-activated operation starts.

37000 7/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

Swing and Tilt/Light Axis ! Display

Adjustment [S-4] Adjust the graph display area.

# Display Area (Horizontal), Light Axis

Bringing up the display Adjustment (initial value: 452) (input range: 1
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment to 2670)
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis The horizontal display area of the light axis
Adjustment adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified.

# Display Area (Horizontal), Swing and Tilt

Adjustment (initial value: 452) (input range: 1
to 3500)
The horizontal display area of the swing and tilt

3. Mode
adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified.

# Display Area (Vertical) (Initial value: 3500)

(Input range: 1 to 4096)
The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis
is magnified.

# Graph
S3396-01-SM02
Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
IMPORTANT boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
• After replacing the scanner unit, carry out adjustment IMPORTANT
following the procedures below.
• When the Light Axis Adjustment and Swing
1. Carry out ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
and Tilt Adjustment are carried out, be sure to
checking).
do at G only.
2. Carry out ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when only
checking). ! Focus value (initial value: 1302) (input range: −
3. Carry out Light Source Registration. 245 to +1561)
☞ 37010
If necessary, the focus value can be changed.
4. Carry out Focus Adjustment.
☞ 37020
5. Carry out Light Source Update. ! Light Axis Adjustment
☞ 37030
! Threshold value (Initial value: 600) (Input
range: 0 to 4096)
! Explanation
For the waveform selected in Graph of Display, Number of
The scanner's Swing and Tilt/Light Axis are adjustable. Pixels Exceeding the Threshold, in which the part over the
IMPORTANT threshold is added up, is displayed.
• The order of priority of the film carriers which are
used for the swing and tilt adjustment and light ! Light Axis Adjustment Check
axis adjustment is as follows. You can check G value differences and light axis adjustment
Priority Film carrier to be set at the same time.

1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)*1 NOTE

• Confirm that the difference expressing the Number of
2 120 AFC-II
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold on the left and right of
3 110 AFC-II

*1. For the 135/240 AFC-II, use the 135 lane to carry out
Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

! Graph
When the image is scanned, the A/D value of each CCD pixel
is graphed out simultaneously.

37000 8/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

the light axis confirmation graph is within the value ! Checking the light axis (when only
indicated in the table below.
checking)
Light Axis Confirmation Table
Film carrier to be set Difference of G values IMPORTANT
when checking the • This is the procedure for only checking the light axis
light axis adjustment of the scanner unit.
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels
120 AFC-II ±28 pixels 1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the
110 AFC-II ±28 pixels
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
! Result use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for
The result is displayed as OK or No Good. checking.

3. Mode
NOTE Priority Film carrier to be set
• Although No Good may be displayed onscreen when 1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
using S-4, the system is functioning normally as long as
2 120 AFC-II
the value does not exceed that shown in the Light Axis
Adjustment Confirmation Table. 3 110 AFC-II

! Swing and Tilt Adjustment IMPORTANT

• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
! Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check
refer to ☞ 4600.
You can check the G value difference and swing and tilt
adjustment at the same time.
2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
NOTE 3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
• Change the focus value continuously, check if the focus Display Area, Threshold, and Display
best positions are equal at the front and rear. Area Setting so that the relation between
After completing, the result is displayed on the pop-up the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in
display. both right and left graphs is shown as
Check the value to see if it has dropped below that shown follows.
in the table below.
Swing and Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table (1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so
that only the largest waveform for the light
Film carrier to be set Difference of G
values when axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen.
checking the swing (2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
and tilt adjustment Light Axis Adjustment of Display Area
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step (Horizontal) and Display Area Setting so
120 AFC-II 27/54 step that only the largest waveform for the light
axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen
110 AFC-II 24/54 step
in the display below.
NOTE
! Result • When performing Display Area Setting,
only the image 2 shown in the display
The result is displayed as OK or No Good. moves right and left.
NOTE
• When performing Light Axis Adjustment
• Although No Good may be displayed when using S-4, of Display Area (Horizontal), the
the system is functioning normally as long as the value is waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display
less than that shown in the Swing and Tilt Adjustment are enlarged or reduced.
Confirmation Table.
(3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of
! Resolution the peak of the waveform and the red line
which indicate the threshold cross the
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display positions of 1 and 2 shown in the display.
is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.

37000 9/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

1 2 ! Checking the swing and tilt (when only

checking)
This is the procedure for checking whether the swing and tilt
of the scanner unit is normal or not.

1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the

135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for
checking.
Priority Film carrier to be set
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)

3. Mode
2 120 AFC-II
S3396-01-SM02 3 110 AFC-II
4. Verify that the difference in the TAGNumber
of Pixels Exceeding the ThresholdTAG IMPORTANT
between TAG0 to 2670TAG and TAG2670 to
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
5340TAG is within the range shown on the
refer to ☞ 4600.
TAGLight Axis Adjustment Confirmation
TableTAG. 2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
NOTE 3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and
• You need not check the Light Axis Adjustment Standard Position so that the relation
of the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II if the value of between the waveforms and the vertical red
the 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) is less than the and blue lines in both right and left graphs is
value shown on the Light Axis Adjustment
shown as follows.
Confirmation Table.

Light Axis Confirmation Table (1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so
Film carrier to be set Difference of G values that the waveform of graph can be seen.
when checking the (2) Using Standard Position, carry out
light axis adjustment
adjustment so that the three waveforms are in
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels between the red lines and the fine waveforms
120 AFC-II ±28 pixels are in the center of the blue lines.
110 AFC-II ±28 pixels The range of the blue lines

IMPORTANT The range of the red lines

• If the difference of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold is more than the
value shown in the Light Axis Adjustment
Confirmation Table, theScanner unit, the
AFC-II, and/or the Scanner adjustment
chart may be defective.
5. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from
the AFC.
IMPORTANT
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the chart gets damaged because the AFC
initial-activated operation starts.

S3396-01-SM02

37000 10/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment

IMPORTANT
• If no waveform is visible, check the position at
which the scanner adjustment chart is
attached.
4. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Check.
5. Verify that the difference in
resolutionbetween 0 to 2670 and 2670 to
5340is within the range shown on the Swing
and Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table.
NOTE
• You need not check the Light Axis Adjustment
of the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II if the value of

3. Mode
the 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) is less than the
value shown on the Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Confirmation Table.
Swing and Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table
Film carrier to be set Difference of G
values when
checking the swing
and tilt adjustment
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step
120 AFC-II 27/54 step
110 AFC-II 24/54 step

IMPORTANT
• If the difference of Resolution is more than
the values in the Swing and tilt adjustment
check table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, and
Scanner adjustment chart may be
defective.
6. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from
the AFC.
IMPORTANT
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the chart gets damaged because the AFC
initial-activated operation starts.

37000 11/11
Distributed by: [Link]

37010
Scanner Unit Adjustment

Light Source Registration ☞ 37020

• The registration is not required for the films which are not
to be used.
Bringing up the display
• For 135, 240, 120, MMC, AMC-II, and MFC, the light
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment source registration for each negative and positive is
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration carried out internally.
NOTE • For 110, the light source registration only for negative is
• You can carry out the same correction of light source carried out internally.
registration in the Scanner Setup.
! Attached Film Carrier
The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly, −
− − − − is displayed.

! Registration

3. Mode
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.

! Adjustment procedure (for other than

MFC)

1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Light

Source Registration.
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, switch the lane to 135 or
S1046-00-SM00 240 securely.
2. Click YES: Enter.
! Explanation
NOTE
The operations below are carried out automatically. • Light Source Registration starts automatically.
1. Checking the CCD sensitivity After Light Source Registration is finished,
Light Source Registration is complete is
2. Executing the Area Registration (registering the valid
displayed.
range of CCD)
☞ 32570 3. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• Area Registration is necessary for attachments other
4. When you continue the operation to set
another film carrier, repeat the steps above.
than the crop card attachment of MFC.
3. Correcting the ND filter dispersion
! Adjustment procedure (for MFC)
4. Calculating the gain value and the offset value

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• Because the CCD valid range of the MMC-II and • The light source registration for other than the crop
AMC-II are calculated with 135 lane of 135/240 card is executed at the attachment for adjusting.
AFC-II or 135 AFC-II, there are limits to carry out
Light Source Registration and Area Registration.
• When installing the machine, replacing the scanner
unit or carrying out Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment of scanner unit, be sure to carry out
Light Source Registration of MMC-II and AMC-II
or Area Registration, after carrying out Light
Source Registration with 135 lane of 135/240
AFC-II and 135 AFC-II or Area Registration

NOTE
• For another film carrier, carry out light source
registration for each film size.
• After carrying out Light source Registration or Area
Registration, the focus adjustment is required.

37010 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37010
Scanner Unit Adjustment

• The light source registration for the crop card is

executed at the crop card attachment.

Attachment for adjustment

3. Mode
Crop card attachment

G078428

1. Set the crop card attachment for MFC

needing light source registration or the
attachment for MFC adjustment.
2. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• Light Source Registration starts automatically.
After Light Source Registration is finished,
Light Source Registration is complete is
displayed.
3. Click YES: Enter.
4. When you continue the operation by setting
another attachment, repeat the steps above.
5. In case of using other than the crop card
attachment of MFC, carry out Area
Registration.
☞ 32570

37010 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

Focus Adjustment # Graph

Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
IMPORTANT
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment • When the Focus Adjustment is carried out, be
sure to do at G only.

! Focus Value
Enter the focus value.

! Resolution
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display
is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.

3. Mode
! Functions

! Magnification Change
Changes the magnification rate of the scanner zoom lens.

! Auto Focus Adjustment

S3230-01-SM00
Carry out the auto focus adjustment.

! Explanation ! Result Display

Correct the deviation of the focus caused by the scanning Display the result of the auto focus adjustment.
height of each film carrier.
After replacing or adding the film carrier, the focus IMPORTANT
adjustment is required. • Refer to the following items for focus adjustment
procedure of each film carrier.
IMPORTANT
• Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for 135/240AFC-
• Before carrying out Focus Adjustment, Light
II, 135AFC-II, 120AFC-II and 110AFC-II).
Source Registration or Area Registration is
required. • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
MMC-II and 135/240 AMC-II).
• After carrying out Focus Adjustment, Light
Source Update is required. • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than
the MFC: crop card attachment).
! Graph • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than
the MFC: crop card attachment).
When the image is scanned, the A/D value of each CCD pixel
is graphed out simultaneously.
! Adjustment procedure (for
! Display 135/240AFC-II, 135AFC-II, 120AFC-II
Adjust the graph display area. and 110AFC-II)

# Display Area (Horizontal) (input range: 1 to IMPORTANT

3500) • Focus for S-2/S-3 and S-4 is automatically adjusted
The display area of the graph horizontal-axis can be to a different rate of magnification.
set. If the display area is narrowed, the horizontal
axis is magnified. Scanner types Magnification
S-2/S-3 ×0.621 to ×2.001
# Display Area (Vertical) (input range: 1 to 4096) S-4 ×0.621 and ×1.344
The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis
is magnified.
1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the
AFC.
IMPORTANT
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
refer to ☞ 4600.

37020 1/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

2. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
so that the relation between the waveform of occur.
the graph and the longitudinal red and blue When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
lines in the graphs is shown as follows. minutes, then carry out the light source update.
8. Carry out Light Source Update.
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so ☞ 37030
that the waveform of graph can be seen.
(2) Using the Standard Position key, carry out ! Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
adjustment so that the three waveforms are
MMC-II and 135/240 AMC-II)
between the blue lines and the fine
waveforms are between the red lines.
IMPORTANT
The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines • For the focus adjustment of 135/240 AMC-II and
135/240 MMC-II, adjusting with each magnification
rate from ×0.720 to ×1.251 must be carried out all at

3. Mode
once.
• If you closed the mode or moved the stop position of
the scanner adjustment chart before finishing the
adjustment with all magnification rate, adjust it from
×0.720.
• Focus for S-2/S-3 and S-4 is automatically adjusted
to a different rate of magnification.
Adjustment procedures for 135/240 MMC-II and
135/240 AMC-II are the same as those for S-2/S-3.
Scanner types Magnification
S-2/S-3 ×0.720 to ×1.251
S-4 ×0.621 and ×1.344

S3230-01-SM00 1. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the

3. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II.
of the graph is approx. maximum. IMPORTANT
4. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment. • For handling the scanner adjustment chart,
NOTE refer to ☞ 4600.
• Adjust the focus for each film carrier. 2. Check that the magnification rate is ×0.720.
IMPORTANT 3. Change the value for Display Area
(Horizontal) of 250 to 1300.
• If the message The measurement failed.
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again 4. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position
while the waveform is displayed in the graph. so that the relation between the waveform of
5. Enter the magnification rate which is not the graph, the longitudinal red and blue lines,
registered to Focus Auto Adjustment using and orange area in the graphs is shown as
Magnification Change in Functions. follows.
NOTE
(1) Check that all of the waveforms B, G, R for
• Set Magnification Change for each film mask.
the focus adjustment can be seen and the
• The magnification rate which is not registered to waveform for light axis checking is in the
Focus Auto Adjustment can be checked using orange area. If the waveform cannot be seen,
Result in Functions.
• The focus value is displayed for the magnification
rate which is already registered. - is displayed for
the magnification rate which is not registered. And
nothing appears if there is no need for setting the
item.
6. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
7. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
focus adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND

37020 2/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

or out of the area, adjust it with Adjust (L) between the blue lines and the fine
and Adjust (R). waveforms are between the red lines.
Waveform B, G, R for the focus adjustment The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines

3. Mode
Waveform B, G, R for the light axis check
S3230-01-SM01 S3230-01-SM02

IMPORTANT 5. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution

• For the 135/240 MMC-II and 135/240 of the graph is approx. maximum.
AMC-II, the waveform may not be
shown because the positioning of the
6. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
scanner adjustment chart (mount) IMPORTANT
which is set to the MMC is not decided. • If the message The measurement failed.
In this case, adjust the mount carrier by appears, carry out the focus adjustment again
pressing Adjust (L) and Adjust (R). while the waveform is displayed in the graph.
NOTE 7. Select the next magnification rate using
• Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) buttons can be Magnification Change in Functions.
used only when the magnification rate is
×0.720. 8. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• For the focus adjustment of 135/240 AMC-II
and 135/240 MMC-II, adjusting with each
magnification rate from ×0.720 to ×1.251
must be carried out all at once.
9. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
focus adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND
filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
occur.
Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update.
10. Carry out Light Source Update.
☞ 37030
S3230-01-SM01

(2) Restore the value in Display Area ! Adjustment procedure (for other than
(Horizontal) to 250 to show only the the MFC: crop card attachment)
waveform for the focus adjustment.
IMPORTANT
(3) Using the Standard Position key, carry out
adjustment so that the three waveforms are • For other than the crop card attachment of MFC, it is
always necessary to carry out Area Registration for
each attachment before carrying out Focus
adjustment. ☞ 32570

37020 3/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

• For the focus adjustment of MFC, the adjustment for or out of the area, adjust it with Adjust (L)
all magnification rate from ×0.621 to ×1.344 is and Adjust (R).
required.
• If you closed the mode or moved the position of the Waveform B, G, R for the light axis check
scanner adjustment chart before finishing the
adjustment with all magnification rate, adjust for all
again from ×0.621.

1. Attach the MFC to the machine and press

Yes in the Focus Adjustment, and the
message "Place the attachment, then set
the Focus Chart." appears.
2. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the
MFC:135 F attachment and press Yes.

3. Mode
135F attachment

Waveform B, G, R for the focus adjustment

S3230-01-SM01

IMPORTANT
• In the case of the MFC:135 F
attachment, waveform of the scanner
adjustment chart may not appear. In
this case, adjust the attachment
position by pressing Adjust (L) and
Adjust (R).

NOTE
• Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) buttons can be
used only when the magnification rate is
×0.621.

Scanner adjustment chart

G078433

3. Check that the magnification rate is ×0.621.

4. Change the value for Display Area
(Horizontal) of 250 to 1300. Adjust (L) and Adjust (R)
5. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position
so that the relation between the waveform of
the graph, the longitudinal red and blue lines,
and orange area in the graphs is shown as S3230-01-SM01
follows. (2) Restore the value in Display Area
(Horizontal) to 250 to show only the
(1) Check that all of the waveforms B, G, R for waveform for the focus adjustment.
the focus adjustment can be seen and the
waveform for light axis checking is in the
(3) Using the Standard Position key, carry out
adjustment so that the three waveforms are
orange area. If the waveform cannot be seen,

37020 4/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

between the blue lines and the fine 2. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the
waveforms are between the red lines. MFC: crop card attachment and press Yes.
The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines Scanner adjustment chart

Crop card attachment

3. Mode
G078431

3. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position

so that the relation among the waveform, the
range between the longitudinal red lines and
the range between the longitudinal blue lines
S3230-01-SM02 in the graph, is as follows.
6. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution (1) Check whether all of the waveforms B, G, R
of the graph is approx. maximum.
for the focus adjustment are shown. If the
7. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment. waveform cannot be seen, or out of the area,
adjust it with Adjust (L) and Adjust (R).
IMPORTANT
• If the message The measurement failed. IMPORTANT
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again • In the case of the MFC: crop card
while the waveform is displayed in the graph. attachment, the waveform may not
appear. In this case, adjust the
8. Select the next magnification rate using attachment position by pressing Adjust
Magnification Change in Functions. (L) and Adjust (R).
9. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
10. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
focus adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND
filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update.
11. If MFC: Crop card is attached, carry out
☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than the
MFC: crop card attachment). Adjust (L) and Adjust (R)

12. Carry out Light Source Update.

☞ 37030

! Adjustment procedure (for other than S3230-01-SM01

the MFC: crop card attachment) (2) Using the Standard Position key, carry out
adjustment so that the three waveforms are
IMPORTANT
• Focus adjustment for the MFC: crop card
attachment requires adjusting magnification of
×0.621 only.

1. Attach the MFC to the machine and press

Yes in the Focus Adjustment, and the
message "Place the attachment, then set
the Focus Chart." appears.

37020 5/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37020
Scanner Unit Adjustment

between the blue lines and the fine

waveforms are between the red lines.

The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines

3. Mode
S3230-01-SM02

4. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution

of the graph is approx. maximum.
5. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• If the message The measurement failed.
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again
while the waveform is displayed in the graph.
6. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
7. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
focus adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND
filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update.
8. If other than the MFC: Crop card is
attached, carry out ☞ Adjustment procedure
(for other than the MFC: crop card
attachment).
9. Carry out Light Source Update.
☞ 37030

37020 6/6
Distributed by: [Link]

37030
Scanner Unit Adjustment

Light Source Update 2. Click YES: Enter.

NOTE
Bringing up the display • Light Source Update starts automatically. After
Light Source Update is finished, Light Source
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Registration is complete is displayed.
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
NOTE
3. Click YES: Enter.
• You can carry out the same correction of Light Source Update NOTE
in the Scanner Setup. • When you continue the operation to set another
film carrier, repeat the steps above.

! Adjustment procedure (for MFC)

IMPORTANT
• For other than the crop card, update the light source

3. Mode
at the attachment for adjustment.
• For the crop card, update the light source at the crop
card attachment.

Attachment for adjustment

S1046-00-SM01

! Explanation
The light source amount changes every day due to the
operating environment. Correct the changed light source
intensity value in Light Source Update.
NOTE
• Be sure to update the light source after the focus Crop card attachment
adjustment for the scanner unit or after reading data from
the backup FD.

! Attached Film Carrier

The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly, −
− − − − is displayed.

! Registration
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.

! Adjustment procedure (for other than G078428

MFC) 1. Set the crop card attachment for MFC
needing light source update or the MFC
1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Light attachment for adjustment.
Source Update.
2. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, be sure to switch the lane
• Light Source Update starts automatically. After
to 135 or 240.
Light Source Update is finished, Light Source
Registration is complete is displayed.

37030 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37030
Scanner Unit Adjustment

3. Click YES: Enter.

NOTE
• When you continue the operation by setting
another attachment, repeat the steps above.

3. Mode

37030 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37300
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment

Laser Unit Adjustment Condition Details

R laser control temperature 27.7°C to 28.3°C
Bringing up the display
IMPORTANT
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Laser Unit Adjustment • The error message of error No. 6107 R Laser
temperature is out of range. appears under the
following condition.
• R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper
limit temperature) again.
• R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower
limit temperature) again.

3. Mode
• ☞ 46107
! Laser Unit Thermosensor Display Section
The temperature of the laser unit temperature sensor is
displayed.
NOTE
S3271-00-SM00
• The laser unit control temperature is adjusted to become
within the controlled temperature by using the laser unit
! Explanation heater and the laser unit cooling fan 1, 2 which are
equipped in the laser unit.
R Laser Thermosensor
• The laser unit control temperature becomes within the
Laser Unit Thermosensor controlled temperature, and then controlling temperature
of the R laser will start.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
Condition Details
Laser unit control temperature 23.0°C to 42.0°C
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
ON sensor exceeds 30°C.
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
OFF sensor lowers to 27°C or less.
Laser unit heater: ON When the laser unit temperature
sensor lowers to 25°C or less.
Laser unit heater: OFF When the laser unit temperature
sensor exceeds 26°C.
Laser unit heater

IMPORTANT
Laser unit
• The error message of error No. 6177 Laser Unit
G076396
temperature is out of range. appears under the
NOTE following conditions.
• Because the R laser thermosensor and laser unit • Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C
thermosensor are inside of the laser unit, you cannot and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
check each sensor. and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper
limit temperature) again.
! R Thermosensor Display Section
• Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C
The temperature of R laser temperature sensor is displayed. and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
NOTE and then the temperature falls under 20.0°C (lower
limit temperature)again.
• Temperature control is equipped in the R laser and this
temperature control section has been adjusted to become • ☞ 46176
within the controlled temperature.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.

37300 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

37500
Operation Information
Operation Information

Saving the Logdata

! Explanation
If a problem occurs while the QSS is running, the operation
status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a
Logdata file.
IMPORTANT
• Usually the Logdata file is stored automatically,
however it can be stored manually too. Select the
file to save, if necessary.
• The Logdata file is stored automatically in the
following conditions.
• When an error occurs:

3. Mode
• When an abnormality occurs in the system program:
S0100-WIN-SM00
• Up to 10 Logdata files that are stored automatically
are saved. When the number of Logdata files
2. Bring up the Start menu and select
exceeds 10, the files will be overwritten from the Accessories via Programs.
oldest one. 3. Select Windows Explorer.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time 4. Select C:\NKData\LogData in the Local
and the contents of the problem. Disc:C via My Computer.

NOTE
5. Select the necessary Logdata file.
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information NOTE
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. • The Logdata files that are stored automatically are
• Status when the problem occurs saved in compressed.
• Operation before the problem occurs • The file name is used from [Link] to
[Link].
• With or without a error, its kind
• Select the necessary file referring to the saved
• Save the paper which is used when the problem time of Logdata file.
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 6. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
! How to obtain
7. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
! To obtain Logdata recorded automatically Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
when the problem occurs
8. The file creating time and the contents about
the problem are recorded in the Copy of
1. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if File.
QSS software works.
NOTE
9. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to NOTE
the key operator mode or service operator mode • The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
and then move to the QSS menu. It displays the to a storage media which has a large capacity such
taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable. as MO.

! To obtain Logdata at present

1. Press the L key while pressing the Ctrl key

and the Alt key on the keyboard when the
problem occurs.
NOTE
• For specifications other than DLS, the operation
can be performed using only the Alt key and the L
key.

37500 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37500
Operation Information

IMPORTANT
• Carry out it immediately after the problem
occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or
performing other operations.
2. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if
QSS software works.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to
the key operator mode or service operator mode
and then move to the QSS menu. It displays the
taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable.

3. Mode
S0100-WIN-SM00

3. Bring up the Start menu and select

Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Select C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-## in the Local
Disc:C via My Computer.
NOTE
• The machine type appears in the ## of QSS-##.
6. Select Logdata.
7. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
NOTE
• When the Logdata file is stored manually, it is not
compressed.
8. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
9. The file creating time and the contents about
the problem are recorded in the Copy of
File.
10. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
NOTE
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.

37500 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37510
Operation Information

Saving the memory data 2. Press Memory data inhale.

The display to select CPU appears.

! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the QSS operation, the operation
status when the problem occurs can be recorded as a memory
data.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time
and the contents of the problem.

NOTE

3. Mode
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information
shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
S1146-02-SM02
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind 3. Select the CPU you want.
The available CPU is shown as an active button to be
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
selected.
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 4. After the dialog of Save As appears, select
output directory.
! Saving procedure

Saving the memory data

1. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the
problem occurs.
The display to acquire the memory data appears.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out it immediately after the problem
occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or
performing other operations.

S1146-06-SM01

IMPORTANT
• The acquired file should be named the store
name, date and the running number.
• Example: Noritsu12-24-01
Noritsu (store name) 12 (month) -24 (day) -01
(running number)

S1146-02-SM00

37510 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

37520_1
Operation Information

Saving the memory data and ! Browse

Logdata at the same time Can change the saving destination of data to each media drive
or the like.

! START
Saves the memory data and Logdata to the files.

! CANCEL
Closes the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display
and returns to the QSS display.

! Saving procedure

Saving the memory data and Logdata

3. Mode
1. Press the Ctrl key, the Alt key and the Y key
on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
The Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display
appears.
NOTE
G074617P • For specifications other than DLS, the saving
display appears pressing only the Alt key and the
! Explanation Y key.

The memory data and Logdata at present can be compressed

and saved at the same time when a problem occurs in running
the QSS.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data and Logdata are not the
ones recorded automatically when the problem
occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• The Logdata recorded automatically when the
problem occurs can be saved by Saving the
Logdata.
☞ 37500
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time
and the contents of the problem.
• For DLS specification, it is necessary to save the G074617P
DLS log file.
IMPORTANT
☞ 37600
• Be sure to carry out this operation
NOTE immediately after the problem occurs. The
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information correct information cannot be recorded after
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. changing the mode or performing other
operations.
• Status when the problem occurs
• Operation before the problem occurs 2. Click START in the display to save the
• With or without a error, its kind memory data and Logdata to the files.
• Save the paper which is used when the problem IMPORTANT
occurs. • Save the test result to C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-
• Any other things you realized ##_##\Log_Data\Memory\############.

! Save in
Shows the saving destination of the memory data and Logdata
files.

37520_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37520_1
Operation Information

• Before clicking START, clicking Browse in

the display can change the saving destination
of data to each media drive or the like.

3. Mode
G074618

IMPORTANT
• When closing the Read All Memory Data &
Save LogData display forcibly using
Ctrl+Alt+Delete, the QSS and PC operations
may be unstable.
• If starting the memory data and Logdata
saving function during the QSS process
(printing, outputting to the media, etc.), the
QSS process and saving data at the same
time may be unstable.
3. When finishing saving the memory data and
Logdata, the screen returns to the QSS
display.
4. End

37520_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37530_1
Operation Information

System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error

Bringing up the display

Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.

3. Mode
G078427

! Explanation
Since communication of each control PCB cannot be performed when No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, it cannot
go into the System Version Check display from Extension.
When No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, if System Version Check is used in the following procedure, it can go into
the System Version Check display easily.

! Procedure

No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs:

1. On the error display, press NO: Stop alarm and press F: Reserve to make this error to suspension.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press NO: Error clear. If NO: Error clear is pressed, ARCNET communication is performed again by
the main CPU, then the same error recurs and it cannot go into the System Version Check display smoothly.
2. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.

37530_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37530_1
Operation Information

3. The System Version Check display appears.

3. Mode
G078427

4. The System Version Check display appears by clicking System Version Check.

S3059-01-SM03

5. Confirm the Version and Communication on the System Version Check display.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• Since communication data has collected on the ARCNET circuit when ARCNET communication error.
occurs, therefore, by the time OK is displayed, this thing will have time.

# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
Version is displayed.: It is communicating.
Version is not displayed.: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• As a result of main CPU's performing an ARCNET communication demand to each control PCB, when
main CPU receives the communication OK signal which each control PCB sent, the version of each control
PCB is displayed.
• If OK is displayed on Communication field, a version will remain displayed even if communication is
become - after that.
6. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error.
☞ 50520_1

37530_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

37600
Operation Information

Saving the DLS log file

! Explanation
Save the log file of DLS software when a problem occurs
during the operation.
IMPORTANT
• It is also necessary to save Logdata and memory
data of QSS.
☞ 37510
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the following
information at the same time.

3. Mode
• Status when the problem occurs
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
occurs.
• Any other things you realized

! Saving procedure

1. Press the Ctrl, the Alt, the SHIFT and the L

keys on the keyboard all together when a
problem occurs.
The command prompt appears and will be saved
automatically.
2. Select Quit The Application from Close
Down Checks in the QSS menu to display
the Windows display.
NOTE
• Switch the DLS display to the key operator mode
or the service operator mode and then move to the
QSS menu. It displays the taskbar and makes the
Windows key able to be selected.
3. Bring up the Start menu and select
Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Copy DLSLOG_1.zip in X:\Kodak_Logs
which can be accessed from My Computer
via Local Disc:X, to a storage media.
NOTE
• The most recent file name is always set to
DLSLOG_1.
The previous file name is changed to _2, _3 or the
like automatically.
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.

37600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

38000
Flatbed execution display
Flatbed execution display

Flatbed execution display

Bringing up the display

Menu

3. Mode
S0100-FB-SM00

! Explanation
It appears when selecting scanner as an input media on the
order display of QSS and pressing .
It does not appear with the check mark for auto color
correction.
IMPORTANT
• This display appears when using the FB scanner
(EPSON type) which is prepared by customers.

! Gamma (Initial value: 1.2) (Input range: 0.5 to

5.0)
Gamma of the image scanned by the FB scanner can be
adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• Gamma initialization is performed only when
bringing up the FB scanner execution display and
pressing Initializing Setting Value in the service
mode.

38000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

4. Troubleshooting

Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .........................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4190
Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4] ...........................................................4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] ...................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ................................................................4202_1
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ........................................................................4203_1
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4] ................................................................................4240
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4250
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] .........................................................................4250

4 Troubleshooting
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) .....................................................................................4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. ....................4302
An abnormal print is made ..............................................................................................................................4304_1
Checking for media drive defect .........................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start properly. ..................................................................................................................................4306
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print .................................................... 4400_1
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) ..........................................................................4400_1
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ...........................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ...................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line .........................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ........................................................................................... 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart .................................................................... 4600
About the scanner adjustment chart .....................................................................................................................4600
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................. 4900
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................................................4900
System Error messages (No. 3-) ........................................................................................... 4910
No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full .....................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full ....................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ................................................................................................................4911
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) ........................................................................................... 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ...........................................................................................................4920

4000 1/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Uploading Error messages (No. 10-) ..................................................................................... 4961

No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .........................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4962
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .......................................................................................................4962
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4963
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4963
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4964
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed ..........................................................................................................4965
No. 10-20 Busy Modem ....................................................................................................................................4965
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-) ..................................................................................... 4970
No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed ....................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error ..............................................................................................................................4972_1
No. 12-8 Printing Error ..................................................................................................................................4972_1
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ............................................................................................................................4974

4 Troubleshooting
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error ..........................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed .......................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .....................................................................................................................4977
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) ............................................................................... 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................40502
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ..................................................................................................40502
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .......................................................................................................40506
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ................................40508
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. .......................................................................................................................40514
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ....................................................................................................................40518_1
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. .......................................................................40518_1
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700
No. 0700-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..............................................40700
No. 0701-####[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# .........................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .....................................................................................40702
No. 0703 [SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...........40702
No. 0704 [SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package.
............................................................................................................................................................................40704
No. 0705-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..............................................40704

4000 2/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41002
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ..........................................41002
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41004
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................41004
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41010
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................41010
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ................................................................41012
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ...................................................................................................................................41012
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ...............................................................41014_1
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? .....................................................................................................41016
No. 1027-#### Profile data was not found. .....................................................................................................41026
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ................41028
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .....................................................................................41028

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. .......................................................................................................41030
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...........................................................41030
No. 1032 One moment please. . . .....................................................................................................................41032
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. ....................................................................41034
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ............................................................................................41038
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ...................................................................................................41038
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. ..................................................................................................................41040
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ...........................................................................................................................................41040
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .........................................................41042
No. 1047-#### Close printer door. ..................................................................................................................41046
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ............................................................41048
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ............................................................................................................41064
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ...........................................................................41072
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................41074
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. ..............................41080
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ...............................................................................................41080
Attention message: Scanner ............................................................................................... 41302
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? ....................................................................................................41302
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. ...............................................................................................41304_1
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ........................................41306
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. ...............................................................................41312
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range. ............................................................................41314
No. 1315-#### LED Light Source temperature is being [Link] cannot be continued. ...................41314
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed. .................................................................................................................41316
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction. ....................................................................41316
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. ..............................................................41318

4000 3/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Attention message: Film carrier ........................................................................................... 41400

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................................................41400
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. ...................................................................................................................41400
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. .................................................................................................................41402
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process. .........................................................................................41402
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ....................................................................................................41404
No. 1405-#### Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................41404
No. 1406-#### Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................41406
No. 1407-#### Remove the 110 film from the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................41406
No. 1408-#### Remove the 120 film from the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................41408
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................................41408
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. .....................................................................41410_1
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing? .................................................41412
No. 1413 Input the frame number ...................................................................................................................41412
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. ..................................................................................................41414
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. ..........................................................................................................................41416

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. ....................................................................................................41416
No. 1420 Select the DX code. .........................................................................................................................41420
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed. ...........................................................41420
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. ..........................................................................................................................41422
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. .........41423
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. ............................................................41423
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. .....................................................................41423
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. ........................................................................................................................41426
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. 41426
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. ......................................................................................41428
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. .................................................................................41428
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. ...................................................................................................................41430
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC. ........................................................................................................................41430
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. .............................................................................................................................41432
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. ..............................................................................................................................41432
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
............................................................................................................................................................................41434
No. 1438 Set the attachment. ...........................................................................................................................41438
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan? ................................................................41438

4000 4/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41500

No. 1501 The media is write protected. ...........................................................................................................41500
No. 1502 Replace the media.### .....................................................................................................................41502
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.### ...........................................................................................41502
No. 1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. ..........................................................................41504
No. 1505 Exif information cannot be read. .....................................................................................................41504
No. 1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? ......................................................................41506
No. 1508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing? 41508
No. 1509 Write the data. ##### Order Number ..............................................................................................41508
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ...........................................................................................................41510
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. ..........................................................................................................41510
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. ..................................................................................................41512
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? ..................................................................41512
No. 1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory. ....................................................................................................41514
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. .................................................................................................................41514
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. ..................................................................................................................41516

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ...............................................................................................41516
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. .....................................................41518
No. 1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files? .....................41518
No. 1520 Select the template. ..........................................................................................................................41520
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. ....................................................41520
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? .......................................................41522
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. ...................................................................................................41522
No. 1526 Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Do you want to try again? ..........................................41526
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. ..........................................................................................................41526
No. 1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing. ................................................41528
No. 1529 Failed to read the bar code. ..............................................................................................................41528
Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41530
No. 1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists. .................41530
No. 1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected. ...............41530
No. 1532 Write the data. ..................................................................................................................................41532
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. ..............................................................................................41532
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? .....................41534
No. 1535 USB Flash Memory is not set. .........................................................................................................41534
No. 1536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media? ............................................41536
No. 1537 The appropriate file was not found.#### .........................................................................................41536
No. 1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click the Output Media icon to output. .....................41538
No. 1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media. ...............................................41538
No. 1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting. .....................................41540
No. 1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written. Settings cannot be changed until the data is written to
media. ................................................................................................................................................................41540
No. 1542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ...................................41542
No. 1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? 41542
No. 1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ...................................................41544
No. 1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
Setting. ...............................................................................................................................................................41546
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. ..............................................................41546
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ........................................................41548
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. .................................................................................................................41548

4000 5/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550

No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. .................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? ..........................................................41550
No. 1552-#### The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. .........................................41552
Attention message: Pricing unit ........................................................................................... 41600
No. 1601-#### Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. ...............................................................41600
No. 1603-#### The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ...............................................................41602
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check .........................................................................................................41604
Attention message: NMC ..................................................................................................... 41620
No. 1621 Would you like to delete the order? .................................................................................................41620
No. 1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt? ...............................................................................41622
No. 1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to delete the order? ...................................................41634
No. 1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. .........................41636
No. 1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted. ................................................................41636
No. 1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted. ...........41638
No. 1639-#### Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted. ...................................................41638

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print Channel. .........................................................41640
No. 1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel. .......41642
No. 1643 The appropriate file was not found. .................................................................................................41642
No. 1644 Exif Information could not be read. .................................................................................................41644
No. 1645 Data is too large to read. ..................................................................................................................41644
No. 1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ...............................................................................................41646
No. 1647 The appropriate file was not found. .................................................................................................41646
No. 1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? 41648
No. 1649 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ...................................................41648
No. 1650 Data is too small to read. .................................................................................................................41650
No. 1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure enough space, then restart processing. ...................41656
No. 1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the calibration? ....................................................................41658
Attention message: Software upgrade ............................................................................ 41800_1
No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. .................................................................................................41800_1
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 1900-#### It was not registered as an option. ..........................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. ......................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ...........................41902_1
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ...................................................................................41902_1
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . .......................................................................................41904
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. .............................................................................................................41904
No. 1909 Title was not set. ..............................................................................................................................41908
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ...............................................................................41910
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ............................................................................................................41910
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ............................................................................41912
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? ....................................................41912
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ....................................41914
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. ..................................................................41922
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ...............................................41922
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". ....................41926
No. 1927-#### Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. ............................................41926
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. .........................................................41932

4000 6/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Attention message: Compact archive unit ........................................................................... 43370

No. 3371-#### Could not execute Hold On Save. ..........................................................................................43370
No. 3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save. ...........................................................................43372
No. 3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? .............43372
No. 3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. Confirm the setting. .............................................43374
No. 3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process. ...............................43374
Attention message: Edit ....................................................................................................... 44000
No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? ...........................................................................................................44000
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. ...........................................................................44002
No. 4003-#### Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ............................................................44002
No. 4004-#### Graphics are too large to insert. ..............................................................................................44004
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
............................................................................................................................................................................44006
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. ..........................................................................44006
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. ................................................44008
No. 4010 Specify the image area. ....................................................................................................................44010

4 Troubleshooting
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. ............................................................................44014
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. ..............................................................................................................44014
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small. ........................................44016
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? ...........................................................................................44018
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ........44018
No. 4020-#### Failed to write the file. ...........................................................................................................44020
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. ......................................................................................................................44020
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. ..........................................................44022
No. 4024 Select the layer. ................................................................................................................................44024
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used. ..........................................44024
No. 4026 The image size is too large to insert. ...............................................................................................44026
No. 4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? .........................................................44026
No. 4028 Failed to export the Image Save File. ..............................................................................................44028
No. 4029 The drive is empty. ..........................................................................................................................44028
No. 4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data. ..............................................................................44030
No. 4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk. .....................................................................................44030
No. 4032 Template size is too large to read. ...................................................................................................44032
No. 4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template. .................44032
No. 4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area. ........................................................................44034
No. 4035 Additional phrases could not be saved. ...........................................................................................44034
No. 4036 The image size is too small to insert. ...............................................................................................44036
No. 4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite? .................................................44036
No. 4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? 44038
No. 4039 Image size during editing is too large. .............................................................................................44038
No. 4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field. ..............................................44040
No. 4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used. ............................................................................44040
No. 4042 Single Form is not positioned. .........................................................................................................44042
No. 4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area. ................................................................................44042
No. 4044 Single Form is overlapped. ..............................................................................................................44044
No. 4045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned. ..............................................................44044
No. 4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled. .........................44046
No. 4047 The selected font was not found. .....................................................................................................44046
No. 4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print. ...........................................................................44048
No. 4049 No more items can be added. ...........................................................................................................44048

4000 7/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ...............................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB .............................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ............................................................................45503
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD .......................................45504
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ........................................45504
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB .....................................45504
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ....................................................................45507
No. 5508[N] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................45508
No. 5508[SM] The processing solution level is too low. ................................................................................45508
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ............................................................................................45508
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ......................................................................................................45510
No. 5511[N] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................45511
No. 5513[N] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................45511
No. 5515[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ..................................................................................45511

4 Troubleshooting
No. 5516[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5517[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5518[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ..................................................................................45511
No. 5511[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ...................................................................................45511
No. 5513[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. BF ....................................................................................45511
No. 5515[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ...............................................................................45511
No. 5516[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ...............................................................................45511
No. 5517[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ...............................................................................45511
No. 5518[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ...............................................................................45511
Error: Processor 2 ............................................................................................................... 45519
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ..................................................................................................................45519
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ...................................................................................................................45519
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ................................................................................................................45519
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ..............................................................................................................45522
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ............................................................................................45524
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ............................................................................................45524
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ........................................................................................45524
No. 5527 Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ........................................................................................45524
No. 5528 Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ........................................................................................45524
No. 5529 Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ........................................................................................45524
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. .............................................................45532
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ....................................................................................45532
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ................................................................................45534_1
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ............................................................................................................45536
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ..........................................................................................................45538
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ............................................................................................................45542
No. 5549-#### Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ........................................................45548
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ................................................................................................................45550

4000 8/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700

No. 5700-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A .................................................................45700
No. 5701-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B .................................................................45700
No. 5702-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C .................................................................45700
No. 5703-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ................................................................45700
No. 5704-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .................................................................45700
No. 5705-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ..................................................................45700
No. 5706-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ...................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45708
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45708
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................45710
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................45710
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................45710
No. 5713[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...............................................................................45710
No. 5714[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...............................................................................45710
No. 5715[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...............................................................................45710

4 Troubleshooting

4000 9/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: Printer ........................................................................................................ 46012

No. 6012-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ..................................................................................46012
No. 6013-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..................................................................................46012
No. 6014-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................46014
No. 6015-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ..............................................................................46014
No. 6016-#### Paper Cutter operation error. ..................................................................................................46016
No. 6017-#### Paper has jammed in the printer section. ................................................................................46016
No. 6021-#### Paper remains in the printer section. ......................................................................................46020
No. 6056-#### Printer system error. ...............................................................................................................46056
No. 6073-#### Synchronous Sensor error. .....................................................................................................46072
No. 6074 B Laser control error. .......................................................................................................................46074
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ......................................................................................................................46074
No. 6076-#### Polygon Mirror control error. .................................................................................................46076
No. 6077-#### Interlock error. ........................................................................................................................46076
No. 6081-#### Backup data error. Printer .....................................................................................................46080
No. 6082-#### Setup error. .............................................................................................................................46082

4 Troubleshooting
No. 6087-#### Laser Control PCB system error. .......................................................................................46086_1
No. 6101-#### Paper Hold Motor operation error. .........................................................................................46100
No. 6104-#### Printer Door is open. ..............................................................................................................46104
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46104
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46104
No. 6107-#### R Laser temperature is out of range. ......................................................................................46107
No. 6135-#### Arm Unit 1 operation error. ....................................................................................................46134
No. 6136-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ..............................................46136
No. 6137-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. ..............................................46136
No. 6144-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ...................................................46144_1
No. 6146-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. ..........................................................................46146
No. 6147-#### Turn Motor operation error. ...................................................................................................46146
No. 6148-#### Paper End Sensor A error. ......................................................................................................46148
No. 6149-#### Paper End Sensor B error. ......................................................................................................46148
No. 6151-#### Paper Loading Sensor error. ...................................................................................................46151
No. 6152-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ............................................................................46152
No. 6153-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .........................................................................46152
No. 6154-#### Paper Supply End Sensor error. .............................................................................................46154
No. 6155-#### Exposure Start Sensor error. ...................................................................................................46154
No. 6156-#### Exposure End Sensor error. ....................................................................................................46156
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ....................................................46172
No. 6177-#### Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ..................................................................................46176
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ...........................................................................................................46178

4000 10/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: Scanner ...................................................................................................... 46302

No. 6303-#### Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. ............................................................................................46302
No. 6304-#### Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. ............................................................................................46304
No. 6305-#### Scanner Focus operation error. ...............................................................................................46304
No. 6306-#### Scanner IRIS operation error. .................................................................................................46306
No. 6309-#### Scanner change of light error. ................................................................................................46308
No. 6311-#### Scanner data error. ..................................................................................................................46310
No. 6319-#### Backup data error. Scanner AFC ...........................................................................................46318
No. 6321-#### Focus auto adjustment error. ..................................................................................................46320
No. 6322-#### Scanner input balance error. ...............................................................................................46322_1
No. 6324 F stop value range error. ..................................................................................................................46324
No. 6327-#### Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. ................................................46326
No. 6329-#### Analog setting communication error. .................................................................................46328_1
No. 6330-#### Digital setting communication error. ..................................................................................46330_1
No. 6331-#### Line scanning communication error. ..................................................................................46330_1
No. 6332-#### Light Source adjustment error. ...........................................................................................46332_1

4 Troubleshooting
No. 6333-#### The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error. ............................................................46332_1
No. 6336-#### Scanner Zoom operation error. ...............................................................................................46336

4000 11/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................. 46400

No. 6400-#### Perforation Sensor error. ........................................................................................................46400
No. 6401-#### Loading Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46400
No. 6402-#### Ready Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46402
No. 6403-#### 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ...............................................................................46402
No. 6404-#### 240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ...............................................................................46404
No. 6405-#### 110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ...............................................................................46404
No. 6406-#### 120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ...............................................................................46406
No. 6407-#### Spool Key operation error. .....................................................................................................46406
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. ..........................................................................................................46408
No. 6409-#### The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..................................................................................46408
No. 6410-#### Film Sensor error. ...................................................................................................................46410
No. 6411-#### Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. .............................................46410
No. 6412-#### 135 DX Sensor 1 error. ...........................................................................................................46412
No. 6413-#### 135 DX Sensor 2 error. ...........................................................................................................46412
No. 6414-#### 135 DX Sensor 3 error. ...........................................................................................................46412

4 Troubleshooting
No. 6415-#### 135 DX Sensor 4 error. ...........................................................................................................46412
No. 6416-#### 240 DX Sensor 1 error. ...........................................................................................................46416
No. 6417-#### 240 DX Sensor 2 error. ...........................................................................................................46416
No. 6423 Auto focus error. ..............................................................................................................................46422
No. 6424-#### Mount Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................46424
No. 6425-#### Mount detection error. ............................................................................................................46424
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ..............................................................................................................46426
No. 6429-#### System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) ......................................................................46428_1
No. 6431 Auto focus error. ..............................................................................................................................46430
No. 6432-#### Mount Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................46432
No. 6433-#### Mount detection error. ............................................................................................................46432
No. 6434-#### Mount detection (inlet) error. .................................................................................................46434
No. 6435-#### Mount insertion operation error. ............................................................................................46434
No. 6436-#### Mount elevator operation error. ..............................................................................................46436
No. 6437-#### Mount eject operation error. ...................................................................................................46436
No. 6438-#### 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..........................................................................................46438
No. 6439-#### The film strip is too short for processing. ..............................................................................46438
No. 6441-#### The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..................................................................................46440
No. 6442-#### The perforation of the film may be broken. ...........................................................................46442
No. 6443 Move Table operation error. ............................................................................................................46444
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position. .............................................................................................................46444
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................. 46502
No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. ...................................................................................................46502
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. ........................................................................................................46504
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. ...................................................................................................46504
No. 6506-#### Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ........................................................46506
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 6551-#### Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ...........................................................................46550
No. 6552-#### Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit .....................................................................................46552
No. 6554-#### Calibration Plate advance error. .............................................................................................46554

4000 12/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4000

Error message: Pricing unit ............................................................................................. 46600_1

No. 6600-#### Pricing Unit communication error. .....................................................................................46600_1
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ..................................................................................................46600_1
No. 6602-#### Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ...................................................................................46602_1
No. 6603-#### Backup data error. PU .......................................................................................................46602_1
Error: NMC .......................................................................................................................... 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. ...................................................................................................46620
Error message: Software upgrade ....................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...............................46802
Error: Main ....................................................................................................................... 46900_1
No. 6900-## Main control system error. .....................................................................................................46900_1
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error. ........................................................................................46900_1
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error. ...............................................................................................46902_1
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? .........................................................46906_1
No. 6907-#### The file was not found. .......................................................................................................46906_1

4 Troubleshooting
No. 6908-#### Processing response error. ..................................................................................................46908_1
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. ....................................................................................46908_1
No. 6913-#### System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ............................................................46912
No. 6916-#### PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. ..............................................................................46916
No. 6918-#### Failed to start the DLS. ...........................................................................................................46918
No. 6920 Hardware Key could not be detected. ..........................................................................................46920_1
No. 6921-#### PCB error. ...........................................................................................................................46920_1
No. 6922-#### Device control error. ...............................................................................................................46922
No. 6925 PC-Laser Interface PCB control error. ........................................................................................46924_1
Error: Compact Archive Unit ................................................................................................ 48360
No. 8361 Archive File read error. ....................................................................................................................48360
No. 8362 Archive File write error. ..................................................................................................................48362
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. .........................................................................................48362
No. 8364-#### Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ..................................................................................48364
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
No. 9000-#### Edit mode System error. ........................................................................................................49000
No. 9001-#### Edit mode Information file error. ..........................................................................................49000
No. 9002-#### Edit mode Image data error. ..................................................................................................49002
No. 9003-#### Edit mode Image read error. ..................................................................................................49002

4000 13/13
Distributed by: [Link]

4001
Error and attention message regulation
Error and attention message regulation

Classification of errors and

attention messages

! Attention message
The message informed through the normal processing appears
as an attention message.
• When the replacement of consumable parts is necessary
• When the judgment of operator is necessary
• When a simple operation mistake has been made

! Error
The message informed when some abnormal error occurs
appears as an error.
• When there is something wrong with the machine
• When a serious operation mistake has been made,
performing the operation not allowed to be performed

4. Troubleshooting
! Error/Attention message number
Error/Attention message number are separated to main and
suffix numbers. In case of 1234-0001, 1234 is the main
number and 0001 is the suffix number.
Main number
It distinguishes the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content of
the main number and the countermeasure.

Main number
Error 0001 to 4999
Attention message 5000 to 9999

Suffix number
It distinguishes error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition
judging with the content of the suffix number and performs
the diagnosis.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, refer to Descriptions of
suffix number.
☞ 4002

4001 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4002
Error and attention message regulation

Suffix number display For example, 3 is for the multiple condition of 1 and 2,
and 5 is for that of 4 and 1.

! The types of suffix number display ! How to determine the condition from
the total of bit operation
The procedure for bringing up the suffix number is classified
in the following three types. This section describes the procedure of determining the target
• Without suffix number condition from the displayed suffix number without the
knowledge of the bit operation theory.
• Displaying the condition with suffix number
• Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number
1. Divide the displayed suffix number into each
digit.
! Without suffix number
NOTE
When the occurring condition is single • When the displayed suffix number is 13, it is
Example 1 divided into 1 and 3.

Suffix Condition 2. Replace them with the bits (1, 2, 4, 8)

number according to the object table below.
- The cover is opened. NOTE
• 1 → 1, 3 → 2 and 1

4. Troubleshooting
! Displaying the condition with suffix number (Object table)
When the occurring condition is multiple and only one of
Suffix number display Suffix number (bit)
them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number
appears with four digits. F 8 4 2 1
E 8 4 2
Example 2
D 8 4 1
Suffix Condition C 8 4
number
B 8 2 1
0001 The sensor has not turned to DARK.
A 8 2
0002 The sensor has not turned to LIGHT.
9 8 1
8 8
! Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix
number 7 4 2 1
6 4 2
When the occurring condition is multiple and some of them
are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total 5 4 1
of the target suffix numbers (bit) appears. 4 4
NOTE 3 2 1
• The bit operation value appears by hexadecimal digit. 2 2
Example 3 1 1
0
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
(bit)
• It can be calculated by replacing the suffix number
0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. of hexadecimal digit with decimal and assigning it
0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. from the larger number.
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect. 3. Add 0 to the second digit or later to make the
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect. number of digits same as the original one.
0010 The sensor 5 does not detect. NOTE
• 1→10 (second digit), 2 and 1 are remained (first
NOTE digit).
• When the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects,
• For the second digit, add 0 once. For the third
0005 appears. When all the sensors are the objects, 001F
digit, add 0 two times.
appears.
• The suffix number (bit) assigned to each condition is
necessarily consisted of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0.
As for the bit display, the other 3, 5, 6, 7... are used for
the multiple conditions.

4002 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4002
Error and attention message regulation

(Example of determining) with the decimal digit and three digits with the
hexadecimal digit.
13 4C0 Thus, the number of digits can be less when there are
↓ ↓ more combinations which can be expressed as one digit.
Divide into each digit.
NOTE
1 3 4 C (12) 0
• A to F of the hexadecimal digit are handled as a number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
in the operation.
Replace with the suffix number of each condition.
(Conversion table)
1 2, 1 4 8, 4 None
Return the number of digits by adding 0. Hexadecimal Decimal numeral Binary number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ numeral
10 2, 1 400 80, 40 None 0 0 0
↓ ↓ 1 1 1
10, 2 and 1 400, 80 and 40 are the objects. 2 2 10
are the objects.
3 3 11
4 4 100
4. Check each condition by the target suffix 5 5 101
number (bit), and specify the occurring
6 6 110
condition.

4. Troubleshooting
7 7 111
NOTE
8 8 1000
• When the suffix number of 13 appears in the
condition of example 3, the numbers of 1, 2 and 9 9 1001
10 are the objects of the suffix numbers (bit). A 10 1010
From this, the occurring condition is recognized as B 11 1011
The sensors 1, 2 and 5 do not detect.
C 12 1100
Example 3 D 13 1101
Object Suffix Condition E 14 1110
number F 15 1111
(bit) 10 16 10000
$ 0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. FF 255 11111111
$ 0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. 3FF 1023 1111111111
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect.
Bit operation
$ 0010 The sensor 5 does not detect.
• When assigning sensor 1 of example 3 to the first digit
and sensor 2 to the second digit as in order, the bit
NOTE operation value is as follows in the case that only each
• To know more details of the bit operation mechanism, condition is ON.
refer to the following explanatory notes. This hexadecimal digit value is assigned as the bit of
single condition.
Digit When multiple conditions are the objects, the total bit
• Binary digit is the basic value of computer calculation assigned to each condition appears.
and expresses the state of ON and OFF of the signal.
Condition Suffix number (bit)
A digit of the binary digit is called as bit. It expresses two
types of numbers, 0 and 1, as one digit. Hexadecim Decimal Binary
When there are two types of bit (condition), it is al numeral numeral number
expressed by the binary digit with two digits and called as Sensor 1 1 1 1
2 bit. Sensor 2 2 2 10
• Decimal digit is generally used to express ten kinds of Sensor 3 4 4 100
numbers, 0 to 9, as one digit.
Sensor 4 8 8 1000
The combinations expressed as one digit are ten kinds.
Sensor 5 10 16 10000
• Hexadecimal digit is used to express 16 kinds of
numbers, 0 to F, as one digit. The combinations
expressed as one digit are 16 kinds.
• Each digit can be converted into other digits.
When there are ten types of conditions, it is 10 bit (ten
digits) by expressing with the binary digit, four digits

4002 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4002
Error and attention message regulation

(Example) When the errors of sensors 1, 2 and 5

have occurred at the same time
Condition Suffix number (bit)
Hexadecim Decimal Binary
al numeral numeral number
Sensors 1, 2 and 5 13 19 10011

4. Troubleshooting

4002 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4]

Described for each model

The described place varies depending on the type of machine. See below for the description for each type of machine.
• For S-2/3, refer to ☞ 4200.

! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each connector disconnected
(for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not connected.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a connector is
disconnected from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

4. Troubleshooting
! Scanner section
Reference
☞ AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB
☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3) ☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)
☞ Scanner unit

! AFC/scanner control PCB

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector (J17). No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P2 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector (J16). No. 1405-19 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P3 Connects to the PM driver The film carrier does not feed the film.
(film feed motor). The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P5 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
driver PCB.
J/P6 Connects to the scanner unit. The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . . while scanning.
J/P9 Inputs the power supply (+5 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
V-1) from the multi power
supply (scanner) and the
power supply (+24 V-1) from
scanner power supply 2.
J/P11 Connects to the AFC/scanner No.1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted.S-2/3 occurs.
driver PCB. After restarting, No.6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
Scanner type S-2/3 is displayed onscreen during System Version Check.

4190 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P18 Connects to the scanner unit. The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
IMPORTANT
• Zoom home sensor does not detect the scanner, causing zoom motor to overrun
and emit a strange sound. Zoom motor stops after a specified length of time.
The scanner will function normally if it is rebooted and initial operations are
performed after the connectors are plugged in properly.
J/P19 Connects to the AFC/scanner The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
driver PCB. LED Thermosensor temperature at Input Check constantly reads 1.2° C; temperature does
not change.
J/P20 ARCNET No.6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. scanner AFC occurs soon after No.1014
Connecting to D-ICE control The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears.
PCB
QSS-33
ARCNET After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was displayed, the
Connected to the PC-scanner buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. scanner
interface PCB AFC occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
(3300 and 33SD)
J/P21 ARCNET The buzzer sounds after No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . .
Connecting to D-ICE control appears, and then No.6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. D-ICE control PCB
PCB occurs.
QSS-33
ARCNET After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was displayed, the
Connected to the PC-scanner buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. scanner
interface PCB AFC occurs.
(3300 and 33SD)

! AFC/scanner driver PCB

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P26 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P27 Inputs power (+36 V-1) from LED does not light while the Order Display is onscreen.
scanner power supply 1. No.6332-0007 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
B, G, R LED do not light during Output Check.
J/P28 Connects to control box Control box cooling fans stops.
cooling fans.
J/P29 Connects to the scanner unit. No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
J/P30 Supplies power (+5 V-2) to No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
the scanner unit.
J/P33 Connects to the AFC/scanner No.1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. S-2/3 occurs.
control PCB. After rebooting the system, No.6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
appears.
Scanner type S-2/3 is displayed onscreen during System Version Check.
J/P37 Connects to the film carrier No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
lock sensor
J/P38 Connects to the film ready The film ready lamp turns off.
lamp.
J/P40 Connects to the power supply The power supply cooling fan stops.
cooling fan.
J/P41 Supplies power (+36 V-4) to No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
the film carrier relay
connector (J17).

4190 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P42 Supplies power (+5 V-2, +36 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-4) to the PM driver (film The film carrier does not feed the film.
feed motor).
J/P43 Supplies power (+24 V-2) to The film cleaner stops operation.
the film cleaner.
J/P44 Connects to LED cooling fan LED cooling fan 2 stops.
2
J/P46 Connects to the film carrier Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
relay connector (J16) (GND).
J/P56 Connects to BG LED Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
(heater).
J/P57 Connects to LED cooling fan LED cooling fan 1 stops.
1
J/P64 Connects the ND filter No.6332-0007 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
solenoid.
J/P65 Input the power supply (+5 No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
V-1) from multi power
supply (scanner) , (+36 V-1)

4. Troubleshooting
from scanner power supply 1
and (+24 V−1) from scanner
power supply 2.
J/P66 Connects to the AFC/scanner The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
control PCB. LED Thermosensor temperature at Input Check constantly reads 1.2° C; temperature does
not change.
J/P79 Connecting the LED light The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
source unit
J/P70 Connects to BG No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
LED(thermosensor ).
J/P140 Connects to LED(B). When carrying out light source update, No.6322-0003 Scanner input balance error. appears.
B LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P141 Connects to LED(G). No. 6332-0001 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
G LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P142 Connects to LED(R1). No. 6322-0001 Scanner input balance error. occurs during light source update.
R1 LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P143 Connects to R LED(heater). Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
J/P144 Connects to LED(IR). No. 6322-0004 Scanner input balance error. occurs during light source update.

! Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P90 AC power supply input The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P91 Supplies power (+36 V-1) to The film ready lamp blinks in red.
AFC/scanner driver PCB. No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.

! Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P92 AC power supply input No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
J/P93 Supplies power (+24 V-1) to No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
AFC/scanner driver PCB and No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
AFC/scanner control PCB.

4190 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P94 AC power supply input No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
J/P95 Supplies power (+15 V-1) to No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
the scanner unit and Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
AFC/scanner driver PCB.

! PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P127 Connects to the AFC/scanner The film carrier does not feed the film.
control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P128 Inputs the power supply (+5 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-2, +36 V-4) from the The film carrier does not feed the film.

4. Troubleshooting
AFC/scanner driver PCB.
J/P129 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp lights in green.
relay connector (J17). The film carrier does not feed the film.

! Scanner unit
Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Connector No. Symptom

J/P60 Connects to the PC-scanner After starting the scanning, the message One moment please... appears and it does not change.
interface PCB(LVDS). NO is selected and scanning can be stopped.
(3300 and 33SD)
Connects to the D-ICE The system starts up normally. No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation
PCBs(LVDS) error. occurs when film scanning is started.
QSS-33
J/P62 Connects the AFC/scanner The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . . while scanning.
J/P69 control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
IMPORTANT
• Zoom home sensor does not detect the scanner, causing zoom motor to overrun
and emit a strange sound. Zoom motor stops after a specified length of time.
The scanner will function normally if it is rebooted and initial operations are
performed after the connectors are plugged in properly.
J/P67 Connect to the AFC/scanner No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
J/P68 driver PCB. No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.

4190 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/S-3]

Described for each model

The described place varies depending on the type of machine. See below for the description for each type of system.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ 4190.

! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each connector disconnected
(for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not connected.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a connector is
disconnected from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

4. Troubleshooting
! Scanner section
Reference
☞ AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB
☞ LED driver PCB ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)
☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1) ☞ Scanner unit

! AFC/scanner control PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 4-1 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector (J17). No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P2 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector (J16). No. 1405-19 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P3 Connects to the PM driver The film carrier does not feed the film.
(film feed motor). The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P5 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-1 No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
driver PCB.
J/P6 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 4-1 The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . .
while scanning.
J/P7 For the LED light source unit ☞ S 1-6 The type of the LED light source unit is not displayed in System Version
types 1, 2 and 3: Connects to Check.
the R LED relay connector
J/P168.
J/P9 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ S 1-2 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
V-1) from the multi power
supply (scanner) and the
power supply (+24 V-1) from
scanner power supply 2.
J/P18 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 12-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
J/P19 Connects to the LED driver ☞ S 12-3 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
PCB. being Adjusted.

4200 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P20 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-1 No.6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. scanner AFC occurs
Connecting to D-ICE control soon after No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . .
PCB appears.
QSS-33
ARCNET After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was
Connected to the PC-scanner displayed, the buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET
interface PCB communication error. scanner AFC occurs.
(3300 and 33SD)
J/P21 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-1 The buzzer sounds after No.1014 The system is being initialized, one
Connecting to D-ICE control moment please. . . appears, and then No.6901-2000 ARCNET
PCB communication error. D-ICE control PCB occurs.
QSS-33
ARCNET After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was
Connected to the PC-scanner displayed, the buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET
interface PCB communication error. scanner AFC occurs.
(3300 and 33SD)

! AFC/scanner driver PCB

4. Troubleshooting
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P26 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-1 No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P27 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ S 1-2 No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
V-1) from the multi power ☞ S 12-1
supply (scanner).
J/P28 Inputs the power supply (+36 The film ready lamp turns off.
V-1) from scanner power The film carrier does not feed the film.
supply 1 and the power
supply (+24 V-1) from
scanner power supply 2.
J/P29 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 12-2 No. 6306-0002 Scanner IRIS operation error. occurs.
J/P30 Supplies power (+5 V-2) to No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
the scanner unit.
J/P34 Jumper connector ☞ S 1-5 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P35 Jumper connector The film ready lamp blinks in red.
The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P38 Connects the film ready lamp ☞ S 12-1 The film ready lamp turns off.
and film carrier lock sensor. No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P40 Connects the power supply Power supply cooling fan or control box cooling fan 1, 2 stops.
cooling fan, control cooling
fan 1, 2.
J/P41 Supplies power (+36 V-4) to ☞ S 1-8 No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
the film carrier relay
connector (J17).
J/P42 Supplies power (+5 V-2, +36 ☞ S 1-3 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-4) to the PM driver (film The film carrier does not feed the film.
feed motor).
J/P43 Supplies power (+24 V-2) to ☞ S 1-5 The film cleaner stops operation.
the film cleaner.
J/P46 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 1-8 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
relay connector (J16) (GND).

4200 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! LED driver PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P56 Connecting the LED light ☞ S 12-4 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
source unit being Adjusted.
J/P57 Connects LED cooling fans 1 LED cooling fans 1 and 2 stop operations.
and 2.
J/P64 Connects the ND filter Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
solenoid.
J/P65 Input the power supply (+5 ☞ S 1-2 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
V−-1) from multi power being Adjusted.
supply (scanner) , (+36 V−-1)
from scanner power supply 1
and (+24 V−1) from scanner
power supply 2.
J/P66 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-3 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
control PCB. being Adjusted.
J/P79 Connecting the LED light The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
source unit being Adjusted.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P70 Connecting the LED light ☞ S 12-4 No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
source unit error. occurs.

! Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P90 AC power supply input ☞ S 1-1 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
☞ S 1-2 No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P91 Supplies power (+36 V-1) to ☞ S 1-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
AFC/scanner driver PCB and No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
LED driver PCB.

! Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P92 AC power supply input ☞ S 1-1 No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
☞ S 1-2 error. occurs.
J/P93 Supplies power (+24 V-1) to ☞ S 1-2 No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
AFC/scanner driver PCB, error. occurs.
AFC/scanner control PCB
and LED driver PCB.

! Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P94 AC power supply input ☞ S 1-1 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
☞ S 1-2 Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
J/P95 Supplies power (+15 V-1) to ☞ S 1-2 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
the scanner unit , and (+5 V- Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
1) to AFC/scanner driver
PCB and LED driver PCB.

4200 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P127 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 4-1 The film carrier does not feed the film.
control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P128 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ S 1-8 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-2, +36 V-4) from the ☞ S 4-1 The film carrier does not feed the film.
AFC/scanner driver PCB.
J/P129 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 4-1 The film ready lamp lights in green.
relay connector (J17). The film carrier does not feed the film.

! Scanner unit
Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P60 Connected to the PC-scanner ☞ - System After starting the scanning, the message One moment please... appears and
interface PCB connection it does not change. NO is selected and scanning can be stopped.
(LVDS) diagram

4. Troubleshooting
(3300 and 33SD)
Connects to the D-ICE The system starts up normally. No.6822-0011 Image Processing PCB
PCBs(LVDS) Image data operation error. occurs when film scanning is started.
(QSS-33)
J/P62 Connects the AFC/scanner ☞ S 1-4 The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . .
control PCB. while scanning.
J/P69 ☞ S 12-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
J/P67 Connect to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-2 No. 6306-0002 Scanner IRIS operation error. occurs.
J/P68 driver PCB. No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.

4200 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section)

! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each connector disconnected
(for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not connected.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a connector is
disconnected from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

! Printer section

4. Troubleshooting
Reference
☞ Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071)
☞ Laser control PCB ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1
☞ Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3
☞ Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ Laser I/O PCB
☞ B laser driver ☞ G laser driver
☞ CVP PCB ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3)
☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10) ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12)
☞ Laser power supply 1 (PS17) ☞ Laser power supply 2 (PS16)
☞ B-AOM driver ☞ G-AOM driver
☞ R-AOM driver ☞ BZ−PC I/O PCB*1
☞ PC-laser interface PCB ☞ PC-scanner interface PCB
*1. The BZ−PC I/O PCB is not installed on QSS-3301SD/3302SD.

! Colorimeter Control PCB

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P180 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-4 No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
(+24 V) from laser power
supply 1.
J/P181 Connects the paper sensor ☞ LPP 2-7 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate
(LED PCB). advance error. occurs.
J/P182 Connects the paper sensor 1 ☞ LPP 2-7 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate
and 2 (detection PCB). advance error. occurs.
J/P183 Connects to the colorimeter. ☞ LPP 2-1 No. 6903-0002 Serial communication error. Colorimeter occurs.
J/P184 Connects to the PC. ☞ LPP 2-1 No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
☞ LPP 2-2
J/P185 Connects the paper advance ☞ LPP 2-7 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0001 Calibration Plate
motor. advance error. occurs.
J/P186 Connects the pressure When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0006 Calibration Plate
change solenoid. advance error. occurs.

4202_1 1/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P200 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LPP 3-2 No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
PCB 1.
J/P201 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LPP 3-3 No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
PCB 2. No.6014-0001 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A occurs.
No.6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
J/P202 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LPP 3-8 No.6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
PCB 3. ☞ LPP 3-9
J/P203 Connects the dual paper ☞ LPP 3-10 No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P204 Connects the paper magazine ☞ LPP 3-1 The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor A are DARK.)
code sensor A.
J/P205 Connects to the laser control ☞ LPP 2-6 The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
PCB. start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P207 Connects to the BZ−PC I/O ☞ LPP 2-1 The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after

4. Troubleshooting
PCB.*1 starting up the PC forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P210 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
V) from printer power supply alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
1.
J/P211 Connects to the CVP PCB. ☞ LPP 3-15 The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P212 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-1 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connecting to the laser ☞ LPP 2-2 alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
control PCB
J/P213 ARCNET No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connecting to the laser alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
control PCB
J/P214 ARCNET No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connects to the PC-laser alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
interface PCB or ARCNET-
HUB PCB
J/P215 ARCNET No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connects to the PC-laser alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
interface PCB or ARCNET-
HUB PCB
J/P216 ARCNET The buzzer sounds intermittently for a while after No.1014 The system is
Connects to the processor being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, and then No.6901-2000
control PCB. ARCNET communication error. D-ICE control PCB occurs. The alarm
cannot be stopped.
J/P217 ARCNET No.6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs soon
Connects to the processor after No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . .
control PCB. appears.
J/P218 Connecting paper magazine ☞ LPP 3-10 The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor B are DARK.)
code sensor B

*1. Not equipped when the printer control PCB (J391071) has been installed.
*2. The printer control PCB (J390944) is not installed on QSS-3301SD/3302SD.

4202_1 2/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Printer control PCB (J391071)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P2200*1 Connects to the SW/LED ☞ LPP 2-1 The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
PCB. starting up the PC forcibly.
J/P2201*1 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P2203*1 Inputs the power supply The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
(+24 V) from printer I/O starting up the PC forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
PCB 1.

*1. Only the Printer control PCB (J391071) is connected.

! Laser control PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1501 Connects to the B-AOM ☞ LPP 3-13 The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.

4. Troubleshooting
driver.
J/P1503 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
driver.
J/P1505 Inputs the power supply (+12 ☞ LPP 1-3 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
V-1) from laser power adjusted. (U).
supply 2.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
V-3) from laser power
supply 2.
J/P1508 Connects to the B, G and R- ☞ LPP 2-6 The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6073
AOM drivers. Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP
mode.
J/P1511 Connects to the laser I/O ☞ LPP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
PCB. adjusted. (R).
J/P1512 Connects to the laser I/O The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
PCB. start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
The order display shows the message Insert negative., and Outputting. .
. appears when proceeding into the Functions and does not allow to
operate.
J/P1513 Connects to the PC-laser ☞ LPP 2-2 The system starts up normally. When printing is started from the PJP
interface PCB (LVDS). mode, then No.6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs, but
the error can be released and the print started, while the print of the 1st
sheet had stopped in the exposure standby position, it does not progress to
the next. The 2nd print is cut and stops in the receiving position of arm 1
and the paper was not rewound to the paper magazine, and it has stopped
in the state where it was sent out.
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LPP 3-11 The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6073
Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP
mode.
J/P1516 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-1 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connects the printer control alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
PCB.
J/P1517 ARCNET No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
Connects the printer control alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
PCB.
J/P1519 Connects to the B and G ☞ LPP 3-14 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
laser drivers. adjusted.

4202_1 3/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P1520 Connects to the printer ☞ LPP 2-6 The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
control PCB. start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
The order display shows the message Insert negative., and Outputting. .
. appears when proceeding into the Functions and does not allow to
operate.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit and ☞ LPP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
connects the inner adjusted. (U).
thermosensor.

! Printer I/O PCB 1

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P233 Supplies power (+5 V, +24 ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6016-0005 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
V, +36 V) to printer I/O ☞ LPP 2-3 No.6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P234 Connects exposure advance ☞ LPP 2-4 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation

4. Troubleshooting
motor 1, 2 and exposure ☞ LPP 3-6 error. occurs.
advance pressure change
motor 1, 2.
J/P235 Connects the zigzagging ☞ LPP 2-4 No.6135-0002 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
correction sensor (right and ☞ LPP 3-6 No. 6021-0006 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
left), exposure advance
No.1405-01 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
pressure change sensor 1, 2,
the exposure start sensor and
the exposure end sensor.
J/P236 Connects to the printer ☞ LPP 2-4 No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P237 Connects paper magazine ☞ LPP 3-1 Paper magazine lamp A does not light.
lamp A and the inner cooling The inner cooling fan does not operate.
fan.
J/P238 Connects the counter The counter does not operate.
(option).
J/P239 Connects to the laser I/O ☞ LPP 3-2 The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
PCB. start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
The order display shows the message Insert negative., and Outputting. . .
appears when proceeding into the Functions and does not allow to operate.
J/P240 Connects the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 1, 2).
J/P241 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ LPP 1-5 No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
V) from printer power
supply 1.
J/P242 Inputs the power supply No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
(+24 V) from printer power error. occurs.
supply 2.
J/P243 Connects the interlock relay. ☞ LPP 3-2 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
error. occurs.
J/P245 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-5 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
(+36 V) from printer power Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
supply 3.
J/P246 Supplies power (+5 V, +36 ☞ LPP 1-5 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
V) to the dual paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
magazine PCB.

4202_1 4/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P247 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-4 The PC does not start automatically.
(+24 V) from laser power Printer control box cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 do not operate.
supply 1.
No.1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs after starting up the PC
forcibly.
J/P248 Printer control PCB The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
(J390944): Supplies the starting up the PC forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
power (+24 V-4) to the BZ−
PC I/O PCB.
Printer control PCB
(J391071): Supplies the
power (+24 V-4) to the
printer control PCB.
J/P249 Supplies power (+24 V-4) to Printer power supply cooling fan 1 does not operate.
printer power supply cooling
fan 1.
J/P250 Supplies power (+5 V, +24 ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6017-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
V) to printer I/O PCB 3. ☞ LPP 2-5

4. Troubleshooting
! Printer I/O PCB 2
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P258 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LPP 2-3 No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P259 Connects the cut home ☞ LPP 3-4 No.6101-0002 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor, cut end sensor, paper
loading sensor and paper end
sensor.
J/P260 Connects the paper hold ☞ LPP 3-3 No.6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and the paper hold
sensor
J/P261 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ LPP 2-3 No.6016-0005 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
V, +24 V, +36 V) from ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
printer I/O PCB 1.
J/P262 Connects paper advance ☞ LPP 3-3 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0002 Paper did not load. Paper
motor 1, 2 and the paper cut Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
motor.
J/P263 Connects the paper supply No. 6135-0001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
arm motor (right) (left).
J/P264 Paper supply end sensor ☞ LPP 3-4 No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.

! Printer I/O PCB 3

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P266 Connects the paper advance ☞ LPP 3-9 No.6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
pressure change sensor, turn
sensor and arm sensor.
J/P267 Connects to the printer control No.6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P268 Connects the lane select motor No.6145-0002 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
and the lane select sensor.
J/P269 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6017-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
V, +24 V) from printer I/O ☞ LPP 2-5
PCB 1.

4202_1 5/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical Symptom

circuit diagram
J/P270 Connects paper advance ☞ LPP 2-5 No.6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
motor 3, paper advance ☞ LPP 3-9
pressure change motor, turn
motor and paper advance arm
motor.

! Dual paper magazine PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P276 Connects paper magazine ☞ LPP 3-10 Paper magazine lamp B does not light.
lamp B.
J/P277 Connects printer door 3 No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
sensor.
J/P278 Connects to the printer No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P279 Connects paper end sensor B. No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P280 Inputs the power supply (+5 ☞ LPP 1-5 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
V, +36 V) from printer I/O ☞ LPP 2-4 Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
PCB 1.
J/P281 Connects paper supply motor ☞ LPP 2-4 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
A, B. ☞ LPP 3-10 Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.

! Laser I/O PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LPP 3-12 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
adjusted. (R).
J/P1534 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LPP 3-12 The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
PCB 1. ☞ LPP 2-6 start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
The order display shows the message Insert negative., and Outputting. . .
appears when proceeding into the Functions and does not allow to operate.
J/P1535 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-3 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
(+5 V-3) from laser power adjusted. (R).
supply 2.
J/P1536 Connects to the laser ☞ LPP 3-12 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
control PCB. adjusted. (R).
J/P1538 Connects to the laser ☞ LPP 3-11 The system starts up normally. The first paper stops around the exposure
control PCB. start position, though the paper is fed, and any error does not occur when
printing is started in the PJP mode.
The order display shows the message Insert negative., and Outputting. . .
appears when proceeding into the Functions and does not allow to operate.
J/P1539 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6076-0001 Polygon
Mirror control error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P1540 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LPP 3-12 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
adjusted. (R).
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-4 The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6076-0001 Polygon
(+24 V) from laser power Mirror control error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
supply 1.

4202_1 6/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P1542 Connects to the B-AOM ☞ LPP 3-2 The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
driver.
J/P1544 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
driver.
J/P1550 Inputs the power supply ☞ LPP 1-3 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
(+12 V-1) from laser power adjusted. (R).
supply 2.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit cooling fan 1, 2, laser control box cooling fan 1, 2 and 3, and
fan 1, 2, laser control box laser unit heater do not operate.
cooling fan 1, 2, 3 and laser Any malfunction in the operations does not occur on this condition.
unit heater.

! B laser driver
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring is already checked with B laser driver for the laser unit type B1.

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P1653 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LPP 3-14 The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser No.6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs.
control PCB. No.6179-0001 B/G Laser Output Unit error. occurs.
J/P1655 Inputs the power supply No.6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs.
(+5 V-3) from laser power
supply 2.

! G laser driver
NOTE
• Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring is already checked with G laser driver for the laser unit type B1.

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P1653 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LPP 3-14 The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser No.6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
control PCB. No.6179-0001 B/G Laser Output Unit error. occurs.
J/P1655 Inputs the power supply No.6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
(+5 V-3) from laser power
supply 2.

! CVP PCB
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P500 Connects to the printer ☞ LPP 2-8 The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Inputs the power supply The CVP unit does not operate.
(+24 V) from printer power
supply 3.
J/P502 Connects the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.

4202_1 7/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! Printer power supply 1 (PS3)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P313 Inputs the AC power ☞ LPP 1-1 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
supply from the main relay alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
PCB.
J/P328 Supplies power (+5 V) to ☞ LPP 1-5 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
the printer control PCB and alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
printer I/O PCB 1.

! Printer power supply 2 (PS10)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P317 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 3-2 Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P324 Supplies power (+24 V) to ☞ LPP 1-5 The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
the printer I/O PCB 1. Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P325 Supplies power (+24 V- The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
GND) to printer I/O PCB 1. Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.

! Printer power supply 3 (PS12)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P318 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 3-2 error. occurs.
J/P326 Supplies power (+36 V) to ☞ LPP 1-5 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
the printer I/O PCB 1. error. occurs.
J/P327 Supplies power (+36 V- No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
GND) to printer I/O PCB 1. error. occurs.

! Laser power supply 1 (PS17)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P314 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 The PC does not start automatically.
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 1-4 No.6903-0001 Serial communication error. colorimeter unit occurs after
starting up the PC forcibly.
J/P1614 Supplies power (+24 V) to ☞ LPP 1-4 The PC does not start automatically.
printer I/O PCB 1 and the No.6903-0001 Serial communication error. colorimeter unit occurs after
laser I/O PCB, the starting up the PC forcibly.
colorimeter control PCB
and the PU control PCB.
J/P1615 Supplies power (+24 V- The PC does not start automatically.
GND) to printer I/O PCB 1 No.6903-0001 Serial communication error. colorimeter unit occurs after
and the laser I/O PCB, the starting up the PC forcibly.
colorimeter control PCB
and the PU control PCB.

! Laser power supply 2 (PS16)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P310 Supplies the power to the ☞ LPP 1-1 No.1903-0001 Proceeding. One moment please. . . appears after No.6901-
laser I/O PCB (+24 V). ☞ LPP 1-3 0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER is released, and the next
operation cannot be performed.

4202_1 8/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P411 Supplies power (+5 V-3, ☞ LPP 1-3 No.1903-0001 Proceeding. One moment please. . . appears after No.6901-
+12 V-1) to the laser I/O 0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER is released, and the next
PCB and the laser control operation cannot be performed.
PCB, and power (+5 V-3)
to the B, G laser drivers.

! B-AOM driver
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1631 Connects to the laser ☞ LPP 3-13 The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
control PCB.
J/P1632 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1633 Connects to the laser I/O The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
PCB.
J/P1634 Connects to the laser The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
control PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
! G-AOM driver
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1636 Connects to the laser ☞ LPP 3-13 The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
control PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
J/P1638 Connects to the laser I/O The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
PCB.
J/P1639 Connects to the laser The system starts up normally. Green print is made when printing.
control PCB.

! R-AOM driver
Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P1641 Connects to the laser ☞ LPP 3-13 The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
control PCB.
J/P1642 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
J/P1643 Connects to the laser I/O The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
PCB.
J/P1644 Connects to the laser The system starts up normally. The print whose color is red only is made.
control PCB.

! BZ−PC I/O PCB*1

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P2200 Connects to the SW/LED ☞ LPP 2-1 The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
PCB. starting up the PC forcibly.
J/P2201 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P2202 Connects to the printer The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
control PCB. starting up the PC forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P2203 Inputs the power supply The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after
(+24 V) from printer I/O starting up the PC forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
PCB 1.

*1. The BZ−PC I/O PCB is not installed on QSS-3301SD/3302SD.

4202_1 9/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4202_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! PC-laser interface PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P73 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-2 After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . is
Connects to the printer displayed, No. 6901-2009 ARCNET communication error. Paper supply
control PCB or section Processor PC-scanner interface PCB occurs after a while. The
ARCNET-HUB PCB. alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
J/P74 ARCNET No.6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper supply section
Connects to the printer Processor LASER occurs soon after No.1014 The system is being
control PCB or initialized, one moment please. . . appears. The alarm (buzzer) does not
ARCNET-HUB PCB. sound.
J/P455 Connecting to the laser The system starts up normally. When printing is started from the PJP mode,
control PCB then No.6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs, but the error
(LVDS) can be released and the print started, while the print of the 1st sheet had
stopped in the exposure standby position, it does not progress to the next.
The 2nd print is cut and stops in the receiving position of arm 1 and the
paper was not rewound to the paper magazine, and it has stopped in the state
where it was sent out.
J/P457 Connected to the PC- LED light source unit types 1, 2 and 3: Connects to R LED relay connector

4. Troubleshooting
scanner interface PCB J/P168.

! PC-scanner interface PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P71 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-2 After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was
Connects the displayed, the buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET
AFC/scanner control communication error. scanner AFC occurs.
PCB.
J/P72 ARCNET After No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . was
Connects the displayed, the buzzer sounds after a while and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET
AFC/scanner control communication error. scanner AFC occurs.
PCB.
J/P436 Connects to the scanner After starting the scanning, the message One moment please... appears and
unit. it does not change. NO is selected and scanning can be stopped.
(LVDS)
J/P437 Inputs the power supply LED light source unit types 1, 2 and 3: Connects to R LED relay connector
(+5 V) from ATX power J/P168.
supply.
J/P457 Connected to the PC-laser LED light source unit types 1, 2 and 3: Connects to R LED relay connector
interface PCB. J/P168.

4202_1 10/10
Distributed by: [Link]

4203_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor)

! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each connector disconnected
(for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not connected.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a connector is
disconnected from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

! Processor section

4. Troubleshooting
Reference
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB
☞ Main relay PCB ☞ Sub relay PCB
☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS7) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8)
☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS9) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB2) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB3)

! Processor control PCB

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P510 Connects to the processor I/O ☞ LPP 6-3 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
PCB. No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
No.0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
No.0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. occurs.
No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
J/P511 Connects to the sub relay ☞ LPP 6-2 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
PCB. No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P512 Connects the CD digital ☞ LPP 6-3 No.5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
flowmeter.
J/P513 Connecting the print sensor ☞ LPP 6-9 No.5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs while
printing.
J/P514 Inputs the power (+5 V) from ☞ LPP 4-2 No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply 1,
and the power (+24 V) from
processor power supply 2.
J/P515 Connects the drive motor. ☞ LPP 6-7 No.5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P516 Connects the processing ☞ LPP 6-8 No.5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. occurs.
solution temperature sensor, No.5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
dryer temperature sensor.

4203_1 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4203_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical Symptom

circuit diagram
J/P517 ARCNET ☞ LPP 2-1 The buzzer sounds intermittently for a while after No.1014 The system is
Connects to the printer being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, and then No.6901-2000
control PCB. ARCNET communication error. D-ICE control PCB occurs. The alarm
cannot be stopped.
J/P518 ARCNET No.6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs soon after
Connects to the printer No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears.
control PCB.
J/P519 Connects the drive motor. ☞ LPP 6-7 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.

! Processor I/O PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P670 Connects the rack stopper ☞ LPP 6-3 No.0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
sensor.
J/P673 Connects the hour meter. The hour meter does not operate.
J/P674 Connects the power (+24 V− ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
1−1, +24 V−1−2, +24 V−3) No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
to the sub relay PCB. occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P677 Connects the CD circulation ☞ LPP 6-1 No.5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
pump. No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
J/P678 Connects the BF circulation No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
pump.
J/P679 Connects the STB1 No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P680 Connects the STB2 No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P681 Connects the STB3 No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P682 Connects the STB4 No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P683 Connects the replenishment ☞ LPP 6-4 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
pump and water supply
pump.
J/P685 Connects the refilling water ☞ LPP 6-5 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
pump and the cleaning pump.
J/P686 Connects the exhaust fan, ☞ LPP 6-7 The exhaust fan, drive motor cooling fan, tank cooling fans 1, 2 and 3 do
drive motor cooling fan, tank not operate.
cooling fans 1, 2 and 3.
J/P687 Connects the effluent float ☞ LPP 6-6 No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P688 Connects the replenishment ☞ LPP 6-5 No.0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
solution level sensor and No.0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
refilling water tank level STB occurs.
sensor.
J/P689 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 6-12 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
from the transformer.

4203_1 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4203_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom

diagram
J/P690 Inputs the power (+24 V) ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
from processor power supply No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
2. occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
J/P691 Connects the chilling unit. ☞ LPP 6-22 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
J/P692 Supplies power (+5 V, +24 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
V-3) to the transistor PCB
(cooling water solenoid
valve).
J/P694 Connects the processor ☞ LPP 6-10 The processor status lamp does not light.
condition lamp.
J/P697 Connects the conveyor unit. ☞ LPP 6-11 When prints are fed out of the dryer, the conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P698 Inputs the power (+5 V) from ☞ LPP 4-2 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
processor power supply 1.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P699 Connects to the processor ☞ LPP 6-3 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
control PCB. No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
No.0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
No.0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. CD BF STB occurs.
No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.

! Main relay PCB

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P553 Connects the dryer heater. ☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer heaters A, B and F do not operate.
J/P554 Connects the dryer heater. Dryer heaters C, D and G do not operate.
J/P555 Connects to the sub relay ☞ LPP 6-3 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
PCB. pressing the power button of the PC.
J/P556 Connects the main relay PCB The main relay PCB cooling fan and the processor power supply 3 cooling
cooling fan and the processor fan do not operate.
power supply 3 cooling fan.
J/P557 Connects the processing ☞ LPP 6-1 The processing solution heater (CD, BF and STB) do not operate.
solution heater.
J/P558 Supplies AC power to printer ☞ LPP 4-1 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
power supply 1, 2, 3, laser ☞ LPP 5-2 pressing the power button of the PC.
power supply 1, 2, the image
processing PCB power
supply, the display monitor
and the PC.
J/P559 Supplies the power to the ☞ LPP 4-1 The power supply cooling fan does not operate.
processor power supplies 1, 2
and 3.
J/P647 Starter jumper ☞ LPP 6-3 This is not to be connected.
J/P659 Connector for setting the ☞ LPP 6-8 All the dryer heater do not operate.
input voltage of the dryer
heater.
J/P662 Supplies AC power to the ☞ LPP 5-2 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
transformer.
J/P663 Jumper connector ☞ LPP 4-1 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.

4203_1 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4203_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! Sub relay PCB

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
J/P648 Connects the interlock switch ☞ LPP 5-2 No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
(dryer cover) (processor top ☞ LPP 6-7
cover).
J/P649 Connects the processing ☞ LPP 5-2 No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
solution float switch. ☞ LPP 6-2 occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
J/P650 Connects to the processor I/O ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
PCB.
J/P651 Connects to the processor ☞ LPP 6-10 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
control PCB. No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P652 Connects the sub relay PCB ☞ LPP 5-2 The sub relay PCB cooling fan does not operate.
cooling fan.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P653 Connects to the main relay ☞ LPP 6-10 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
PCB. pressing the power button of the PC.
J/P654 Inputs the power (+24 V) ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
from processor power supply No.5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
2.
No.5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
No.5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
No.5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
No.5509 The circulation amount has decreased. CD occurs.
J/P655 Inputs the power (+24 V) The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
from processor power supply pressing the power button of the PC.
3.
J/P656 Connects the dryer safety ☞ LPP 6-10 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P657 Connects the dryer fan. No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P658 Connects the drive motor. ☞ LPP 6-7 No.5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.

! Processor power supply 1 (PS7)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
J/P791 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 4-1 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 4-2 alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
J/P792 Supplies power (+5 V) to the ☞ LPP 4-2 No.6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs. The
processor control PCB and alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
the processor I/O PCB.

4203_1 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4203_1
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

! Processor power supply 2 (PS8)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom
circuit
diagram
J/P793 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 4-1 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
J/P794 Supplies power (+24 V-1) to ☞ LPP 4-2 occurs.
the processor control PCB, No.5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
the processor I/O PCB and No.5521 Thermosensor error. STB1 occurs.
the sub relay PCB. No.5520 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
No.5519 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
J/P795 Supplies power (+24 V-
No.5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
GND) to the processor
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
control PCB, the processor
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. CD BF STB occurs.
I/O PCB and the sub relay
No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
PCB.

! Processor power supply 3 (PS9)

Connector No. Electrical Symptom

4. Troubleshooting
circuit
diagram
J/P796 Inputs the AC power supply ☞ LPP 4-1 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
from the main relay PCB. ☞ LPP 4-2 pressing the power button of the PC.
J/P797 Supplies power to the sub ☞ LPP 4-2 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
relay PCB (+24 V-2). pressing the power button of the PC.
J/P798 Supplies power to the sub The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
relay PCB (+24 V-GND). pressing the power button of the PC.

! Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ LPP 4-1 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the CD, BF and
☞ LPP 6-1 STB heaters turns to OFF.) )
☞ LPP 6-8

! Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB2)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ LPP 4-1 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater
☞ LPP 6-8 turns to OFF.))

! Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB3)

Connector No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ LPP 4-1 All the systems do not start.

4203_1 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4240
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4]

Described for each model

The described place varies depending on the type of machine. See below for the description for each type of machine.
• For S-2/3, refer to ☞ 4250.

! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each fuse removed (for
example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a fuse.

! Scanner section
Reference

4. Troubleshooting
☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

! AFC/scanner driver PCB

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
+5 V-1 input power supply
from multi power supply
scanner)
F2 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The film ready lamp turns off.
+24 V-1 input power supply The film carrier does not feed the film.
from scanner power supply 2)
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The film ready lamp blinks in red.
+36 V-1 input power supply No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
from scanner power supply 1)
F4 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 1410 Verify the film stop position appears.
+36 V-1 input power supply The image is not shown at the Film Stop Position screen and is still grayed out when it is moved
from scanner power supply 1) to the PJP screen.

! Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
V power supply protection)

! Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
V power supply protection)

4240 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4240
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

! Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T2.5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
240 V power supply
protection)

4. Troubleshooting

4240 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4250
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3]

Described for each model

The described place varies depending on the type of machine. See below for the description for each type of machine.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ 4240.

! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each fuse removed (for
example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a fuse.

! Scanner section
Reference

4. Troubleshooting
☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ LED driver PCB
☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

! AFC/scanner driver PCB

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F26 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of ☞ S 1-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
+36 V-1 input power supply No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
from scanner power supply 1)
F27 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The film ready lamp turns off.
+24 V-1 input power supply The film carrier does not feed the film.
from scanner power supply 2)
F28 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of ☞ S 1-8 No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
+5 V-1 input power supply
from multi power supply
scanner)

! LED driver PCB

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of ☞ S 1-2 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
+5 V-1 input power supply being Adjusted.
from multi power supply
scanner)
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
+24 V-1 input power supply being Adjusted.
from scanner power supply 2)
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The LED light source unit does not turn on.
+36 V-1 input power supply No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. or No. 1420
from scanner power supply 1) Select the DX code. occurs while film scanning.

4250 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4250
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

! Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
V power supply protection)

! Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
V power supply protection)

! Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit
diagram
F1 T2.5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

4. Troubleshooting
240 V power supply
protection)

4250 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section)

! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each fuse removed (for
example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the fuse on each PCB is blowout.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a fuse.

! Printer section
Reference
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Laser I/O PCB
☞ CVP PCB ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3)

4. Troubleshooting
☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10) ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12)
☞ Laser power supply 1 (PS17) ☞ Laser power supply 2 (PS16)

! Printer I/O PCB 1

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F32 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of ☞ LPP 1-5 No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
+5 V input power supply
from printer power supply 1)
F33 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation
+24 V input power supply error. occurs.
from printer power supply 2)
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
from printer power supply 2)
F35 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No.6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
from printer power supply 2)
F36 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
+36 V input power supply Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from printer power supply 3)
F37 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No.6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper
+36 V input power supply Magazine A occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from printer power supply 3)
F38 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of ☞ LPP 1-4 The PC does not start automatically.
+24 V-4 input power supply Printer control box cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 do not operate.
from laser power supply 1)
No.1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs after starting up the PC forcibly.

4252 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

! Laser I/O PCB

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of ☞ LPP 1-4 The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6073 Synchronous
+24 V-1 input power supply Sensor error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from laser power supply 1)
F2 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No.6076-0001 Polygon
+24 V-2 input power supply Mirror control error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from laser power supply 1)
F3 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
+24 V-3 input power supply
from laser power supply 1)

! CVP PCB
Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F25 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of ☞ LPP 1-5 The CVP unit does not operate.
+36 V input power supply

4. Troubleshooting
from printer power supply 3)

! Printer power supply 1 (PS3)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

! Printer power supply 2 (PS10)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

! Printer power supply 3 (PS12)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

! Laser power supply 1 (PS17)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

! Laser power supply 2 (PS16)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LPP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

4252 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4253
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section)

! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each fuse removed (for
example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the fuse on each PCB is blowout.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a fuse.

! Processor section
Reference
☞ Processor I/O PCB ☞ Main relay PCB
☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

4. Troubleshooting
☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3)

! Processor I/O PCB

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of ☞ LPP 4-2 No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
+24 V input power supply No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
from processor power supply occurs.
2)
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
No.0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
F15 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
+24 V input power supply No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
from processor power supply occurs.
2)
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
F16 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V ☞ LPP 6-5 Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
input power supply
protection)

! Main relay PCB

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
FL1 T5 A/250 V (Protection ☞ LPP 4-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
circuit for power surges)
FL2 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
circuit for power surges)
FL3 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
circuit for power surges)
FL4 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
circuit for power surges)

4253 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4253
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom

circuit diagram
F41 T10 A/250 V (protection of ☞ LPP 6-1 All the processing solution heater do not operate.
power supply for processing
solution heater)
F42 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The STB heater does not operate.
power supply for STB heater)
F43 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The BF heater does not operate.
power supply for BF heater)
F44 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The CD heater does not operate.
power supply for CD heater)
F45 T6.3 A/250 V (protection of ☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer heater G does not operate.
power supply for dryer heater
G)
F46 T10 A/250 V (protection of Dryer heaters C, D do not operate.
power supply for dryer
heaters C, D)
F47 T6.3 A/250 V (protection of Dryer heaters A, B do not operate.
power supply for dryer

4. Troubleshooting
heaters A, B)
F48 T6.3 A/250 V (protection of Dryer heater F does not operate.
power supply for dryer heater
F)
F49 T15 A/250 V (protection of Dryer heaters C, D and G do not operate.
power supply for dryer
heater)
F50 T15 A/250 V (protection of Dryer heaters A, B and F do not operate.
power supply for dryer
heater)

! Sub relay PCB

Fuse No. Electrical circuit Symptom
diagram
F61 T5 A/250 V (protection of ☞ LPP 6-7 No.5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
power supply +24 V-5 for
drive motor)
F62 T5 A/250 V (protection of ☞ LPP 6-10 The dryer fan does not operate.
power supply +24 V-2-2 for
dryer fan)
F63 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of ☞ LPP 4-2 The PC does not start. The PC will not start even using forced start by
input power supply +24 V pressing the power button of the PC.
from processor power supply
3)
F64 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of No.5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
input power supply +24 V-3) No.5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No.5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
F65 T5 A/250 V (protection of No.5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
output power supply +24 V-1 No.5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
to the processor I/O PCB)
No.5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
F66 T5 A/250 V (protection of No.5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
input power supply +24 V-3 No.5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
from the processor I/O PCB)
No.5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
No.5509 The circulation amount has decreased. CD occurs.

4253 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4253
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

! Processor power supply 1 (PS1)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 − ☞ LPP 4-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

! Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 − ☞ LPP 4-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

! Processor power supply 3 (PS3)

Fuse No. Electrical Symptom
circuit diagram
F1 − ☞ LPP 4-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

4. Troubleshooting

4253 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear
from the order display.

NOTE
• The message No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please... appears when some operation with exposure is
carried out while the message is displayed. ☞ 41042
• The messages for laser temperature adjustment in the order display appear in order of Laser temperatures are being
[Link].##sec, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U), Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R).
• Laser temperatures are being adjusted. If the message, (U) does not disappear, refer to ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.
• Laser temperatures are being adjusted. If the message, (R) does not disappear, refer to ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.
• The processable range of laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• The processable range of R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• Measure the voltage of TP (ground) on each PCB for ground described in the flow chart.

! Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.

4. Troubleshooting
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.

Reset the power supply and restart the system.

YES
The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.

NO
Less than
23.0°C.
Check the temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensoron the Input Check display. ☞ 35210

More than 42°C.

YES
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes down by 1°C or more in ten minutes.

NO

The voltage between the pin 3 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 1 V,
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

4302 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 7 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB is 0 V, which means the
laser unit cooling fan control is ON. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power to supply the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

Laser unit cooling fan 1 rotates. ☞ 61100_1

4. Troubleshooting
YES NO

Failure in the laser unit cooling fan 1 ☞ 61100_1

Laser unit cooling fan 2 rotates. ☞ 61100_1

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit cooling fan 2 ☞ 61100_1

The voltage between the pins 17 (+) and 18 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit heater.

YES NO

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

4302 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is over
0.45 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 64150_1

NO YES

The ambient temperature may be high. Keep the ambient

temperature at less than 30°C.

Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins
3 and 4 on the laser unit thermosensor side is less than 4 kΩ (resistance value of the laser unit thermosensor
). ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

4. Troubleshooting
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up by 1°C or more in ten minutes. YES

NO

The voltage between the pin 3 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 1 V,
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 0 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 0 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

The voltage between the pins 17 (+) and 18 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit heater. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

4302 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 7 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit cooling fan control is OFF. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 0 V, which
means the power to supply the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is less
than 0.25 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor. ☞ 64150_1

NO YES

Failure in the laser unit heater ☞ 61450

Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. If the measured resistance value between pins 3
and 4 on the laser thermosensor side is more than 10 kΩ (resistance of the laser unit thermosensor ).
☞ 64150_1
YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted properly.

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.

4302 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

! Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.

Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.

Reset the power supply and restart the system.

The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.

NO YES

The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted

properly.

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is 1 V, which

4. Troubleshooting
means the R laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between TP2 and TP9 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is 1 V, which means standard
voltage of R laser thermosensor. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

It is below
27.7°C.
Check the temperature of the R Laser Thermosensor on the Input Check display. ☞ 35210

It is over 28.3°C.

Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is less than 4.5 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).
☞ 64200
YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

The voltage between TP2 and TP11 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is more than 350 mV
(measured voltage of R laser thermosensor).

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

4302 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 350
mV, which means R laser temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 2.5 V,
which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is over 2.5 V, which means the
Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over 0 V and
less than 2 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is over 5.4 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

The voltage between TP2 and TP11(+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is less than 350 mV,
which means the R laser temperature sensor measurement voltage.
☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

4302 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
350 mV, which means the R laser sensor unit temperature measurement voltage. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
2.5 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 64150_1

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is less than 2.5 V, which
means it is less than the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over −2 V and
less than 0 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 64200

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

4302 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

4304_1
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

An abnormal print is made

! Specifying the occurring place

The line appears inputting from the film. The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.

YES YES

The line appears inputting from the media. NO ☞ Inputting side is not good.
(around the scanner and around
the AFC)

YES

☞ Around the laser unit is not

good.

4. Troubleshooting
! Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner and around the AFC)
Refer to the below table about an abnormal print occurred because of around the scanner unit and around the AFC.

No. Symptom Reference

1 BGR colors mixing line in the film advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4400_1

! Around the laser unit is not good.

Refer to the below table about an abnormal print occurred because of around the laser unit.

No. Symptom Reference

1 The light density line (white) in the paper advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4450
2 The monochrome line perpendicular to paper advance direction is ☞ 4451
occurred.
3 The light color is appeared in unexposure position. ☞ 4452
4 The stripped pattern like a wavy line in the whole part of print is occurred. ☞ 4453
5 Banding is occurred. ☞ 25820☞ 36090

4304_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4305
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

Checking for media drive defect

! Checking procedure

What is the drive?

Floppy disk drive CD-ROM and CD- Zip drive MO drive DVD-RAM drive Five slots card
R/RW drive reader

Clean the drive and read the same media again.

• Clean the MO drive with the optional MO head cleaner.
• Clean the floppy disk drive and DVD-RAM drive with a commercial cleaning kit.
• Except above drive are cleaned with the air duster or the like.

4. Troubleshooting
Not settled.

Read the other media.

Not settled.

Confirm that the Device status of each drive is become This device is working properly in the Device Manager.
• If not, each drive is not recognized.
Reinstall the driver or check the cable connection.

Not settled.

Check that the cable is securely connected.

• In the case of FD, if the cable is connected reversely, the access lamp is on all the time.

Not settled.

Check the ID setting of IDE. Check the ID setting of SCSI.

• In the case of CD, secondary and • In the case of MO drive, the SCSI ID is 0.
master. • In the case of DVD-RAM drive, the SCSI ID
• In the case of ZIP, secondary and slave. is 6.

High-spec PC:
Check that these are recognized on the BIOS
display of SCSI when starting up the personal
Not settled. computer.
Check that the BIOS setting is correct.

4305 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

PC does not start properly.

This describes the diagnosis when the PC does not start properly.
For details of terms used below or operations, refer to the startup sequence for PC. ☞ 50510

! Specifying the occurring cause

IMPORTANT
• The diagnosis below is for widely used PC (Windows 2000).
Any explanation for the extension PCB such as the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB, which is used for the QSS only, is not
described here.
When the diagnosis is not effective to solve the problem, check the extension PCB used for the QSS only.

PC does not start properly.

Any messages in the monitor display?

4. Troubleshooting
YES NO

Power LED goes on and it beeps.

YES NO

1. Check the power supply cable.

2. Check the connection of mother board power supply connector.
3. Check the voltage of mother board power supply connector.
• ±12 V, ±5 V, ±3.3 V are detected.
4. Replace the ATX power supply.
5. Replace the Power Switch.
6. Replace the mother board.

Specify the beep sound.

1. Just once
2. Long beep: once, Short beep: twice
3. Repeating long beep

1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).
3. Replace the mother board.

1. Replace the mother board.

2

1. Check the video cable connection.

3 2. Replace the monitor display.

4306 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

YES

Messages are shown during POST.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in
starting up).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. BIOS ROM checksum error - System halted
2. CMOS battery failed
3. CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded
4. Floppy disk(s) fail
5. HARD DISK INSTALL FAILURE
6. Primary master hard disk fail
7. Keyboard error or no keyboard present
8. Keyboard is locked out - Unlock the key
9. Invalid System Disk Replace the disk, then press any key
10. DISK BOOT FAILURE, INSERT SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS ENTER

4. Troubleshooting
1
1. Replace the mother board.

2, 3 1. Replace the CMOS battery.

2. Replace the mother board.

1. Check the floppy disk drive cable connection.

4 2. Replace the floppy disk drive cable.
3. Replace the floppy disk drive.
4. Replace the mother board.

1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

5, 6 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
3. Replace the hard disk.
4. Replace the mother board.

1. Check the keyboard cable connection.

7, 8
2. Replace the keyboard.
3. Replace the mother board.

9 1. Check that no floppy disk is inserted.

2. Replace the floppy disk drive.

1. Recover the OS.

10 2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

4306 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

NO

It stops during POST or reading NTLDR, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in
starting up).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. It stops on the CPU or the memory test display, or it restarts.
2. It stops on the IDE connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
3. It stops on the SCSI connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
4. It stops before the message Starting Windows... for NTLDR appears, or it restarts.

1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).

4. Troubleshooting
3. Replace the mother board.

1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

2 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
3. Replace the hard disk.
4. Replace the mother board.

1. Check the SCSI ID.

2. Check the terminator.
3
3. Check the SCSI board connection.
4. Replace the SCSI board.
5. Replace the SCSI device.

1. Check the connection of extension board.

4
2. Replace the extension board.
3. Replace the mother board.

It brings up the message during POST or reading NTLDR.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to
start the OS).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. NTLDR missing, Replace disk and press any key to continue

1. Recover the OS.

1
2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

4306 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

NO

It stops while starting the OS, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.

NO YES

1. Recover the OS.

2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

The STOP code error occurs while starting the OS.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.

NO YES

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The error of STOP code is shown by STOP0xXXXXXXXXX.
• Countermeasure for the STOP code error may be shown on the Microsoft's website.

IMPORTANT
• Record the error No. if the STOP code error occurs.

1. Recover the OS.

2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

The PC starts.

4306 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

4400_1
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057580

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Features of symptom
• The BGR moire like a sample print or white stripes is occurring only printing from the film.
• The BGR moire appears in the film advance direction but not always straight stripe, it may be bent a little or like a pattern.
NOTE
• Because it appears in the film advance direction, when the advance length is shorter than the paper width (horizontal feed), it
may appear perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The colorful moire mixing the BGR colors.
• It may be confirmed on the monitor display at PJP.

! Explanation and check point

! Explanation
When the dust around the slot for AFC scanning does not move together with a film, it occurs.
IMPORTANT
• When the dust does not move together with a film, the DIGITAL ICE and digital masking are not effective since the
position of dust is not specified.

! Check point
• Change the 135/240 AFC-II lane (135→240, 240→135) and check.
If it does not occur after changing the lane, the dust may attach to the previous lane. Clean the inside and outside of the AFC
again.
Clean slots (upper and lower), film path surface, protection glass of LED light source, condensing lens of AFC, insertion section,
rewinding section, each roller and etc. too.

4400_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4400_1
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the AFC, clean the both lanes of AFC.
• Confirm that the dust does not remain in the slots for scanning or between the rollers, and clean the front and rear
sides carefully.
• If this symptom occurs when changing the lane (135→240, 240→135), clean around the dust prevention glass of scanner.
• Clean around the AFC, scanner and film path surface.

4. Troubleshooting

4400_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4450
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

Light density line (white) (paper advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057583

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Features of symptom
• The stripped pattern like a sample print occurs in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• The line appears parallel to the paper advance direction.

! Explanation and check point

! Explanation
It occurs when the dust adheres to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit, exposure advance unit or laser dustproof glass cover. Or,
it occurs due to the dust inside the laser unit.

! Check point
• Clean the glass surface of laser unit.
Refer to ☞ Cleaning the laser dustproof glass.
IMPORTANT
• When the line is not clear, the dust may adhere to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit or inside of the laser
unit. When the line is clear, the dust may adhere around the pressure guide.
• Clean the laser dustproof glass cover.
• Clean around the exposure section of exposure advance unit.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4450 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4450
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

! Cleaning the laser dustproof glass

1. Pull out the paper advance unit.

Paper Advance Unit 2

G073910

2. Wear clean gloves.

4. Troubleshooting
3. Open the partition plate in the left side of the paper advance unit to put hands. Then, clean the laser
dustproof glass using the attached cleaning sheet (soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, wipe in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has been
removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in order
not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.

Laser dustproof glass cover

Glass surface

G076250

4450 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4451
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057579

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Features of symptom
• The stripped pattern like a sample print occurs in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• The monochrome line is appeared perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The line appears at the same intervals.

! Explanation and check point

! Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.

! Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 64210
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4451 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4452
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

Light color is appeared in unexposure position

4. Troubleshooting
G057585

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Features of symptom
• The light color is appeared in the unexposure position or low density position.
• The symptom like a sample print is occurred in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).

! Explanation and check point

! Explanation
The chemical may deteriorate or laser light may leak because the inside the laser unit is abnormal.

! Check point
• Process the control strip and check the color of the white part. If the problem occurs, the chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and make a setup print. If there is a
difference between the unexposed position shielded by the splicing tape and regular unexposed position, the abnormal print is
caused by leakage of laser beam.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to adhere dust or damage to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4452 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4453
Diagnosis appendix: An example of the abnormal print

Stripped pattern like a wavy line

4. Troubleshooting
G057584

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Features of symptom
• The stripped pattern like a sample print occurs in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• A stripped pattern like a wavy line.
• Appeared forward of the print.

! Explanation and check point

! Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.

! Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 64210
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4453 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner

List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type)

The following table shows the conditions and the corrective action when error messages appear.

Error message Condition Countermeasure

The copy may be improperly The copy is out of the edge of the copy deck in the Put the copy properly on the copy deck in the
positioned, or the selected area is flatbed scanner. flatbed scanner so that it is not out of the deck.
too small. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The outline of copy is not clear. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The message appears when the image frame is too Remove the check mark for the DIGITAL
small with the digital ICE function valid. ICE Technology(TM) function.
Resize the image frame manually.
Flatbed Scanner Communication When the driver software for FB scanner has not Check the conditions shown on the left and
Error been installed then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing again on the Order
display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
When the lock of FB scanner has not been released

4. Troubleshooting
There is insufficient memory. The memory of the personal computer is not Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
enough. image smaller.
There is nothing to scan. There is no copy on the copy deck. Place the copy correctly.
Cancel When the user interrupt the previewing or scanning Carry out the same previewing or scanning
Quit the process. operation operation again after deleting the message in
the message box.
There is insufficient space left on The hard disk space is not enough. Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
the hard disk. image smaller.
The copy may be improperly When the copy is protruded from the deck Place the copy on the deck not to protrude.
positioned.
When the copy is not protruded from it, release
the error message and enlarge or move the
image frame to fit the image.
Capturing communication error When using the FB scanner with QSS software Check the conditions shown on the left and
while using the FB scanner with another software then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing Preview again on the Order Display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
All Data included the Tone Curve When the Setting Initialization button is clicked If you would like to initialize, select OK. If
and the Save Data are initialized. on the FB scanner execution display not, select Cancel.
Are you sure you want to initialize
them?
Cut Position Error When the upper left corner of brought area is Press the Preview button again.
recognized as placed in a wrong position (The
position of copy is not wrong.)
Cut Angle Error When the inner angle of brought area is not
recognized 90-degree (The angle of copy is not
wrong.)
DLL Load Completed When trying to load the DLL again although it is Quit the message display and execution display
already loaded of FB scanner by pressing the CLOSE button
DLL Load Failed When the DLL is not recognized as already and restart the FB scanner execution display by
installed pressing YES key in the order display.
When the installation of DLL is failed
The DLL was not loaded. When the DLL is not loaded

4500 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner

IMPORTANT
• If the messages of DLL Load Completed, DLL Load Failed or The DLL was not loaded. appears repeatedly, the DLL
data may be damaged or broken. Reinstall the QSS software as a corrective action. ☞ 88000

NOTE
• DLL is a driver for running the FB scanner execution display on the Order Display of QSS.
Location: My Computer\C\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Exe\NKC_ImageFBScan.dll

4. Troubleshooting

4500 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart

About the scanner adjustment chart

IMPORTANT
• When the scanner adjustment chart itself is abnormal, if Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment or Focus Adjustment is
performed, fault may occur. Furthermore, since it cannot adjust normally, it may adversely affect the print quality.
• When you use the scanner adjustment chart, check whether there are any abnormalities in the scanner adjustment chart
referring to the display indicated below and the illustration of scanner adjustment chart.
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart,
☞ Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart (for the 135/240 MMC-II and the 135/240 AMC-II).

! Normal scanner adjustment chart and display (swing and tilt/light axis adjustment)
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display

4. Troubleshooting
S3396-01-SM02

Scanner adjustment chart

For confirming the light axis

For confirming the swing For confirming the swing

and tilt and tilt

G078399

! Explanation
• As for the normal scanner adjustment chart, eight about 20µm slots and three about 100µm slots are contained for the swing and
tilt, and the triangle slot for the light axis is contained in the inner side.

4600 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart

! Normal scanner adjustment chart and display (focus adjustment)

Focus Adjustment display

S3230-01-SM00

Scanner adjustment chart

4. Troubleshooting
For checking the focus

G071789

! Explanation
• As for the normal scanner adjustment chart, three about 100µm slots, eight about 20µm slots and three about 100µm slots are
contained for the focus adjustment.

4600 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart

! When dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart:

Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display

A part of waveform has collapsed.

S3396-01-SM04

4. Troubleshooting
Scanner adjustment chart

Dust adheres.

Dust adheres.

G078401

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Explanation
• Since dust has adhered to the slot section, a part of waveform has collapsed.

4600 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart

! When the scanner adjustment chart is damaged:

Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display

Since the slot is damaged, the mountain of waveform has decreased.

4. Troubleshooting
S3396-01-SM03

Scanner adjustment chart

The slot is damaged. The slot is damaged.

G078400

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

! Explanation
• Since the 20µm slot section for the Swing and Tilt confirmation is damaged, the mountain of waveform has decreased.

! Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart

IMPORTANT
• Check if dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart. If dust adheres, remove it with a blower brush before
attaching.
• Do not fold the scanner adjustment chart as it is thin.
• Position the scanner adjustment chart correctly. Otherwise, the scanner unit cannot be adjusted properly. Be sure to
press the upper and left parts of the chart to the AFC as shown below and secure the upper and lower parts using
tapes.
• Do not use the scanner adjustment chart wrong side out. Place the scanner adjustment chart so that the stamp mark
of the film size can be read.

4600 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart

• After using the scanner adjustment chart, put it into a card case.
• The scanner adjustment chart is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

Tapes Adjustment chart

G050982

4. Troubleshooting
! Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart (for the 135/240 MMC-II and
the 135/240 AMC-II)

IMPORTANT
• Check if dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart. If dust adheres, remove it with a blower brush before
attaching.
• Do not fold the scanner adjustment chart as it is thin.
• Do not use the scanner adjustment chart wrong side out. Place the scanner adjustment chart so that the stamp mark
of the film size can be read.
• Set the scanner adjustment chart (mount) for 135/240 MMC-II and adjust it.
• For the 135/240 AMC-II, attach the single adaptor and ejection stocker, then set the scanner adjustment chart (mount)
to adjust.
• The scanner adjustment chart is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

4600 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

4900
DLS Error Messages
DLS Error Messages

DLS Error Messages

Followings are the error messages that tells Contact your service
provider.
NOTE
• Errors other than below, see the Online Help.
System Error messages (No. 3-)
No. Contents Reference
3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ☞ 4910
3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
3-3 WIP Partition Is Full
3-4 WIP Partition Is Full
3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ☞ 4911

Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

No. Contents Reference
6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ☞ 4920

4. Troubleshooting
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)
No. Contents Reference
10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ☞ 4961
10-10 Error While Uploading Network
Order
10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize ☞ 4962
Customer Name
10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host
10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize ☞ 4963
Scan Location
10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize
Member ID
10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize ☞ 4964
Account ID
10-19 Connection Processing Failed ☞ 4965
10-20 Busy Modem

Rendering Error messages (No. 12-)

No. Contents Reference
12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ☞ 4970
12-2 Print Initialization Failed
12-7 Rendering Error ☞ 4972_1
12-8 Printing Error
12-11 Print Service Error ☞ 4974
12-13 Print Creation Error ☞ 4975
12-14 Order Queuing Failed
12-40 Error Preparing a Print ☞ 4977

Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

No. Contents Reference
13-1 CD Authoring Service Initialization ☞ 4980
Failed

4900 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4910
System Error messages (No. 3-)
System Error messages (No. 3-)

☞ 88000
No. 3-1
WIP Partition is Half Full
No. 3-2
WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
No. 3-3
WIP Partition Is Full
No. 3-4
WIP Partition Is Full

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The number of completed WIP orders to be retained is set
too high.

4. Troubleshooting
• Too many orders are active in the system, due to one or more
of the following reasons:
• The WIP contains many paused orders.
• A backlog of orders is waiting to be processed.
• The printer is not operational.
• A printer error occurred.

Diagnosis
1. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to bring up the
Computer Management display.
2. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.

S072418
3. The display shows WIP (V:). Check if it is Healthy.
4. The display shows WIP (V:), but if it is not Healthy, format
WIP (V:).
5. If the display does not show WIP (V:), carry out recovery.
☞ 88000
6. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and
execute the recovery.

4910 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4911
System Error messages (No. 3-)

No. 3-6
Order Failed Image Analysis

Attention message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
An error occurred on the software.

Check Point
1 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Makeover the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
☞ 88000

4911 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4920
Archive Error messages (No. 6-)
Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

No. 6-1
Insufficient Store-It Disk Space

Attention message release

OK

Condition
Condition
There is insufficient disk space for the archive system. This is
why archiving is unavailable.

Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary order.

Diagnosis
1. Restart the system.
2. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to bring up the

4. Troubleshooting
Computer Management display if it does not recover.
3. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.

S072418
4. The display shows Archive (U:). Check if it is Healthy.
5. The display shows Archive (U:), but if it is not Healthy,
format Archive (U:).
6. If the display does not show Archive (U:), carry out recovery.
☞ 88000
7. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and
execute the recovery.
☞ 88000

4920 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4961
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-9 No. 10-10

Cannot Connect to Upload Host Error While Uploading Network Order

Error message release Error message release

Retry or Cancel Retry or Cancel

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The network is not connected. • An error occurred while uploading to the upload services.
• The modem is not connected.
• The network configuration is not correct. Check Point
1 Have the key operator confirm that the network
Check Point configuration is correct.
1 Check the network and modem connections.
Diagnosis
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
configuration is correct. 1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis 3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.
3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4961 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4962
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-11 No. 10-12

Upload Server Cannot Recognize Cannot Connect to Upload Host
Customer Name
Error message release
Retry or Cancel
Condition
Condition
Condition
Condition
• The Customer Name is missing.
• The server cannot recognize the price sheet associated with
• The Customer Name is not entered correctly.
the customer.

Check Point
Check Point
1 Confirm that the Customer Name is entered correctly.
1 Check the network and modem connections.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
configuration is correct.
configuration is correct.
3 Restart the computer.
Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct. Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4962 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4963
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-13 No. 10-14

Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Upload Server Cannot Recognize
Location Customer Name

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The Scan Location is missing. • The Member ID is missing.
• The Scan Location is not entered correctly. • The Member ID is not entered correctly.

Check Point Check Point

1 Confirm that the upload configuration is entered 1 Confirm that the Member ID and upload
correctly. configuration are entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network 2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
configuration is correct. configuration is correct.

Diagnosis Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct. 1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4963 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4964
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-15
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan
Location

Condition
Condition
• The Account ID is missing.
• The Account ID is not entered correctly.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the Account ID is entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4964 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4965
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-19 No. 10-20

Connection Processing Failed Busy Modem

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• An error has occurred when uploading the image file to • System Cannot Communicate with Modem
Upload Server.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Upload the image file again after a while.
1 Upload the image file again.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
2. Check if any problem occurs with the network cable.

4. Troubleshooting

4965 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4970
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-1 No. 12-2

Print Service Initialization Failed Print Initialization Failed

Error message release Error message release

Continue Retry

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• Hard disk has an I/O problem. • Error in Hardware or Software Used for Communication
• Hard disk has no space.
• An error occurred on the software. Check Point
1 Restart the system.
Check Point
1 Restart the system. Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
Diagnosis ☞ 88000
1. Save the log data of DLS. 2. Restart the system.

4. Troubleshooting
☞ 88000 3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
2. Restart the system. ☞ 88000
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000

4970 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4972_1
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-7 No. 12-8

Rendering Error Printing Error

Error message release Error message release

Continue Retry

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The partition of print buffer has no efficient disk capacity. • Error While Sending the Image To Printer
• Hard disk has an I/O problem.
• An error occurred on the software. Check Point
1 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
Check Point followings.
1 Restart printing on the WIP display. • Restart printing from the order
• Makeover the order.
Diagnosis • Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.
1. Save the log data of DLS.

4. Troubleshooting
☞ 88000
Diagnosis
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software. Failed parts Manual No.
☞ 88000 PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ S 13-6 Control section

4972_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4974
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-11
Print Service Error

Condition
Condition
• A printer error occurred.

Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000

4. Troubleshooting

4974 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4975
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-13 No. 12-14

Print Creation Error Order Queuing Failed

Error message release Error message release

Continue Continue

Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The print products which do not correspond to the system • Although a print request was sent, all the order frames have
have been selected. been denied.
• There is no necessary template for the index print. • An error occurred on the software.

Check Point Check Point

1 Makeover on the WIP display. 1 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
2 Restart the system. followings.
• Restart printing from the order
Diagnosis • Makeover the order.

4. Troubleshooting
1. Save the log data of DLS. • Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
☞ 88000 display.
2. Restart the system.
Diagnosis
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000 1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000

4975 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4977
Uploading Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-40
Error Preparing a Print

Condition
Condition
• The image file which is larger than 4800 × 7200 pixels has
been attempted to be imported by DLS.
• An error occurred while preparing a print.

Check Point
1 Press the image file to 4800 × 7200 pixels or less
using the external software.
2 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Makeover the order.

4. Troubleshooting
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000

4977 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

4980
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

No. 13-12
CD Authoring Complete
No. 13-13
CD Authoring Complete

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The CD was authored successfully, but the CD drawer could
not be opened.

Check Point
1 Open the CD drawer manually, if necessary.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Check if the CD drive is set to G drive.

4980 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

40500
Attention message: Processor
Attention message: Processor

No. 0500[N] No. 0501[N]

Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. The replenisher switch is turned on.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns ON by pressing the YES key.
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- The refilling water tank level sensor turns OFF. number
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
Diagnosis specified number of seconds of replenishment lack
time has passed.
Blown fuses Manual No.
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1 specified time has passed with the replenishment
solution sensor ON.
Failed parts Manual No. - After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, manual
Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63250_1 replenishment or output amount measurement is
carried out.

4. Troubleshooting
• Disconnect the connector of the refilling water tank level
sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10°C
and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is
not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-5 Replenisher section (2)

40500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

40502
Attention message: Processor

No. 0502[N] No. 0503[N][SM]

Add replenishment solution to the Empty the Effluent Tank.
replenishment tank.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES or automatic release
YES • This attention message will be automatically released when
the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number Suffix Condition
- Each replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF. number
- While prints are not being made, each effluent float
NOTE switch turns ON.
• The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message. NOTE
CD, BF or STB • The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
Diagnosis CD, BF or STB

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No. Check Point
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63250_1
1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment solution level
sensor. If the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack 2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves
side is not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ when the solution up and down smoothly.
temperature between is 10°C and 35°C, the level sensor is
defective. Diagnosis
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1 Blown fuses Manual No.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2 Failed parts Manual No.
Effluent float switch ☞ 63250_1
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
• Disconnect the connector of the effluent float switch. If there
Failed parts is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
the float is lowered, the float switch is defective.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
NOTE
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Failed parts
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Detailed diagram Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
☞ LPP 6-5 Replenisher section (2) Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram

40502 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40502
Attention message: Processor

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-6 Effluent section

4. Troubleshooting

40502 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40506
Attention message: Processor

No. 0507
Close the Processor Top Cover.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• The message will be automatically released when the
processor top cover is closed.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are not being made, the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
- When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock
switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
- When refilling with water is to be carried out, the
interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.

Check Point
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250_1

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section

40506 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

40508
Attention message: Processor

No. 0508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you
sure you want to turn the drive off?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn OFF the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being ON.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Although paper still remains in the processing rack or
dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.

NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the
specification.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.

40508 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

40514
Attention message: Processor

No. 0515
Set the Rack Stopper.

Attention message release

YES/START or automatic release
• This attention message will be released when the rack stopper
is set.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are not being made, the rack stopper
sensor turns OFF.

Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment ☞ 63250_1
of the rack stopper sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the rack stopper sensor. If there
is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the rack stopper sensor,
the sensor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-3 Processor section

40514 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

40518_1
Attention message: Processor
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
No. 0518
Set the Dryer Cover. Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Attention message release Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
YES/START or automatic release
• This message will be released automatically when the dryer NOTE
cover is closed. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Circuit diagram

☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Suffix Condition
number
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
- While prints are not being made, the interlock switch
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
(dryer cover) turns OFF.
Detailed diagram
NOTE ☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive ☞ LPP 6-10 Dryer section (3)
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the dryer cover is securely attached.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63250_1

Blown fuses Manual No.

F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
F64 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

40518_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40518_1
Attention message: Processor

No. 0519
Remove the prints from the Print
Conveyor Unit.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The print full sensor turns DARK.

Check Point
1 Check that the print full sensor is not soiled.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Print full sensor ☞ 63260_1
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-11 Print conveyor section/Print sort unit

40518_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
Attention message: SM replenishment

Check Point
No. 0700-####[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with 1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
a new one.P-#
Diagnosis
Attention message release
YES Adjustment failure point Manual No.
This attention message will be released only when the Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 63250_1
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the sensor
replenishment package sensor once.)
Failed parts Manual No.
Condition
Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63250_1
Suffix Condition SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
number
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly. Circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
refilled forcibly.
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly. Detailed diagram
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns ☞ LPP 6-13 SM Replenisher section (2)
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.

NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM
Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these
messages appear. When the following conditions, the tanks
are not refilled forcibly.
SM Detecting condition of the replenishment
Replenishment solution sensor
Setting
ON The replenishment solution is not detected
when the power is ON.
The replenishment solution is not detected
when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected
during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected
while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected
while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the
replenishment package is not detected at the
same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.

• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.

☞ 81510

40700 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0701-####[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• When the replenishment package is set, the message is
released automatically and attention message No.703 Would
you like to initialize the remaining amount of the
Replenishment Package? appears.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns OFF.
0002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns OFF.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment ☞ 63250_1
of the replenishment package sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package
sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the
jack side when a magnet is placed near the replenishment
package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-12 SM Replenisher section (1)

40700 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40702
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0702[SM] No. 0703 [SM]

Add water to the Water Supply Tank. Would you like to initialize the remaining
amount of the Replenishment Package?
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the
Suffix Condition [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of
number the Replenishment Package.
- The water supply tank level sensor turns OFF. • Select NO to return to the regular print display.

IMPORTANT
Diagnosis
• When the replenishment package is replaced before it
Failed parts Manual No. becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63250_1 Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709
• Disconnect the connector of the water supply tank level Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on will be displayed because the actual remaining amount
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10°C of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining
and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is amount in data.

4. Troubleshooting
not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ. ☞ 45708
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600 • When the replenishment package is not replaced but
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 attached again, the process will be continued without
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400 initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package.
Processor power supply 2

NOTE Condition
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference Suffix Condition
number
Circuit diagram
- Before the replenishment package is completely
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram OFF.
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
Diagnosis
Detailed diagram
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
☞ LPP 6-15 SM Replenisher section (4)
Failure in the attaching position adjustment ☞ 63250_1
of the replenishment package sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package
sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the
jack side when a magnet is placed near the replenishment
package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB

40702 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40702
Attention message: SM replenishment

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-12 SM Replenisher section (1)

4. Troubleshooting

40702 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40704
Attention message: SM replenishment
Detailed diagram
No. 0704 [SM] ☞ LPP 6-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the
remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the
replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.

IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment package is replaced before it
becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
will be displayed because the actual remaining amount
of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining

4. Troubleshooting
amount in data.
☞ 45708
• When the replenishment package is not replaced but
attached again, the process will be continued without
initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Before the replenishment package is completely
empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
OFF.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment ☞ 63250_1
of the replenishment package sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package
sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the
jack side when a magnet is placed near the replenishment
package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB

40704 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

40704
Attention message: SM replenishment

NOTE
No. 0705-####[SM]
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-# Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
YES ☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
This attention message will be released only when the
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
Detailed diagram
replenishment package sensor once.)
☞ LPP 6-13 SM Replenisher section (2)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are

4. Troubleshooting
refilled forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.

NOTE
• When the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has
been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
☞ 81510
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 63250_1
sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63250_1
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

40704 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41000
Attention message: Printer
Attention message: Printer

No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine A
No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine B

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the
printing.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix Condition

4. Troubleshooting
number
- Paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 (in case of A) ☞ 64170
Dual paper magazine PCB (in case of B) ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit

41000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41002
Attention message: Printer

No. 1002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper Magazine B

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without
exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper

4. Troubleshooting
when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is
carried out or after you replaced the paper magazine.

41002 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41004
Attention message: Printer

No. 1004
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A
No. 1005
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when
the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect
the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn

4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT.)
- Although either paper magazine code sensor A or B
detects the paper magazine code, the currently
selected print channel is inconsistent.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not
soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is
correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it
will go.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61100_1
code sensor is defective.

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 61100_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-1 Frame section
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit

41004 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41010
Attention message: Printer

No. 1010
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A
No. 1011
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine which is different from that set
in the print channel is set prior to starting print.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not
soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is
correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it
will go.
4 Check the print channel setting.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61100_1
code sensor is defective.

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 61100_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-1 Frame section
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit

41010 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41012
Attention message: Printer

No. 1012 No. 1013

The print channel is not set. Confirm the Outputting. . .
print channel.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES or automatic release
YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be canceled automatically after Condition
the all settings required in the print channel are entered, or the Suffix Condition
print channel is changed. number
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the
Condition paper is feeding in the printer, an attempt is made to
Suffix Condition access to the Menu display.
number
- A print channel with improper print channel setting is Check Point
selected.
1 Check the current print position.

Check Point
1 Check the print channel setting.

4. Troubleshooting

41012 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41014_1
Attention message: Printer

No. 1014
The system is being initialized, one
moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically after
system initialization is completed.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- After the power supply has been turned ON, the
system is being initialized.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000
PC-scanner interface PCB

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ PC-laser interface PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ PC-scanner interface PCB.

Failed part(s) [S-4]

☞ 4190

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 3-15 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Around printer control PCB
☞ Scanner section

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41014_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41016
Attention message: Printer

No. 1017
Would you like to stop printing?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop printing.
• Select NO to continue printing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are being made, the NO key is pressed.

4. Troubleshooting

41016 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41026
Attention message: Printer

Suffix Condition
No. 1027-#### number
Profile data was not found. 0091 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for gray control is not included in
Attention message release the hard disk.
YES
Diagnosis
Condition
Failure in the profile data Manual No.
Suffix Condition Install the profile data from the profile CD ☞ 88000
number corresponding to the main software.
0001 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
0002 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
0011 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the
hard disk.
0012 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,

4. Troubleshooting
the profile data of paper type 2 is not included in the
hard disk.
0013 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 are not
included in the hard disk.
0014 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper type 3 is not included in the
hard disk.
0015 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0016 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 2 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0017 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0040 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
0041 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
0050 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the positive scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
0051 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the positive scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
0060 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the reference table data (monitor) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0061 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the reference table data (printer) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0090 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not
included in the hard disk.

41026 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41028
Attention message: Printer
Failed parts Manual No.
No. 1028 Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
More than 3 correction keys of low, middle ATX mother board ☞ 88000
or high density area. Execute correction? Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Attention message release
YES or NO
NOTE
• Select YES to carry out the correction. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• Select NO to stop the correction.
Circuit diagram
IMPORTANT ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
• When this error occurs, the colorimeter may be ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
calibrated with the calibration plate in a wrong position. ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
Stop the correction by clicking the NO key and start a
setup (for example, daily setup) all over again. ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit
Condition
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
- When the measurement of the test print has been
completed in setup mode, the correction result is ±3
keys or more.

Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly set.
3 Verify that the processing racks are clean.
4 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet.
5 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.

IMPORTANT
• If the abnormal calibration data of the colorimeter unit is
registered by selecting YES for the message 1551: The
calibration plate data is out of range. Register the
data?, the attention message No. 1028 may appear.
• In the case above, update the calibration plate data.
☞ 21110
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.

Diagnosis
In the case of an adjusting failure
Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 21110
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the ☞ 21110
colorimeter unit failure.

41028 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41028
Attention message: Printer

NOTE
No. 1029
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
YES or NO ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
• Select YES to measure the print again. ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
• Select NO to stop the operation. ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When measuring the test print, difference of the
density between each step is not detected.
- When measuring the test print, abnormal density is
detected.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the
colorimeter.
2 Check that the test print is correctly made.
3 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet.
4 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.

Between steps

G078472

Diagnosis
In the case of an adjusting failure
Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 21110
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the ☞ 21110
colorimeter unit failure.

Failed parts Manual No.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110

41028 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41030
Attention message: Printer

No. 1030 No. 1031

Wait until printing is complete. Paper Specification Registration Setup
was not completed.
Countermeasure message
Return the Paper Magazine, if you removed it. Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when Condition
the print channel is changed or the selected magazine is
attached. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - An attempt is made to print using the paper type
which has not been set up in the Paper Magazine
Suffix Condition Registration Setup, Weekly Setup, or the Printer
number Profile Calibration mode.
- When the paper magazine needs to be replaced
during printing Check Point

Check Point 1 Carry out the setup using the paper type which the
Paper Specification Registration Setup has been

4. Troubleshooting
1 Wait until printing is completed, and place the done.
selected paper magazine.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Carry out Paper Specification Registration ☞ 32510
Setup.

41030 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41032
Attention message: Printer

No. 1032
One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Scanning or printing is interrupted by pressing the
NO key.

Check Point
1 Wait until the interrupt process has been completed.

4. Troubleshooting

41032 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41034
Attention message: Printer

No. 1035
Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not
completed.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine which the Paper Magazine
Registration Setup has not been done is selected
when outputting the test print for monitor gamma
adjustment or profile chart.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine to which Paper
Magazine Registration Setup has been completed is

4. Troubleshooting
selected.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration ☞ 32520
Setup.

41034 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41038
Attention message: Printer

No. 1038 No. 1039

Paper type for the magazine is not set. Paper type specification is not set.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The paper type of the paper magazine with which - The paper type, the specification of which has not
printing or setup is to be carried out is not specified. been registered during printing or setup, is selected.

Check Point Check Point

1 Check the paper type of the paper magazine. 1 Check that the paper type, the specification of which
has been registered, is selected.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration ☞ 32520 Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Setup. Carry out Paper Specification Registration ☞ 32510
Setup.

41038 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41040
Attention message: Printer

No. 1040 No. 1041

Press the [ORDER] key. Unable to accept additional processing at
this time. The order will be counted. Wait
Attention message release until the output process is complete.
YES or automatic release
Attention message release
Condition YES
Suffix Condition The order number will be counted up automatically.
number
- Since the machine is waiting until the index prints Condition
have been made or the data has been output to the Suffix Condition
medium, another setting display cannot appear. number
- The 151st roll of film or 151st file of media in the
same order has been processed continuously.

NOTE
• The data capacity which can be stored in an order is limited.

4. Troubleshooting

41040 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41042
Attention message: Printer

No. 1043 IMPORTANT

Laser temperature is being adjusted. One • Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
moment please. . . Replace the unit.

Attention message release NOTE

YES or automatic release. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• When the temperature adjustment of the lasers B, G and R are Circuit diagram
completed and the machine becomes processable, it returns
automatically. ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
Condition ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
Condition ☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit
The count down timer The B and G lasers are waited until the
is displayed in the temperatures become to be processable. Detailed diagram
Order Display. ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
The count down timer The laser unit or R laser is waited until ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (4)
is not displayed in the the temperature becomes to be
Order Display. processable.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The attention message appears until B and G lasers are
processable.
• When the laser unit is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U)
is displayed.
• When the R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R)
is displayed.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for
adjusting the temperature to processable.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser and laser unit in
Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Wait until the laser temperature adjustment has been
completed.
2 Refer to the flow chart of ☞ 4302
diagnosis appendix for the
failures.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61100_1
B and G laser drivers ☞ 61450
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser unit ☞ 26710

41042 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41046
Attention message: Printer
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 1047-####
Close printer door. Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
Attention message release Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
YES or automatic release Refer to 4202 ☞ Dual paper magazine PCB.
• This attention message will be released automatically when
the printer door is closed.
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Condition
Failed parts
Suffix Condition Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
number
0001 The interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF. NOTE
0002 Printer door 3 sensor turns OFF. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

NOTE Circuit diagram

• The power is not supplied to some electrical parts when the ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF. ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely Detailed diagram
closed. ☞ LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor

Blown fuses Manual No.

F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switches (printer
door 1 and 2). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3
on the plug side when you place a magnet close to the
interlock switches (printer door 1 and 2), the interlock
switches are defective.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor,
the sensor is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

41046 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41048
Attention message: Printer

No. 1048
Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output
has completed.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the
paper is feeding in the printer, the light source update
is required.

4. Troubleshooting

41048 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41064
Attention message: Printer

No. 1065
Would you like to continue?

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Printer door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing using
paper magazine A.

NOTE
• This attention message appears when using the dual magazine
specification machine.

Check Point
1 Check that the printer door 3 is securely closed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connectors of the printer door 3 sensor. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 (printer
door 1, 2) sensor, the sensor is defective.
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit

41064 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41072
Attention message: Printer

No. 1072
Paper color intensity is low. Execute
correction?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the correction.
• Select NO to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Paper color intensity is low as a result of the
calculated correction value in the setup mode.

Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is correctly set.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
3 Check the solution condition using a control strip.
4 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

41072 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41074
Attention message: Printer

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 1074
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Sensors may be dirty.
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Countermeasure message Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Intensity again.
Attention message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Circuit diagram

☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Condition
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
The light source level when the sensor status changes from
DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper
☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in ☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
Paper Sensor Adjustment.
Detailed diagram
Suffix Condition ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
number ☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)

4. Troubleshooting
(bit)
☞ LPP 3-7 Exposure advance unit (3)
0001 Paper end sensor A (SE13)
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
0002 Paper end sensor B (SE41)
0004 Paper loading sensor (SE14)
0040 Paper supply end sensor (SE18)

NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the
message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A (SE13) ☞ 61200
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper supply end sensor (SE18)
Zigzaging correction sensor (left) (SE19) ☞ 61300
Zigzagging correction sensor (right) (SE20)
Exposure start sensor (SE22)
Exposure end sensor (SE24)

41074 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41080
Attention message: Printer

No. 1080 No. 1081

Unable to accept additional processing at The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
this time. Press the [ORDER] key.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES or NO
YES or ORDER • Selecting YES cancels the attention message and brings up the
• Selecting YES can read data up to for less than 10,000 frames. message to confirm whether or not to advance the leading end
of the paper.
NOTE
• Selecting NO cancels the attention message.
• The rest of the film or the data in the storage media,
which come as or after the 10,000th frame, are not NOTE
printed. • If printing is turned off, no index printing or data saving
follows this printing.
• Selecting ORDER prepares to process orders up to less than
10,000 frames in the order and prints, or writes data to storage
media. Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition
• As for the rest of the order, it is accepted as a new order number
and the frames of the film or the data in the storage media - The attention message No.1081 is given when all the
that exceeded the 10,000th frame are printed. following conditions are fullfilled.

4. Troubleshooting
• Magazine auto exchange is set toValid in
Condition Operator Selections.
Suffix Condition • Paper magazines containing the paper with same
number width and surface are loaded on the Magazine
mounts A and B.
- • Appears when the number of frames to process
in one order reaches 10,000. • When all paper that are set in the magazine
mounts A and B runs out.

41080 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41302
Attention message: Scanner
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1302
Would you like to stop scanning?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to eject the film and stop scanning.
• Select NO to continue scanning.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The NO key is pressed during film scanning or
judgement.

4. Troubleshooting

41302 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41304_1
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1305
Photometry Section may be dirty.

Countermeasure message
Clean the parts in the Light Source Section and Photometry
Section. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, execute
the Scanner Change of Light in Daily Setup.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the Area Registration, Light Source
Registration or Light Source Update is carried out,
the data sent from the CCD is abnormal.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean the LED light source section.
2 Check that the LED light source section is neither
damaged nor soiled.
3 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit
and AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean
with it.

NOTE
• Bring up Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display
without attaching the scanner adjustment chart. By checking
the condition of the graph, you may specify the occurring
cause.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting
☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 2)

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41304_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41306
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1306
Update the light source. If film remains in
the Film Carrier, remove it.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the light source update.
• Select NO not to carry out the light source update.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The light source registration is not carried out, or a
specified time has passed after updating the light
source.

Check Point
1 Update the light source.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Register the light source. ☞ 37010

41306 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41312
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1313
The Focus Adjustment was not completed
yet.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Film scanning is carried out when the DIGITAL
ICE Technology Correction of Operator Selection
is ON and the Focus Adjustment is not completed.

Check Point
1 Carry out the focus adjustment.
2 Check the setting of the DIGITAL ICE Technology
correction.

4. Troubleshooting

41312 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41314
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1314 No. 1315-####

Light source evenness is out of allowable LED Light Source temperature is being
range. [Link] cannot be continued.

Countermeasure message Attention message release

Clean the parts in the Light Source Section and Photometry YES
Section. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, execute
the Scanner Change of Light in Daily Setup. Condition
Attention message release
YES Suffix Condition
number
Condition 0001 The temperature of LED light source has exceeded
the upper limit (46 degree C) of Standby while
Suffix Condition processing.
number
0002 The temperature of LED light source has fallen below
- The light source blur value of each film size has the lower limit (44 degree C) of Standby while
exceeded the standard one due to the light source processing.
registration or light source update.
Check Point
Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the room temperature is 15 to 30 degree
1 Clean the LED light source section. C.
2 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit 2 Clean the scanner filter.
and AFC slot.
3 Check the LED cooling fan rotation.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean
with it.
IMPORTANT
Diagnosis • If the above message appears when starting the
operation (when the QSS is turned on by the program
Failed parts Manual No. timer) or when performing the dairy setup, the operation
LED light source unit ☞ 62050 temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) may be
out of the specified range (15 to 30 degree C).
ND filter solenoid ☞ 62050 For the operation specification of the LED light source
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020 unit,
Scanner unit ☞ 20610 Refer to ☞ 62050.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 • In the case above, each electrical part of the QSS is
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 normal.
Update the scanner light source after the operation
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) is within
Scanner power supply 2 the specified range.
Multi power supply (scanner)
Diagnosis
NOTE
Failed parts Manual No.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
LED cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 62050
Circuit diagram
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting LED light source unit ☞ 62050
☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2) AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
☞ S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Detailed diagram
Scanner power supply 2
☞ S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1)
Multi power supply (scanner)
☞ S 12-4 Around LED light source unit (2)
☞ S 12-5 Around LED light source unit (3) NOTE
☞ S 12-6 Around LED light source unit (4) • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting
☞ 89010 ☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2)
☞ S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB
41314 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41314
Attention message: Scanner

Detailed diagram
☞ S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1)
☞ S 12-4 Around LED light source unit (2)
☞ S 12-5 Around LED light source unit (3)
☞ S 12-6 Around LED light source unit (4)

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

41314 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41316
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1316 No. 1317

Focus Adjustment failed. Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto
Correction.
Attention message release
YES Countermeasure message
Check whether the film is appropriate. For details, refer to the
Condition manual.
Attention message release
Suffix Condition
YES
number
- When Focus Auto Adjustment was performed, the Condition
waveform which can perform auto adjustment was
not obtained and a focus value has not been set. Suffix Condition
number
Check Point - The image was not detected properly when carrying
out the Scanning Position Auto Correction.
1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit
and AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean Check Point
with it. 1 Check that the appropriate film is used which is

4. Troubleshooting
2 Check whether the scanner adjustment chart is dirty including the normal display with clear edges.
or there is any distortion and also check the
attachment state.
3 Check a waveform and adjust a focus value again.

NOTE
• For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.

41316 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41318
Attention message: Scanner

No. 1319
Scanner type was changed. The system
will be restarted.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Operating system recognized scanner type change at
start-up.

IMPORTANT
• If this attention message appears, scanner-related data
is initialized after the system is restarted.
After restarting the system either upload backup data or
re-register light source(s), readjust focus, and update
light sources again.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• This message appears when the main software recognizes a
scanner type change from S-2/S-3 to S-4 or from S-4 to S-2/S-
3.
• The detected scanner type is displayed in the third line.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41318 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41400
Attention message: Film carrier
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1400 No. 1401

Lock the Film Carrier. Attach the Film Carrier.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or automatic release YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when • This attention message will be automatically released when
you lock the film carrier. you lock the film carrier.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- When the film is not processed with the film carrier, - When the film is not processed, all the film carrier
the film carrier lock sensor turns LIGHT. code detection turns OFF.

Check Point Check Point

1 Check that the film ready lamp of the film carrier 1 Check the carrier code detector via input check with
does not blink in red. the film carrier attached.
2 Check the sensor status via input check. 2 If there is an optional film carrier besides the current

4. Troubleshooting
one, set it and specify the error caused by the film
NOTE carrier or main body.
• If the film carrier is not in position, the ready lamp blinks.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
When the error caused by the film carrier:
Failed parts Manual No.
Failed parts Manual No.
Film carrier lock sensor ☞ 62050
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Connecting PCB (135/240 AMC-ll) ☞ 65350
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
When the error caused by the main body:
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Failed parts Manual No.
Failed part(s) [S-4] AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
☞ 4190 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

☞ 89000_1
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

41400 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41400
Attention message: Film carrier

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

41400 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41402
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1402 No. 1403

Attach the 135/240 AFC. Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.

Attention message release Countermeasure message

YES or automatic release Confirm the Film Cartridge.
• This attention message will be automatically released when Attention message release
you attach the film carrier. YES

Condition Condition

Suffix Condition Suffix Condition

number number
- A film carrier other than the 135/240 AFC-II is - When the 240 cartridge is inserted into the film
attached when cleaning the 135/240 AFC-II at the carrier, the IPI sensor turns ON.
close down check.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Check if the IPI pawl of the 240 film cartridge is
1 Check that the 135/240 AFC-II is securely attached. folded back.
2 Check the carrier code detector via input check with 2 Check that the pin of the IPI sensor moves smoothly.

4. Troubleshooting
the film carrier attached. 3 Check the sensor status via input check.

Diagnosis Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200 IPI sensor ☞ 62150
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
Power PCB ☞ 65260 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] NOTE

☞ 89000_1 • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

Wiring diagram [S-4] ☞ 89000_1
☞ 89010
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010

41402 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41404
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1404 No. 1405-####

The IX frame data is incomplete. Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.

Countermeasure message Attention message release

Press the [YES] key to scan again. If this error recurs, clean the YES
Magnetic Head. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release Condition
YES or NO
Condition
• Select YES to scan it again.
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is initialized
• Select NO to process the film.
after the error cancellation, the film carrier sensor turns DARK.
NOTE The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
• When the above attention message appears, the frame beginning of film processing.
numbers which could not be read are displayed in the second
line.
Suffix Condition
number
Condition (bit)
Suffix Condition 0001 135 loading sensor
number 0002 135 ready sensor

4. Troubleshooting
- Some frames cannot be read when the read head 0004 135 perforation sensor
(camera track or photo finishing track) reads the IX
0008 DX sensor 1
data.
0010 DX sensor 3
Check Point 0080 Rewinding sensor
8000 Film needs to be removed due to reason not
1 Clean the magnetic head. applicable to any of the above sensor detections

Diagnosis NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Failed parts Manual No.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Read head ☞ 62150 Suffix number display.
Magnetic head PCB ☞ 65270 ☞ 4002
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
Check Point
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
Power PCB ☞ 65260 2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Adjustment.
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

NOTE Diagnosis
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
135/240 AFC-ll
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
☞ 89000_1 Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35000
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Failed parts Manual No.
135 loading sensor ☞ 62150
135 ready sensor
135 perforation sensor
135 DX sensor 1
135 DX sensor 3
Rewinding sensor
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 ☞ 65280

41404 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41404
Attention message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.

Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Power PCB ☞ 65260
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Power PCB ☞ 65260 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3] Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB. Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1).
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB. Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1).
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1. Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190
Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190

4. Troubleshooting
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse Refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB. Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4240
Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4240 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
NOTE Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference ☞ 89000_1
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000_1 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010

135 AFC-II
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35060
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

Failed parts Manual No.

135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
135 ready sensor
135 perforation sensor
135 DX sensor 1
135 DX sensor 3
Rewinding sensor
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000

41404 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41406
Attention message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 1406-####
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier.
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Attention message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is initialized
Wiring diagram [S-4]
after the error cancellation, the film carrier sensor turns DARK.
The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
☞ 89010
beginning of film processing.

Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 240 loading sensor
0002 240 ready sensor

4. Troubleshooting
0004 240 perforation sensor
0008 DX sensor 1
0040 Cartridge limit switches 1 and 2

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors and limit switches via
input check.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35000
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

Failed parts Manual No.

240 loading sensor ☞ 62150
240 ready sensor
240 perforation sensor
240 DX sensor 1
Cartridge limit switch 1 or 2
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260

41406 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41406
Attention message: Film carrier

Wiring diagram [S-4]

No. 1407-#### ☞ 89010
Remove the 110 film from the Film Carrier.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is initialized
after the error cancellation, the film carrier sensor turns DARK.
The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
beginning of film processing.

Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 Loading sensor
0002 Ready sensor

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Perforation sensor

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35020

Failed parts Manual No.

Loading sensor ☞ 62350
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Sensor PCB ☞ 65320
Connecting PCB ☞ 65310
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

41406 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41408
Attention message: Film carrier
Wiring diagram [S-4]
No. 1408-#### ☞ 89010
Remove the 120 film from the Film Carrier.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is initialized
after the error cancellation, the film carrier sensor turns DARK.
The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
beginning of film processing.

Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 Loading sensor
0002 Ready sensor

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Film sensor

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35010

Failed parts Manual No.

Loading sensor ☞ 62250
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Sensor PCB ☞ 65290
Connecting PCB ☞ 65300
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

41408 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41408
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1409
Set the lane for the Film Carrier.

Attention message release

YES
NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the 135/240 AFC is
attached.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The lane of 135/240 AFC-II is set to neither 135 nor
240.

Check Point
1 Check that the lane is correctly selected.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Check the limit switch status via input check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
135 lane limit switch ☞ 62150
240 lane limit switch
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
Connecting PCB 3 ☞ 65220
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41408 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41410_1
Attention message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 1410
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Confirm the film stop position in the Film
Scanner power supply 1
Carrier.
Scanner power supply 2

Countermeasure message
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Adjust the film stop position by using the cursor keys. When you
change the frame size, select the desirable frame size and press the Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
[YES] key.
Refer to 4200 ☞ LED driver PCB.
Attention message release
PASS, YES or NO
Failed part(s) [S-4]
• Select PASS to skip the frame and restart scanning from the
next frame. ☞ 4240
• Select YES to start film scanning.
• Select NO to eject the film. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Suffix Condition ☞ 89000_1
number

4. Troubleshooting
- The scanner cannot recognize the frames included in Wiring diagram [S-4]
the scanned data as proper images. ☞ 89010
NOTE
• The film stop position in the film carrier is not checked.
• The whole roll of a film is scanned from the leading edge to
the rear edge and the image data is read.
• Then, the images which are recognized as frames by the
scanner are displayed on the screen sequentially.
• This attention message will appear when the image data of
frames which has unclear boundary between exposed area and
unexposed one is displayed on the screen.

Check Point
1 Insert the film in the reverse direction to check that it
stops at the same position.
2 Carry out the Scanning Position Correction.
3 Register the light source.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Film feed motor (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 62150
Film feed motor cooling fan
Film feed motor (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
Film feed motor (120 AFC-II) ☞ 62250
Film feed motor (110 AFC-II) ☞ 62350
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
LED light source unit ☞ 20620
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
LED cooling fan 1 ☞ 62050
LED cooling fan 2

41410_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41412
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1412 No. 1413

The film is upside down. Would you like to Input the frame number
continue processing?
Attention message release
Attention message release YES or NO
YES or NO • Select YES to input the frame numbers.
• Select YES to start film scanning. • Select NO to start scanning without reading the frame
• Select NO to eject the film. numbers.

Condition Condition

Suffix Condition Suffix Condition

number number
- When 135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 detects the film DX - The frame number cannot be detected by 135 DX
code, it detects that the film is upside down. sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4 while processing 135 film. Or,
two or more frame number cannot be detected.
Check Point NOTE
1 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled. • This attention message appears only when the setting of
Frame No. Detect Error Correction in Additional tab of

4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment. Operator Selections is Manual.

3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

Check Point

Diagnosis 1 Check that the DX code area of the film is not

fogged.
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
2 Check that the film without the DX code is not used.
Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35000 3 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled.
(135/240 AFC-II)
4 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35060 Adjustment.
(135 AFC-II)
5 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

Failed parts Manual No.

Diagnosis
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135/240 AFC- ☞ 62150
II) Adjustment failure point Manual No.
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650 Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35000
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250 (135/240 AFC-II)
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370 Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35060
(135 AFC-II)
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Failed parts Manual No.
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135/240 AFC- ☞ 62150
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360 II)
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
NOTE Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
☞ 89000_1
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
☞ 89010 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

41412 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41412
Attention message: Film carrier

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

41412 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41414
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1414
The FID number was not detected.

Countermeasure message
Input the FID number then press the [START] key to print the FID
number.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to input the FID manually.
• Select NO to start scanning without reading the FID number.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- 240 DX sensor 1 or 2 cannot the FID code of the film.

Check Point
1 Check that the 240 DX sensor is soiled.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment ☞ 35000

Failed parts Manual No.

240 DX sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41414 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41416
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1416 No. 1417

Select the 240 lane. Close the Mount Insertion Cover.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or automatic release
NOTE • This message will be released automatically when the mount
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AFC-II is insertion cover is closed.
attached. NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the 135/240 MMC-
Condition II is attached.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- 240 lane limit switch does not turn ON when Suffix Condition
cleaning the 240 lane for the AFC cleaning in the number
close down checks.
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is
240 lane limit switch does not turn ON when initializing after the error cancellation, the mount
updating the 240 light source. insertion cover sensor turns LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point Check Point
1 Check that the 240 lane is correctly selected. 1 Check that the mount insertion cover is closed.
2 Check the lane limit switch status via input check. 2 Check the status of the mount insertion cover sensor
via input check.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Diagnosis
240 lane limit switch ☞ 62150 Failed parts Manual No.
135 lane limit switch Mount insertion cover sensor ☞ 62450
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240 MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
Connecting PCB 3 ☞ 65220 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Power PCB ☞ 65260 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
NOTE Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference ☞ 89000_1
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000_1 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010

41416 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41420
Attention message: Film carrier
Wiring diagram [S-4]
No. 1420 ☞ 89010
Select the DX code.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Press the YES key to select the DX code.
• Select NO to start scanning without reading the DX code.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The DX code on the negative or position film is not
read while scanning.

Check Point
1 Check that the DX code area of the film is not
fogged.
2 Check that the film without the DX code is not used.

4. Troubleshooting
3 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled.
4 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
5 Check the DX sensor status via input check.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment ☞ 35000

Failed parts Manual No.

135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 ☞ 62150
240 DX sensor 1 or 2
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Refer to 4250 ☞ LED driver PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

41420 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41420
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1421
Confirm the stop position of all the frames
to be processed.

Countermeasure message
Adjust the film stop position by using the cursor keys. When you
change the frame size, select the desirable frame size and press the
[YES] key.
Attention message release
PASS, YES or NO
• Select PASS to skip the frame and restart scanning from the
next frame.
• Select YES to start film scanning.
• Select NO to eject the film.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
- The film is inserted pressing the N key of the
operation keyboard or pressing the F4 key of the full
keyboard to check the frame stop position manually.

NOTE
• When scanning the film, the machine cannot recognize the
frame properly, adjust the stop position manually.

41420 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41422
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1422
Select the 135 lane.

Attention message release

YES
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AFC-II is
attached.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- 135 lane is not selected when cleaning the 135 lane
for the AFC cleaning in the close down checks.

Check Point
1 Check that the 135 lane is correctly selected.
2 Check the lane limit switch status via input check.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
135 lane limit switch ☞ 62150
240 lane limit switch
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
Connecting PCB 3 ☞ 65220
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41422 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41423
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1423
Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. Remove the film from the
Film Carrier.
No. 1424
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
being executed.
No. 1425
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
complete.

Attention message release

YES
NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the positive film is
inserted.

4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- A positive film is inserted into the auto film carrier
when two or more hours passed after finishing the
previous sensor LED light source intensity
adjustment.

NOTE
• If the attention message No.1423 is released by removing the
film and pressing the YES key, the sensor LED light intensity
adjustment is carried out automatically.
In this time, attention messages Nos.1424 and 1425 appear.
After the sensor LED light intensity adjustment is completed,
the attention message is released automatically.

41423 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41426
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1426 No. 1427

Attach the 110 AFC. Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. If film remains in the Film
Attention message release Carrier, remove it.
YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when Attention message release
you attach the film carrier. YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the light intensity adjustment.
Condition
• Select NO to stop the light intensity adjustment.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- A film carrier other than 110 AFC-II has been set
Suffix Condition
when carrying out the setup for 110 in the daily setup
number
or area registration.
- If a specified amount of time has elapsed since the
intensity of the sensor LED light source was
Check Point
previously adjusted and the sensor LED light source's
1 Check if the 110 AFC-II is set securely. intensity must be readjusted, but a light source update
is not necessary:

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
110 connecting PCB ☞ 65310
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41426 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41428
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1428 No. 1429

Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. Make sure that the mount is placed
correctly.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is number
initializing after the error cancellation, the mount - When the mount is inserted for the first time, the
sensor turns ON. mount sensor does not turn ON.
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is
initializing after the error cancellation, the ejection NOTE
sensor turns ON. • This attention message appears when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached.
NOTE
• This attention message appears when the 135/240 AMC-II is Check Point
attached.

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the
Check Point mount stocker.
2 Check the status of the mount sensor and mount
1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the sensor (inlet) via input check.
mount stocker.
2 Check the status of the sensors via input check. Diagnosis

Diagnosis Failed parts Manual No.

Mount sensor ☞ 62550
Failed parts Manual No.
Mount sensor (inlet)
Mount sensor ☞ 62550 MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
Ejection sensor
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000_1
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000_1 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010

41428 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41430
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1430 No. 1431

Confirm the frame size. Attach the 120 AFC.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when
Condition you attach the film carrier.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- A frame film which size is smaller than 120 frame Suffix Condition
size (6×6/6×7/6×8/6×9) selected in Machine Status number
of order display. - A film carrier other than 120 AFC-II is set when
carrying out 120 AFC-II cleaning in the AFC
NOTE cleaning mode.
• This attention message appears when the 120 AFC-II is
attached.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Check that the 120 AFC-II is securely attached.

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the frame size (6×6/6×7/6×8/6×9)
selected in Machine Status of order display is as Diagnosis
same as one inserted 120 frame size. Failed parts Manual No.
2 Check that the loading sensor, the ready sensor and Connecting PCB ☞ 65290
the film sensor are not soiled.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
3 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
4 Check the status of the sensors via input check.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Diagnosis
NOTE
Adjustment failure point Manual No. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Sensitivity adjustment failure in the loading ☞ 35010 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor
☞ 89000_1
Failed parts Manual No.
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Loading sensor ☞ 62250
☞ 89010
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Sensor PCB ☞ 65300
Connecting PCB ☞ 65290
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41430 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41432
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1432 No. 1433

Attach the MMC. Attach the AMC.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or automatic release YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released when the MMC is • This attention message will be released when the AMC is
attached. attached.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The daily setup is carried out using the 135/240 - The daily setup is carried out using the 135/240
AMC-II when the light source registration is carried MMC-II when the light source registration is carried
out with 135/240 MMC-II. out with 135/240 AMC-II.

NOTE NOTE
• The light source registration of mount carrier can be carried • The light source registration of mount carrier can be carried
out only for either 135/240 MMC-II or 135/240 AMC-II. out only for either 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II.
• Carry out the light source registration before using the • Carry out the light source registration before using the

4. Troubleshooting
different type of the mount carrier. different type of the mount carrier.

Check Point Check Point

1 Check the carrier code detector via input check with 1 Check the carrier code detection via input check with
the 135/240 MMC-II attached. the 135/240 AMC-II attached.
2 Carry out the light source registration. 2 Carry out the light source registration.

Diagnosis Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000_1 ☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4] Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010 ☞ 89010

41432 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41434
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1435
Insertion direction of film is different.
Insert the film from the rear end (end with
largest frame number).

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to eject the film.
• Select NO to continue film processing from the front end.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The 135 DX sensor detected that the film had been
inserted from the front end.

NOTE
• This attention message appears only when the setting of 135

4. Troubleshooting
Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function in
Additional tab of Operator Selections is ON.

Check Point
1 Check that the 135 DX sensor is soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the 135 DX sensor status via input check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
135 DX sensor 1 or 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
135 DX sensor 1 or 2 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
135 AFC connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65360
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

41434 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41438
Attention message: Film carrier
Check Point
No. 1438
Set the attachment. 1 When the above attention message appears ☞ 35200
even though the attachment for adjustment is
set, check the detected status of the attchment
Attention message release for adjustment.
Set the attachment for adjustment and press YES.
Diagnosis
Condition
Failed parts Manual No.
Suffix Condition
number Attachment Detection Switch ☞ 62670
33 The attachment which is set is other than the AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
attachment for adjustment when registering and
updating the light source, Or the attachment for NOTE
adjustment is not set. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
34 Pressing START on the Order Display while an Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
attachment other than the attachment (mask) is
attached.
☞ 89000_1
An attachment other than the attachment for
Wiring diagram [S-4]
adjustment is set when carrying out area registration,
focus adjustment and film carrier adjustment. Or the ☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting
attachment for adjustment is not set.

NOTE
• This attention message appears when the multi film carrier is
attached.
• Crop card attachment is available for the use as the attachment
for adjustment.

Attachment for adjustment

Crop card attachment

G078428

41438 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41438
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1439
Light Source was not updated. Would you
like to scan?

Attention message release

Pressing YES scans without updating the light source.
Pressing NO ejects film without scanning.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The film is set in the film carrier without updating the
light source.

Check Point
1 Update the light source by each film carrier.

4. Troubleshooting

41438 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1501
The media is write protected.

Countermeasure message
Release the write protection tab on the disk.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The media is write-protected when an attempt was
made to write data to the disk.

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the write protection tab of the media indicated
in the message.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41502
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1502 No. 1503

Replace the media.### The appropriate file was not found.###

Countermeasure message Attention message release

Replace the disk. YES
Attention message release
YES or NO Condition
• Select YES to restart writing.
Suffix Condition
• Select NO to stop writing. number
- The readable file was not found when an attempt was
Condition made to read data.
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
- Although an attempt was made to write several data, • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
the media is filled to capacity. second line of the message.

Check Point
IMPORTANT
• When the data of which capacity is larger than the media 1 Check that the media containing the desired file has

4. Troubleshooting
is to be written, the message No. 1515 Data is too large been inserted.
to write. appears.
Diagnosis
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the Failed parts Manual No.
second line of the message. If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920_1
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message. even if the media has been set, carry out the
(max: five orders) Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• The number of the orders to be output is displayed in the Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
fourth line of the message.
• The number of media, images and the processing time will be NOTE
displayed in the fifth line of the message. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
Check Point
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
1 Check the free space of the disk indicated by the ☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
message.
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41502 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41504
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1504 No. 1505

Image Destination for the print channel is Exif information cannot be read.
not set.
Countermeasure message
Attention message release Although pressing the [YES] key executes the image data reading,
the auto correction (digital camera) and Exif printing specification
(date printing) function of the digital image become invalid. For
applying the auto correction, make the Digital Image Auto
Condition
Correction (other) valid. For details, refer to the manual.
Suffix Condition Attention message release
number YES
- In the state where the check is contained in neither
CD-R external writing system in a media output Condition
setting of a print channel, nor d-Storage, it was going
Suffix Condition
to output to external system.
number
- The Exif information which is memorized in the
Check Point image cannot be read when reading the image and
1 Check the print channel setting. printing.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
the message.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41504 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41506
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1506
Would you like to remove the USB Flash
Memory?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Press the YES key to start processing to disconnect the OS
and devices.
• Select NO to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- ← and → have been pressed to remove the USB
Flash Memory.

NOTE
• When the device gets in the state possible to be removed

4. Troubleshooting
safely, Remove the USB Flash Memory. appears.
☞ 41514

41506 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41508
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1508 No. 1509

There are some files that could not get Write the data. ##### Order Number
written to the media. Would you like to
stop processing? Countermeasure message
Replace the disk.
Attention message release
Countermeasure message
YES or NO
For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release • Select YES to start writing.
YES or NO • Select NO to stop writing.
• Select YES to stop the operation.
• Select NO to continue the operation. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - The data is to be written into the hard disk.
number
NOTE
- The file name (folder name) which cannot carry out
the media copy was contained. • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
HD

4. Troubleshooting
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.

41508 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41510
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1510 No. 1511

Read the data. Set the media. Write the data. Set the media.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or NO
• Select YES to write data.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing data.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- The media is removed while reading. Suffix Condition
number
NOTE
- A media is not placed when the data is to be written
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the to the media.
second line of the message.
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message. NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
Check Point second line of the message.
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set. • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
• The number of media will be displayed in the fourth line of
Diagnosis the message.

Failed parts Manual No. Check Point

If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920_1
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.
even if the media has been set, carry out the
Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE
If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920_1
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference even if the media has been set, carry out the
Circuit diagram Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting NOTE
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41510 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41512
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1512 No. 1513

Data was not read from the media. Data was not written to the media. Format
the media?
Countermeasure message
Replace the disk. Countermeasure message
Attention message release Are you sure you want to format?
YES Attention message release
YES, PASS or NO
Condition • Select YES to format the media and write the data to the
Suffix Condition media.
number • Select PASS to write the data to the media without being
- A disk error occurs when the data is to be read from formatted the media.
the media. • Select NO to stop writing.

NOTE Condition
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message. Suffix Condition
number
Check Point - A disk error occurs when the data is to be written to

4. Troubleshooting
the media.
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.
NOTE
Diagnosis • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
Failed parts Manual No.
• If the file already exists in the media, the attention message
If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920_1 No. 1536 appears.
even if the media has been set, carry out the ☞ 41536
Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Check Point

NOTE 1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.

• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Diagnosis
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram Failed parts Manual No.
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram NOTE
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41512 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41514
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1514 No. 1515

Remove the USB Flash Memory. Data is too large to write.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- It is in the state possible to remove the USB Flash - When the file is written to the media, the data cannot
Memory safely. be written as the file size is larger than the capacity of
the media.

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the size of the media displayed in the message.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41514 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41516
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1516 No. 1517

Data is too large to read. Invalid image format. Failed to read.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading. • Select YES to continue reading.
• Select NO to stop reading. • Select NO to stop reading.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Total pixels of the file to be read from the media are - Since the image format cannot be identified, printing
beyond 64 M pixels (12500 × 5120 pixels etc.) cannot be carried out.
- The both sides (length and width) of the image read
from the media are over 5120 pixels. (This does not NOTE
occur in the Edit Mode). • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
- One side of the image read from the media is over second line of the message.
12500 pixels. • The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of

4. Troubleshooting
- When the data is saved in the media of the external the message.
system, one side of the data is over 7400 pixels. • This message will be displayed each time the file is not read.

NOTE Check Point

• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
1 Check the format of the file displayed in the message.
second line of the message.
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of NOTE
the message.
• Applicable input image format
• This message will be displayed each time the file is not read. Exif1.0, Exif2.1, JPEG (including Progressive JPEG and
CMYK Format), Flashpix, Bitmap, PSD (including Photoshop
Check Point document and CMYK Format), PCD (Photo CD), PCX, DCX
(Paint Brush Format), TGA (Taraga), and TIFF (RGB non-
1 Check the size of the file displayed in the message. compressed)

Diagnosis Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting ☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41516 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41518
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1518 No. 1519

Output media is the same as Input media. Data has been written to this media.
Select different one. Would you like to delete all the written
files?
Attention message release
YES Countermeasure message
Are you sure you want to format?
Condition Attention message release
YES or NO
Suffix Condition
number • Select YES to delete the data that is stored in the media and
write the data to the media.
- The same media is selected for input and output and
the YES key is pressed. • Select NO to stop writing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- A disk error (There is already files) occurs when the
data is to be written to the CD-R/RW.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
CD
• This message appears only for the CD-RW.

Check Point
1 Check if the CD-RW is set.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
CD-R/RW drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41518 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41520
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1520 No. 1521

Select the template. Template information does not match to
make the Album Print.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- An attempt is made to scan and read the data without number
selecting the template when album printing. - The information file does not exist when selecting the
- An attempt is made to register without selecting the album template, or selected the album template
template when album print channel setting. without the image insertion area.
- The image insertion area of album template is
Check Point overlapped.
- A template other than album template is selected
1 Check if the album template is selected.
when selecting the album template.
- There are the areas of ovals or polygons.

4. Troubleshooting
- There are 41 areas or more.

Check Point
1 Correct the information file in the template
information correction display.

41520 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41522
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1522 No. 1523

Are you sure to print the previous frame It was not registered as an option.
except selected one?
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES or NO
• Select YES to print. Condition
• Select NO to stop the operation. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - The input/output media drive which is selected in the
print channel setting has been removed. Or the option
Suffix Condition
registration has been released.
number
- An attempt is made to print the previous frame when NOTE
entering the 1 frame magnification display from the • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
judge display. second and third lines of the message.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the media drive displayed in the message.
2 Check the setting for Option Registration.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41522 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41526
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1526 No. 1527

Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Write the data. Set the media.
Do you want to try again?
Countermeasure message
Attention message release Press the [NO] key to stop writing. Press the [YES] key to write
YES or NO the order. Press the [PASS] key to write the order at another time.
Attention message release
• Press the YES key to restart processing to disconnect the OS
PASS, YES or NO
and devices.
• Select PASS to write several orders to the media.
• Select NO to stop the operation.
• Select YES to write to the media.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing to the media.

Suffix Condition Condition

number
- The processing to disconnect the OS and devices was Suffix Condition
started to remove the USB Flash Memory, however, number
it has failed because the USB Flash Memory was - Displayed to check when the data is being written to
being accessed. the same media written once before.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• When the device gets in the state possible to be removed • The number of media to be saved can be set on this
safely, Remove the USB Flash Memory. appears. display.
☞ 41514
• The same number as that of label count which is set on
the Order Display appears as initial value.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
USB Flash Memory Kit ☞ 88000 second line of the message.
NOTE • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference (max: five orders)
• The number of the orders to be output is displayed in the
Circuit diagram fourth line of the message.
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting • The number of media will be displayed in the fifth line of the
message.

41526 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41528
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1528 No. 1529

Registered Print Type of Print Channel is Failed to read the bar code.
not for normal printing.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - The bar code of the Consumer Terminal (CT) was not
- When the prints are made from the Consumer read properly.
Terminal (CT), Print Type in Print Channel
Setting has been set to other than Normal Print.

NOTE
• When using the Consumer Terminal (CT) with off-line
process, this message appears.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Change the print channel of QSS to the normal print
mode.

41528 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41530
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1530 No. 1531

The data was not written to the Network The data was not written to the Network
Folder. Make sure a Network Folder Folder. Make sure the Network is
exists. connected.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to restart reading. • Select YES to restart reading.
• Select NO to stop writing. • Select NO to stop writing.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- There is no corresponding folder when outputting the - When outputting the data to the folder of the network,
data to the folder on the network. the network is not connected.

Check Point Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if there is the corresponding folder. 1 Check the network connection.

41530 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41532
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1532 No. 1533

Write the data. Data was saved to the storage media.

Countermeasure message Attention message release

Press the [NO] key to stop writing. Press the [YES] key to write YES
the order. Press the [PASS] key to write the order at another time.
Attention message release Condition
PASS, YES or NO
Suffix Condition
• Select PASS to write several orders to the hard disk.
number
• Select YES to write to the hard disk.
- The data has been written to the hard disk.
• Select NO to stop writing to the hard disk.
NOTE
Condition • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
Suffix Condition second line of the message.
number HD:

- After writing the data into a hard disk, it appears for • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
checking before writing more data continuously. (max: five orders)
• The number of the orders, images and the processing time are
NOTE displayed in the fourth line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
HD:
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
(max: five orders)
• The number of the orders to be output is displayed in the
fourth line of the message.
• When changing the order or before writing the data, this
message appears.

41532 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41534
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1534 No. 1535

Data was not written to the Hard Disk. USB Flash Memory is not set.
Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the File Delete dialog. Delete Condition
unnecessary files in the hard disk. Suffix Condition
• Select NO to stop the operation. number
- The operation to remove the USB Flash Memory has
Condition been carried out when the USB Flash Memory is not
recognized. (Press ← and →.)
Suffix Condition
number
Check Point
- When the data is to be written to the hard disk, the
free space of hard disk is below 4 GB. 1 Check whether the USB Flash Memory is set.

NOTE
Diagnosis
• When media output is performed to the hard disk, this

4. Troubleshooting
message appears. Failed parts Manual No.
• When this message is displayed, the File Delete dialog box USB Flash Memory Kit ☞ 88000
appears.
• Read only files will not be deleted. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Check Point Circuit diagram
1 Delete unnecessary files. ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
HD drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41534 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41536
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1536 No. 1537

The data has already been written to this The appropriate file was not found.####
media. Format this media?
Attention message release
Countermeasure message YES or NO
Are you sure you want to format? • Select YES to read the next file.
Attention message release • Select NO to stop reading.
YES, PASS or NO
• Select YES to format the media and write the data to the Condition
media.
Suffix Condition
• Select PASS not to format the media and write the data to the
number
media.
- Several files have been read, but some of them are
• Select NO to stop writing.
not found.
Condition NOTE
Suffix Condition • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
number second line of the message.
- A disk error (files have already been there) occurs • The name of the missing file is displayed in the third line.

4. Troubleshooting
when the data is to be written to the media. • If all the files are not found, the attention message No. 1503
appears.
NOTE ☞ 41502
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message. Check Point

Check Point 1 Check that the media containing the desired file has
been inserted.
1 Check the media displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Failed parts Manual No. Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41536 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41538
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1538 No. 1539

There are still orders remaining for output. The data has already been written to this
Click the Output Media icon to output. media. Set a new media.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or NO
• Select YES to write data.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- When the reserved orders are remained, Order Suffix Condition
Display has been changed to the Menu mode. number
- When the reserved orders are remained, the print - When writing to the CD-R, disk error has occurred.
channel has been changed to the other channel which
output media is different from the current one. NOTE
- When the reserved orders are remained, the output • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
media has been changed. second line of the message.
CD

4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only for the CD-R.

Check Point
1 Check if the CD-R is placed.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
CD-R/RW drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41538 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41540
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1540 No. 1541

Data could not be written to the media. The data for media output is waiting to be
Confirm the media drive setting. written. Settings cannot be changed until
the data is written to media.
Attention message release
YES or automatic release Attention message release
• This attention message will be automatically released when YES
the data saving is completed.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - When the reserved orders are remained (for example,
- The data is being written to the media. when not pressing the ORDER key after scanning),
the output media or the number of prints to be output
NOTE have been changed.
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message. Check Point
1 Press the ORDER key and output the data to the

4. Troubleshooting
media.

41540 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41542
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1542 No. 1543

The same order number data already This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be
exists. Would you like to overwrite? converted correctly. Would you like to
read the data?
Attention message release
YES, NO or PASS Countermeasure message
• Select YES to overwrite the image data. Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed.
• Select NO to write the image data to the hard disk or the Attention message release
media with _01 added to the folder name (order number) YES or NO
automatically. • Select YES to read the image data.
• Select PASS to stop writing the image data. • Select NO not to read the image data.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- When outputting to the media, the same order - It is attempted to read JPEG image data with CMYK
number data already exists in the media. format when prints are made from the media.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message. second line of the message.
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
the message.

Check Point
1 Change the data to the RGB format by Adobe
Photoshop etc.

41542 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41544
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1545
The image size aspect ratio is not correct.
Data was not written.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Press the YES key to skip the incorrect image and to write
other image.
• Select NO to stop writing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Aspect ratio of the image is more than 1:6.6 when
outputting the image to CD-R external writing system
or d-Storage with normal mode.
- When saving image data into each media drive, the
aspect ratio of the input image exceeds the following

4. Troubleshooting
condition.

Output image size Limited ratio

16Base (2048 × 3072) 1: 3.5
4Base (1024 × 1536) 1: 7
Base (512 × 768) 1: 14
1/4Base (256 × 384) 1: 28
- No limit with ratio

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
• The file name of which image size is out of the specification is
displayed in the third line of the message.
• Carry out the operations below to write the image which has
not been written.
Change the output image size without changing the aspect
ratio of the input image. Or process the input image to fulfill
the conditions above using the Adobe Photoshop.

41544 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41546
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1546 No. 1547

Data could not be written to the media. Data was saved to the storage media.
Confirm that the media capacity matches Remove the media.
the Media Capacity Setting.
Attention message release
Countermeasure message YES or automatic release
Refer to the manual for corrective action. • This attention message will be automatically released when
Attention message release the data saving is completed.
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - The data has been written to the media.
- The capacity of the CD-R/RW to be used is smaller
than that of the media registered as an option when NOTE
writing data to the CD-R/RW. • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
Check Point • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
(max: five orders)
- Make sure how large is the capacity of the media in
Option Registration. • The number of the orders, images, and the processing time are
displayed in the fourth line of the message.
NOTE
• The type of CD and the capacity of the media can be set in
Option Registration.
• For the type of CD there are two types, that of 12 cm and 8
cm. The capacity differs between those.

Type of CD Capacity
12 cm CD 640 to 720 MB
8 cm CD 150 to 300 MB

• The capacity is reference. Set the capacity of the media to be

used each time, because the capacity of CD-R/RW depends on
each manufacturers.

41546 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41548
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1548 No. 1549

Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete Data is too small to read.
the image file(s)?
Attention message release
Countermeasure message YES or NO
Refer to the manual for corrective action. • Select YES to continue reading.
Attention message release • Select NO to stop reading.
YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the File Delete dialog. Delete the files Condition
in the hard disk.
Suffix Condition
• Select NO to stop the operation.
number
Condition - When reading the data from media, the file size is
smaller than the inputting minimum size.
Suffix Condition - The image size is less than 120 pixels in the vertical
number direction and less than 160 pixels in the horizontal
- When Adobe Photoshop is started, the free space of direction when outputting the image to the CD-R
hard disk is below 4 GB. writing system with normal mode.
- The aspect ratio of the input image is less than the
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
following conditions when outputting the image to a
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third media other than CD-R writing system.
line of the message.
C:
Output image size Pixels
• When this message occurs, the File Delete dialog box appears.
16Base (2048 × 3072) No limit with ratio
• Read only files will not be deleted.
4Base (1024 × 1536) No limit with ratio

Check Point Base (512 × 768) No limit with ratio

1/4Base (256 × 384) No limit with ratio
1 Delete unnecessary files.
- The shorter side is less than 80
pixels.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. IMPORTANT
HD drive ☞ 88000 • Inputting minimum size from media is 32 pixels vertically
and 32 pixels horizontally.
NOTE
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
Circuit diagram second line of the message.
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram • The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting the message.
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

41548 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
Attention message: Colorimeter

No. 1550 No. 1551

Register the Calibration Plate Data. The calibration plate data is out of range.
Register the data?
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to resister the correction value.
Suffix Condition • Select NO not to resister the correction value.
number
IMPORTANT
- The unavailable data is registered in the current
calibration plate data. • When the message 1551: The calibration plate data is
out of range. Register the data? appears, be sure to
select NO.
Check Point
1 Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110 Condition
Suffix Condition
Diagnosis number
Failed parts Manual No. - When the colorimeter is calibrated, the difference

4. Troubleshooting
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130 between the two photometry values obtained by the
calibration plate measurements from the leading end
ATX mother board ☞ 88000 to 9 mm and from that to 18 mm is 100 or less.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Check Point
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference 1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly set.
Circuit diagram
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Adjustment.
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram IMPORTANT
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting • The calibration plate may not be set correctly or be
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit soiled. In this case, stop registering the correction value
with the NO key, check/clean the calibration plate and
set it properly.
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and set it
properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, update
the calibration plate data.
☞ 21110
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.

Diagnosis
In the case of an adjusting failure
Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 21110
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the ☞ 21110
colorimeter unit failure.

41550 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41550
Attention message: Colorimeter

Failed parts Manual No.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

4. Troubleshooting

41550 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41552
Attention message: Colorimeter

No. 1552-####
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short.
It cannot be measured.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While the paper is being fed to lead the paper front
end, the paper rear end has passed paper sensor 1.
0002 While the paper is being advanced, the paper rear end
has passed paper sensor 1.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61110
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

41552 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41600
Attention message: Pricing unit
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1601-####
Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a
pricing sheet.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the standard setting of pricing unit is used for
printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
0002 When type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) is used
for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.

NOTE
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to
Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 The cover on the pricing unit is open.
2 There is no pricing sheet.
3 Sheet feed switch is pressed.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 64140_1
PU printer -

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-9 Pricing Unit

41600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41602
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1603-####
The rest 2 order could be kept by the
Pricing Unit.

Countermeasure message
Print the Pricing Sheet.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Standard pricing unit can store only two more orders
of data.
0002 Type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) can store only
two more orders of data.

NOTE
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to

4. Troubleshooting
Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-9 Pricing Unit

41602 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41604
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1604
Pricing Sheet Print Out Check

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to print the pricing sheet.
• Select NO not to print the pricing sheet.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- This message appears after the judgement is finished
or the ORDER key is pressed.

NOTE
• When PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order via Operator
Selections is set to Not in use, this attention message will not
appear after the judgement is completed.

4. Troubleshooting
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to
Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

41604 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41620
Attention message: NMC
Attention message: NMC

No. 1621
Would you like to delete the order?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete the order.
• Select NO to continue printing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The Delete button was clicked on Net Order Mode.

NOTE
• The receipt number is displayed in the third line of the
message.

4. Troubleshooting

41620 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41622
Attention message: NMC

No. 1622
Would you like to quit the Net Order
Receipt?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to quit the net order mode.
• Select NO to continue printing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The End button or NO key is pressed in the Net
Order Mode.

4. Troubleshooting

41622 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41634
Attention message: NMC

No. 1634
Data could not be received. Would you
like to delete the order?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete the order.
• Select No to cancel the attention message and receive
customer order(s) again.
This message will appear onscreen again if data is not
received within 10 minutes.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt was made to load target image data
received from the external PC based on customer
order information received via Net Order. Since the
corresponding image data did not exist, it could not

4. Troubleshooting
be uploaded to the QSS within 10 minutes.

NOTE
• The receipt number, host number, and request number are
displayed in the second, third and fourth line respectively.

Check Point
1 Verify that the external PC and QSS are properly
connected.
2 Verify that the host PC is running normally.
3 Verify that external PC applications were not
interrupted and that the order request is correct.

41634 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41636
Attention message: NMC

No. 1636 No. 1637

Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel was not set. The order was
Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. not accepted.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES
NOTE
• Select YES to reserve the order. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
number Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, required print
channel by the Consumer Terminal (CT) did not exist
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
on the QSS.
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, the setting of
the required print channel is changed before prints are
NOTE
processed, though the print channel was existed
before. • The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The print channel is displayed in the fifth line of the message.
• The receipt number is displayed in the third line of the • This message occurs on the Net Order Mode only.
message.
• The print channel is displayed in the forth line of the message. Check Point
• This message occurs on the Net Order Mode only.
1 Check the print channel setting.
Check Point
1 Check the print channel setting.

41636 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41638
Attention message: NMC

No. 1638 No. 1639-####

Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is Failed to read the DPOF file. The order
not Normal Print. The order was not was not accepted.
accepted.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number 0001 DPOF file is edited, and the print channel has not
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer been set.
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, required print 0002 DPOF file is edited, and the frame information has
channel by the Consumer Terminal (CT) was set for not been set.
some print mode other than Normal Print. 0003 The network is interrupted while reading the DPOF
file, and the print type has not been set.
NOTE
0004 Image file set with the frame information does not
• The host name is displayed in the third line. exist.

4. Troubleshooting
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line. 0005 Image file set with the frame information cannot be
• The print channel is displayed in the fifth line of the message. copied.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. 0006 The order fails to be registered to the Net Order.
0007 DPOF file fails to be copied.
Check Point In the QSS-Kids, the setting of Terminal in Net
Folder Registration is wrong.
- Check the print channel setting.
0008 The request number is duplicated.

NOTE
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

Check Point
- Check whether it is correct to the setting of Net
Folder Registration.
- Check the network connection.
- Check with another order.

41638 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41640
Attention message: NMC

No. 1641
Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm
the Print Channel.

Attention message release

YES
NOTE
• Pressing YES: OK reserves the order that brings up the
attention message.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, the print
channel specified by the Consumer Terminal (CT)
has not been set on the QSS.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

Check Point
- Check the print channel setting.

41640 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41642
Attention message: NMC

No. 1642 No. 1643

Destination to save image is not set for The appropriate file was not found.
the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print
Channel. Attention message release
YES
Attention message release
YES Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition
• Pressing YES: OK reserves the order that brings up the number
attention message. - Any required files were not found when reading data
on the Net Order.
Condition
NOTE
Suffix Condition
• The host name appears in the second line.
number
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
third line.
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, the print
channel specified with the Consumer Terminal (CT) • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
was set Destination to External System, but it was not
Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
set Writing to the CD-R External Writing System
or Saving to the d-Storage.
1 Check if there is the required files.
NOTE 2 Check the network connection.
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

Check Point
- Check the print channel setting.

41642 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41644
Attention message: NMC

No. 1644 No. 1645

Exif Information could not be read. Data is too large to read.

Countermeasure message Attention message release

Although pressing the [YES] key executes the image data reading, YES or NO
the auto correction (digital camera) and Exif printing specification • Select YES to continue reading.
(date printing) function of the digital image become invalid. For
• Select NO to stop reading.
applying the auto correction, make the Digital Image Auto
Correction (other) valid. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release Condition
YES Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- Total pixels of the file read on the Net Order are over
Suffix Condition 64 M pixels (12500 × 5120 pixels etc.).
number - The both sides (length and breadth) of the image read
- The Exif information which is memorized in the on the Net Order are over 5120 pixels.
image cannot be read when reading the image on the - One side of the image read on the Net Order is over
Net Order. 12500 pixels.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line. • The host name appears in the second line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the • The request number or reference number is displayed in the
third line. third line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line. • The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

41644 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41646
Attention message: NMC

No. 1646 No. 1647

Invalid image format. Failed to read. The appropriate file was not found.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading. • Select YES to read the next file.
• Select NO to stop reading. • Select NO to stop reading.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The image format cannot be recognized when reading - Several files have been read on the Net Order, but
the image on the Net Order. some of them are not found.

NOTE NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line. • The host name appears in the second line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the • The request number or reference number is displayed in the
third line. third line.

4. Troubleshooting
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line. • The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
• If all the files are not found, the attention message No.1643
Check Point appears.
1 Check the file format.
☞ 41642

NOTE Check Point

• Applicable input image format 1 Check if there is the required files.
Exif1.0, Exif2.1, JPEG (including Progressive JPEG and 2 Check the network connection.
CMYK Format), FlashPix, Bitmap, PSD (including
Photoshop document and CMYK Format), PCD (Photo CD),
PCX, DCX (Paint Brush Format), TGA (Taraga), and TIFF
(RGB non-compressed)

41646 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41648
Attention message: NMC

No. 1648 No. 1649

This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be The image size aspect ratio is not correct.
converted correctly. Would you like to Data was not written.
read the data?
Countermeasure message
Countermeasure message Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed. Attention message release
Attention message release YES or NO
YES or NO • Select YES to continue writing.
• Select YES to read the image data. • Select NO to stop writing.
• Select NO not to read the image data.
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - Aspect ratio of the image is more than 1:6.6 when
- It is attempted to read the JPEG image data of the outputting the image to CD-R external writing system
CMYK format when reading the image on the Net in the normal mode on the Net Order.
Order. - The aspect ratio of the input image is beyond the

4. Troubleshooting
following conditions when outputting the image to a
NOTE media other than CD-R external writing system on
• The host name is displayed in the third line. the Net Order.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the
fourth line. Output image size Limited ratio
• The frame number is displayed in the fifth line. 16Base (2048 × 3072) 1: 3.5
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. 4Base (1024 × 1536) 1: 7
Base (512 × 768) 1: 14
Check Point 1/4Base (256 × 384) 1: 28
1 Change the data to the RGB format by Adobe - No limit with ratio
Photoshop etc.
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the
fourth line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fifth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

41648 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41650
Attention message: NMC

No. 1650
Data is too small to read.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading.
• Select NO to stop reading.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When reading the data from media on the Net Order,
the file size is smaller than the inputting minimum
size.
- The image size is less than 120 pixels in the vertical
direction and less than 160 pixels in the horizontal
direction when outputting the image to the CD-R
writing system in the normal mode on the Net Order.

4. Troubleshooting
- The aspect ratio of the input image is less than the
following conditions when outputting the image to a
media other than CD-R writing system on the Net
Order.

Output image size Pixels

16Base (2048 × 3072) No limit with ratio
4Base (1024 × 1536) No limit with ratio
Base (512 × 768) No limit with ratio
1/4Base (256 × 384) No limit with ratio
- The shorter side is less than 80
pixels.

IMPORTANT
• Inputting minimum size from media is 32 pixels vertically
and 32 pixels horizontally.

NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the
third line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.

41650 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41656
Attention message: NMC

No. 1657
Hold On Save could not be executed.
Secure enough space, then restart
processing.

Attention message release

YES/START or automatic release

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When saving order from the QSS-Kids to the
Compact Archive Unit, the space for Hold on Save
has 0 byte.

NOTE
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the

4. Troubleshooting
fourth line.

41656 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41658
Attention message: NMC

No. 1659
Calibrating... Would you like to stop the
calibration?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to quit the Net Order display and delete the LUT
confirmation file.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- End button at the Net Order Screen is clicked during
calibration

NOTE
• This message appears if calibration is performed from DP2 to
HotFolder.

4. Troubleshooting

41658 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41800_1
Attention message: Software upgrade
Attention message: Software upgrade

Wiring diagram [S-4]

No. 1801-#### ☞ 89010
Execute software upgrade.

Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked
when the power supply is turned ON, it is not correct.

Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
2000 PC-scanner interface PCB
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB

NOTE
• The name of PCB where the attention message arises is
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Carry out the corrective actions according to the following
diagnosis for the displayed PCB as a reference.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600_1

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

41800_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41900
Attention message: Main
Attention message: Main

No. 1900-#### No. 1901

It was not registered as an option. Selected optional function is not available.
If you need to use, Install it.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
When the setup or adjustment for the option which is not Suffix Condition
registered is to be carried out. number
- After the optional software has been uninstalled, an
Suffix Option attempt is made to use its function.
number
(bit) Check Point
0001 PU
1 Install the software of the option to use.
0002 NMC
0010 Flatbed scanner

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To carry out the setup or adjustment, register as an option.
• The description of suffix number is displayed in the second
line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002

41900 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41902_1
Attention message: Main

No. 1902 No. 1903-####

Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Proceeding. One moment please. . .
Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition 1 The F key is selected via the Order Display during
number processing.
- An attempt is made to select Menu using F via 2 The interrupt process is carried out while test prints
Order Display while Adobe Photoshop is being are made during setup.
used. 3 An attempt is made to change each control PCB on
the Menu display or subsequent during processing.
NOTE
• The operation relating to setup cannot be done when the NOTE
Adobe Photoshop is being used. • The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing

NOTE
• In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of
condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.

Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser power supply 2 ☞ 64250_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply 2 (PS16).

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

41902_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41902_1
Attention message: Main

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

41902_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

41904
Attention message: Main

No. 1904-#### No. 1905

Proceeding. One moment please. . . Program Timer was not set.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES or NO YES
• Select YES to continue printing.
• Select NO to bring up the next display on your responsibility. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Condition - When the program timer is to be activated after close
down checks have been completed, the time of the
- An attempt is made to change each control PCB on
program timer has not been set yet.
the Menu display or subsequent during processing.

NOTE Check Point

• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in 1 Set the time of the program timer.
progress.
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing

NOTE
• This message is displayed only in the Service Mode.

41904 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41908
Attention message: Main

No. 1909
Title was not set.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to register the package print format
without setting its title in editing the package print
format.

Check Point
1 Set the title.

4. Troubleshooting

41908 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41910
Attention message: Main

No. 1910 No. 1911

There is no frame. The format will be This Title data already exist.
deleted.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - It is attempted to register the package print format
- It is attempted to delete the package print format and with the same title as existing one in editing the
register it in editing the existing format. package print format.
- It is attempted to register it with no operation in
creating a new package format.

4. Troubleshooting

41910 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41912
Attention message: Main

No. 1912 No. 1913

There is no format. New format will be This format is used in a Print Channel.
created. Would you like to edit?

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or NO
NOTE
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the existing package format. The
Suffix Condition change in the package format is reflected on all the print
number channels to which the edited package format is set.

- It is attempted to edit an existing format with no • Select NO to create a new package format without overwriting
created package format. the existing one.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to select the package format which is
set in print channel in editing the package print

4. Troubleshooting
format.

41912 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41914
Attention message: Main

No. 1914
The format has reached maximum
capacity. No more data can be added.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to register it newly with the maximum
number of formats in editing the package print
format.

4. Troubleshooting

41914 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41922
Attention message: Main

No. 1922 No. 1923

Viewer Software was not found. Confirm Set the destination of Media Output to
the settings. other than External System.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The path set in the Operator Selections does not - The Package Prints has been selected in the print
exist when writing the viewer software. Or the viewer channel setting of long length print, and the external
software does not exist in the specified path. system has been selected for the media output.

Check Point Check Point

1 Check the Path Setting of the viewer software in the 1 Change the setting to other than Package Prints, or
Operator Selections. other than external system for media output.

4. Troubleshooting

41922 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41926
Attention message: Main

No. 1926 No. 1927-####

Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Sort by Output Media Frame Number
Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". function cannot be used.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES/START YES/START
When the attention message is canceled, machine processes
Condition without using the function.

Suffix Condition Condition

number
- When registering the frame in the frame setting of the Condition
print channel setting display and print channel, the Sort by Output Media Frame Number function of the Operator
media print paper fitting is set to except for Cut, All Selections is set to Sort by Frame Number, but the Sort by
and Real Size. Output Media Frame Number function is not available for the
output external system.
Check Point
Suffix Condition
1 When registering the frame in the frame setting, number
check if the media print paper fitting is Cut or All, (bit)

4. Troubleshooting
Real Size.
0800 CD-R external writing system
1000 d-Storage

NOTE
• For 3300, the attention message No.1927 is not given.
• The message appears only once just after starting up the QSS.
It does not appear for the second time.
• The corresponding external system is displayed in the second
line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Change the destination, or change the setting for the
Sort by Frame Number in the Operator Selections
to Without Sort by Frame Number.

41926 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

41932
Attention message: Main

No. 1933
Select an input media other than the
Compact Archive Unit.

Attention message release

YES/START
The attention message disappears.

Condition
Condition
When processing, an attempt is made so that the Compact
Archive Unit is set to Input Media in Print Channel on the Edit
while the Compact Archive Unit is set toTYPE 1.

NOTE
• If the Compact Archive Unit is set to TYPE 1, the attention
message above appears because the image data saved in the
Compact Archive Unit is RAW data which cannot be read in
the Edit Mode.

4. Troubleshooting
• If the image data is saved while the Compact Archive Unit is
set to TYPE 2, the attention message does not appear when
reading the image data in the Edit Mode.
• If the setting is changed to TYPE 2, reading the image data
that was saved with the TYPE 1 is not available.

Check Point
1 On the Option Registration, change the Type of the
Compact Archive Unit to TYPE 2.
2 Set other than the Compact Archive Unit to Input
Media.

41932 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

43370
Attention message: Compact archive unit
Attention message: Compact archive unit

No. 3371-####
Could not execute Hold On Save.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The space for Hold on Save of Compact Archive Unit
is not sufficient to start scanning.
0002 The space for Hold on Save of Compact Archive Unit
is not sufficient to save data on the Archive Print
Selection display.

NOTE
• This attention message appears only when the compact
archive unit has been installed and Compact Archive Unit on
the Option Registration display has been selected.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Set some image data held on save to Auto Delete
Mode on the Archive Print Selection display.

NOTE
• Hold on Save Mode is indicated by Hold.
• Auto Delete Mode is indicated by blank.
• Defragmentation has no effect to restore the space for Hold on
Save when this message appears.

43370 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

43372
Attention message: Compact archive unit

No. 3372 No. 3373

There is insufficient space left for Hold on The data could not be saved to the
Save. Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to
continue?
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to stop writing to the Compact Archive Unit
Suffix Condition (TYPE2) while continuing process of QSS-Kids.
number • Select NO to stop processing.
- There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save of
Compact Archive Unit. Condition
Suffix Condition
Check Point number
1 Set some image data held on save to Auto Delete - Start process of saving from QSS-Kids to the
Mode on the Archive Print Selection display. Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2) is failed.

NOTE NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• Hold on Save Mode is indicated by Hold. • This message appears only when connecting the Compact
Archive Unit (TYPE2).
• Auto Delete Mode is indicated by blank.
• Defragmentation has no effect to restore the space for Hold on
Check Point
Save when this message appears.
1 Confirm that the destination is correctly set.
2 Confirm that the QSS-Kids is not in the offline mode.
3 Chenck if the QSS-Kids and the QSS are connected
correctly.

43372 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

43374
Attention message: Compact archive unit

No. 3374 No. 3375

The Compact Archive Unit could not be The data could not be saved to the
used. Confirm the setting. Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Cannot read data from the Compact Archive Unit - Data that was read in order to be written to the
(TYPE2) when bringing up the Archive File Compact Archive Unit contains errors
Selection display and the Archive Unit Adjustment
display. NOTE
• This message appears onscreen when data could not be read
NOTE from the media due to poor storage conditions.
• This message appears only when connecting the Compact
Archive Unit (TYPE2). Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point 1 Verify that the media can read the data properly.
2 Configure the settings saved on the Compact Archive
1 Check the Compact Archive Unit setting. Unit to OFF.
2 Chenck if the QSS-Kids and the QSS are connected
correctly.

43374 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44000
Attention message: Edit
Attention message: Edit

No. 4001
Are you sure about deleting?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete.
• Select NO to stop.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to delete the area made in the
template information correction display.
- An attempt is made to delete the image save data.
- An attempt is made to delete the all area in the
template information correction display.
- The delete button is pressed in the customer
information select screen.

4. Troubleshooting
- An attempt is made to delete the phrase data in the
Phrase Read display.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

44000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44002
Attention message: Edit

No. 4002 No. 4003-####

Red Eye Correction cannot be executed Image cannot be inserted into the
no more. specified position.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The Red Eye Correction is executed over 20 times for 0001 The area for image inserting is not selected.
an image. 0002 The dropped area is not for image inserting.
0003 The frame is dropped on the area except the area for
NOTE
image inserting.
• This message appears in the Red Eye Correction operation.
• To repeat the Red Eye Correction over 20 times, reset with NOTE
UNDO. • This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the image is dropped in the area for image
inserting.
2 Check that the area for image inserting is selected.

44002 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44004
Attention message: Edit

No. 4004-####
Graphics are too large to insert.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The horizontal width of the graphic to insert is larger
than the template.
0002 The vertical width of the graphic to insert is larger
than the template.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Reduce the size of the graphic using an application
software of Adobe Photoshop.

44004 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44006
Attention message: Edit

No. 4006 No. 4007

Prints cannot be made with this Print The Letter Information was not read
Channel. Select a Print Channel using a successfully.
larger paper width.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - Some letter information file does not exist when
- The specified print size is larger than the paper size. reading a image.

NOTE NOTE
• This message appears in the mode for business card and ID • This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
photo.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Correct the information file in the template

4. Troubleshooting
1 Make paper advance length longer. information correction display.
2 Use the wide width paper.

44006 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44008
Attention message: Edit

No. 4009
Template file was not found. Select the
folder including the files.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- There is not the template in the folder selected in the
template selection screen.
- After selecting the folder in the template selection
screen, the CD-ROM is removed before reading.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the CD-ROM is set securely.
2 Check if the folder containing the templates is
selected.

44008 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44010
Attention message: Edit

No. 4010
Specify the image area.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The image inserting area is not made in the template
information correction display.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the template
information correction display.

Check Point
1 Make the area for image inserting in the template

4. Troubleshooting
information correction display.

44010 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44014
Attention message: Edit

No. 4014 No. 4015

The saved data cannot be read with this Selected file already exists.
version.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - When making a new customer information file, there
- The version of the image saved data is old when is a same name file.
reading the data.
NOTE
NOTE • This message appears when operating in the Customer
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit Information Input screen.
mode.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Save the data with another file name.

4. Troubleshooting
1 Make the image data again.

44014 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44016
Attention message: Edit

No. 4017
The head and jaw position is opposite, or
the selected area is too small.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- In ID photo mode, extremely small area is selected.
- The head and jaw position is opposite.

IMPORTANT
• When positioning the face in ID photo mode, position the
head first, then position the jaw.
• The jaw cannot be positioned above the head.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• In example A, the jaw is set to wrong position therefore the
face area become narrower.
• In example B, the head position is upside down.

Example A Example B

Head position 1 Jaw position 2

+
⊕

Jaw position 2 Head position 1

44016 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44018
Attention message: Edit

No. 4018 No. 4019

Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? If you Import, all customer information will
be deleted. Are you sure you want to
Attention message release Import?
YES or NO
• Select YES to continue printing. Attention message release
• Select NO to quit the edit mode. YES or NO
• Select YES to continue printing.
Condition • Select NO to stop importing.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- Edit End is pressed during image editing in the edit Suffix Condition
mode. number
- An attempt is made to read the customer information
from CSV file during image editing.

4. Troubleshooting

44018 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44020
Attention message: Edit

No. 4020-#### No. 4021

Failed to write the file. Failed to read the file.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 The data base file for writing the customer - The customer information cannot be read from CSV
information cannot be opened. file.
0002 The CSV file for writing the customer information
cannot be opened. IMPORTANT
• The data base file format is mdb.
IMPORTANT • The data base file manages the customer information of
• The data base file format is mdb. CSV file format.
• The data base file manages the customer information of
CSV file format.

4. Troubleshooting

44020 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44022
Attention message: Edit

No. 4023
Image magnification ratio or reduction
ratio is out of range.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When specifying the cropping area using the mouse
in the edit mode or 1 frame magnification display,
magnification ratio exceeds the setting range.

NOTE
• The cropping value of image data in the edit mode or 1 frame
magnification display is from 10% to 400%.

4. Troubleshooting

44022 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44024
Attention message: Edit

No. 4024 No. 4025

Select the layer. This template has more than 16 layers.
This template cannot be used.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- The default layer is not selected on the template edit number
display. - An attempt is made to move to the next screen with
selecting the template which has more than 16 layers
Check Point on the Template Select Screen.

1 Select the default layer.

Check Point
1 Use the template which has less than 16 layers.

4. Troubleshooting

44024 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44026
Attention message: Edit

No. 4026 No. 4027

The image size is too large to insert. The same data already exists. Would you
like to overwrite?
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the file.
Suffix Condition • Select NO to stop the operation.
number
- The image size is too large to process for inserting Condition
the graphics such as illustration or logo.
Suffix Condition
number
Check Point
- There is the same data in the place where
1 Reduce the size of the graphic using the Adobe Export/Import of image data is performed.
Photoshop.
NOTE
• The data for saving images is controlled with the date when it
is created and saved for the first time. Therefore this message

4. Troubleshooting
does not appear even if another file has the same name.
• This message appears when overwriting the data for images.
• The name of the saved image is displayed in the third line of
the message.

44026 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44028
Attention message: Edit

No. 4028 No. 4029

Failed to export the Image Save File. The drive is empty.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- An error occurs halfway through exporting the data - The media has not been inserted to the drive when
for images. performing Export/Import of the data for saving
images.

NOTE
• The name of the saved image is displayed in the third line of
the message.

4. Troubleshooting

44028 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44030
Attention message: Edit

No. 4030 No. 4031

Failed to delete the Exported Image Save There is insufficient space left on the disk.
Data.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - There is not enough space in the disk when
- The media is write-protected and the exported data performing Export/Import of the image data.
cannot be deleted when trying to delete it.
- The data is read only file and cannot be deleted when
trying to delete it.

NOTE
• The file name of image data is shown in the last line of the
message.

4. Troubleshooting

44030 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44032
Attention message: Edit

No. 4032 No. 4033

Template size is too large to read. Vertical templates cannot be used to make
frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- Both sides of vertical and horizontal are beyond 3700 number
pixels in the template. - You selected the template which has larger number of
- Either side of vertical and horizontal is beyond 5500 pixels in vertical than horizontal for the frame print.
pixels in the template.
- Either side of vertical and horizontal is beyond 11000 NOTE
pixels in the template. • This does not occur in the album print and edit modes.

NOTE
• The long length print cannot be made in the album print and
edit modes.

4. Troubleshooting

44032 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44034
Attention message: Edit

No. 4034 No. 4035

A pupil could not be detected in the Additional phrases could not be saved.
specified area.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - It is beyond the limit of savable phrase number.
- A pupil is not detected in the specified area.

4. Troubleshooting

44034 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44036
Attention message: Edit

No. 4036 No. 4037

The image size is too small to insert. The same file name already exists. Would
you like to overwrite?
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the file.
Suffix Condition • Select NO to stop the operation.
number
- Either side of vertical or horizontal is less than 32 Condition
pixels in the image you tried to insert.
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to overwrite the customer
information file.

4. Troubleshooting

44036 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44038
Attention message: Edit

No. 4038 No. 4039

This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be Image size during editing is too large.
converted correctly. Would you like to
read the data? Countermeasure message
Change the Image Size to be input or the Magnification Ratio
smaller.
Countermeasure message
Attention message release
Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed.
YES
Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition
• Select YES to read the file.
• Select YES not to read the file. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - There is insufficient memory for image editing.

Suffix Condition
Check Point
number
- JPEG data with CMYK format is used for Insert 1 Reduce the image size with an application software
Graphics on the edit mode. such as Adobe Photoshop.
2 Set the image magnification ratio smaller.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• JPEG data with CMYK format cannot be converted by QSS
correctly. But it can read them.
• File name is shown in the last line of the message.

Check Point
1 Change the data to RGB format with an application
software such as Adobe Photoshop.

44038 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44040
Attention message: Edit

No. 4040 No. 4041

The database was not changed. Confirm A form larger than the print size cannot be
the property of each field. used.

Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- When the data base file is made using the data base - On the form selection display for ID photo, multiple
creation software, the properties of field is different. larger forms than the print size set in the print
channel are selected.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check the data base or properties of the field.
1 Check multiple forms or the print channel.

4. Troubleshooting

44040 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44042
Attention message: Edit

No. 4042 No. 4043

Single Form is not positioned. A Single Form protrudes from the Print
Area.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo, number
multiple forms are attempted to register without - On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo,
positioning single form. a single form protrudes from the print area.

Check Point Check Point

1 Check that a single form is positioned. 1 Check the position of the single form.
2 Check the paper setting.

4. Troubleshooting

44042 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44044
Attention message: Edit

No. 4044 No. 4045

Single Form is overlapped. No more than three Single Form types can
be positioned.
Attention message release
YES Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo, number
the positioned single forms are overlapped. - On the Multiple Forms Setting display for ID photo,
more than four single form types are positioned.
Check Point
1 Check if the single forms are not overlapped. Check Point
1 Check if more than four single form types are not
positioned.

4. Troubleshooting

44044 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44046
Attention message: Edit

No. 4046 No. 4047

When the Paper Setting is changed, the The selected font was not found.
current position information is canceled.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES/START
YES or NO
• Selecting YES changes the paper setting. Condition
• Selecting NO does not change the paper setting. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - When editing the frame and the letter print which is
set in the edit mode, or when carrying out printing on
Suffix Condition
the print channel which is set the letter print, the
number
setting letter font is not found.
- On the Paper Setting display of Multiple Forms
Setting for ID photo, the paper setting was changed. NOTE
• The font name which cannot be found is displayed in the
second line.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the font displayed in the second line of the
attention message is installed.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Change the setting font to the font which is -
available to use.
For the Windows standard font
• Perform the defragmentation. -
• Carry out the recovery. ☞ 88000
For the font which is installed additionally
• Perform the defragmentation. -
• Reinstall the font. -

44046 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

44048
Attention message: Edit

No. 4048 No. 4049

The image size is too small to make a Test No more items can be added.
Print.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES/START
YES/START
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - The number of cross registered for the cross filter
- When test printing for correction patterns, the shorter exceeds 100.
side of the image is less than 32 pixels. - The number of areas not for soft filter correction
exeeds 10.
Check Point - The number of spot correction points exceeds 100.
- The number of tone curve correction points exceeds
1 Try again after increasing image magnification.
10.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 If you want to add more items, delete some from the
existing items first.

44048 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45500
Error message: Processor 1
Error message: Processor 1

In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.

No. 5500
Chilling unit ☞ 63250_1
The processing solution temperature is
Processing tank cooling fan 1, 2, 3 ☞ 63250_1
above the safety range. CD
• If the cooling fan does not operate when DC 24 V in output
No. 5501 between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cooling fan,
the tank cooling fan is defective.
The processing solution temperature is
above the safety range. BF Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5502 Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
The processing solution temperature is Processor power supply 2
above the safety range. STB
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Countermeasure message Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the Thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
manual.
• Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
Alarm release
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
NO
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
Error message release
thermosensor is defective.
YES
☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
Processor power supply 1
Condition
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
Error message No. Condition
10 20.35
No. 5500 The CD processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting 20 12.59
temperature + 1°C) after temperature 30 7.99
adjustment has been completed. (CD 35 6.42
thermosensor)
38 5.65
No. 5501 The BF processing solution temperature
40 5.19
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 3°C) after temperature 45 4.22
adjustment has been completed. (BF
thermosensor) When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
No. 5502 The STB processing solution temperature Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
exceeds the safety range (setting Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB Processor power supply 2
thermosensor) Processor power supply 3

NOTE
Check Point
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered. Circuit diagram
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
(only when equipped with the chilling unit). ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
3 Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD, ☞ LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB
BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
cooling water unit).
4 Check that the tank cooling fans (FAN 1 to 3) operate Detailed diagram
properly.
☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
Diagnosis
☞ LPP 6-22 Cooling water plumbing unit
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63250_1
• If the cooling water solenoid valve does not operate when
DC 24 V is output between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
each cooling water solenoid valve, the solenoid valve is
defective.
Transistor PCB ☞ 63200_1

45500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45503
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5503
The dryer temperature is above the safety
range.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range
(setting temperature + 10°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (dryer temperature
sensor)

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1)

45503 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45504
Error message: Processor 1

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

No. 5504
Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
The processing solution temperature is
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
below the processing range. CD
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
No. 5505 Processor power supply 2
The processing solution temperature is
below the processing range. BF Heater name Resistance (Ω)
CD (H1) 72
No. 5506 BF (H2) 72
The processing solution temperature is STB (H3) 57.6
below the processing range. STB
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Countermeasure message Thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of • Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
purchase. measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
Alarm release differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
NO thermosensor is defective.
Error message release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
error display is canceled.
10 20.35
Condition 20 12.59
30 7.99
Error message No. Condition
35 6.42
No. 5504 The CD processing solution temperature
falls below the processing range (setting 38 5.65
temperature − 1°C) after the temperature 40 5.19
adjustment has been completed. (CD 45 4.22
temperature sensor)
No. 5505 The BF processing solution temperature NOTE
falls below the processing range (setting • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
temperature − 3°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF Circuit diagram
temperature sensor) ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
No. 5506 The STB processing solution temperature ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
falls below the processing range (setting
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
temperature − 5°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
temperature sensor)
Detailed diagram
Check Point ☞ LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1)
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor ☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F41 Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
F42
F43
F44

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processing solution heater ☞ 63250_1

45504 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45507
Error message: Processor 1

Measured point Resistance (Ω)

No. 5507
8-9 48.4
The dryer temperature is below the
9-10 31.3
processing range.
11-12 39.3

Countermeasure message 12-13 12.6

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
purchase.
Alarm release Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
NO • Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the
Error message release measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
NO differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is thermosensor is defective.
canceled. Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Condition
Suffix Condition Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
number 10 19.07
- The dryer temperature falls below the processing 20 11.92
range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper
30 7.63

4. Troubleshooting
processing. (dryer thermosensor)
40 5.05
Diagnosis 50 3.41
60 2.35
Blown fuses Manual No.
70 1.66
F45 Main relay PCB ☞ 66220 80 1.19
F46
F47 NOTE
F48 • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
F49 Circuit diagram
F50 ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No. ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
Dryer heater ☞ 63250_1 ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer heater (H4). If the
measured resistance on the plug side differs greatly from the
Detailed diagram
values in the table below, the heater is defective.
Main relay PCB ☞ 66220 ☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1)
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

Connector No. Measured point Resistance (Ω)

J553 1-2 28.5
1-6 47.1
3-7 75.3
J554 1-4 57.9
2-5 57.9
5-6 28.5

Measured point Resistance (Ω)

1-4 79.8
2-5 48.4
5-6 31.3
6-7 79.8

45507 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45508
Error message: Processor 1

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

No. 5508[N]
• If the replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24
The processing solution level is too low. V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of each replenisher
pump connector, the pump is defective.
Countermeasure message Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Error message release Processor power supply 2
YES
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Condition
Failed parts
Suffix Condition
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
number
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
- The processing solution level detectors of the
processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF: Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
FS2, and STB: FS6) turned OFF. Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

4. Troubleshooting
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF. Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Check Point Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank. NOTE
2 Clean the strainer units of the replenisher pumps CD, • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
BF, and STB1 and the hoses. Check the output
Circuit diagram
amounts.
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly. ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
Diagnosis ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
Blown fuses Manual No.
Detailed diagram
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
F15
☞ LPP 6-4 Replenisher section (1)
F64 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
☞ LPP 6-5 Replenisher section (2)
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the
jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.
Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

Replenisher pump ☞ 63250_1
Refilling water pump ☞ 63250_1

45508 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45508
Error message: Processor 1

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

No. 5508[SM]
• If the water supply pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
The processing solution level is too low. outputted between the pins (BF-W:PIN 3-4, STB-W:5-6) on
the connector of each water supply pump, the pump is
Countermeasure message defective.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Alarm release
NO Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Error message release Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
YES Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Condition
Processor power supply 3
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
• If the CD-W has any problem, the message No. 5524 Refilling
- The processing solution level detectors of the
water operation error. is displayed first.
processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF:
FS2, and STB: FS6) turned OFF. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing Circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Check Point ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
Detailed diagram
2 Clean the strainer units in the replenisher pumps
(CD-A: RP5, CD-B: RP6, CD-C: RP7, BF-A: RP8, ☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
BF-B: RP9, and STB: RP10) and in the water supply ☞ LPP 6-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
pumps (CD-W: RP-1, BF-W: RP-2, and STB-W: RP- ☞ LPP 6-14 SM Replenisher section (3)
3) and hoses. Check the output amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly.

Diagnosis
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the
jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.
Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

Replenisher pump ☞ 63250_1
• If the replenisher pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each
replenisher pump, the pump is defective.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63250_1

45508 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45508
Error message: Processor 1

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

No. 5509
The circulation amount has decreased. Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
Countermeasure message
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the NOTE
manual. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Alarm release
NO Circuit diagram
Error message release ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
YES ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
NOTE ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
• This error message will be displayed only when the machine is
equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

Condition Detailed diagram

☞ LPP 6-3 Processor section
Suffix Condition
number
- The circulation amount of the CD processing solution

4. Troubleshooting
measured by the digital flowmeter falls below
3L/min.
- Although the machine is not equipped with a digital
flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via
Option Registration.

NOTE
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is
set to OFF via Option Registration.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected
to the pump are clogged.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F66 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230

Failed parts Manual No.

Digital flowmeter ☞ 63250_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

45508 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45510
Error message: Processor 1

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

No. 5510
40 5.05
Processor A/D conversion error.
50 3.41

Countermeasure message 60 2.35

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of 70 1.66
purchase. 80 1.19
Alarm release
NO # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Error message release
NO Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).
Condition
Suffix Condition NOTE
number • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
- The analog data detected by each thermosensor
Circuit diagram
cannot be converted to digital data.
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
IMPORTANT ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
• The A/D conversion is a process that converts analog ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

4. Troubleshooting
data of the temperature measured by the processing
solution thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the Detailed diagram
inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor
☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
control PCB.
☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1)
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in table 1 below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260_1
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in table 2 below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400

Table 1
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

Table 2
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63

45510 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45511
Error message: Processor 1

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 5511[N]
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
The circulation pump has stopped. CD outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
circulation, the pump is defective.
No. 5513[N]
The circulation pump has stopped. BF Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
No. 5515[N] Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
No. 5516[N]
Processor power supply 3
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2
No. 5517[N] # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
No. 5518[N]
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
The circulation pump has stopped. STB4

Countermeasure message # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Contact us or your place of purchase.

4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release Failed parts
NO Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
Error message release
YES
NOTE
Condition • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Error message No. Condition Circuit diagram

No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
circulation pump detects that the pump ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
has stopped rotating. ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
circulation pump detects that the pump Detailed diagram
has stopped rotating.
☞ LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1)
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5517 The rotation detector built in the STB3
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5518 The rotation detector built in the STB4
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F65 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230

Failed parts Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63250_1

45511 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

45511
Error message: Processor 1

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 5511[SM]
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
The circulation pump has stopped. CD
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5513[SM] Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
The circulation pump has stopped. BF Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3
No. 5515[SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
No. 5516[SM]
Circuit diagram
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
No. 5517[SM] ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
No. 5518[SM]
Detailed diagram
The circulation pump has stopped. STB4
☞ LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1)
Countermeasure message

4. Troubleshooting
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5517 The rotation detector built in the STB3
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5518 The rotation detector built in the STB4
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Circulation pump ☞ 63250_1
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
circulation, the pump is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1

45511 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

45519
Error: Processor 2
Error: Processor 2

NOTE
No. 5519
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Thermosensor error. CD
Circuit diagram
No. 5520 ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Thermosensor error. BF ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
No. 5521 ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
Thermosensor error. STB
Detailed diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Error message No. Condition

4. Troubleshooting
No. 5519 The temperature detected by the CD
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
No. 5520 The temperature detected by the BF
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
No. 5521 The temperature detected by the STB
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Disconnect the connector of the thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

45519 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45522
Error: Processor 2

No. 5522
Dryer Thermosensor error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor
is not within a specified range.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Disconnect the connectors of the dryer thermosensor and
inner thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins
1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the
table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1)

45522 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45524
Error: Processor 2

NOTE
No. 5524
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have
Refilling water operation error. CD-W a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level
detector and a safety thermostat for each.
No. 5525 The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water level detector for each.

No. 5526 Check Point

Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
No. 5527 tank.
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W 2 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly.
No. 5528 3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and
STB4-W to the sub-tank are not clogged.
No. 5529
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refilling water pump ☞ 63250_1

4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release • The replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24
NO V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
Error message release replenisher pump, the pump is defective.
YES Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Condition
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Error message No. Condition Processor power supply 2
No. 5524 The refilling water level detector of the
CD processing solution float switch does When refilling water is incorrectly
not turn ON even though approximately Manual No.
detected
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF, STB1, STB2,
No. 5525 The refilling water level detector of the
STB3, and STB4 processing solution float switches. If there
BF processing solution float switch does
is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
not turn ON even though approximately
the float is raised, the float switch is defective.
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started. Main relay PCB ☞ 66220
No. 5526 The refilling water level detector of the Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
STB1 processing solution float switch Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed NOTE
since refilling water operation started. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
No. 5527 The refilling water level detector of the
STB2 processing solution float switch Circuit diagram
does not turn ON even though ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
approximately 26 seconds have passed ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
since refilling water operation started.
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
No. 5528 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
STB3 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed Detailed diagram
since refilling water operation started. ☞ LPP 6-4 Replenisher section (1)
No. 5529 The refilling water level detector of the
STB4 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.

45524 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5530
The Processor Top Cover is open.

Countermeasure message
Close the cover.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5530 While prints are being made, the
interlock switch (processor top cover)
turns OFF.

NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch

4. Troubleshooting
(processor top cover) turns OFF.

Check Point
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250_1

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section

45530 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45532
Error: Processor 2

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

No. 5532
• Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF and STB
The Processing Solution Safety thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and
Thermostat has activated. 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the table
below, the thermosensor is defective.
Countermeasure message Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Contact us or your place of purchase. Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Alarm release
NO
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
Error message release
YES 10 20.35
20 12.59
Condition 30 7.99
Suffix Condition 35 6.42
number 38 5.65
- The safety thermostat of the processing solution float 40 5.19
switches CD, BF and STB turn OFF. 45 4.22

NOTE
In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the

4. Troubleshooting
following temperatures. Circulation pump ☞ 63250_1
OPEN (OFF) 46±2.5°C • If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
CLOSE (ON) 36±3°C outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch circulation, the pump is defective.
turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
pumps will stop. Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Check Point
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled. Processor power supply 2
2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump Processor power supply 3
are clogged.

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Diagnosis
Failed parts
Blown fuses Manual No.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
F15
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
F64 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.
Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 6 and 8 on the NOTE
jack side when the processing solution temperature is at • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
36°C or below, the float switch is defective.
Circuit diagram
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1 ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230 ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63250_1
45532 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45532
Error: Processor 2

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1) No. 5533
☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2) The Dryer Safety Thermostat has
activated.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The dryer safety thermostat turns OFF.

NOTE
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following

4. Troubleshooting
temperatures.
OPEN (OFF) 90±2.8°C
CLOSE (ON) 70±4.4°C
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater
and dryer fan go OFF.

Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.

Diagnosis
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Dryer fan ☞ 63260_1

Blown fuses Manual No.

F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
F15
F64 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63260_1
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer safety thermostat. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
when the dryer section temperature is at 60°C or below, the
safety thermostat is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260_1

45532 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45532
Error: Processor 2

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

• Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

4. Troubleshooting
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1)
☞ LPP 6-10 Dryer section (3)

45532 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

45534_1
Error: Processor 2
In the case of an adjusting failure Manual No.
No. 5535 Check Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position ☞ 36010_1
Paper has jammed in the processor Correction, Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop
section. Position Correction and Paper Stop
Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit
Countermeasure message Correction.
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
NO Dryer fan ☞ 63260_1
Error message release
YES
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Condition Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3
Suffix Condition
number
- After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, When the drive motor is defective Manual No.
the print sensors in the dryer section do not turn Drive motor ☞ 63250_1
DARK within a specified time and this happens Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
consecutive six times.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE Processor power supply 1
• For details, refer to ☞ 56100_1 Processor paper advance Processor power supply 3
operation.
In the case of a detection failure Manual No.
Check Point Print sensor ☞ 63260_1
1 Check that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
securely attached. Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400
2 Make sure that the gears and the rollers rotate
smoothly after removing the paper processing rack # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
from the processing solution tank.
3 Check if the lower turn belt of the paper processing Failed parts
rack is ripped up. Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
4 Check that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
5 Check if the print sensor is soiled. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
IMPORTANT
Circuit diagram
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items. ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
Version Check display. ☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
☞ 37530_1
• Check the ARCNET communication path. Detailed diagram
☞ 50520_1 ☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section
Diagnosis
☞ LPP 6-9 Dryer section (2)

Failed parts Manual No.

Check the cause of failure in System Version ☞ 37530_1
Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520_1
communication error.

45534_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45536
Error: Processor 2

No. 5537
The Rack Stopper is not set.

Countermeasure message
Close the cover.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor
turns OFF.

Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63250_1

Failed parts Manual No.

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-3 Processor section

45536 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45538
Error: Processor 2

No. 5538
Backup data error. Processor

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the
processor control PCB are abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the processor control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.

Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB

45538 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45542
Error: Processor 2

No. 5543
The dryer cover is removed.

Countermeasure message
Close the cover.
Alarm release

Error message release

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are being made, the interlock switch
(dryer cover) turns OFF.

NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the dryer top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63250_1

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63250_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section
☞ LPP 6-10 Dryer section (3)

45542 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45548
Error: Processor 2

No. 5549-####
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor
Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed
in Functions of Drive Motor Revolution Count
Setting.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.

Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
0002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 0, it was much than the required count.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Drive motor ☞ 63250_1
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section

45548 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45550
Error: Processor 2

No. 5550
Drive Motor has stopped.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- The drive motor has stopped due to the protected
operation.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
F61 Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230

Failed parts Manual No.

Drive motor ☞ 63250_1
Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 6-7 Drive section

45550 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45700
Error message: SM replenishment
Error message: SM replenishment

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 5700-####[SM]
• If the replenishment pump and water supply pump do not
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- operate when AC 24 V is outputted between the pins (CD-
A A:1-2, CD-B:3-4, CD-C:5-6, CD-W:1-2, BF-A:7-8, BF-B:9-
10, STB:11-12) on the plug side of connectors for the
No. 5701-####[SM] pumps, the pumps are defective.
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- Replenisher pump sensor and water supply ☞ 63250_1
B pump sensor
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
No. 5702-####[SM]
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
C
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
No. 5703-####[SM] Processor power supply 2
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- Processor power supply 3
W NOTE
No. 5704-####[SM] • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Replenishment pump operation error. BF- Circuit diagram
A ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
No. 5705-####[SM] ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-
B Detailed diagram
No. 5706-####[SM] ☞ LPP 6-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
Replenishment pump operation error. STB ☞ LPP 6-15 SM Replenisher section (4)

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays ON even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
0002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays OFF even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.

Check Point
1 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
2 Clean the strainer.
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63250_1

45700 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45708
Error message: SM replenishment

NOTE
No. 5708[SM]
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error. Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
No. 5709[SM] ☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Replenishment Package solution ☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
remaining error.
Detailed diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 6-13 SM Replenisher section (2)
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
The attention message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. will be displayed when the
replenishment alarm value is set to -5% (initial value) in Package

4. Troubleshooting
Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes
empty. In this case, the error messages No. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error. will not be
displayed.
Suffix Condition
number
- The percentage of the replenishment remaining
amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller than
the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment
remaining amount < Package capacity ×
Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the
replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.

Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the
one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
3 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
4 Clean the strainer.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 27830
replenishment solution sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, ☞ 63250_1
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

45708 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

45710
Error message: SM replenishment
Check Point
No. 5710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W 1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
No. 5711[SM] 2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves
No. 5712[SM] smoothly.
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
Diagnosis
No. 5713[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63250_1
No. 5714[SM] • If the water supply pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W outputted between the pins (CD-W:1-2, BF-W:3-4, STB4:5-
6) on the connectors of water supply pumps CD-W, BF-W
No. 5715[SM] and STB4, the pump is defective.
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Refilling water pump ☞ 63250_1
• The refilling water pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
Countermeasure message outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connectors of the
Refer to the manual for corrective action. refilling water pump, STB1, STB2 and STB3, the pump is

4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release defective.
NO SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Error message release
YES
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Condition Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Error message No. Condition
No. 5710 The refilling water level detector of the
When refilling water is incorrectly
CD processing solution float switch does Manual No.
detected
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250_1
started. • Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
No. 5711 The refilling water level detector of the switch. If there is no conduction between the pins (CD:5-6,
BF processing solution float switch does BF:5-6, STB:1-2, STB4:5-6) on the jack side, the float
not turn ON even though a specified time switch is defective.
has passed since refilling water operation Sub relay PCB ☞ 66230
started. Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5712 The refilling water level detector of the Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
STB1 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified NOTE
time has passed since refilling water
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
operation started.
No. 5713 The refilling water level detector of the Circuit diagram
STB2 processing solution float switch ☞ LPP 4-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
does not turn ON even though a specified
☞ LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
time has passed since refilling water
operation started. ☞ LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around
No. 5714 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB
STB3 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified Detailed diagram
time has passed since refilling water ☞ LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2)
operation started.
☞ LPP 6-14 SM Replenisher section (3)
No. 5715 The refilling water level detector of the
STB4 processing solution float switch ☞ LPP 6-15 SM Replenisher section (4)
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.

45710 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46012
Error message: Printer
Error message: Printer

In the case of a detection failure (paper

No. 6012-#### end sensor)
Manual No.
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
No. 6013-#### Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
In the case of a detection failure (paper
Manual No.
loading sensor)
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
Alarm release Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
NO Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Error message release Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
YES
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Condition
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Error message No. Condition
No. 6012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper Failed parts
magazine A. Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
No. 6013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
magazine B. Refer to 4202 ☞ Dual paper magazine PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10).
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors
A and/or B do not turn DARK. Failed parts

0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
after the paper end sensors A and B have turned
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Check Point
Circuit diagram
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
paper magazine.
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
2 Clean the advance roller.
☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
Diagnosis
Detailed diagram
Blown fuses Manual No. ☞ LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
F36 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1 ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
F37 ☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit

In the case of an advance failure Manual No.

Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper supply motors A, B
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 3 ☞ 64250_1

In the case of a detection failure (paper

Manual No.
end sensor)
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1

46012 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46014
Error message: Printer
In the case of a detection failure (paper
No. 6014-#### loading sensor)
Manual No.
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
No. 6015-#### Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Alarm release
Failed parts
NO
Error message release Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
YES
NOTE
Condition • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Error message No. Condition Circuit diagram
No. 6014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
magazine A.
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
No. 6015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
magazine B.
☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A

4. Troubleshooting
Detailed diagram
Suffix Condition
number ☞ LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
after the paper rewinding has started, the paper ☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
paper end sensors A and/or B do not turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
In the case of an advance failure Manual No.
Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper supply motors A, B
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 3 ☞ 64250_1

In the case of a detection failure (paper

Manual No.
end sensor)
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46014 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46016
Error message: Printer

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

No. 6016-####
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Paper Cutter operation error.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Countermeasure message Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
purchase.
Alarm release # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
NO
Error message release Failed parts
NO Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
Condition
Suffix Condition NOTE
number • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
0001 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT even
Electrical circuit diagram
though a specified time has passed after the cut
operation started. ☞ 89000_1
0002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
a specified time has passed after the cut operation

4. Troubleshooting
started and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT.
0003 The cut end sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut
home sensor turned DARK.
0004 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut end
sensor turned DARK.
0005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in
the initial operation.

IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.

NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
Cutter unit ☞ 25620_1
Cut motor ☞ 61200
• If the cut motor does not operate when DC 24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cut motor, the
cut motor is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Cut home sensor ☞ 61200
Cut end sensor

46016 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

46016
Error message: Printer

Advance Unit and verify that the Exposure Advance

No. 6017-#### Unit is properly attached.
Paper has jammed in the printer section. Roller 1 and surrounding area

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition G081998

number
In the case of an adjusting failure Manual No.
0001 The paper supply end sensor does not turn DARK
even though the paper was fed by arm unit 1. Verify that the paper advance length of the ☞ 55200
paper advance operation (before exposure)
0002 The paper supply end sensor does not turn LIGHT is 320.1 mm or longer.
even though a specified length of paper was fed from
the exposure standby position. Check whether the screws of the exposure ☞ 25810
advance unit are loosened.

4. Troubleshooting
0003 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even
though a specified length of paper was fed from the Check the length between paper supply unit ☞ 26910_1
exposure standby position. A and the exposure advance unit.

0004 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced

after the exposure start sensor has turned DARK, the
Diagnosis
exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0005 The exposure end sensor does not turn DARK even In the case of an adjusting failure Manual No.
though a specified length of paper was fed from the Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010_1
exposure standby position.
0006 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
after the exposure end sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure end sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Paper hold motor ☞ 61200
Paper supply arm motor (left)
Check Point Paper supply arm motor (right)
Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 61300
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
Exposure advance motor 2
2 Check that the exposure advance drive belt of
exposure advance unit is not damaged. Exposure pressure change motor 1

3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Exposure pressure change motor 2
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Adjustment. ☞ 36000 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 64250_1
IMPORTANT
• If the suffix number 0004 Paper has jammed in the In the case of a detection failure Manual No.
printer section. appears onscreen,
Paper supply end sensor ☞ 61200
• If paper whose advance length is 320.1 or longer stops
somewhere close to Roller 1 in the Exposure Advance
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Unit during processing, examine the dimensions of the Exposure end sensor
gap between Paper Supply Unit A and the Exposure Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.

46016 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

46016
Error message: Printer

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

4. Troubleshooting

46016 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

46020
Error message: Printer
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 6021-####
Paper remains in the printer section. Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
Countermeasure message Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
Alarm release Refer to 4202 ☞ Dual paper magazine PCB.
NO
Error message release
YES NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Condition
Circuit diagram
Suffix Condition ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
number ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
01 Paper end sensor A turns DARK after the error ☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. was released. ☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
02 Paper end sensor B turns DARK after the error
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the Detailed diagram
printer section. was released. ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)

4. Troubleshooting
03 The paper loading sensor turns DARK after the error ☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the ☞ LPP 3-7 Exposure advance unit (3)
printer section. was released.
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
04 The paper supply end sensor turns DARK after the
error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. was released.
05 The exposure start sensor turns DARK after the error
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. was released.
06 The exposure end sensor turns DARK after the error
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. was released.

Check Point
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
3 Check that the exposure advance drive belt of
exposure advance unit is not damaged.

Diagnosis
In the case of a detection failure Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Paper loading sensor
Paper supply end sensor
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Exposure end sensor
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46020 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46056
Error message: Printer

No. 6056-####
Printer system error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 When the RAM or the like on the printer control PCB
is checked during start-up, they are abnormal.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1

46056 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46072
Error message: Printer
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 6073-####
Synchronous Sensor error. Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Countermeasure message Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
NO
Error message release Failed parts
NO Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

Condition NOTE
Suffix Condition • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
number Circuit diagram
0001 The synchronous signal does not enter within the ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
Diagnosis ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control Detailed diagram
PCB to laser unit are out on their own. ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON ☞ LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
and G Laser Output ON of Output
☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
Check→Printer→Engine Section. If the results are
shown below, each laser is normal.
☞ 35310
• Laser Synchronous Sensor:Synchronous
• Polygon Mirror Frequency:1380±7
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in
the laser unit) may be defective.
Blown fuses Manual No.
F1 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser unit ☞ 61450

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

46072 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46074
Error message: Printer
Detailed diagram
No. 6074 ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
B Laser control error. ☞ LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
No. 6075 ☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
G Laser control error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error message release
Error Clear

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
From A communication or control error occurred between
0006 to the laser control PCB and the laser unit.

4. Troubleshooting
0011

IMPORTANT
• In the laser unit type B, this error message will not be
displayed.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser unit ☞ 61450

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

46074 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46076
Error message: Printer

Circuit diagram
No. 6076-####
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
Polygon Mirror control error.
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit
Countermeasure message
Detailed diagram
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
0002 The polygon mirror frequency is out of range.

NOTE
• The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from

4. Troubleshooting
1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.
• You can check the polygon mirror frequency via Input
Check.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F2 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
AOM driver (In case of suffix number 0002) ☞ 64230
Laser unit ☞ 61450

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)

46076 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46076
Error message: Printer

No. 6077-####
Interlock error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Unused
0002 The printer control PCB is detecting the interlock of
the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2) while the laser
control PCB is not detecting the interlock.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit

46076 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46080
Error message: Printer

No. 6081-####
Backup data error. Printer

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0### The backup data of the printer control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the printer
control PCB are abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the printer control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.

Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1

46080 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46082
Error message: Printer

Suffix Condition
No. 6082-#### number
Setup error. 0106 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
Countermeasure message specification registration setup. (B)
Refer to the manual for corrective action. 0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Alarm release carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
NO specification registration setup. (R)
Error message release
YES 0108 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (G)
Condition
0109 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Suffix Condition carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
number specification registration setup. (B)
0001 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0201 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the daily setup. (R)
in the initial setup. (R) 0202 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0002 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0203 The center correction is out of allowable range when
in the initial setup. (G) carrying out the daily setup. (B)

4. Troubleshooting
0003 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0204 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the daily setup. (R)
in the initial setup. (B)
0205 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
0206 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) (R)
0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when 0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) (B)
0010 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup 0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
is out of allowable range. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0011 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup (R)
is out of allowable range. (G) 0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0012 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
is out of allowable range. (B) (G)
0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0306 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
in the paper specification registration setup. (R) (B)
0102 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
in the paper specification registration setup. (G) 0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0103 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when
in the paper specification registration setup. (B) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
specification registration setup. (R) 0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0105 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper 0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
specification registration setup. (G) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0501 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (R)

46082 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46082
Error message: Printer

Suffix Condition Circuit diagram

number ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
0502 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range ☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit
when carrying out each setup. (G)
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit
0503 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (B)
Detailed diagram
0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
when carrying out each setup. (R)
☞ LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (G) ☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (B)
0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (G)
0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (B)

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Calibrate the colorimeter.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.

Diagnosis
In the case of an adjusting failure Manual No.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100

In the case of a colorimeter failure Manual No.

Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 21110
Calibration plate failure

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser unit ☞ 61450

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)

46082 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46086_1
Error message: Printer

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6087-####
Laser power supply 2 ☞ 64250_1
Laser Control PCB system error.
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Failed parts
purchase. Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Alarm release Refer to 4202 ☞ PC-laser interface PCB.
NO
Error message release
YES NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Condition
Failed parts
Condition ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
An error occurs on the laser control PCB. ☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Data processing error

4. Troubleshooting
0002 Memory error
0003 Communication error
0004 Exposure operation error
0005 Data processing error
0006 Exposure operation error
0007 Communication error
0008 Data processing error
0009
0010
0011
0019
0022 Communication error between the printer control
PCB and laser control PCB occurs.

IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530_1
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520_1
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version ☞ 37530_1
Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520_1
communication error.

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000

46086_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46100
Error message: Printer
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
No. 6101-####
Paper Hold Motor operation error. Failed parts
Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of NOTE
purchase. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Alarm release
NO Circuit diagram
Error message release ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
NO ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
Condition
☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
Suffix Condition Detailed diagram
number
☞ LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
0001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from
LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed
after starting the paper hold motor operation.
0002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from
DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after

4. Troubleshooting
starting the paper hold motor operation.

IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F34 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Paper hold sensor ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

In the case of an operation failure Manual No.

Paper hold motor ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

# Symptoms result from disconnection of connector

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.

46100 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46104
Error message: Printer

Circuit diagram
No. 6104-####
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
Printer Door is open.
Detailed diagram
Countermeasure message
Remove any paper that remains then close Printer Doors 1 and 2.
☞ LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit
Alarm release ☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch
(printer doors 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3
sensor turns OFF.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock
switch (printer door 1 or 2) or printer door 3 sensor turns OFF.

Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely
closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switches (printer
door 1 and 2). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3
on the plug side when you place a magnet close to the
interlock switches (printer door 1 and 2), the interlock
switches are defective.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor,
the sensor is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)

46104 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46104
Error message: Printer

No. 6105 IMPORTANT

B Laser light source status error. • Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
No. 6106 Replace the unit.
G Laser light source status error.
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Countermeasure message Failed parts
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
purchase.
Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release NOTE
NO • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Circuit diagram

☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Error message Condition
No.
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
6105 An error occurs in the light source state of
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
B laser. ☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

4. Troubleshooting
6106 An error occurs in the light source state of
G laser. Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
NOTE
☞ LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
• This error lets you know that the B/G laser head in the laser
unit has deteriorated. ☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
• When the error is released once, the error does not recur until
the power supply is reset or the machine is started by the
program timer.

IMPORTANT
• If an error occurs every time the power supply is reset or
the machine is started by the program timer, check the
contents of Point. When there is no problem there, it is
highly possible that the laser unit is defective.
• Check each of G Laser Light Source Status and B
Laser Light Source Status for Input Check → Printer
→ Engine Section, and if it is OK, it is highly possible
that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if either G
Laser Light Source Status or B Laser Light Source
Status is No Good.

Diagnosis
Point
1 Check if the power (5 V) is supplied from laser power supply
2 and the laser control PCB.

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser unit ☞ 61450
B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
Laser power supply 2 ☞ 64250_1
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1

46104 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46107
Error message: Printer

Circuit diagram
No. 6107-####
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit
R Laser temperature is out of range.
Detailed diagram
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
purchase. ☞ LPP 3-12 Laser unit (2)
Alarm release ☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper limit
temperature) again.
0002 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and

4. Troubleshooting
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower limit
temperature) again.

NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of R laser in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Perform the diagnosis of ☞ Specifying the occurring
cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R)
appears. Refer to 4302.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
Laser unit ☞ 61450
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number ☞ 61100_1
0001)

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)

46107 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46134
Error message: Printer
Detailed diagram
No. 6135-#### ☞ LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
Arm Unit 1 operation error. ☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The zigzaging correction sensor does not turn DARK
even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm
unit 1 for the specified length in the direction of
paper advance.
0002 The zigzaging correction sensor does not turn LIGHT

4. Troubleshooting
even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm
unit 1 for the specified length in the reverse direction
of paper advance when zigzag correction sensor is
DARK.

Diagnosis
In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-3 Paper supply unit A
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

46134 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46136
Error message: Printer

No. 6136-#### No. 6137-####

Exposure Advance Pressure Change Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 1 operation error. Motor 2 operation error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not 0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not
turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the
specified length. specified length.

4. Troubleshooting
0002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not 0002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not
turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the
specified length. specified length.

Diagnosis Check Point

In the case of an operation failure Manual No. 1 Check that the focal plane regulating guide is
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 61300 securely attached.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Diagnosis
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1 Blown fuses Manual No.
Printer power supply 2 F33 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1

In the case of a detection failure Manual No. In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 61300 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 ☞ 61300
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1 Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference In the case of a detection failure Manual No.
Circuit diagram Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 ☞ 61300
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4) Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

Detailed diagram # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

☞ LPP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2) Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12).

46136 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46136
Error message: Printer

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2)

4. Troubleshooting

46136 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46144_1
Error message: Printer

No. 6144-####
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor
operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 Even though the paper advance pressure change
motor operates a specified amount, the paper advance
pressure change sensor does not turn DARK.
02 Even though the paper advance pressure change

4. Troubleshooting
motor operates a specified amount, the paper advance
pressure change sensor does not change from DARK
to LIGHT.
03 Even though the paper advance pressure change
motor operates a specified amount from the home
position, the paper advance pressure change sensor
does not change from DARK to LIGHT.

Diagnosis
In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
Paper advance pressure change motor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Paper advance pressure change sensor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-8 Paper advance unit (1)

46144_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46146
Error message: Printer

NOTE
No. 6146-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Paper Advance Arm Motor operation
error. Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of ☞ LPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit
purchase.
Alarm release
Detailed diagram
NO
Error message release ☞ LPP 3-9 Paper advance unit (2)
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 Even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified
length, the arm sensor does not change from LIGHT
to DARK.
02 Even though arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length,

4. Troubleshooting
the arm sensor does not change from DARK to
LIGHT.
03 Even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified
length from the home position, the arm sensor does
not change from LIGHT to DARK.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64180_1

In the case of an operation failure Manual No.

Paper advance arm motor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Arm sensor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.

# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

46146 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46146
Error message: Printer

No. 6147-####
Turn Motor operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 Even though the turn unit operates a specified
amount, the turn sensor does not change from LIGHT
to DARK.
02 Even though the turn unit operates a specified

4. Troubleshooting
amount, the turn sensor does not change from DARK
to LIGHT.
03 Even though the turn unit operates a specified amount
from the home position, the turn sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK.

Diagnosis
In the case of an operation failure Manual No.
Turn motor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Printer power supply 2

In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Turn sensor ☞ 61400_1
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 64180_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-9 Paper advance unit (2)

46146 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46148
Error message: Printer

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6148-####
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Paper End Sensor A error.
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
No. 6149-####
NOTE
Paper End Sensor B error. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Countermeasure message Circuit diagram

Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
Intensity again.
Alarm release ☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
NO
Error message release Detailed diagram
YES ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

4. Troubleshooting
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.

Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
46148 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46151
Error message: Printer

NOTE
No. 6151-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Paper Loading Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light ☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO Detailed diagram
Error message release ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
YES ☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46151 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46152
Error message: Printer

Circuit diagram
No. 6152-####
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
No. 6153-#### Detailed diagram
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) ☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor

4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the zigzag correction sensor (right or left).
☞ 61300
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)

46152 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46154
Error message: Printer

NOTE
No. 6154-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Paper Supply End Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light ☞ LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A
Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO Detailed diagram
Error message release ☞ LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
YES ☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper supply end sensor using the blower
brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper supply end sensor ☞ 61200
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 64170
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46154 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46154
Error message: Printer

NOTE
No. 6155-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Exposure Start Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Contact us or your place of purchase. ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
Alarm release ☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
NO
Error message release
YES Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is

4. Troubleshooting
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46154 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46156
Error message: Printer

NOTE
No. 6156-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Exposure End Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Contact us or your place of purchase. ☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
Alarm release ☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit
NO
Error message release
YES Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is

4. Troubleshooting
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the exposure end sensor using the blower
brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Exposure end sensor ☞ 61300
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 64160_1
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46156 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46172
Error message: Printer

No. 6173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be
adversely affect print quality.

Countermeasure message
Close the printer door. When you inspect the paper currently
processing, check whether it is satisfactory.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing
from paper magazine A.

NOTE
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening

4. Troubleshooting
printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that
adversely affects the print quality.

Check Point
1 Check that the printer door 3 is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61100_1
• Disconnect the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor,
the sensor is defective.
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4)
☞ LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit

46172 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46176
Error message: Printer
Detailed diagram
No. 6177-#### ☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ☞ LPP 3-12 Laser unit (2)
☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit
temperature) again.
0002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C

4. Troubleshooting
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature falls under 20.0°C (lower
limit temperature)again.

NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
Laser unit ☞ 61450
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61100_1

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

46176 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46178
Error message: Printer

No. 6179
B/G Laser Output Unit error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error message release
Error Clear

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
0002 lasers B and G.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B and G
have been securely connected.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 64200
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1
Laser power supply 2
Laser unit ☞ 61450

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

Detailed diagram
☞ LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
☞ LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
☞ LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4)

46178 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46302
Error message: Scanner
Error message: Scanner

No. 6303-####
Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3]
scanner.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified

4. Troubleshooting
pulse counterclockwise in its initial operation.
0002 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn LIGHT
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified
pulse clockwise in its initial operation.
0003 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified
pulse counterclockwise after the zoom 1 pre-home
sensor turned LIGHT in its initial operation.
0004 The zoom 1 home sensor does not turn LIGHT even
though the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse
counterclockwise after the zoom 1 pre-home sensor
turned DARK in its initial operation.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

46302 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46304
Error message: Scanner

No. 6304-#### No. 6305-####

Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. Scanner Focus operation error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3] • This error only occurs if you are using an [S-4] scanner.
scanner.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number 0001 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0001 The zoom 2 pre-home sensor does not turn LIGHT clockwise for specified distance, but focus home
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified sensor did not allow light to permeate lens.

4. Troubleshooting
pulse clockwise in its initial operation. 0002 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0002 The zoom 2 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK counterclockwise for specified distance, but focus
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified home sensor did not block light.
pulse counterclockwise in its initial operation. 0003 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0003 The zoom 2 home sensor does not turn LIGHT even clockwise for specified distance after focus home
though the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse sensor blocked light, but focus home sensor did not
counterclockwise after the zoom 2 pre-home sensor subsequently allow light to permeate lens.
turned DARK in its initial operation.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Failed parts Manual No. Scanner unit ☞ 20610
Scanner unit ☞ 20610 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Scanner power supply 2
Scanner power supply 2 Multi power supply (scanner)
Multi power supply (scanner)
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010
☞ 89000_1

46304 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46306
Error message: Scanner

No. 6306-####
Scanner IRIS operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3]
scanner.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The IRIS sensor does not turn DARK even though
the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse

4. Troubleshooting
clockwise in its initial operation.
0002 The IRIS sensor does not turn LIGHT even though
the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse
counterclockwise in its initial operation.
0003 IRIS sensor does not turn DARK even though the
zoom lens operated for a specified pulse clockwise
after the IRIS sensor turned LIGHT in its initial
operation.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner unit.
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

46306 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46308
Error message: Scanner

No. 6309-####
Scanner change of light error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the daily setup has not been
completed properly. After troubleshooting, carry out the
daily setup again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
0005 The Light Source Update was carried out with the
film carrier which is not registered the light source.

Check Point
1 Register the light source.

46308 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46310
Error message: Scanner

No. 6311-####
Scanner data error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the light source registration data
will be erased. In this case, you have to read backup
data or carry out the light source registration again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
- While the backup data is being read, the detected data
is out of range.

NOTE
• Although the suffix numbers for this error message will vary
depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective
action should be taken according to the the following check
point and diagnosis.

Check Point
1 Initialize the scanner data and carry out the light
source registration and the area registration.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46310 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46318
Error message: Scanner

No. 6319-####
Backup data error. Scanner AFC

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0### The backup data of the AFC/scanner control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the
AFC/scanner control PCB are abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the AFC/scanner control PCB has been
replaced with a new one, this error message will appear.

Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46318 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46320
Error message: Scanner
Check Point
No. 6321-####
Focus auto adjustment error. 1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit and
AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean
Countermeasure message with it.
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
2 Check that the scanner dust prevention glass is not
Alarm release
soiled.
NO
Error message release 3 Check whether the scanner adjustment chart is damaged.
YES 4 Check the ND filter solenoid operates ☞ 35300
via Output Check.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the Focus Auto Adjustment
IMPORTANT
has not been completed normally. After troubleshooting,
carry out the Focus Auto Adjustment again. ☞ 37020 • When the error above occurs during the focus
adjustment, the ND filter solenoid heats and it may
Condition cause the malfunctions.
After cooling the ND filter solenoid for about ten minutes
Suffix Condition at OFF, carry out the focus adjustment again.
number
NOTE
Other There is a problem with internal operation values,
than such as arguments and variables. • For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.

4. Troubleshooting
below
Diagnosis
627 For 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II, the focus
chart is inserted incorrectly. Failed parts Manual No.
644 The assigned magnification is considerably different Scanner unit ☞ 20610
from the magnification calculated from the scanned
image.
LED light source unit ☞ 20620
661 Shading is abnormal.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
694 The slot of the focus chart cannot be detected
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
correctly because of the dust on the focus chart or the Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
damage of the focus chart. Scanner power supply 2
711 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be Multi power supply (scanner)
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus
chart or the damage of the focus chart. NOTE
728 The focus chart cannot be detected correctly because • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
of the dust on the focus chart or the damage of the
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
focus chart.
805 The CCD for scanner IR and the CCD for image
☞ 89000_1
scanning are out of positions.
1189 The light axis of the scanner is out of position. Wiring diagram [S-4]

1573 The scanner is considerably out of focus. ☞ 89010

2657 The light axis of the scanner is out of position or the
lens of the scanner is on a slant.
3362 For 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II, the Focus
Auto Adjustment is performed when the waveform
cannot be recognized or is not in the normal range.
3412 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus
chart or the damage of the focus chart.
3415 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus
chart or the damage of the focus chart.
3620 The scanner is considerably out of focus.

46320 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46322_1
Error message: Scanner
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 6322-####
Scanner input balance error. Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of NOTE
purchase. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Alarm release
NO Electrical circuit diagram
Error message release ☞ 89000_1
NO
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Condition
☞ 89010
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Each gain value of R became out of range during the
light source registration.
0002 Each gain value of G became out of range during the
light source registration.
0003 Each gain value of B became out of range during the

4. Troubleshooting
light source registration.
0004 Each gain value of IR became out of range during the
light source registration.

Check Point
1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit and
AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean
with it.
2 Check the ND filter solenoid operates ☞ 35300
via Output Check.
3 If the error described above only occurs ☞ 34500
when images are being processed on the
120 AFC, check to see whether or not
the 120 AFC diffuser has been installed.

IMPORTANT
• When the error above occurs via Light source
registration or Light source update, the ND filter solenoid
heats and malfunctions may occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it for about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update and light
source update again.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
LED light source unit ☞ 20620
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

46322_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46324
Error message: Scanner

No. 6324
F stop value range error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the Light source registration
has not been completed properly. After troubleshooting,
carry out the Light source registration again.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Since the aperture has been adjusted during light

4. Troubleshooting
source registration, the standard light intensity cannot
be obtained.

Check Point
1 Check that the LED light source section is neither
damaged nor soiled.
2 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46324 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46326
Error message: Scanner

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6327-####
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
Scanner Light Source Section
LED light source unit ☞ 62050
temperature adjustment error.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Countermeasure message AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Scanner power supply 2 ☞ 65060
purchase.
Alarm release # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
NO
Error message release Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
NO Refer to 4200 ☞ LED driver PCB.
Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2).
Condition
Suffix Condition Failed part(s) [S-4]
number ☞ 4190
0001 The temperature in the LED light source section was
43 degree C or higher when starting the temperature NOTE
adjustment, and it does not reach 45±1 degree C after
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
30 minutes has passed.

4. Troubleshooting
The temperature in the LED light source section was Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
43 degree C or lower when starting the temperature ☞ 89000_1
adjustment, and it does not reach 45±1 degree C after
30 minutes has passed.
Wiring diagram [S-4]
0002 The temperature of LED light source section has
exceeded the upper limit range (50 degree C). ☞ 89010
0003 The temperature of LED light source has fallen below
the lower limit range (40 degree C) in stand-by status
(45±1 degree C).
0004 The temperature in the LED light source section was
43 degree C or lower when starting the temperature
adjustment, and it does not reach 45±1 degree C after
20 minutes has passed.

Check Point
1 Check that the room temperature is 15 to 30 degree
C.
2 Clean the scanner filter.
3 Check the LED cooling fan rotation.

IMPORTANT
• If the above message appears when starting the
operation (when the QSS is turned on by the program
timer) or when performing the dairy setup, the operation
temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) may be
out of the specified range (15 to 30 degree C).
For the operation specification of the LED light source
unit,
Refer to ☞ 62050.
• In the case above, each electrical part of the QSS is
normal.
Update the scanner light source after the operation
temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) is within
the specified range.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
LED cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 62050

46326 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46328_1
Error message: Scanner

No. 6329-####
Analog setting communication error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 There is a problem with the communication between
to the scanner unit, AFC/scanner control PCB and main
0011 software at the light source registration.
0051 Abnormal operation of the scanner unit and
to AFC/scanner control PCB at the light source

4. Troubleshooting
0061 registration

IMPORTANT
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication
status is abnormal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530_1
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520_1
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46328_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46330_1
Error message: Scanner

No. 6330-#### No. 6331-####

Digital setting communication error. Line scanning communication error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0007 The communication between the PC-scanner 0001 The communication between the AFC/scanner
interface PCB and main software has problems control PCB, PC-scanner interface PCB and main
during light source registration. software has problems during light source
0057 Abnormal operation of the PC-scanner interface PCB registration.
during light source registration 0002 Abnormal operation of the AFC/scanner control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
and the PC-scanner interface PCB during light source
IMPORTANT registration
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication
status is abnormal. IMPORTANT
If the error occurs, check the following items. • Since the scanner section is compatible with multiple
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the systems, the different system program may be installed
Version Check display. at the installation or replacement.
☞ 37530_1 In this case, this error occurs because the versions of
the program of the AFC/scanner control PCB and the
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
other program do not match.
☞ 50520_1 Upgrade the program of the AFC/Scanner control PCB
at the installation or replacement.
Diagnosis ☞ 35600_1
Failed parts Manual No. • This error may occur when the ARCNET communication
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000 status is abnormal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
PC-laser interface PCB
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the
NOTE Version Check display.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
☞ 37530_1
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
Electrical circuit diagram ☞ 50520_1
☞ 89000_1
Check Point
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

46330_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46330_1
Error message: Scanner

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

46330_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46332_1
Error message: Scanner
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 6332-####
Light Source adjustment error. Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of NOTE
purchase. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Alarm release
NO Electrical circuit diagram
Error message release ☞ 89000_1
NO
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Condition
☞ 89010
Condition
Due to the failure of the light source or scanner, the light source
registration operation does not finished properly.

Suffix Condition
number
0001 Adjustment failure (The measurement value does not

4. Troubleshooting
converge on the target value.)
0002 Measurement value abnormal
0003 Data calculation error
0004 Lack of pixels
0005 Zoom value abnormal
0006 Image position abnormal
0007 Light amount abnormal
0008 Aperture value abnormal
0009 The dark level is not adjustable.
0010 The AFC was removed or the lane of the AFC was
changed, while executing the light source
registration.
0011 The light source registration was forced to be ended.

IMPORTANT
• If the message No.6332-0007 appears in registering the
light source or during updating the light source,
malfunctions may have been occurred in the ND filter
solenoid of the LED light source unit.
Check the ND filter solenoid operates via Output Check.
☞ 35300
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
LED light source unit ☞ 62050
ND filter solenoid ☞ 62050
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB

46332_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46332_1
Error message: Scanner

No. 6333-####
The Line Data is out of the Standard
Range Error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
Due to the poor contact between PCBs and connectors, the
scanning data has a problem and the light source registration
operation does not finish properly.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Measurement value abnormal
to
0005
0006 Data calculation error
0007 The light source registration was forced to be ended.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)
PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46332_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46336
Error message: Scanner

No. 6336-####
Scanner Zoom operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-4] scanner.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
counterclockwise for specified distance, but zoom
home sensor did not block light.

4. Troubleshooting
0002 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
clockwise for specified distance, but zoom home
sensor did not allow light to permeate lens.
0003 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
counterclockwise for specified distance after zoom
home sensor allowed light to permeate lens, but zoom
home sensor did not then block light.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46336 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46400
Error message: Film carrier
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6400-####
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
Perforation Sensor error.
Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
Countermeasure message AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
manual. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Alarm release AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NO
Error message release Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
YES
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Condition
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Suffix Condition
number ☞ 89000_1
0001 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the perforation sensor and light Wiring diagram [S-4]
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, ☞ 89010
the input status does not turn LIGHT.
0002 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
135 AFC-II

4. Troubleshooting
standard voltage is lowered without changing the
light intensity level of the perforation sensor, the Adjustment failure point Manual No.
input status does not turn LIGHT. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 35060
0003 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the perforation sensor
standard voltage of the perforation sensor has been
fixed at the upper limit and light intensity level has
Failed parts Manual No.
been changed up to upper limit, the input status does
not turn DARK. 135 perforation sensor ☞ 62650
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
level of the perforation sensor were set to initial 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
value, the input status turns LIGHT. AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
line. Power PCB ☞ 65260
135, 240 or 110 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Check Point NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
1 Check that the perforation sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Adjustment. ☞ 89000_1
Diagnosis Wiring diagram [S-4]
135/240 AFC-ll, 110 AFC-II ☞ 89010
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 35000
perforation sensor ☞ 35020

Failed parts Manual No.

135 perforation sensor ☞ 62150
240 perforation sensor ☞ 62150
110 perforation sensor ☞ 62350
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Sensor PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65320
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280

46400 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46400
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6401-####
Sensor PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65320
Loading Sensor error.
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Countermeasure message Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
manual. Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Alarm release Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
NO
Error message release AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
YES Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Condition AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Suffix Condition Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
number
NOTE
0001 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the loading sensor and light • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
the input status does not turn LIGHT.
☞ 89000_1

4. Troubleshooting
0002 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage is lowered without changing the
light intensity level of the loading sensor, the input Wiring diagram [S-4]
status does not turn LIGHT. ☞ 89010
0003 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the loading sensor has been fixed 135 AFC-II
at the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not Adjustment failure point Manual No.
turn DARK. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35060
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity sensor
level of the loading sensor were set to initial value,
the input status turns LIGHT. Failed parts Manual No.

NOTE 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650

• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
line. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
135, 240, 110 or 120 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Check Point
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
1 Check that the loading sensor is not soiled. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Diagnosis Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
135/240 AFC-ll, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II ☞ 89000_1
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000
sensor ☞ 35010 ☞ 89010
☞ 35020

Failed parts Manual No.

135 loading sensor ☞ 62150
240 loading sensor ☞ 62150
120 loading sensor ☞ 62250
110 loading sensor ☞ 62350
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Sensor PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65300

46400 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46402
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6402-####
Sensor PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65320
Ready Sensor error.
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Countermeasure message Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
manual. Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Alarm release Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
NO
Error message release AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
YES Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Condition AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Suffix Condition Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
number
NOTE
0001 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the ready sensor and light • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
the input status does not turn LIGHT.
☞ 89000_1
0002 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the

4. Troubleshooting
standard voltage is lowered without changing the
light intensity level of the ready sensor, the input Wiring diagram [S-4]
status does not turn LIGHT. ☞ 89010
0003 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the ready sensor has been fixed at 135 AFC-II
the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not Adjustment failure point Manual No.
turn DARK. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready ☞ 35060
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity sensor
level of the ready sensor were set to initial value, the
input status turns LIGHT.
Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE 135 ready sensor ☞ 62650
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
line of the message. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
135, 240, 110 or 120
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Check Point AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
1 Check that the ready sensors are not soiled.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
Diagnosis • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
135/240 AFC-ll, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Adjustment failure point Manual No. ☞ 89000_1
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready ☞ 35000
sensor ☞ 35010 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 35020 ☞ 89010

Failed parts Manual No.

135 ready sensor ☞ 62150
240 ready sensor ☞ 62150
120 ready sensor ☞ 62250
110 ready sensor ☞ 62350
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Sensor PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65300

46402 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46402
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6403-####
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Countermeasure message Power PCB ☞ 65260
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Alarm release Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NO
Error message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1
Suffix Condition
number
Wiring diagram [S-4]
0002 Even when the specified length has been fed after the
ready sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor
☞ 89010
does not detect the perforation.
0003 Even when a specified length of film has been fed 135 AFC-II
after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
Adjustment failure point Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
does not turn LIGHT. (The film rear end is not fed.)
0005 Although a specified length of film has been fed
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35060
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
when film ejecting operation, the ready sensor does
not turn DARK. Failed parts Manual No.
0006 Even when a specified length of film has been fed 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
after the ready sensor turned DARK while film
ejecting operation, the loading sensor does not turn 135 ready sensor
DARK. 135 perforation sensor
0014 Even when a specified length has been fed after the Rewinding sensor
perforation sensor turned DARK while film ejecting Film feed motor
operation, the ready sensor does not turn LIGHT.
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
0017 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
Check Point
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
perforation sensor are not soiled.
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Diagnosis
NOTE
135/240 AFC-II • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Adjustment failure point Manual No. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000 ☞ 89000_1
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 89010
135 loading sensor ☞ 62150
135 ready sensor
135 perforation sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200

46402 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46404
Error message: Film carrier
Diagnosis
No. 6404-####
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
Countermeasure message
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Failed parts Manual No.
NO Loading sensor ☞ 62150
Error message release Ready sensor
YES
Perforation sensor
Condition VEI sensor
Rewinding sensor
Suffix Condition
number Spool key motor
0001 Even when a specified length is fed after the film Film feed motor
front end was fed from the cartridge, the loading PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
sensor does not detect the film front end. Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
0002 Even when the specified length is fed after the Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
loading sensor detected the film front end, the ready
sensor does not turn DARK.
Connecting PCB 3 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65220

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Even when a specified length is fed after the ready
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor does not Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
turn DARK. Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
0005 Even when a specified length is fed after the AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
detect the first perforation.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
0006 Even when a specified length is fed after the
perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
detect the end perforation. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
0008 Even when the specified length is rewound when
rewinding the film, the ready sensor does not turn NOTE
LIGHT. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
0009 Even when the specified length is rewound when Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
rewinding the film, the loading sensor does not turn ☞ 89000_1
LIGHT.
1000 Even when the specified length of the film has been
Wiring diagram [S-4]
rewound on rewinding the film, the detection of the
VEI sensor did not change. ☞ 89010
0011 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
0012- When pre-scanning is carried out, although a
0013 specified length is fed after the perforation sensor
turned DARK, the sensor cannot detect the next
perforation.
0014- When scanning is carried out, although a specified
0015 length is fed after the perforation sensor turned
DARK, the sensor cannot detect the next perforation.

Check Point
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and
perforation sensor are not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check if the VEI sensor and the rewinding sensor are
not soiled.

46404 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46404
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6405-####
Power PCB ☞ 65260
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Countermeasure message Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
NOTE
Alarm release
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
NO
Error message release Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
YES
☞ 89000_1
Condition
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Suffix Condition ☞ 89010
number
0002 Even when a specified length is fed after the ready
sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor cannot
detect the first perforation.
0003 Even when one or more film is fed after the ready
sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor cannot detect

4. Troubleshooting
the film rear end.
0004 While the film is being fed, the perforation sensor
between the specified length cannot detect the
continuous signals of DARK and LIGHT.
0005 After pre-scanning, although the specified length is
fed after the film feed started to the scanning
direction, the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
0006 While the film is being fed to the scanning direction,
although the specified length is fed after the ready
sensor has turned DARK, the loading sensor does not
turn DARK.
0007 While the film is being fed to the scanning direction,
although the specified length is fed after the
perforation sensor has turned LIGHT, the ready
sensor does not turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and
perforation sensor are not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35020
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Loading sensor ☞ 62350
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
Sensor PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65320
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060

46404 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46406
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6406-####
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Countermeasure message NOTE
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Alarm release
NO Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Error message release ☞ 89000_1
YES
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Condition
☞ 89010
Suffix Condition
number
0002 Even when a specified length is fed after the ready
sensor turned DARK, the film sensor does not turn
DARK.
0003 Even when a specified length of film has been fed
after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
does not detect the film rear end.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Although a specified length of film has been fed with
the film sensor DARK, the input status (rotation
detection) of the film feed sensor does not change.
0005 After pre-scanning, although the specified length is
fed after the film feed started to the scanning
direction, the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
0006 While the film is being fed to the scanning direction,
although the specified length is fed after the ready
sensor has turned DARK, the loading sensor does not
turn DARK.
0007 While the film is being fed to the scanning direction,
although the specified length is fed after the film
sensor has turned LIGHT, the ready sensor does not
turn LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Check that the loading sensor, the ready sensor and
the film sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure in the loading ☞ 35010
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Loading sensor ☞ 62250
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Sensor PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65300
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260

46406 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46406
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6407-####
Spool Key operation error.

Countermeasure message
Confirm the Film Cartridge.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Unused
0002
0003 Even though the spool key motor has been rotated by
the specified angle, the VEI sensor does not detect
the rotation.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the VEI sensor is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
VEI sensor ☞ 62150
Spool key motor
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
Connecting PCB 3 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65220
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46406 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46408
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6408 No. 6409-####

The Film Carrier is unlocked. The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.

Alarm release Countermeasure message

NO Remove the cleaning leader. For details, refer to the manual.
Error message release Alarm release
YES NO
Error message release
Condition YES

Suffix Condition Condition

number
- The AFC lock sensor turns OFF when the film is in Suffix Condition
the AFC. number
0002 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified
Diagnosis length after the ready sensor detected the leader, the
perforation sensor does not turn DARK.
Failed parts Manual No. 0006 When ejecting the cleaning leader, although the
Film carrier lock sensor ☞ 62050 leader is fed for a specified length, the perforation
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 sensor does not turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 0007 Even when the specified length has been fed after the
perforation sensor turned LIGHT, the ready sensor
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE 0008 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference 0009 When ejecting the cleaning leader, the loading sensor
turns RIGHT immediately after the ready sensor
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] detected the cleaning leader. (The cleaning leader is
☞ 89000_1 too short.)

Wiring diagram [S-4] Check Point

☞ 89010 1 Check that the cleaning leader is not defective.
2 Check if the ready sensor, perforation sensor and film
ejection sensor are soiled.
3 Clean the film feed route.
4 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

Loading sensor ☞ 62150
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
VEI sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000

46408 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46408
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

4. Troubleshooting

46408 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46410
Error message: Film carrier

NOTE
No. 6410-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Film Sensor error.
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000_1
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. Wiring diagram [S-4]
Alarm release
NO
☞ 89010
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the film sensor and light intensity
level have been changed up to upper limit, the input
status does not turn LIGHT.
0002 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, the standard

4. Troubleshooting
voltage is lowered without changing the light
intensity level of the film sensor, the input status does
not turn LIGHT.
0003 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the film sensor has been fixed at
the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not
turn DARK.
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity
level of the film sensor were set to initial value, the
input status turns LIGHT.

NOTE
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second
line.
120

Check Point
1 Check that the film sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of the film sensitivity adjustment ☞ 35010

Failed parts Manual No.

120 film sensor ☞ 62250
Sensor PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65300
Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

46410 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46410
Error message: Film carrier

Diagnosis
No. 6411-####
Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity 135/240 AFC-II
Adjustment was not executed. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35000
Countermeasure message Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
Failed parts Manual No.
NO
Error message release AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
YES
110 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II
Condition
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Suffix Condition
number
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35010
0001 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are not adjusted.
☞ 35020
0002 240 DX sensors 1 and 2 are not adjusted.
Failed parts Manual No.
0003 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, 4, 240 DX sensors 1 and 2 are
not adjusted. AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000

4. Troubleshooting
0004 The loading sensors (135 and 240), ready sensors NOTE
(135 and 240), and perforation sensors (135 and 240)
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
are not adjusted.
0005 The 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4, loading sensors Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
(135 and 240), ready sensors (135 and 240), and ☞ 89000_1
perforation sensors (135 and 240) are not adjusted.
0006 The 240 DX sensors 1 and 2, loading sensors (135 Wiring diagram [S-4]
and 240), ready sensors (135 and 240), and
perforation sensors (135 and 240) are not adjusted.
☞ 89010
0007 The 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4, 240 DX sensors 1
and 2, loading sensors (135 and 240), ready sensors 135 AFC-II
(135 and 240), and perforation sensors (135 and 240)
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
are not adjusted.
0008 The 110 loading sensor, ready sensor and perforation
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35060
sensor are not adjusted. Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
0010 The 120 loading sensor, ready sensor and film sensor
are not adjusted. Failed parts Manual No.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
NOTE
• This error message will be displayed at the following cases. NOTE
Refer to the diagnosis when the error message will be • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
displayed again even though the sensitivity adjustment was
carried out. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
• The AFC/scanner control PCB was replaced. ☞ 89000_1
• Backup data cannot be retrieved from the AFC/scanner
control PCB. Wiring diagram [S-4]
• The sensor standard adjustments have not been ☞ 89010
completed properly.
• The name of the film carrier and the sensor to be adjust will be
displayed on the second line of the message.

Check Point
1 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

46410 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46412
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6412-####
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
135 DX Sensor 1 error.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
No. 6413-#### Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
135 DX Sensor 2 error. Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
No. 6414-####
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
135 DX Sensor 3 error.
NOTE
No. 6415-#### • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
135 DX Sensor 4 error.
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000_1
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. Wiring diagram [S-4]
Alarm release ☞ 89010
NO
Error message release
YES 135 AFC-II

4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Condition
Failure of the film sensitivity adjustment ☞ 35060
Suffix Condition Failure of 135 DX sensor standard
number adjustment
0001 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the value of
A/D exceeds 204 with minimum LED Light Intensity
Failed parts Manual No.
Value.
0002 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the value of
135 DX sensor ☞ 62650
A/D does not exceed 204 with maximum LED Light 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
Intensity Value. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
0003 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the adjusted AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
gain value exceeds 255. Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
0004 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, none Power PCB ☞ 65260
negative level calculated from inserting negative
exceeds 255.
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
0005 When adjusting the sensor LED light intensity, the
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
value does not reach until none negative level
NOTE
although the light intensity value has been maximum.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Check Point Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

1 Check that the 135 DX sensor is soiled. ☞ 89000_1

2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment. Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Diagnosis
135/240 AFC-II
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of the film sensitivity adjustment ☞ 35000
Failure of 135 DX sensor standard
adjustment

Failed parts Manual No.

135 DX sensor ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280

46412 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46416
Error message: Film carrier

NOTE
No. 6416-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
240 DX Sensor 1 error.
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
No. 6417-#### ☞ 89000_1
240 DX Sensor 2 error.
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89010
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the value of
A/D exceeds 204 with minimum LED Light Intensity

4. Troubleshooting
Value.
0002 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the value of
A/D does not exceed 204 with maximum LED Light
Intensity Value.
0003 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the adjusted
gain value exceeds 255.
0004 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, none
negative level calculated from inserting negative
exceeds 255.
0005 When adjusting the sensor LED light intensity, the
value does not reach until none negative level
although the light intensity value has been maximum.

Check Point
1 Check that the 240 DX sensor is soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure of 240 DX sensor standard ☞ 35000
adjustment

Failed parts Manual No.

240 DX sensor ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

46416 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46422
Error message: Film carrier

NOTE
No. 6423
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Auto focus error.
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000_1
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. Wiring diagram [S-4]
Alarm release
NO
☞ 89010
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Even though the auto focus adjustment had been
performed against the mount for a specified time, the
adjustment is failure.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
attached.

Check Point
1 Check that the film is placed on the mount.
2 Check that the AF sensor and mirror is not soiled.
3 Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission
adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
4 Check that the mount is processable with MMC.

NOTE
• For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is ☞ 35030
correctly positioned.
When adjusting the height of the mount ☞ 20850
carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (± one
tooth).

Failed parts Manual No.

AF sensor ☞ 62450
AF motor ☞ 62450
• If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

46422 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46424
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6424-#### No. 6425-####

Mount Unit operation error. Mount detection error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. manual.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0001 When the mount insertion cover sensor is ON, the
carrier to the home position, the mount carrier home mount sensor does not turn ON.
sensor does not turn DARK even after the mount 0002 When the mount is to be ejected, the mount sensor
carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified time. does not turn OFF.
0002 When an attempt has been made to move the mount

4. Troubleshooting
carrier from the home position, the mount carrier NOTE
home sensor does not turn LIGHT even after the • This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
mount carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified attached.
time.
0003 When the mount is to be ejected, the mount insertion Check Point
cover is not opened.
1 Check that the mount insertion cover sensor or the
NOTE mount sensor is not soiled.
• This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
attached. Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check Point
Mount insertion cover sensor ☞ 62450
1 Check that the mount carrier home sensor or the Mount sensor
mount insertion cover sensor is not soiled.
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
2 Check if the mount unit slides smoothly.
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
Diagnosis
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Failed parts Manual No. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Mount carrier home sensor ☞ 62450 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Mount carrier slide motor Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330 NOTE
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Power PCB ☞ 65260 ☞ 89000_1
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46424 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46426
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6426
The lane is out of position.

Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The 135 or 240 lane limit switch turns OFF while the
film is being processed using the 135/240 AFC.

Check Point
1 Check that the lever is set securely and the lane limit
switch is pressed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Lane limit switch ☞ 62150
• If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 (135) or
between pins 1 and 3 (240) on the connector when the lane
limit switch is pressed, the lane limit switch is defective.
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
Connecting PCB 3 ☞ 65220
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46426 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46428_1
Error message: Film carrier
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
No. 6429-####
System error. (AFC / Scanner control Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]

PCB) Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner unit.

Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
Countermeasure message Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release Failed part(s) [S-4]
NO
☞ 4190
Error message release
YES
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Condition
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
Suffix Condition
number Refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
0001 When starting up the AFC/scanner control PCB,
conditions of ICs on the PCB were abnormal. Failed part(s) [S-4]
1000 The scanner status is BUSY when checking at ☞ 4240
startup.
3000 The zoom operation of scanner unit is abnormal. NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
3001 (Occurs only when using S-2/S-3 scanners.) • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
3002 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
3003 The IRIS operation of scanner unit is abnormal. ☞ 89000_1
(Occurs only when using S-2/S-3 scanners.)
3004 Focus movement range is mathematically abnormal. Wiring diagram [S-4]
(Occurs only when using S-4 scanner.)
☞ 89010
NOTE
• Suffix numbers for the error message will vary depending on
the error occurring condition. Carry out the corrective actions
according to the following diagnosis for each suffix numbers.

Check Point
Countermeasure Manual No.
When an error occurs due to communication ☞ 35600_1
error among the suffix numbers above,
upgrade the system.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F28 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010

Failed parts Manual No.

Scanner unit ☞ 20610
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010

46428_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46430
Error message: Film carrier

NOTE
No. 6431
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Auto focus error.
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000_1
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Wiring diagram [S-4]
NO
Error message release
☞ 89010
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Even though the auto focus adjustment had been
performed against the mount for a specified time, the
adjustment is failure.

NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is

4. Troubleshooting
attached.

Check Point
1 Check that the film is placed on the mount.
2 Check that the AF sensor and mirror is not soiled.
3 Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission
adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
4 Check that the mount is processable with AMC.

NOTE
• For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is ☞ 35040
correctly positioned.
When adjusting the height of the mount ☞ 35040
carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (± one
tooth).

Failed parts Manual No.

AF sensor ☞ 62550
AF motor
• If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

46430 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46432
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6432-#### No. 6433-####

Mount Unit operation error. Mount detection error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0001 Although the mount is fed to the mount carrier from
carrier to the home position, the mount carrier home insert stocker, the mount sensor does not turn ON.
sensor does not turn DARK even after the mount Or, the mount sensor (inlet) is ON in spite of there is
carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified time. no mount.
0002 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0002 Although the mount is fed to the ejection stocker, the
carrier from the home position, the mount carrier mount sensor does not turn OFF.

4. Troubleshooting
home sensor does not turn LIGHT even after the
mount carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified NOTE
time. • This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached.
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is Check Point
attached.
1 Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount
Check Point stocker.
2 Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
1 Check if the mount carrier sensor is soiled.
2 Check if the mount unit slides smoothly. Diagnosis

Diagnosis Failed parts Manual No.

Mount sensor (inlet) ☞ 62550
Failed parts Manual No.
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
Mount carrier home sensor ☞ 62550 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
Mount carrier slide motor
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 Power PCB ☞ 65260
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 NOTE
Power PCB ☞ 65260 • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

NOTE
☞ 89000_1
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] ☞ 89010
☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46432 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46434
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6434-#### No. 6435-####

Mount detection (inlet) error. Mount insertion operation error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 Although the mount sensor (inlet) is not turned ON 0001 Although the mount insertion motor has rotated for a
when the mount is fed to the mount carrier, the mount specified time to return the mount insertion arm to
sensor turns ON. the home position, the insertion sensor 1 does not
turn DARK.
NOTE 0002 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is for a specified time from the home position, the

4. Troubleshooting
attached. insertion sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
0003 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved to
Check Point the set position, the insertion sensor 2 does not turn
DARK.
1 Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount
stocker. 0004 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved
for a specified time to return to the home position
2 Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
from the set position, the insertion sensor 2 does not
turn LIGHT.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Failed parts Manual No.
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
Mount sensor (inlet) ☞ 62550 attached.
Mount sensor
Mount carrier home sensor Diagnosis
Mount carrier slide motor
Failed parts Manual No.
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070 Loading sensor 1 ☞ 62550
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 Loading sensor 2
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350 Mount carrier home sensor
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Mount carrier slide motor
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Power PCB ☞ 65260 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
NOTE Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference Power PCB ☞ 65260
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
☞ 89000_1 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89010
☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46434 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46436
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6436-#### No. 6437-####

Mount elevator operation error. Mount eject operation error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 The mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK even 0001 The ejection sensor does not turn ON even though the
though the mount elevator motor revolves for a mount ejection solenoid operated and the mount
specified time. moved to the ejection position.
0002 The mount elevator sensor does not turn LIGHT even 0002 The ejection sensor does not turn OFF even though
though the mount elevator motor revolves for a the mount elevator motor revolved and the mount got
specified. out to the ejection stocker.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is • This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached. attached.

Diagnosis Check Point

Failed parts Manual No. 1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount carrier.
Mount elevator sensor ☞ 62550 2 Confirm the set state of the mount stocker.
Mount elevator motor 3 Clean the mount ejection roller.
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Diagnosis
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Failed parts Manual No.
Power PCB ☞ 65260 Ejection sensor ☞ 62550
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Mount ejection solenoid

NOTE
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Power PCB ☞ 65260
☞ 89000_1 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Wiring diagram [S-4] NOTE
☞ 89010 • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46436 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46438
Error message: Film carrier

Failed parts Manual No.

No. 6438-####
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Countermeasure message Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Alarm release AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NO
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Error message release
YES NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Condition
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Suffix Condition
number
☞ 89000_1
0002 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified
Wiring diagram [S-4]
length after the ready sensor detected the leader, the
perforation sensor does not turn DARK. ☞ 89010
0007 When ejecting the leader, although the leader is fed
for a specified length, the perforation sensor does not 135 AFC-II
turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
0008 When ejecting the leader, although the leader is fed
for a specified length after the perforation sensor Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35060
turned LIGHT, the ready sensor does not turn sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
LIGHT.
Failed parts Manual No.
0009 When the leader is ejected, although the leader is fed
for a specified length after the perforation sensor 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
turned DARK, the ready sensor does not turn DARK. 135 ready sensor
(Unspecified cleaning leader is used.) 135 perforation sensor
0010 When the leader is ejected, although the leader is fed Rewinding sensor
for a specified length after the ready sensor turned
Film feed motor
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK.
(Unspecified cleaning leader is used.) PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
0011 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam. 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
Check Point AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor, perforation
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
sensor, and film ejection sensor are not soiled. Power PCB ☞ 65260
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Adjustment. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060

Diagnosis NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
135/240 AFC-II
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
☞ 89000_1
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
Wiring diagram [S-4]

Failed parts Manual No.

☞ 89010
Loading sensor ☞ 62150
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280

46438 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46438
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6439-####
The film strip is too short for processing.

Countermeasure message
Remove the film from the cartridge and proceed by strip. The film
length is shorter than prescribed. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When processing the stripped film, the loading sensor
turned LIGHT for a specified time before the ready
sensor detect the detach perforation after the film
feeding started.

4. Troubleshooting
0002 The ready sensor detected the detach perforation
before the last frame of the film is scanned.

NOTE
• This error occurs when the length of the IX240 film rear edge
is shorter than that is required for scanning.

Check Point
1 Check that the processed film has not the detach
perforation near the rear edge or the detach
perforation has not cut.
2 Check that the size A of the processed film indicated
below is not 125 mm or less.

Rear end perforation Turnaround

perforation

Detach
perforation

G058798

G058799

IMPORTANT
• Process the stripped IX240 cartridge film.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual.
• If the size A is 125 mm or more, all the frames in the film
can be printed by stripping the film.
• If the size A is less than 125 mm, the last frame and the
several frames from the last in the film cannot be printed.

46438 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46440
Error message: Film carrier
Failed parts Manual No.
No. 6441-#### Loading sensor ☞ 62250
The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. Ready sensor
Film sensor
Countermeasure message
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Film feed sensor
Alarm release Film feed motor
NO PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Error message release
YES
Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Sensor PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65300
Condition AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Suffix Condition
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
number Power PCB ☞ 65260
0001 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
length since the ready sensor detected the cleaning Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
leader, the film sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 Since the film sensor turned DARK, the signal of the NOTE
film feed sensor (motion detection) does not change • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
while the cleaning leader is being fed for a specified
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

4. Troubleshooting
length.
0003 Although a specified length of leader has been fed
☞ 89000_1
when ejecting, the film sensor does not turn DARK.
0004 Although a specified length of leader has been fed Wiring diagram [S-4]
since the film sensor turned LIGHT, the ready sensor ☞ 89010
does not turn LIGHT.
0005 Although a specified length of leader has been fed
since ejecting the leader started, the ready sensor
does not turn DARK. (Unspecified cleaning leader is
used.)
0006 When ejecting, although a specified length of leader
has been fed since the ready sensor turned DARK,
the loading sensor does not turn DARK. (Unspecified
cleaning leader is used.)

NOTE
• The specified length of 120 cleaning leader is 400 mm.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (170 mm
or less) will cause errors.
The suffix number of the possible error is 05.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (180 mm
or less) will cause errors.
The suffix number of the possible error is 05 or 06.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (223
mm) will cause errors. The suffix number of the possible error
is 06.

Check Point
1 Check that the loading sensor, ready sensor, film
sensor, and film feed sensor are not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35010
sensor, ready sensor, film sensor, and film
feed sensor

46440 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46442
Error message: Film carrier
135 AFC-II
No. 6442-####
The perforation of the film may be broken. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 35060
perforation sensor
Countermeasure message
Remove the film and check the perforations and other film
condition. For details, refer to the manual. Failed parts Manual No.
Alarm release 135 perforation sensor ☞ 62650
NO
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
Error message release
YES 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Condition Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Suffix Condition Power PCB ☞ 65260
number AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
0001 The perforation sensor does not change when a Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
specified length of film is being fed in the pre-
scanning direction. NOTE
0002 The perforation sensor does not change when a • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
specified length of film is being fed in the scanning
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

4. Troubleshooting
direction.
☞ 89000_1
Check Point
Wiring diagram [S-4]
1 Check that the perforation sensor is not soiled. ☞ 89010
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
135/240 AFC-ll
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 35000
perforation sensor

Failed parts Manual No.

135 perforation sensor ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Connecting PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46442 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46444
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6443 No. 6444

Move Table operation error. Cartridge is out of position.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release Attention message release
YES/START YES/START
NOTE NOTE
• Start initial operation after release. • Start initial operation after release.

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
01 Although it was going to return the move table of The cartridge limit switch (cartridge limit switches 1
MFC to the home position, even if it carried out fixed and 2) turns OFF while the 240 film is being
distance movement, the move table home sensor does processed.
not turn DARK.
02 Although fixed distance movement of the move table Check Point
of MFC was carried out from the home position, the

4. Troubleshooting
move table home sensor does not turn LIGHT. Check the status of the cartridge limit switch by
input check. ☞ 35200
03 During the move table of MFC operates (during
processing the film), the attachment (mask) code is
not detected. Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE
• This attention message appears when MFC is attached.
Cartridge limit switch 1 or 2 ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Check Point
NOTE
Suffix • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Manual No.
number
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
01,02 Check the status of Move Table Home Sensor via
Input Check. ☞ 35200 ☞ 89000_1
Check the operation of Move Table Slide Motor via
Output Check. ☞ 35300 Wiring diagram [S-4]
03 Check the Attachment Detection Switch status via ☞ 89010
input check. ☞ 35200

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Table home sensor ☞ 62670
Table slide motor
PM driver
Connecting PCB 2 ☞ 62660
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000_1

Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010

46444 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46502
Error message: Disk/Media
Error message: Disk/Media

No. 6503
Formatting could not be executed.

Countermeasure message
Clean the disk drive with a disk cleaner. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The format error occurs in the driver controller.

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920_1
even if the media has been set, carry out the
Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46502 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46504
Error message: Disk/Media

No. 6504 No. 6505

Backup data could not be read. Backup data could not be written.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- When the power supply is turned ON, the backup - The backup data cannot be written to the hard disk.
data recovered from the hard disk cannot be read.
NOTE
NOTE • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the second line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
second line of the message. HD
HD
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Failed parts Manual No. HD drive ☞ 88000
HD drive ☞ 88000 ATX mother board
ATX mother board ATX power supply
ATX power supply
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46504 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46506
Error message: Disk/Media

No. 6506-####
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary
image file(s).

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
• Select NO to bring up the File Delete dialog box. Delete
unnecessary files in the hard disk.
• Select PASS to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the power supply is turned on or the data is to
be written to the hard disk, the free space of hard disk
drive is below 4 GB.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third
line of the message.
C:
• Read only files will not be deleted.

Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary files.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
HD drive ☞ 88000
ATX mother board
ATX power supply

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-6 PC Power supply connecting
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46506 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46550
Error message: Colorimeter
Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6551-####
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the
front end of the paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn
DARK.
0002 When paper is being fed in paper advance operation,
paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT.
0003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn

4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to
lead the front end of the paper.

Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet.
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61110
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

46550 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46552
Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6552-####
Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is
not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup
data is not stored in the HD of the computer.)
0002 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is
not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup

4. Troubleshooting
data is stored in the HD of the computer.)

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding CPU PCB will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
• Backup data is saved on an EEPROM mounted on the PCB
and is not lost even if the system power is turned OFF for an
extended period of time.
• The message with suffix number 0002 appears after the
colorimeter control PCB was replaced. Clearing the error by
selecting NO reads the backup data of the paper front end
advance length correction and feed error correction from the
hard disk to the colorimeter control PCB.

Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

46552 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46554
Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6554-####
Calibration Plate advance error.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn DARK.
0002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
0003 In initial operation, although a specified length of
moving to the home position was attempted to the

4. Troubleshooting
calibration plate, paper sensors 1 and 2 do not turn
LIGHT.
0004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT.
0005 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn DARK.
0006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 1 dose not turn DARK.

Check Point
1 Check if the calibration plate is set correctly.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61110
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit

46554 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46600_1
Error message: Pricing unit
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6600-#### No. 6601-##

Pricing Unit communication error. Pricing Unit operation error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The communication between the PU control PCB and 0001 Although a specified time has passed since printing
the pricing unit is not carried out normally. started, printing is not completed.
0002 Since excessive communication data is sent to the
NOTE 0003 pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is 0004

4. Troubleshooting
different. 0005 Even after a specified time has passed since the data
Suffix Type was transmitted to the personal computer, no signal is
number returned.
0002 Type A
NOTE
Bar code pricing unit • Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
0003 Type B different.
Card printer pricing unit
Suffix Type
0004 Type C number
Bar code pricing unit 0001 Standard
Pricing Unit
0002 Type A
Check Point
Bar code pricing unit
1 Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON.
0003 Type B
Card printer pricing unit
Diagnosis
0004 Type C
Blown fuses Manual No. Bar code pricing unit
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 88000 0005 Type D
For PC output
Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 88000 • When the pricing unit specification via Machine
ARCNET-HUB PCB Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
PC-laser interface PCB
Diagnosis
PC-scanner interface PCB
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1 Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference Failed parts Manual No.
Circuit diagram PU control PCB ☞ 88000
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ARCNET-HUB PCB
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3) PC-laser interface PCB
☞ LPP 2-9 Around pricing unit PC-scanner interface PCB
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

46600_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46600_1
Error message: Pricing unit

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-9 Around pricing unit

4. Troubleshooting

46600_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46602_1
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6602-#### No. 6603-####

Pricing Unit Printer operation error. Backup data error. PU

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
purchase. manual.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.
Condition
Condition Condition
Abnormal data is sent from the card printer. Suffix Condition
Continuous check for two or more seconds detects that an error number
signal has been sent. 0### The backup data of the PU control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the PU
Suffix Type control PCB are abnormal.
number

4. Troubleshooting
0003 Type B NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
Card printer pricing unit
digits of the suffix number.
NOTE • If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is being OFF or if the PU control PCB has been replaced with a
different. new one, this error message will appear.
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification
Diagnosis
is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
When the data is erased Manual No.
Diagnosis Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 88000 Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE
Printer -
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
ARCNET-HUB PCB Circuit diagram

PC-laser interface PCB ☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram

PC-scanner interface PCB ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1 ☞ LPP 2-9 Around pricing unit

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
☞ LPP 2-9 Around pricing unit

46602_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46620
Error: NMC
Error: NMC

No. 6620
Remote Control was not finished.

Attention message release

YES or NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Remote Control has not finished.

Check Point
1 If it recurs, reinstall the Noritsu-eNET system
program.

4. Troubleshooting

46620 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46802
Error message: Software upgrade
Error message: Software upgrade

No. 6803
Language version of message data is
incorrect. Message display in English.

Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the power supply is turned ON or when the
language of the machine specification is to be
changed, the selected language does not appear.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1

46802 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46900_1
Error: Main
Error: Main

Diagnosis
No. 6900-##
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
Main control system error. depending on the suffix number (bit).

Countermeasure message Suffix

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of number Countermeasure Manual No.
purchase. (bit)
Alarm release 0004 Reinstall the QSS system ☞ 88000
NO 0010 program.
Error message release 0040
NO 0080
0001 Carry out the recovery.
Condition 0002
0100
Condition
0200
Because of the QSS control system, it is in a condition that the
main control system cannot assume, such as that there is no
0400 Initialize the Compact Archive ☞ 36700
Unit.
necessary file, the file is damaged and the data to be collated is
not consistent. 0800 When recurs, get the log data. ☞ 37500
1000 Check the connection of each ☞ 88000
Suffix Condition media drive.

4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit) Suffix
0001 ARCNET or LVDS cannot be used. number Failed parts Manual No.
(bit)
0002 There is not enough memory, failed to operate.
0004 There is no initial data file.
0040 Hard disk (for system) ☞ 88000
0080
0008 It loses one frame of the scanned images (0 frame). 0200
0010 The temporary file can not be made. 0800
0020 The number of scanned images is too many. 0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
0040 Check the error of the backup data. PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000
0080 Check the error of the backup data. PC-scanner interface PCB
0100 Communication error between tasks 0008 Scanner unit ☞ 20610
0200 The backup file of the frame format cannot be found. 0020
0400 The data base file of the archive is damaged.
NOTE
0800 The data mainly processed is not consistent. • If the failed part is the PC-laser-interface PCB, check the
1000 When writing the data to the input media like MO, setting of DS1.
the image data is not written normally.
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Electrical circuit diagram
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display. ☞ 89000_1
☞ 4002
Wiring diagram [S-4]
Check Point ☞ 89010
1 Reset the power supply.
2 Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
3 When recurs, get the log data.
☞ 37500

46900_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46900_1
Error: Main

Diagnosis
No. 6901-####
ARCNET communication error. Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version ☞ 37530_1
Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET
Countermeasure message
communication error.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520_1
Alarm release communication error.
NO
Error message release Failed parts Manual No.
NO
ARCNET cable -

Condition Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Condition
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is checked, or
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
instant power failure. PC-scanner interface PCB
PU control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB ARCNET-HUB PCB
number Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
(bit)
Laser power supply 2 ☞ 64250_1
0001 Printer control PCB
Printer power supply 1
0008 Processor control PCB
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
0200 Laser control PCB
Failed parts
0800 -
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
1000 -
Refer to 4200 ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3).
2000 PC-scanner interface PCB
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).
IMPORTANT Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3).
continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply 2 (PS16).
QSS. Refer to 4202 ☞ PC-laser interface PCB.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be Refer to 4202 ☞ PC-scanner interface PCB.
displayed in the second line depending on the equipped
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
options or ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS7).
displayed PCB.
☞ 50520_1 Failed part(s) [S-4]
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the ☞ 4190
Version Check display.
☞ 37530_1
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
Electrical circuit diagram
the second line of the message.
☞ 89000_1
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display. Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 4002 ☞ 89010
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

46900_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46902_1
Error: Main

NOTE
No. 6903-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Serial communication error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3)
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
purchase. ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
Alarm release
NO ☞ LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit
Error message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to continue the communication.
• Select NO to abort the communication.

Condition
Condition
The serial communication has an error.

Suffix Condition

4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0001 Between the ATX mother board and the colorimeter
control PCB
0002 Between the colorimeter and the colorimeter control
PCB

NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the communication status of the ☞ 37530_1
colorimeter unit in System Version Check at
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.

Failed parts Manual No.

Serial cable -
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Laser power supply 1 ☞ 64250_1

# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply 1 (PS17).

46902_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46906_1
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6906-####
Failed to change the mode. Enter to the Failed parts Manual No.

next mode? ARCNET cable -

Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Countermeasure message AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
purchase. PU control PCB ☞ 88000
Alarm release
NO ARCNET-HUB PCB
Error message release PC-laser interface PCB
• Select PASS to change the mode again. PC-scanner interface PCB
• Select NO to stop the change.
NOTE
• Select YES to enter the next mode.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Condition Circuit diagram

Condition
☞ - System connection diagram
Each control PCB does not return any signal when the mode is
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
changed. ☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

4. Troubleshooting
The first figure of suffix number:
The mode which you are going to bring up is displayed.

Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
1### Normal mode
2### Input/Output mode
3### Setup mode
4### Adjustment mode
5### Start Up Checks mode
6### Close Down Checks mode
7### Program timer mode
8### Input Check mode
F### Unknown

The last three digits of suffix number:

Each control PCB which was failed to change the mode is
indicated by the total of the bit operation.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
#002 AFC/scanner control PCB
#008 Printer control PCB
#080 Processor control PCB
#100 PU control PCB

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002

46906_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46906_1
Error: Main

No. 6907-####
The file was not found.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The required file for setup does not exist.

NOTE
• The file name where the error arises will be displayed in the
second line of the message.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46906_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46908_1
Error: Main

NOTE
No. 6908-####
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Processing response error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ - System connection diagram
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of ☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
purchase. ☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
Alarm release
NO ☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
When the processing command is given, each CPU does not
return any signal.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
instant power failure.

Suffix PCB

4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 -
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB

NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
ARCNET-HUB PCB
PC-laser interface PCB
PC-scanner interface PCB

46908_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46908_1
Error: Main

No. 6909-####
CPU was reset. Abort the process.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure.

Suffix PCB
number
(bit)

4. Troubleshooting
0200 Laser control PCB

NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ - System connection diagram
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

46908_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46912
Error: Main

No. 6913-####
System was shut down forcibly. Restart
the system.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
System has shut down forcibly while processing.

4. Troubleshooting

46912 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46916
Error: Main

No. 6916-####
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
NOTE
• This error does not occur when using 3300 and 33SD because
said units are not equipped with the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
PCB.

Condition
Condition
An error occurred at the diagnostic check of the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 Standard PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
0002 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB for Compact Archive
Unit (option)

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Electrical circuit diagram

☞ 89000_1

46916 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46918
Error: Main

No. 6918-####
Failed to start the DLS.

Countermeasure message
Restart the system. If this error recurs, contact your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The signal of starting failure from DLS has been
notified to QSS.
0002 The signal of completing starting from DLS has not
been notified to QSS although a specified time has
passed.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 37600
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
☞ 88000

46918 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46920_1
Error: Main

No. 6920 No. 6921-####

Hardware Key could not be detected. PCB error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Select Power OFF via FUNCTION in Close Down Checks. Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
After that, turn OFF the circuit breaker and check the connecting Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again. If
condition of Hardware Key. this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
For details, refer to the manual. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
NO Error message release
Error message release NO
The error message cannot be released.
Reserve the error with F: Reserve button and carry out the Close Condition
Down Checks.
Turn the Power OFF via FUNCTION in Close Down Checks. Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program
IMPORTANT
version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.
• The error message of error No.6920 appears only for
QSS-3300 PRO.
Suffix PCB
number
Condition

4. Troubleshooting
(bit)
Suffix Condition 0001 Printer control PCB
number 0008 Processor control PCB
- When starting up QSS-3300 PRO System Program, 0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
Hardware Key was not detected.
0100 PU control PCB
The Hardware Key was not detected when the Start
key was pressed on Net Order Display. 0200 Laser control PCB
0800 CD-R writing system
Check Point 2000 PC-scanner interface PCB
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB
1 Check that the Hardware Key is attached to the
parallel port in position.
NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Diagnosis For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
In the case of an operation failure Manual No. Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Hardware Key ☞ 88000
Mother board unit Check Point
NOTE 1 Reset the power supply.
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Diagnosis
Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140_1
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150_1
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
PU control PCB ☞ 88000
ARCNET-HUB PCB
PC-laser interface PCB
PC-scanner interface PCB
CD-R writing system -

46920_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46920_1
Error: Main

NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ - System connection diagram
☞ LPP 2-1 System diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting
☞ LPP 2-6 Around laser unit

4. Troubleshooting

46920_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

46922
Error: Main

No. 6922-####
Device control error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 An error of Windows about the USB flash memory is
detected using the self-diagnostic function of the
main control system.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Confirm whether the USB flash memory is not being
removed during reading data from the USB flash
memory.
2 Failure in the USB flash memory
3 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Failure in the USB Flash Memory ☞ 88000
Compatible Kit
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1

46922 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

46924_1
Error: Main

No. 6925
PC-Laser Interface PCB control error.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
An error occurred during the PC laser interface diagnostic check.

Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PC-laser interface PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

46924_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

48360
Error: Compact Archive Unit
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8361
Archive File read error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Reading image data is failed while printing from the
compact archive unit.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

48360 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

48362
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8362 No. 8363

Archive File write error. Compact Archive Unit processing error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
NO NO

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Writing data is failed while saving the image to the - Cannot communicate with the Compact Archive Unit
compact archive unit. (TYPE2) in order to save to, or print from the
Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).
Diagnosis
NOTE
Failed parts Manual No. • This message appears only in the case of Compact Archive

4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000 Unit (TYPE2).

NOTE Check Point

• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
1 Check the settings for Option Registration and
Circuit diagram Operator Selections of the Compact Archive Unit
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting (TYPE2).
2 If this occurs while using the QSS-Kids, check the
connection between the QSS-Kids and the machine.
3 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

48362 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

48364
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8364-####
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used at the start-up of QSS or
when reading back-up data.

Suffix Condition
number
0001 There is no hard disk drive available for use.

4. Troubleshooting
0002 There is only one PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (for
TYPE1 only).
0003 The hard disk drive has not been formatted.
0004 The capacity of the hard disk drive has become below
the lower limit.

NOTE
• For the 3300, the error from the condition of suffix number
0002 cannot occur.

Check Point
1 Reset Option Registration of the Compact Archive
Unit (TYPE2) and reset the power supply.
Restart the machine, carry out Option Registration
again, and check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram for the reference

Circuit diagram
☞ LPP 2-2 PC connecting

48364 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit

No. 9000-#### No. 9001-####

Edit mode System error. Edit mode Information file error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES YES

Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 There is no .dll in Windows 2000. 0001 The image insertion information is defective when
0002 AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows reading an information file in the Edit mode.
2000. 0002 The letter information is defective when reading an
0003 The image information file is broken when entering information file in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode. 0003 There is an unknown information data when reading

4. Troubleshooting
0004 There is not the image information file when entering information file extend data in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
NOTE
0005 Making data for frame printing is failed.
• This message appears when reading an information file in the
0006 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
0007 Changing the size of template image is failed when Check Point
entering in image editing mode.
0008 Changing the magnification of inserted image data is 1 Check if the information file is not broken in the
failed. template information correction screen.

0009 Reading the letter information file in the template 2 Install the option template again.
selection display is failed.
0010 Reading phrase data is failed.
0011 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering
the information file correction display.
0012 Changing the size of template image is failed when
entering the information file correction display.
0013 Opening the file is failed.
0014 Memory mapping is failed.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1
Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000
Carry out the recovery.

49000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

49002
Error message: Edit

No. 9002-#### No. 9003-####

Edit mode Image data error. Edit mode Image read error.

Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

This file format cannot be read, or this file is broken. Select the Saved image is broken. Remake the data, and save it.
correct file. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
NO Error message release
Error message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
Suffix Condition number
number 0001 The image saved data to read is broken.
0001 Reading PSD file is failed. 0002 There is not the information file in the image saved
0002 Copying the image inserted in Inserted Graphics is data to read.
failed. 0003 There is not the template file in the image saved data
0003 The inserted image data cannot be read by Plug-in. to read.
0004 Reading PSD file is failed.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
0005 Reading PSD image file is failed.
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
0006 There is not the image file to insert. mode.
0007 Reading image file to insert is failed.
0008 The layer information to read image is defective. Check Point
0009 Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed. 1 Make the image data again.
0010 Reading thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Diagnosis
0011 Writing thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Countermeasure Manual No.
0012 There is not a file when receiving the template file Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1
name. Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Check Point
1 Check if the corrective image data is selected.
2 Carry out the operation using another image data.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600_1
Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000

49002 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

49002
Error message: Edit

4. Troubleshooting
This page is intentionally blank.

49002 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

5000

5. Operation sequence

Start up/Closing down sequence ..................................................................................... 50500_1

Startup sequence ............................................................................................................................................50500_1
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification) ........................................................ 50501_1
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ...........................................................................................................50501_1
PC startup sequence ........................................................................................................... 50510
Startup sequence for PC ....................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ................................................................................................. 50520_1
ARCNET communication flow .....................................................................................................................50520_1
How to use the fiber cutter ............................................................................................................................50520_1
How to use the aspirator ................................................................................................................................50520_1
Data flow chart ................................................................................................................. 50700_1
Data flow in printing ......................................................................................................................................50700_1
Data flow in data saving ................................................................................................................................50710_1
Data flow to the CAU ....................................................................................................................................50730_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) ............................................................................... 50800_1
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] ..........................................50800_1
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] .....................................................................................................50810_1

5 Operation sequence
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] ...............................................................................................50820_1
Film carrier section .............................................................................................................. 51010
Film feed operation (135) ..................................................................................................................................51010
Film feed operation (240) ..................................................................................................................................51110
Film feed operation (120) ..................................................................................................................................51310
Film feed operation (110) ..................................................................................................................................51410
Film feed operation (MMC) ..............................................................................................................................51510
Film advance operation (AMC) .........................................................................................................................51550
Paper path diagram ......................................................................................................... 55000_1
Paper path diagram ........................................................................................................................................55000_1
Paper advance operation .................................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation .....................................................................................................................................55100
Paper advance operation (before exposure) .......................................................................................................55200
Exposure operation ............................................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation ................................................................................................................................55400_1
Paper rewind operation ......................................................................................................................................55500
Paper splicing operation ....................................................................................................................................55600
Paper end operation ...........................................................................................................................................55700
Fogged paper operation .................................................................................................................................55800_1
Processor paper advance operation ................................................................................ 56100_1
Processor paper advance operation ................................................................................................................56100_1
Print conveyor unit operation ........................................................................................................................56200_1

5000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

50500_1
Start up/Closing down sequence
Start up/Closing down sequence

Startup sequence

• This section covers starting up flow.

1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.

2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.

• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X34) of the main relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.

3. The control PCBs turn ON.

4. The machine starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Turns ON SSR1 (CD heater), SSR2 (BF heater) and SSR3 (STB heater) of the main relay PCB.

5. The machine starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.

6. The machine starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.

5. Operation sequence
7. The BZ−PC I/O PCB or the printer control PCB turns on the power supply of the built-in personal
computer.

• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.

NOTE
• The BZ−PC I/O PCB is not installed on QSS-3301SD/3302SD.

8. The PC starts up and it starts up the QSS software.

• The PC checks the free space on drive C of the hard disk drive while it starts up the QSS software.
When the main software does not start normally
• No. 6900: Main control system error.
☞ 46900_1
When the free space on the drive C of hard disk drive is 4 GB or less
• No. 6506: Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).
☞ 46506

9. Check the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.

• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
When the backup data in the hard disk drive is not normal
• No. 6900: Main control system error.
☞ 46900_1

10. Check the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the machine checks the communication status between control PCBs.
• The checking order is shown below.
1. Processor control PCB
2. AFC/scanner control PCB
3. PU control PCB*1

50500_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50500_1
Start up/Closing down sequence

4. Printer control PCB

5. Laser control PCB
6. PC-scanner interface PCB
7. Colorimeter Control PCB*2
*1. The system checks the communication status of the PCBs only when these options are registered for Option Registration.
*2. The system does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the system checks the colorimeter control PCB when the
main software starts up.

NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the processor control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the
control PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status
checking.
When the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6903: Serial communication error.
☞ 46902_1
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and colorimeter control PCB became normal, backup data is written to
the colorimeter control PCB from the hard disk drive.
When the processor control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0008: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6901-0010: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the PU control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0100: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the printer control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0001: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the laser control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0200: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the PC-scanner interface PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-2000: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and the laser control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
laser control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the temperature in the laser unit will be controlled.

11. The process for starting the QSS software completes.

NOTE
• After the QSS software starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any key is
pressed.
• The system shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The system shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.

12. It displays the message The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted.

50500_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50500_1
Start up/Closing down sequence

13. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.

14. It displays Laser temperatures are being adjusted..

• It displays this only when the temperature adjustment for the laser is not completed at this point.

15. Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.

16. It displays Scanner temperature is being adjusted..

17. It displays LED Light Source Standby.

18. Temperature adjustment of the scanner is completed.

19. Temperature adjustment of the LED light source is completed.

20. The machine performs the light source update.

NOTE

5. Operation sequence
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the breaker to start up, No.1306: Update the light source. If film remains
in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.

21. After all temperature adjustments are completed, the message Would you like to proceed to the
operation mode? appears.

22. The YES key is pressed.

23. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality..

24. The machine displays an attention/error message if any.

25. The machine displays Start Up Checks mode.

50500_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50501_1
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification)
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification)

Startup sequence (DLS specification)

• This section covers starting up flow.

1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.

2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.

• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X34) of the main relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.

3. The control PCBs turn ON.

4. The machine starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Turns ON SSR1 (CD heater), SSR2 (BF heater) and SSR3 (STB heater) of the main relay PCB.

5. The machine starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.

6. The machine starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.

5. Operation sequence
7. The BZ−PC I/O PCB or the printer control PCB turns on the power supply of the built-in personal
computer.

• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.

NOTE
• The BZ−PC I/O PCB is not installed on QSS-3301SD/3302SD.

8. The PC starts up and it starts up the QSS software.

• The process for starting the QSS System Program is carried out.
When the main software does not start normally
• No. 6900: Main control system error.
☞ 46900_1

9. DLS System Management Software starts up.

• By the order from the QSS System Program, DLS System Management Software starts up.
When DLS System Management Software does not start up
• No. 6918: Failed to start the DLS.
☞ 46918

10. Check the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.
• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
When the backup data in the hard disk drive is not normal
• No. 6900: Main control system error.
☞ 46900_1

11. Check the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the machine checks the communication status between control PCBs.

50501_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50501_1
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification)

• The checking order is shown below.

1. Processor control PCB
2. AFC/scanner control PCB
3. Printer control PCB
4. Laser control PCB
5. PC-scanner interface PCB
6. Colorimeter Control PCB*1
*1. The machine does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the machine checks the colorimeter control PCB when
the main software starts up.

NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the processor control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the
control PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status
checking.
When the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6903: Serial communication error.
☞ 46902_1
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and colorimeter control PCB became normal, backup data is written to
the colorimeter control PCB from the hard disk drive.
When the processor control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0008: ARCNET communication error.

5. Operation sequence
☞ 46900_1
When the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0010: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the printer control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0001: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the laser control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0200: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
When the PC-scanner interface PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-2000: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900_1
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and the laser control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
laser control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the temperature in the laser unit will be controlled.

12. The process for starting QSS System Program completes.

• After starting up the QSS System Program, it controls the starting up of DLS System Management Software.
When DLS System Management Software does not start up
• No. 6918: Failed to start the DLS.
☞ 46918
NOTE
• After the QSS System Program starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any
key is pressed.
• The machine shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The machine shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.

50501_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50501_1
Start up/Close down sequence (DLS specification)

13. The process for starting DLS System Management Software completes.

14. The system displays the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode?.
NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.

15. Press the YES key.

NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.

16. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality..

17. The machine displays an attention/error message if any.

18. The machine displays Start Up Checks mode.

19. Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.

5. Operation sequence
20. Temperature adjustment of the scanner is completed.

21. Temperature adjustment of the LED light source is completed.

22. The machine performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the breaker to start up, No.1306: Update the light source. If film remains
in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.

23. The adjustment of processing solution temperature completes.

50501_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50510
PC startup sequence
PC startup sequence

Startup sequence for PC

This section covers the startup sequence of widely used PC (Windows 2000).
IMPORTANT
• The screens described in this section may be different from the actual ones or may not be displayed depending on the PC
type or connected devices.

1. Standby status

(1) Standby current is supplied from the ATX power supply to the mother board.

2. Power ON

(1) Power ON signal is input to the ATX power supply.

(2) Power LED turns on.
(3) Power is supplied to the mother board.
(4) Power is supplied to the built-in drives.

3. POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in starting up)

5. Operation sequence
(1) VGA BIOS test
• Video board test

G057479

(2) CPU, memory test

• Resetting CPU
• DRAM check

G057480

(3) IDE connected device detection

• Program execution in BIOS
• Keyboard connection check
• Reading CMOS memory setting
• Initializing the chipset and on-board I/O
• Detecting the floppy disk
• Detecting the IDE hard disk

50510 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

50510
PC startup sequence

G057481

(4) SCSI connected device detection

• Detecting the SCSI connected device

G057482

(5) System configurations

5. Operation sequence
• Displaying the system settings (settings for the software and hardware)

G057483

(6) PCI device listing

• Displaying the PCI devices

G057484

(7) Starting disk searching

(8) Selecting the device where the OS installed

50510 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

50510
PC startup sequence

4. Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to start the OS)

(1) Starting the bootstrap loader in the BIOS ROM (to initialize the program)
(2) Searching the MBR (master boot record, the first sector) in the hard disk
(3) NTLDR moves to the RAM
(4) Searching the system file to start the OS with NTLDR in the hard disk
(5) The system file to start the OS moves to the RAM by NTLDR.

5. Starting the OS
NOTE
• The files required to start the OS.

File name Explanation

[Link] Controls the installed OS, location to save the OS, the OS starting as a default and
waiting time for starting up the PC.
ntldr Displays the starting menu, reads the OS.
[Link] Collects the hardware information and writes it to the OS (registry).

(1) "Starting Windows" display

5. Operation sequence
White progress bar appears.

G057485

(2) "Starting up" display

Blue progress bar appears.

G057486

50510 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

50510
PC startup sequence

(3) "Please wait" display

G057487

5. Operation sequence

50510 4/4
 PC-laser interface PCB

J/P73
ARCNET communication figure (without option) J/P74
ATX mother board
Distributed by: [Link]

J/P71
PC-scanner interface
PCB
J/P72
J/P71

J/P72
ARCNET communication flow

Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB Processor control PCB

J/P214 J/P215
J/P216
J/P212 J/P213 J/P217 J/P518 J/P517
J/P1516 J/P1517

50520_1
50520_1

ARCNET
ARCNET Order of the ARCNET communication (without option)

1 Processor control PCB

2 PC-scanner interface PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB
4 Printer control PCB
5 Laser control PCB
ARCNET (Connector emission side)
ARCNET (Connector detection side)

AFC/scanner control
J/P20 PCB
J/P21

G077174
ARCNET communication

1/12
ARCNET communication

5. Operation sequence
 Processor control PCB ARCNET communication figure (with option)

J/P518 J/P517 PC-laser interface

J/P73 PCB

J/P74

ATX mother board

Printer control PCB
Distributed by: [Link]

PC-scanner interface
PCB
Laser control PCB
J/P71
J/P217
J/P216 J/P214
J/P212 J/P213 J/P215 J/P72

J/P1516 J/P1517
ARCNET-HUB PCB

J/P135
Order of the ARCNET communication (with option)
J/P136

ARCNET
1 Processor control PCB
2 PC-scanner interface PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB
4 PU control PCB
5 Printer control PCB

50520_1
50520_1

J/P133 6 Laser control PCB

ARCNET (Connector emission side)
J/P134 ARCNET (Connector detection side)

J/P137
AFC/scanner J/P138
control PCB J/P139
J/P20 J/P140
J/P21

J/P288 J/P300
PU control PCB
(option)

G077175
ARCNET communication

2/12
5. Operation sequence
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.

! Order of the ARCNET communication

No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 4 PU control PCB
2 PC-scanner interface PCB 5 Printer control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB 6 Laser control PCB

! ARCNET communication at the starting up

This figure of the ARCNET communication is an image.

Actual data communication path is different.

PC (PC-laser interface PCB)

6 Laser control PCB (ID##) 1 Processor control PCB (ID##)

5. Operation sequence
5 Printer control PCB (ID##) 2 PC-scanner interface PCB (ID##)

4 PU control PCB (ID##) 3 AFC/scanner control PCB (ID##)

G077141

1. All the PCBs which are involved in the ARCNET communication network have their own IDs.
2. At starting up the machine, the PC requires the processor control PCB to transmit data in order of the
ARCNET communication.
3. When the processor control PCB receives the data transmission requirement from the PC, it returns the
signal of the communication OK.

50520_1 3/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

4. After receiving the signal of the communication OK from the processor control PCB, the ARCNET
communication between the PC and the processor control PCB turns OK.
NOTE
• After turning the ARCNET communication between the PC and the processor control PCB to OK, Version of the Version
Check display appears and OK is displayed at Communication.
Version OK

S3059-01-SM03

5. After turning the ARCNET communication between the PC and the processor control PCB to OK, the
same communication check as the processor control PCB will be executed in order of PC-scanner
interface PCB and ARCNET communication.
6. The system starts up normally after completing the communication check of all the PCBs involving to

5. Operation sequence
the network.

! Diagnosis procedure at the ARCNET communication error

Example: When No. 6901-0200 Printer control PCB occurs

1. Check the communication status of all the control PCBs.
☞ 37530_1
2. Since the communication status of the Version Check display is - , or the control PCB, which version is
not displayed, might be damaged, check mainly the PCB first.
IMPORTANT
• If the communication status of the ARCNET is in poor condition, it may take several minutes before OK
appears at Communication or the version of each control PCB appears at Version, in the System Version
Check display.
In addition, when the ARCNET communication status is in poor condition, the machine may repeatedly cycle
through indications of Communication, OK, and -.
• When the option is not equipped, or depending on the model composition, the communication status may be
displayed by - in the System Version Check display.
• For diagnosis with System Version Check, refer to ☞ Example 1: Judgement of failed part System Version
Check.
Version Communication

S3059-01-SM03

50520_1 4/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

3. When No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. Printer control PCB occurs at turning on the
power supply, there is little possibility that the ARCNET communication paths of No. 6901-0001
ARCNET communication error. Processor control PCB, No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication
error. PC-scanner interface PCB and No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. AFC/scanner
control PCB have a problem. Therefore, exclude those parts from the diagnosis.
NOTE
• Carry out the diagnosis confirming the above display and the following table.
See illustration. ☞ ARCNET communication flow
$ : Make a diagnosis.
− : Do not make a diagnosis.

−/$ Parts for diagnosis (without option) −/$ Parts for diagnosis (with option)
− PC-laser interface PCB − PC-laser interface PCB
− PC-scanner interface PCB − PC-scanner interface PCB
− AFC/scanner control PCB − AFC/scanner control PCB
− Processor control PCB − Processor control PCB
$ Printer control PCB − ARCNET-HUB PCB
$ Laser control PCB $ PU control PCB
$ Printer control PCB
$ Laser control PCB

4. Check the connecting condition of ARCNET PCB, ARCNET cable after the parts for diagnosis are
decided.

5. Operation sequence
Check point
(1) Check that the cable is securely attached to the connector for ARCNET PCB.
(2) Check if the ARCNET cable takes off from the connector of the ARCNET PCB only for pulling it a little.
IMPORTANT
• When the ARCNET cable comes off only by pulling the cable lightly although its sheath is not shaved,
there is a possibility that the stopper of the connector on the ARCNET PCB is damaged is high, replace
the ARCNET PCB.

Stopper

G077187

(3) Check whether the ARCNET cable is shaved and it is thin.

IMPORTANT
• When the sheath of ARCNET cable is shaved and gets thin, replace the cable or cut it.

50520_1 5/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

For details about how to cut the cable, refer to ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.

ARCNET cable

Chips of shaved cable sheath

G077188

5. When you remove the ARCNET cable, check whether the red light has come out from the IN cable
(connected to the black connector) of ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Since it is necessary to check the power supply of the machine in the state where it turned ON in order to
confirm the connection state of the ARCNET PCB, ARCNET cable, be sure to work carefully enough to each
PCB.

Check point
(1) When two or more IN cables are on the PCB, and the red light is weak compared with the other IN cable or the red

5. Operation sequence
light has not shone, check whether the chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the connector of
the PCB for OUT.
Check defects of the ARCNET cable.
For details about how to cut the cable, refer to ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
For details about how to clean inside the connector, refer to ☞ How to use the aspirator.

IN cables

Red lights
G077181

50520_1 6/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

6. When you remove the ARCNET cable, check whether the red light has come out from the OUT
connector on the ARCNET PCB.

Check point
(1) When there are two or more OUT connectors on the PCB, compare and check the strength of light of OUT
connector on other PCB.
IN cables

Red lights (OUT connectors)

G077180

(2) When the red light is weak compared with the other connector or the red light has not shone, check whether the
chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the connector.
IMPORTANT
• Check whether the chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the IN connector at the
same time.
For details about how to clean inside the connector, refer to ☞ How to use the aspirator.

5. Operation sequence
Connector

Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath

G077182

7. Check whether +5 V is supplied to each ARCNET PCB from each power supply PCB as a factor which
ARCNET communication error occurs in addition to the above.
NOTE
• When +5 V is not supplied to the ARCNET PCB, the red light does not come from the OUT connector on the ARCNET
PCB.
8. After confirming the check points mentioned above, when normal, replace each PCB.
! Diagnosis appendix
Example 1: Judgement of failed part System Version Check
1. If the communication status of the ARCNET is in poor condition, - may appear at Communication, or
version of some control PCBs may not appear at Version, in the System Version Check display. (The

50520_1 7/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

colorimeter unit, the NMC1 and the NMC2 may not be inclusive if they are not for the ARCNET
communication.)
Version Communication

→-

S3059-01-SM03

2. In the case above, either the IN connector or the OUT connector of each control PCB is not connected
securely.
Loose connection of either the IN or the OUT connector of each control PCB is highly suspected.
In such cases, specify which control PCB is causing trouble and disconnect its IN and OUT connectors. This may be helpful to
stabilize the ARCNET communication, and Communication and Version of control PCBs other than those of the control PCB

5. Operation sequence
causing trouble may appear.
IMPORTANT
• Depending on the communication status of the ARCNET, it is sometimes required to restart the PC to bring up
the Version and Communication in the System Version Check display, even when the physical ARCNET
communication status is in normal condition.

IN connector
Red light (OUT connector)

G077180

3. In the case of Step 2 as above, check the connection of the cable and the control PCB connector that is
causing trouble.
Cleaning inside the connectors on the ARCNET PCB, cutting the ARCNET cable or replacing the ARCNET cable or
ARCNET control PCB solves the trouble.
For details about how to cut the cable, refer to ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
For details about how to clean inside the connector, refer to ☞ How to use the aspirator.
IMPORTANT
• If the problem is caused by the printer control PCB, or the ARCNET-HUB PCB, above diagnosis may not be
applicable because these PCBs are equipped with HUB function.

Example 2: Judgment of failure place (when either laser control PCB or printer control PCB is out of order)
NOTE
• It is an explanation for the case when the message No. 6901-0200 Printer control PCB is displayed.
1. Replace connector (2) with connector (1) on the printer control PCB.

50520_1 8/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

2. If replacing the connector of the printer control PCB results in recurrence of No. 6901-0001 ARCNET
communication error. Processor control PCB, it is highly probable that the cause of failure lies in the
printer control PCB.

Processor control PCB

Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB

ARCNET
(1) (2) G077185

Example 3: Judgment of failure place with the ARCNET cable

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• The method of diagnosis in case there is an empty connector of ARCNET PCB, such as ARCNET-HUB PCB, is explained.
• To perform the diagnosis using the ARCNET cable, it is necessary to prepare the ARCNET cable in advance.
1. Disconnect the cable connected to the laser control PCB, and replace it with the ARCNET cable from
the prepared ARCNET-HUB PCB.

50520_1 9/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

2. If "ARCNET communication error" does not occur as a result of replacing the ARCNET cable, it is highly
probable that the cause of failure lies in the printer control PCB.

Processor control PCB

Laser control PCB Printer control PCB

ARCNET

5. Operation sequence
ARCNET-HUB PCB

Prepared ARCNET cable

G077186

50520_1 10/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

How to use the fiber cutter

! How to use the fiber cutter

1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

2. Cut the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Cut the ARCNET cable at 15 mm from the end.
• To keep the quality of cutting surface, cut the ARCNET cable only once with each hole of the fiber cutter.
Cutting holes

Before cutting (abnormal)

5. Operation sequence
After cutting (normal)

G081991

IMPORTANT
• If the end of ARCNET cable is in the following condition, cut it.

No. Condition of ARCNET cable Illustration

1 The cable surface is sticky. -
2 The cable surface is thick and soft.
NOTE
• If the cable surface is thick and soft, it may not be inserted into the
hole of fiber cutter.
In this case, cut the ARCNET cable using a nipper or the like, and
then cut the end of the cable with the fiber cutter.

3 The cable surface is shaved.

3. Check the condition of the end of ARCNET cable and that no dust is attached on it.
4. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
☞ How to use the aspirator
5. Connect the ARCNET cable.

50520_1 11/12
Distributed by: [Link]

50520_1
ARCNET communication

How to use the aspirator

! How to use the aspirator

1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

2. Attach the front end of aspirator to the connector on ARCNET PCB to suck out the dust.
Dust

Front end of aspirator

5. Operation sequence
Aspirator
G081992

3. Connect the ARCNET cable.

50520_1 12/12
 VIDEO BOARD ATX mother board

PC-laser
Mirror interface
AOM LVDS PCB/ARCN
Distributed by: [Link]

ET PCB Media drive

Data flow in printing

PC-scanner
R laser R-AOM interface
driver
PCB/ARCN
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM ET PCB
driver HDD
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver Printer control PCB Processor control PCB
Laser control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror ARCNET

50700_1
50700_1

Lens ARCNET
Synchronous sensor

AFC/scanner
Print data

control PCB
Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

Data coming from the media drive

G077145

1/2
Data flow chart

Data flow chart

5. Operation sequence
Distributed by: [Link]

50700_1
Data flow chart

! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.

1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.

4. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

5. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50700_1 2/2
 VIDEO BOARD
ATX mother board

PC-laser
Mirror interface
AOM PCB/ARCN
Distributed by: [Link]

LVDS Media drive

ET PCB

PC-scanner
R laser R-AOM interface
driver
Data flow in data saving

PCB/ARCN
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM ET PCB
driver HDD
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver Printer control PCB Processor control PCB
Laser control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror
ARCNET

50710_1
50710_1

Lens ARCNET
Synchronous sensor

AFC/scanner
control PCB
Saving Data
Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

G077148

1/2
Data flow chart

5. Operation sequence
Distributed by: [Link]

50710_1
Data flow chart

! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Pre-scanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to
be displayed on the monitor.

3. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is
written to each media.

5. Operation sequence

50710_1 2/2
 ARCNET-HUB PCB

ATX mother board

Distributed by: [Link]

VIDEO BOARD

PU PCB
Data flow to the CAU

PC-laser
interface
PCB/ARCN
ET PCB
LVDS

PC-scanner
interface
PCB/ARCN
LVDS ET PCB
HDD CAU HDD

50730_1
50730_1

Processor control PCB

Printer control PCB
Laser control PCB
ARCNET

R laser R-AOM
driver ARCNET
Prescanning data

Bl
as
er G-AOM ARCNET
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver

AFC/scanner
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)

control PCB
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)

G077153

1/3
Data flow chart

5. Operation sequence
Distributed by: [Link]

50730_1
Data flow chart

! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)
NOTE
• The operations of data writing to the CAUs (TYPE1: 12 bit, TYPE2: 8 bit) are the same.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on

5. Operation sequence
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Prescanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is saved to the CAU via
the HDD.

4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is saved
to the HDD of CAU.

IMPORTANT
• In the case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In the case
of reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.
• In the case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In the case of reading from
the CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.

NOTE
• In the case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)

1. The image data is output to the laser control PCB via standard PC laser interface PCB from the HDD
of the CAU. Image data is outputted to the laser control PCB via HDD of CAU, standard HDD, and
the PC-laser interface PCB.

50730_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50730_1
Data flow chart

2. Outputs the image data to the laser unit.

3. The laser unit exposes the paper.

5. Operation sequence

50730_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

50800_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS

specification]

Input

Editing

Output

Network Order (Option by Kodak) Scanner Media

PC LAN PCI-scanner Media drive

interface PCB

5. Operation sequence
System Management
QSS System Program Software

Editing

HDD (system)
KIAS (Z:) WIP (V:) PrintBuf (Y:)

HDD (archive)

Archive (U:)

PC-laser interface
PCB

Printer Laser control PCB

QSS System Program

G078423

50800_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

50800_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

! Data flow around the DLS System Management Software is described.

NOTE
• For details about the data flow of scanner and printer, refer to the descriptions below.
• Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [DLS specification]
☞ 50810_1
• Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]
☞ 50820_1

1. The image data is read into WIP (V:) from the input devices such as scanner or media.
NOTE
• For the Network Order (Option by Kodak), the image data input to KIAS (Z:) from the network device is transferred to
WIP (V:).

2. The image is edited in the Preview display.

NOTE
• The sequence of editing operations such as color and density correction, image rotation, cropping, front print, index print
and template composition is performed all in the System Management Software.

3. By pressing Start Job, the edited image data is saved in WIP (V:) and transferred to PrintBuf (Y:).

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• Scaling of image and allocation of white border are performed by System Management Software.

4. The image data is transferred from PrintBuf (Y:) to each output device such as printer, media and
archive.

50800_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

50810_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

Data flow in printing [DLS specification]

Print data

Actual scanning data

Media drive
Prescanning data
ATX mother board

Data coming from the media drive

Processor control PCB

PCB/ARCN
PCB/ARCN

PC-scanner
interface
interface
PC-laser

ET PCB
ET PCB

Printer control PCB

AFC/scanner

5. Operation sequence
control PCB
Laser control PCB

Polygon mirror

Lens
AOM

Synchronous sensor
Mirror

G078429

50810_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

50810_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

! Input is film scanning operation or the image data and output is printing operation.

1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
analysis.
Actual scan data is used for index print and preview.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.

4. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

5. Operation sequence
5. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50810_1 2/2
 ATX mother board

Mirror PC-laser
interface
Distributed by: [Link]

AOM
PCB/ARCN
ET PCB Media drive

PC-scanner
interface
PCB/ARCN
ET PCB

Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

Polygon mirror

50820_1
50820_1

Lens
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]

Synchronous
sensor

AFC/scanner
control PCB
Saving Data
Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

G078430
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

1/2
5. Operation sequence
Distributed by: [Link]

50820_1
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
analysis.
Actual scan data is used for index print and preview.

2. Processing the image with PC. (Standard)

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

3. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the image data is
written to each media.

5. Operation sequence

50820_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

51010
Film carrier section
Film carrier section

Film feed operation (135)

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, pre-scanned, scanned and ejected.

! Flow chart

1. The film is inserted.

2. The film has passed the loading sensor.

• Film feed motor: ON

Loading sensor

Rewinding unit Film

G068353

3. Reading of the DX code starts.

5. Operation sequence
DX sensor

G068353

4. The film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the film though the specified length advances with the loading
sensor turned DARK:
• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
When the ready sensor does not detect the film though the specified length advances after loading
sensor turned LIGHT with the film undetected by the ready sensor:
• Film feed motor: reverse
• The film is ejected, because the minimum required length is not detected.

Ready sensor

G068353

51010 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51010
Film carrier section

5. The film is fed.

When the 135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function is set to ON in the Operator
Selections:
• Go to Step 6.
When the 135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function is set to OFF in the Operator
Selections:
• Go to Step 8.

6. The film is fed for a specified length from the ready sensor.
• Film feed motor: OFF
When the DX code sensor detects the film's front end (end with the small frame number):
• No. 1435
Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:
• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

5. Operation sequence
Rewinding sensor Perforation sensor

G068353

7. The film is fed.

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)

8. The film is fed just before the scanning position.

• Film feed motor: OFF

Scanning position
G068353

9. Pre-scanning starts.
• LED light source: ON
• Film feed motor: ON

10. The film has passed the perforation sensor.

When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

51010 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51010
Film carrier section

Rewinding sensor Perforation sensor

G068353

11. The front end of the film enters the rewinding unit.

When the rewinding sensor detects film jam:

• No. 6405
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

12. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
NOTE
• This error message appears when the ready sensor detected the film and a specified length of film was fed, but the ready

5. Operation sequence
sensor did not turn LIGHT.

Rewinding sensor Ready sensor

G068353

13. The rear end of the film passes the scanning position.

Scanning position

G068353

14. The pre-scanning is completed.

• Film feed motor: OFF
When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

15. Scanning starts.

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)

51010 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51010
Film carrier section

When LED light source is OFF

• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.

Perforation sensor

G068353

16. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

5. Operation sequence
Ready sensor

G068353

17. The rear end of the film has passed the loading sensor.

When the loading sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6403
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Loading sensor

G068353

51010 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51010
Film carrier section

18. The final frame of the film has passed the scanning position.

Scanning position

G068353

19. Scanning is completed.

20. The film is ejected.

• Film feed motor: OFF
When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

5. Operation sequence

51010 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51110
Film carrier section

Film feed operation (240)

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, scanned and ejected.

! Flow chart

1. A film cartridge is set.

• Cartridge limit switches 1 and 2: ON
When the IPI sensor recognizes that the film is undeveloped
• No. 1403
Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.

2. The light lock door is opened.

• Light lock door motor: ON/OFF

Rewinding unit

5. Operation sequence
Light lock door

G068354

3. The film is rewound by 1.5 revolution (spool key spindle).

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)
• Spool key motor: ON (reverse)

4. The film front end is fed.

• Film feed motor: ON (forward)
• Spool key motor: ON (forward)

5. The front end of the film has passed the loading sensor.

When the loading sensor does not detect the film front end:
• Operation goes back to Step 3 and the film is rewound (retry).
When the loading sensor cannot detect the front end of the film after retrying:
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Film

Loading sensor

G068354

51110 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51110
Film carrier section

6. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
• Spool key motor: OFF
When the ready sensor does not detect the film front end:
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

DX sensor

Ready sensor

G068354

7. DX sensor starts reading the data other than the magnetic data.
NOTE
• The data other than the magnetic data are the DX code, frame numbers and FID.

8. The front end of the film passes the scanning position.

5. Operation sequence
Scanning position

G068354

9. Pre-scanning starts.
• LED light source: ON
• Film feed motor: ON (forward)

10. Reading of the the magnetic data starts.

11. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Perforation sensor

Rewinding sensor

G068354

51110 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51110
Film carrier section

12. Rewinding of the film front end starts.

When the rewinding sensor detects film jam:

• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

13. The turn round perforation has passed the ready sensor.

14. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

• Film feed motor: OFF

15. Check the read magnetic data.

When the magnetic data has not been read:

• No. 1404
The IX frame data is incomplete.
• If scanning is selected again, the magnetic data is read again after rewinding of the film.

Scanning position

5. Operation sequence
G068354

16. Pre-scanning is completed.

• Film feed motor: OFF
When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

17. Scanning starts.

• Spool key motor: ON (reverse)
• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)
When LED light source is OFF
• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.
When the perforation sensor cannot detect film rewinding or rotation detection by VEI sensor does not
change
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Scanning position

G068354

51110 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51110
Film carrier section

18. The final frame of the film passes the scanning position.

Scanning position

G068354

19. Scanning is completed.

• Film feed motor: OFF

20. The film is fed.

• Film feed motor: ON (forward)
When the magnetic data is not written:
• Go to Step 26.

21. The front end of the film passes the perforation sensor.

When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Perforation sensor

G068354

22. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

• Film feed motor: OFF

Scanning position
Magnetic head

G068354

23. Magnetic data writing starts.

NOTE
• It waits until the writing data has been sent from the personal computer.

51110 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51110
Film carrier section

24. The leading edge of the film passes the magnetic head.

Magnetic head

G068354

25. Writing of the magnetic data is completed.

• Film feed motor: OFF

26. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

Ready sensor

G068354

When the ready sensor does not detect the film:

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6404
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

27. A specified length of the film is rewound.

• Film feed motor: OFF
• Spool key motor: ON

28. The VEI of the cartridge is set to the "Processed".

• Spool key motor: ON/OFF
When 3 revolutions of the spool key spindle does not make VEI set position detectable
• No. 6407
Spool Key operation error.

29. The light lock door is closed.

• Light lock door motor: ON

Light lock door

G068354

30. Remove the cartridge.

When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

51110 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

51310
Film carrier section

Film feed operation (120)

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, pre-scanned, scanned and ejected.

! Flow chart

1. The film is inserted.

2. The front end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
• Film feed motor: ON

Rewinding unit

Loading sensor

G050826

3. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

5. Operation sequence
When the ready sensor does not detect the film:
• No. 6406
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
When the loading sensor turns LIGHT before the specified length of the film advances after the ready
sensor detected the film:
• Film feed motor: reverse
• The film is ejected, because the minimum required length is not detected.

Ready sensor

G050827

4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
• LED light source: ON

Scanning position

G050854

51310 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51310
Film carrier section

5. Pre-scanning starts.

6. The film sensor detects film advance.

When the film sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6406
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Film sensor

G050828

7. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6406

5. Operation sequence
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Ready sensor

G050829

8. The rear end of the film passes the scanning position.

• Film feed motor: OFF

Scanning position

G050830

9. Pre-scanning is completed.

When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

10. Scanning starts.

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)

51310 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51310
Film carrier section

When LED light source is OFF

• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.

Scanning position

G050831

11. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
• No. 6406
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

5. Operation sequence
Ready sensor

G050832

12. The rear end of the film has passed the loading sensor.

When the loading sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6406
120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Loading sensor

G069968

13. The front end of the film passes the scanning position.
• Film feed motor: OFF

51310 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51310
Film carrier section

Scanning position

G050833

14. Scanning is completed.

15. The film is fed at a high speed.

• Film feed motor: ON (high speed)

16. Film is ejected.

• Film feed motor: OFF
When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

5. Operation sequence

51310 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51410
Film carrier section

Film feed operation (110)

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, pre-scanned, scanned and ejected.

! Flow chart

1. The film is inserted.

2. The front end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
• Film feed motor: ON

Rewinding unit

Loading sensor

G050837

3. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.

5. Operation sequence
When the ready sensor does not detect the film:
• No. 6405
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
When the loading sensor turns LIGHT before the specified length of the film advances after the ready
sensor detected the film:
• Film feed motor: reverse
• The film is ejected, because the minimum required length is not detected.

Ready sensor

G050838

4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
• LED light source: ON

Scanning position

G050855

51410 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51410
Film carrier section

5. Pre-scanning starts.

6. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.

When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6405
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Perforation sensor

G050839

7. The rear end of the film passes the scanning position.

• Film feed motor: OFF

5. Operation sequence
Scanning position

G050856

8. Pre-scanning is completed.

When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

9. Scanning starts.
• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)
When LED light source is OFF
• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.

Scanning position

G050840

51410 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51410
Film carrier section

When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6405
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

10. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
When the ready sensor does not detect the film:
• No. 6405
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Ready sensor

G050841

11. The rear end of the film has passed the loading sensor.

When the loading sensor does not detect the film:

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6405
110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Loading sensor

G069969

12. The front end of the film passes the scanning position.
• Film feed motor: OFF

Scanning position

G050842

13. Scanning is completed.

14. The film is fed at a high speed.

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)

51410 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51410
Film carrier section

15. Film is ejected.

• Film feed motor: OFF
When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

5. Operation sequence

51410 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51510
Film carrier section

Film feed operation (MMC)

This section explains the process of the mount insertion cover being opened and the mount being ejected.
NOTE
• When the mount insertion cover is not open, it opens after returning the carrier to its home position.

! Flow chart

1. The mount carrier moves to the left. (The mount insertion cover is closed.)
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)

Scanning position
Moves to the left.

Detection plate Mount carrier home sensor

G052535

5. Operation sequence
When the mount carrier home sensor is not LIGHT: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.

2. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)

Moves to the right.

Mount carrier home sensor

Detection plate
G052534

When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.

3. The mount insertion cover is open.

When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.

4. After inserting the mount, close the mount insertion cover.

• Mount insertion cover sensor: DARK
• Mount sensor: DARK

51510 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51510
Film carrier section

5. The mount carrier is moved to the position of the focus adjustment.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)

Mount

Mount insertion cover sensor

G052536

6. The auto focus is adjusted.

• AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:
• No. 6423
Auto focus error.

5. Operation sequence
Moves up and down.

AF sensors
G052537

7. Pre-scanning starts.
• LED light source: ON
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)

Moves to the left.

G052696

8. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops at the scanning start position.
• Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

9. Scanning starts.
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)

51510 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51510
Film carrier section

When LED light source is OFF

• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.

Moves to the right.

Scanning start position

G052539

10. Scanning is completed.

• Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

5. Operation sequence
Scanning start position
G052540

11. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)
When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.

Moves to the right.

Mount insertion cover sensor

Mount carrier home sensor
G052542

12. The mount insertion cover is open.

When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.

51510 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51510
Film carrier section

13. The mount is ejected.

5. Operation sequence

51510 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

Film advance operation (AMC)

This section explains the process of the mount insertion and the mount ejection.
NOTE
• If the mount carrier is not in the home position, move it to the home position before the operation.

! Flow chart

1. The loading stocker is set to the AMC.

When the mount sensor (inlet) does not turn DARK after pressing the YES/START key:
• No. 1429
Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
Loading stocker

Mount sensor (inlet)

Mount insertion motor

Mount

5. Operation sequence
Loading sensor 1

Loading sensor 2
G058785

2. Move the mount from the loading stocker to the mount carrier.
• Mount loading motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
If mount sensor 1 does not allow light to penetrate or mount sensor 2 does not block light (mount
ejector pin does not move into loading position) during mount loading:
• No. 6435
Mount insertion operation error.
When the mount sensor is not DARK:
• No. 6433
Mount detection error.
When the mount sensor turns DARK after the mount sensor (inlet) turned DARK starting with LIGHT:
• Dummy mount is detected.
After the dummy mounts are ejected, the mount sensor get back to the home position to start processing the following
order.
When the mount sensor stays LIGHT after the mount sensor (inlet) started with LIGHT
• The loading stocker is empty.
It gets back to the home position and stops processing.

51550 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

Loading stocker
Mount sensor

Mount Mount insertion motor

Loading sensor 1

Mount loading pin Loading sensor 2

Mount carrier
G058793

3. Move the mount loading pin to the home position.

• Mount loading motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When the loading sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT or the loading sensor 1 does not turn DARK when the
mount loading pin is moving to the home position after the mount is loaded (the mount loading pin
does not move to the home position):
• No. 6435

5. Operation sequence
Mount insertion operation error.
Loading stocker
Mount sensor

Mount Mount insertion motor

Mount loading pin

Loading sensor 1
Mount carrier Loading sensor 2
G058792

4. Auto focus adjustment

• AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:
• No. 6431
Auto focus error.

51550 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

Mount

AF motor
AF sensors

Moves up and down.

G058786

5. Pre-scanning starts.
• LED light source: ON
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position at high speed.
• The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting pre-scanning.

• The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position

at high speed.

Scanning position

Mount

G057568

• The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting

pre-scanning. Mount carrier slide motor

G058787

51550 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

6. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops after the scanning position.
• Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF

Mount carrier slide motor

Mount

Scanning position
G058788

7. Scanning starts.

5. Operation sequence
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)

IMPORTANT
• The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position at high speed.
• The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting scanning.
When LED light source is OFF
• LED light source: ON
When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.
• The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position
at high speed.
Scanning position

Mount

G057565

51550 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

• The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting

scanning.

G057567

8. Scanning is completed.
• Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
• LED light source :OFF

Mount carrier slide motor

5. Operation sequence
Mount

G057566

9. The mount carrier moves to the ejection side at high speed.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)

Mount carrier slide motor

Mount

G058788

10. The mount moves to the ejection position.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)
• Mount ejection solenoid: ON/OFF

51550 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

When the mount sensor does not turn LIGHT:

• No. 6433
Mount detection error.
When the ejection sensor does not turn DARK:
• No. 6437
Mount eject operation error.

Ejection position
Mount ejection solenoid
Mount carrier slide motor

Mount

Mount sensor

Ejection sensor
Mount ejection roller
G058789

11. The mount moves to the ejection stocker.

5. Operation sequence
• Mount elevator motor: ON/OFF
When the mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK -> LIGHT -> DARK:
• No. 6436
Mount elevator operation error.
When the ejection sensor does not turn LIGHT:
• No. 6437
Mount eject operation error.

Mount elevator motor

Ejection stocker

Mount

Ejection sensor

Mount elevator sensor

G058790

12. The mount is ejected.

13. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)/OFF

51550 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

51550
Film carrier section

When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK:

• No. 6432
Mount Unit operation error.

Mount carrier slide motor

Mount

Mount carrier home sensor

Mount carrier

G058791

14. The following mount is processed.

5. Operation sequence
• Back to Step 2.

51550 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

55000_1
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram

Paper path diagram

The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.

Paper cutter unit

Paper advance unit

Paper supply unit A Arm unit 1

View from the arrow

Exposure advance unit

Arm unit 2
Correction value printing
unit

5. Operation sequence
Turn unit

Paper magazine B Paper magazine A

Paper supply unit B

G074568

The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor.

Print conveyor unit

No. 1 upper guide

Dryer rack

Processing tanks and

processing racks

G078452

55000_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

55100
Paper advance operation
Paper advance operation

Paper loading operation

This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine uses only paper magazine A.

Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper end sensor B (SE41)

Paper loading sensor (SE14)

Paper cutter

Paper magazine B
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)

Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42)

Paper end sensor A (SE13)

5. Operation sequence
G074569

Paper loading starts.

Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)

Did paper end sensor A or B detect the paper leading end? NO Error No. 6012-01
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error No. 6013-01
YES Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

Paper advance motor 1: OFF

NO Error No. 6012-02

Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error No. 6013-02
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
YES

Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

Paper advance motor 1: OFF

The paper leading end is advanced to just before the cut

position.

After detecting the paper by the paper loading sensor, a specified

time has passed:
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF
Paper advance motor 1: OFF

The loading is completed.

55100 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

55200
Paper advance operation

Paper advance operation (before exposure)

This section explains the paper advance operation, the paper cut operation and the paper transfer operation to the exposure advance section.

Paper hold position (advance length: 116.9 mm or less)

Paper hold position (advance length: 117 mm or more)
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper cutter Paper transfer position

Papers Zigzag correction sensors (left and

right) (SE19 and 20)

Papers
Exposure advance unit
Arm unit 1

Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Exposure advance motor 1
(PM24)
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Cut motor (M5) Pressure change motor 1 (PM25)

5. Operation sequence
G074570

Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading

end is before the cut position).

Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)

A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped

where the paper end comes to the hold position.
NOTE
• The hold position differs between the paper advance
length of 116.9 mm or less and that of 117 mm or more.

Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Paper advance motor 2: OFF

The paper is held with arm unit 1.

Paper hold motor: ON/OFF

55200 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

55200
Paper advance operation

According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced

to the paper cut position.

Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF

Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)/OFF
Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)/OFF
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)/OFF
NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply
motor A or B operate simultaneously.

The paper is cut.

Cut motor: ON/OFF

Rewind a specified length of paper in the magazine so that

the paper leading end is before the cut position.

5. Operation sequence
Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)/OFF
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)/OFF

The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the

exposure advance section.

Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF

Arm unit 1 is moved for the input correction value in Arm

Unit Zigzagging Correction of Printer Mechanical
Adjustment.

Paper supply arm motors (left) or (right): ON/OFF

Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error No. 6135-01
unit 1? Arm Unit operation error.1

YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF

55200 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

55200
Paper advance operation

With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance section, the hold of the arm unit is released.

Pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF

Paper hold motor: ON/OFF

Exposure starts.
☞ 55300

Is the paper advance length 320.1 mm or less? NO Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
paper enters to the exposure advance unit.

YES

Arm unit 1 is moved for the Arm Unit Zigzagging

Correction.

5. Operation sequence
Paper supply arm motors (left or right): ON (reverse)/OFF
NOTE
• The initial operation does not include this operation.

Arm unit 1 is moved to the paper hold position.

Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (reverse)

Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error No. 6135-02
LIGHT? Arm Unit operation error.

YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF

After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,

a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.

Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF

End

55200 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure operation

The section explains the exposure operation.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)

Roller 1
Roller 3

Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

Paper
Arm unit 1 Exposure start sensor (SE22)

Exposure end sensor (SE24)

Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure
change motor 2 (PM27)
G074571

When the paper is loading, the drive of roller 2 and 3 are

5. Operation sequence
started.

Exposure advance motor 2: ON

Roller 1: Released pressure
Roller 2: Released pressure
Roller 3: Released pressure→Pressured
Paper leading end position: Before the paper cutter blade

The paper advance operation is carried out and the paper

exposure advancing is started with transferring the paper to
the exposure advance section.

Roller 1 is pressured.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF

Roller 1: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure
Roller 3: Pressured
Paper leading end position: The position of a few millimeter
across roller 1

The hold of arm unit 1 is released.

Paper hold motor: ON/OFF

55300 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)

Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)

Roller 1
Roller 3

Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

Paper
Arm unit 1 Exposure start sensor (SE22)

Exposure end sensor (SE24)

Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure
change motor 2 (PM27)
G074571

Is there a paper processed before?

5. Operation sequence
NO YES

The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.

Exposure advance motor 1: ON

Paper leading end position: Around before the exposure start
sensor

NO Error No. 6017-03

Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

YES
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
Is the image to be exposed prepared?

YES NO

The drive of roller is stopped.

Exposure advance motor 1: OFF

Paper leading end position: Around before roller 2

The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.

Exposure advance motor 1: ON

55300 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)

Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)

Roller 1
Roller 3

Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

Paper
Arm unit 1 Exposure start sensor (SE22)

Exposure end sensor (SE24)

Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure
change motor 2 (PM27)
G074571

Roller 2 is pressed and the pressure of roller 3 is released.

5. Operation sequence
Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF
Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 3: Pressured→Released pressure
Paper leading end position: Around before roller 2

The pressure of roller 1 is released.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF

Roller 1: Pressured→Released pressure
Roller 2: Pressured
Roller 3: Released pressure
Paper leading end position: Around before the exposure
position

The drive of roller is stopped.

Exposure advance motor 1: OFF

Exposure starts.

Roller 3 is pressured.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF

Roller 1: Released pressure
Roller 2: Pressured
Roller 3: Released pressure→Pressured
Paper leading end position: Around before roller 3

55300 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)

Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)

Roller 1
Roller 3

Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

Paper
Arm unit 1 Exposure start sensor (SE22)

Exposure end sensor (SE24)

Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure
change motor 2 (PM27)
G074571

NO Error No. 6017-05

Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

5. Operation sequence
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF

The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end

comes around the position before the exposure start sensor.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF

Roller 2: Pressured→Released pressure

Process of the next paper

Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1

Process of the current paper

NO Error No. 6017-06

Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF

After the paper is rewound, rollers 2, 3 stops their driving

and roller 3 is released its pressure.

Exposure advance motor 2: OFF

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF
Roller 3: Pressured→Released pressure

End

55300 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

55400_1
Paper advance operation

Paper advance operation

This explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.

Inserting position

Arm

Arm unit 2 Arm

Paper Advance Section

Standby position

Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit

5. Operation sequence
Exposure Advance Section
G074572

Inserting
position

Arm

Arm unit 2 Arm

Paper Advance Section

Standby
position Exposure Advance Section

Exposure position Advance roller

Receiving
position

Paper
Turn unit
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor

Paper advance pressure change Paper advance motor 3 (PM28)

motor (PM29)
G078385

55400_1 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

55400_1
Paper advance operation

The exposure advance operation is carried out, and the

paper advance operation is started with transferring the
paper to the paper advance section.

After the exposure finishes, the advance roller is pressed.

Paper advance pressure change motor: ON/OFF

Advance rollers: pressure release → pressure
Paper rear end position: Around the exposure position

After the advance roller is pressed, the advance rollover

starts driving.

Paper advance motor 3: ON

Paper rear end position: Around before the exposure end sensor

NO Error No.6017-16
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

YES Exposure advance motor 2: OFF

Paper advance motor 3: OFF

5. Operation sequence
After a specified length of paper is advanced, the paper is
stopped at the paper rear end receiving position.

Paper advance motor 3: OFF

Paper rear end position: Around the turn unit inlet
NOTE
• For details about the stopping position, refer to the Paper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010_1

55400_1 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

55400_1
Paper advance operation

Inserting position

Arm

Arm unit 2
Arm
Paper Advance Section
Standby
position

Receiving
position Exposure position Advance roller

Paper
Turn unit

Exposure Advance Section Turn sensor

Paper advance motor 3 (PM28)

5. Operation sequence
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G078385

The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the
receiving position from the standby position.

Turn motor: ON/OFF

Paper advance arm motor: ON/OFF
NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010_1

The advance roller starts driving.

Paper advance motor 3: ON

A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller

stops driving and the pressure of advance roller is released.

Paper advance motor 3: OFF

Advance rollers: pressure → pressure release
Paper leading end: Position where a specified length of paper is advanced from the roller of the arm

Arm unit 2 starts going up.

Paper advance arm motor: ON

55400_1 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

55400_1
Paper advance operation

Arm
Arm
Inserting
position
Arm unit 2

Paper

Paper Advance Section

Standby Arm sensor
position

Exposure position
Receiving
position

Turn unit

Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor

Paper advance arm motor (PM31)

5. Operation sequence
Turn motor (PM32)

G074572

After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn
unit turns 90 degrees.

Turn motor: ON/OFF

Arm unit stops going up at the inserting position.

Paper advance arm motor: OFF

NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010_1

Arm unit 2 starts going down.

Paper advance arm motor: ON

55400_1 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

55400_1
Paper advance operation

Inserting
position

Arm
Arm unit 2
Paper
Arm

Standby Paper Advance Section

position

Exposure position Arm sensor

Receiving
position

Turn unit

Exposure Advance
Section

5. Operation sequence
Paper advance arm motor (PM31)
G078385

Arm unit 2 stops going down at the standby position.

Paper advance arm motor: OFF

End

55400_1 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

55500
Paper advance operation

Paper rewind operation

This section explains the paper rewinding operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine is only operation of paper A.
Paper rewind conditions
• →Paper was rewound.
• After printing was finished and then 30 seconds passed, the paper was automatically rewound.
• The paper end sensor is DARK when turning on the power supply.
• The error of paper jam occurred on the printer and processor.
• The magazine to be used is changed when the paper is being loaded from the magazine.
• When the paper is end
• ☞ 55700
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper cutter

5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine B Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)

Paper magazine A

Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper end sensor A (SE13)

G074569

Paper rewinding is started.

Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)

Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)

Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error No. 6014-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
Error No. 6015-01
YES Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B

Paper advance motor 1: OFF

Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

NO Error No. 6014-02

Did paper end sensor A or B turn LIGHT?
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
Error No. 6015-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
YES

The paper is rewound into the magazine. Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

After paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT, a specified time has passed:
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF
Paper advance motor 1: OFF

Rewinding is completed.

55500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

55600
Paper advance operation

Paper splicing operation

This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition

Splice hole
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Splice section
Paper cutters

Paper
advance
direction

Y X

Cut prohibitive area (263.1 mm) Exposure possible area

5. Operation sequence
G074573
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut-forbidden area and the cutter

! Operation outline

! Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is the print advance length or more (X + Y ≥ Print advance length)

1. Load the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Then load the splice section and cut it, and then feed out the splice section.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)

! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)

X + Y ≥ 82.5 mm
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out the unexposed paper to the processor.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
X + Y < 82.5 mm
1. Load the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)

55600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

55700
Paper advance operation

Paper end operation

This section explains the paper end processing operation in printing.

• The paper is rewound into the magazine in paper end.
• Remove the rewound paper when replacing with the new one.
• Except in printing, the paper end processing is also carried out in the following timing.
Timing which performs the paper end processing
• Printing was started, and the paper end was detected when the paper leading end was advanced.
• The paper end was detected in processing of the fogged paper.
• When the loading operation was carried out on the Various Adjustment mode (Focus Adjustment, Printer Mechanical Adjustment,
etc.), the paper end was detected.
IMPORTANT
• For paper magazine A of the single or dual paper magazine machine, the paper end length is about min. 184 mm to
max. 540 mm.
(184 + Paper advance length → maximum of 184 + 356 = 540 mm )
Advance length of paper leading end
Approx. 184 mm

5. Operation sequence
Paper cutter Exposure advance unit

Paper magazine A Paper end sensor A (SE13)

G074575
• For paper magazine B of the dual paper magazine machine, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 648
mm.
(292 + Paper advance length → maximum of 292 + 356 = 648 mm )

Paper end sensor B (SE41) Paper cutter

Approx. 292 mm

Advance length of paper leading

Exposure advance unit
end

Paper magazine B
G074576
• However, if the paper leading end is held by arm unit 1, the leading end is cut and fed to the processor.
When the advance length is 116.9 mm or less, the paper that has an advance length of 82.5 mm or more from the
paper cutter is to be held by arm unit 1.
When the advance length is 117 mm or more, the paper that has an advance length of 117 mm or more from the
paper cutter is to be held by arm unit 1.
• When the paper is end, the paper which is cut and advanced to the processor is not exposed. UNEXPOSED is printed
on the paper base.

55700 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

55700
Paper advance operation

The paper is loaded.

Did paper end sensor A (or B) turn LIGHT? NO The paper processing is continued.

YES

The CVP printing and paper advancing are stopped.

Is the paper leading end held by arm unit 1?

NO YES

The paper is cut and the leading end is advanced to the processor.

UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.

5. Operation sequence
The paper is rewound into the magazine.

Attention No. 1000

The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
Attention No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B

Do you continue the printing operation? NO Press the NO: End key.

YES

The film is ejected from the film carrier and the processing is
completed.
Did you replace the paper magazine with a new one?
NO

YES

Press the YES: Restart key.

The paper processing is continued.

55700 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

55800_1
Paper advance operation

Fogged paper operation

This section explains the fogged paper operation when the paper is loading (print standby) with the printer door opened.
Timing when the fogged paper is processed
• When the first print is made after the fogged paper was made
When the fogged paper is made
Paper supply section A
Y = approx. 210 mm X

Paper cutter

Exposure advance unit

Paper magazine A

Rewinding position
G074577
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
Paper supply section B
Paper cutter

5. Operation sequence
Rewinding position

X
Y = approx. 318 mm
Exposure advance unit

Paper magazine B
G074578
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter

! Operation outline
Condition 1: Paper leading end is at the rewinding position.
1. When the paper size of the magazine which is in use changes from narrow to wide: A paper is advanced by 200 mm advance.
NOTE
• For cleaning of the processing rack, carry out the work above.
2. Other than No.1 of Condition 1: A paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
Condition 2: Paper leading end is before the paper cutter or at the position less than 52.5 mm away from the
paper cutter.
1. Cut the paper from the paper leading end by 117 mm and feed it out. Feed out the paper of the length of Y which is shown in the
above.
NOTE
• When the paper leading end is at the position 200 mm away from the rewinding position, 234 mm (117 mm x 2) is to be
advanced.
Condition 3: Paper leading end is at the position 52.5 mm away from the paper cutter.
1. The paper after the paper cutter is to be cut in the initial operation after the printer doors are closed.
Take the cut paper out of the printer.
Cut the paper left to be cut by 117 mm and the cut papers are fed out including the rewinding position.

55800_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

56100_1
Processor paper advance operation
Processor paper advance operation

Processor paper advance operation

This section explains the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit. It is a precondition
that the temperature adjustment of the chemical is completed.

1. The processor enters the following states when the paper is loaded. ☞ 55100
• Processor drive motor: ON
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON

2. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
• For details of the movement in the printer, until the paper is carried to the processor after paper passes through the exposure
end sensor, refer to ☞ 55400_1.

Paper advance direction

Position A

Exposure end sensor

5. Operation sequence
G078453

3. When the paper front end passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to the
processor by the printer.

• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.

Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice

56100_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

56100_1
Processor paper advance operation

4. The paper front end passed through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
• When the print sensor fails to detect the paper consecutive six times, refer to No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor
section.☞ No. 5535.
Print sensor: SE52

Print conveyor unit

G078454
NOTE
• When the print sensor fails to detect the paper consecutive six times, see the illustration below.
Print sensor

Paper advance direction

5. Operation sequence
1 2 3 4 5 6

When the paper is not detected.

Dryer rack
G078455

5. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

• For movement of the print conveyor unit, refer to ☞ 56200_1.
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was ejected to the print conveyor unit;
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF

56100_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

56200_1
Processor paper advance operation

Print conveyor unit operation

This section explaines the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.

1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100_1

2. Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the print sensor.
• Conveyor motor: ON (after the fixed time has passed: OFF)
Print sensor: SE52
Print conveyor unit

Conveyor motor

5. Operation sequence
G078454

NOTE
• The time of conveyor motor rotation is changed depending on the maximum advance length of the orders.
• The order information and the information of paper advance length are transmitted to the processor control PCB from the
printer control PCB.

The operation condition of the conveyor motor

1 When the print sensor detects the paper leading end of the first order, the operation time of the conveyor motor is decided
depending on the maximum paper advance length which is fed out to the processor.
2 When the paper which has longer advance length is processed in the same orders as former condition after operating the
conveyor motor under the condition No.1, the conveyor motor is operated by necessary paper advance length when the print
sensor detects the paper leading end of the first order.

56200_1 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

56200_1
Processor paper advance operation

NOTE
• Example: The operation of conveyor motor described below.

Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the print sensor. (the maximum paper advance length in the orders: 89 mm)

↓
Conveyor motor: ON (after conveyor motor operation by 89 mm: OFF )

↓
The paper of 178 mm is processed after conveyor motor operation. (in the same orders)

↓
Detects the paper leading end of 178 mm with the print sensor.

↓
Conveyor motor: ON (after conveyor motor operation by 178 mm: OFF )

Print conveyor unit Print sensor: SE52

5. Operation sequence
89mm 178mm

Dryer rack
G078456
• For keep the paper alignment on the print conveyor unit, the print conveyor unit becomes the operation specification above.
• When the paper advance length which is 178 mm is processed before 89 mm is processed, the paper advance length which is
89 mm is on 178 mm.

3. The receiving number of prints on the conveyor unit exceeds 50.

• Conveyor motor: ON (after the fixed time has passed: OFF)
NOTE
• The conveyor motor is operated when the next print leading end is detected after the number of prints on the conveyor
unit exceeds 50.
However, Control strip processing, splicing paper, Paper Leading Edge Advance, fogged paper, paper end and cleaning
paper are not counted.
• The operation condition of the conveyor motor is same as ☞ Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the
print sensor..

56200_1 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

56200_1
Processor paper advance operation

Print sensor: SE52

Print conveyor unit

Conveyor motor

G078454

4. The print full sensor turns DARK during operating the print conveyor unit.
• No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. occurs. Refer to ☞ No. 0519.
Print sensor: SE52
Print conveyor unit

5. Operation sequence
Print full sensor: SE32

Conveyor motor

G078454
NOTE
• If No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. occurs, the conveyor motor is not stopped operating.

5. Conveyor belt stops moving after the fixed time.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.

56200_1 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

56200_1
Processor paper advance operation

This page is intentionally blank.

5. Operation sequence

56200_1 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

6000

6. Electrical parts

Position of electrical parts (printer section) ...................................................................... 61000_1

Printer section (positions of PCBs) ...............................................................................................................61000_1
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) .........................................................................61100_1
Colorimeter unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) .................................................................................61110
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) ...........................................................61300
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) .............................................................61400_1
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) ....................................................................................61450
Position of electrical parts (scanner section) ....................................................................... 62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2] ........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-3] ........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-4] ........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2] ..........................................................................................62050
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-3] ..........................................................................................62050
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-4] ..........................................................................................62050
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section) ................................................................ 62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) .................................................................................................................62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..................................................................................................62150
120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ........................................................................................................................62200
120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................................62250
110 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ........................................................................................................................62300
110 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................................62350

6 Electrical parts
135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs) ...............................................................................................................62400
135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ................................................................................................62450
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) .................................................................................................62500
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) .................................................................................................62550
135 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ........................................................................................................................62600
135 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................................62650
MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .................................................................................62660
MFC (position and description of electrical parts) ............................................................................................62670
Description of PCB (processor section) ........................................................................... 63200_1
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] ....................................................................................................63200_1
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] ....................................................................................................63200_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section) .............................................................. 63250_1
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] ......................................................................................63250_1
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ...................................................................................63250_1
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ...................... 63260_1
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) ................................................63260_1

6000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

6000

Description of PCB (printer section) ................................................................................ 64110_1

Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) ...........................................................................................................64110_1
Colorimeter control PCB (J390801) ..................................................................................................................64130
Printer control PCB (J391071) ......................................................................................................................64140_1
Laser control PCB (J391081) ........................................................................................................................64150_1
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390939) .........................................................................................................................64160_1
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390940) .............................................................................................................................64170
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J390941) .........................................................................................................................64180_1
Dual paper magazine PCB (J390942) ...............................................................................................................64190
Laser I/O PCB (J390945) ..................................................................................................................................64200
B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1) ....................................................................................64210
B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1) ....................................................................................64210
AOM driver (I124020) ......................................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J390943) ..........................................................................................................................................64240
BZ-PC I/O PCB (J391024) ...........................................................................................................................64245_1
Power supply (printer section) .......................................................................................................................64250_1
Description of PCB (scanner section) .................................................................................. 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879) ................................................................................................................65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3] ..................................................................................................65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4] .........................................................................................................65010
LED driver PCB (J390999) ...............................................................................................................................65020
Power supply (scanner) .....................................................................................................................................65060
PM driver ...........................................................................................................................................................65070
Description of PCB (film carrier section) .............................................................................. 65200

6 Electrical parts
Connecting PCB 1 (J390756) ............................................................................................................................65200
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) ............................................................................................................................65210
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) ............................................................................................................................65220
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) ....................................................................................................................................65230
Driver PCB 2 (J390519) ....................................................................................................................................65240
Sensor PCB (J390757) .......................................................................................................................................65250
Power PCB (J390755) .......................................................................................................................................65260
Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051) ...........................................................................................................65270
Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784) ...........................................................................................................65270
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) ............................................................................................................................65280
Connecting PCB (J390371) ...............................................................................................................................65290
Sensor PCB (J390385) .......................................................................................................................................65300
Connecting PCB (J390372) ...............................................................................................................................65310
Sensor PCB (J390394) .......................................................................................................................................65320
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) .....................................................................................................................65330
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ............................................................................................................................65340
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) ......................................................................................................................65350
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779) ................................................................................................................65360
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) .......................................................................................................................65370
Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414) ...................................................................................65380
Connecting PCB 1 (J390783) ............................................................................................................................65390
Connecting PCB 2 (J490291) ............................................................................................................................65400

6000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

6000

Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................... 66200

Processor control PCB (J390878) [N] ...............................................................................................................66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM] ............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N] .................................................................................................................66210_1
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM] ..............................................................................................................66210_1
Main relay PCB (J390976) ................................................................................................................................66220
Sub relay PCB (J390935) ..................................................................................................................................66230
SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM] ............................................................................................................................66600
Power supply (processor) ..................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) ..............................................................................68050
Cables ............................................................................................................................. 68100_1
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ................................................................68100_1
Handling the flat cable .......................................................................................................................................68200
Power ON/OFF .................................................................................................................... 68500
System starting ..................................................................................................................................................68500
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) .................................................................68550_1

6 Electrical parts

6000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

61000_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Printer section (positions of PCBs)

! Position
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.

Dual paper magazine specification

14
12
3 13
6 5 4

Hole that sets the

screwdriver 11

15

10
9

6. Electrical parts
2 7 1

16

Single paper magazine specification

3 6 5 4
Screwdriver

1
2
7

PCB attaching plate

G077195

61000_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

61000_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

IMPORTANT
• For the keyboard switch PCB, PU control PCB, the ARCNET-HUB PCB, the PC-laser interface PCB, and the PC-
scanner interface PCB, refer to the PC Service Manual. Refer to ☞ 88000.
• For the single magazine specification, the PCB attaching plate is left open when the screwdriver is set to the position
above.
• For the dual paper magazine specification, the PCB cover is left open when the screwdriver is set to the position
described above.
Printer section (PCB)
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
*1
1 Printer I/O PCB 1 J390939 ☞ 64160_1
2 Printer control PCB J391071 ☞ 64140_1 The part in
(J390944) parentheses is no
longer available.
*1
3 Printer power supply 1 PS3 I038320 ☞ 64250_1
4 Printer power supply 2 PS10 I038286
5 Printer power supply 3 PS12 I038287
6 Laser power supply 1 PS17 I038286
7 BZ−PC I/O PCB J391024 ☞ 64245_1 No longer
available*3
8 B-AOM driver I124020 ☞ 64230 The part number
9 G-AOM driver (I124019) in parentheses is
(I124012) no longer
10 R-AOM driver
available. *2
11 Laser control PCB J391081 ☞ 64150_1 J391081: only for
(J390919) 33 series*2
(J390919): for 32
and 33 series

6. Electrical parts
*2
12 Laser I/O PCB J390945 ☞ 64200
13 B laser driver J390973 ☞ 64210 Laser unit (Type
14 G laser driver A1) *2
13 B laser driver J390929 Laser unit (Type
14 G laser driver B1) *2
*2
15 Laser power supply 2 PS16 I038146 ☞ 64250_1
16 Keyboard connecting PCB J390645 ☞ 64110_1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the side cover or the table cover needs to be removed.
☞ 20010_1
*2. To check these electrical parts, the PC control unit needs to be removed or opened.
☞ 21170☞ 21180_1
*3. The machine with which the printer control PCB (J391071) has been installed is not equipped the BZ−PC I/O PCB.
The position of printer control PCB and BZ−PC I/O PCB differs depending on the machine.

61000_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

61000_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

! Position
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.

Dual paper magazine

6. Electrical parts
2

G077151

Printer section (PCB)

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 CVP PCB J390943 ☞ 64240 Option
2 Dual paper magazine PCB J390942 ☞ 64190 Option
3 Printer I/O PCB 2 J390940 ☞ 64170
4 Printer I/O PCB 3 J390941 ☞ 64180_1

61000_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

61100_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Printer section (position and description of electrical parts)

Position (front face)

Dual paper magazine specification

5

12

6 7 8
2

Single paper magazine specification

12

11 10

Dual paper magazine specification

6. Electrical parts
2

3 4

G077196

Printer main body (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Printer control box cooling fan FAN24 Intake (the fan is always ON.) *1
*1
2 Buzzer BZ1
3 Paper magazine code sensor B SE40
4 Printer door 3 sensor LS10
5 Inner cooling fan FAN23 Intake (the fan is always ON.)
6 Paper magazine code sensor A SE12
7 Interlock switch (printer door 1) LS6
8 Interlock switch (printer door 2) LS7
*2
9 Counter C
*3
10 Paper magazine lamp A L6
11 Paper Magazine lamp B L7

61100_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

61100_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

12 Interlock relay X37
*1. To check these electrical parts, the side cover or the table cover needs to be removed.
☞ 20010_1
*2. To replace these electrical parts, the table needs to be removed.
☞ 20012
*3. Specific models are not equipped.

! Position (back face)

1
2

4
6

6. Electrical parts
G077197

Printer main body (back face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Laser control box cooling fan 2 FAN17 Exhaust (the fan is always ON.) *1
2 Laser control box cooling fan 1 FAN16
3 Laser control box cooling fan 3 FAN18
*1
4 Inner thermosensor TH5
5 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN15 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF
6 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN14 controlling of laser unit cooling fan 1
and 2.

*1. To check these electrical parts, the printer cover needs to be removed.
☞ 20011

61100_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

61110
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Colorimeter unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts)

! Position

6 4 7

G074435

Colorimeter unit (PCB)

6. Electrical parts
No. Name Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
*1
1 Colorimeter Control PCB J390801 ☞ 64130

Colorimeter unit (electrical parts)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
3 Colorimeter − Colorimeter unit *1
4 Paper sensor 1 SE75
5 Paper sensor 2 SE76
6 Paper advance motor PM12
7 Pressure change solenoid SOL1

*1. To check these electrical parts, the colorimeter unit needs to be removed.
☞ 21110

61110 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

61200
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

Paper supply unit A

Paper supply unit B 9

4 15
8
6
13
3

2 10

5
7
12

6. Electrical parts
1

14 11 16

G057391

Paper Supply Section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper end sensor A SE13
2 Paper loading sensor SE14
3 Cut home sensor SE15
4 Cut end sensor SE16
5 Paper hold sensor SE17
6 Paper supply end sensor SE18
7 Paper end sensor B SE41 Option (dual paper magazine)
8 Paper advance motor 1 PM20 When one of the interlock switches (printer
9 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM22 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
10 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM23
11 Paper advance motor 2 PM21 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.

61200 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

61200
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

12 Paper supply motor A PM42 Option (dual paper magazine)
13 Paper Supply Motor B PM43 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2, and printer door 3 sensor) is
off, not in operation.
14 Cut motor M5 When one of the interlock switches (printer
15 Paper hold motor M7 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
16 Ribbon advance motor M6

6. Electrical parts

61200 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

61300
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

! Position

10

4
6

6. Electrical parts
2
5

9 3
G057392

Exposure Advance Section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
*1
1 Zigzag correction sensor (left) SE19
2 Zigzag correction sensor (right) SE20
3 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE21
4 Exposure start sensor SE22
5 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 SE23
6 Exposure end sensor SE24
7 Exposure advance motor 1 PM24 When one of the interlock switches (printer
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM25 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM27
10 Exposure advance motor 2 PM26 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1

*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810

61300 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

61400_1
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

! Position

1 3

4 7

G077198

6. Electrical parts
Paper Advance Section
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper advance pressure change sensor SE25
2 Arm sensor SE27
3 Turn sensor SE28
4 Turn motor PM32 When one of the interlock switches (printer
5 Paper advance arm motor PM31 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
6 Paper advance motor 3 PM28
7 Paper advance pressure change motor PM29

61400_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

61450
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts)

! Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are two types of laser unit. One is type A1 and another one is type B1. There is no difference in functions and quality.

Laser unit (Type A1) (Z021425) Laser unit (Z023040)

B and G laser driver (J390973)
Laser unit (Type B1) (Z021426) Laser unit (Z023041)
B and G laser driver (J390929)

NOTE
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, refer to the following.
☞ 26710
• It is not necessary to change the setting because it recognizes the type of the laser unit when installed.

IMPORTANT
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500_1
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.

Laser unit (Type A1) Black letters on a white background First four-digit number is No.
0920.
Laser unit (Type B1) Black letter on a yellow First four-digit number is No.
background 0922.

6. Electrical parts
Laser unit

G laser driver

B laser driver

Type A1 Type B1

Either of these labels is affixed.

G074560
• Basically, the laser unit should be replaced with the same type of the laser unit and the laser drivers (B and G).
☞ 64210
• The laser unit and B, G laser drivers can be replaced separately if they are replaced with the same type. However,
they cannot be used if they are different types. (connecting cables neither.)
When the laser unit is replaced with different type laser unit, it needs to be replaced with a set of the laser unit and the
laser drivers (B and G).

61450 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

61450
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

! Position
Laser unit

Back view of laser unit

G074481

Laser unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Laser unit heater H5 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
the laser unit heater

6. Electrical parts

61450 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

62000
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2]

About the scanner section, disposition of PCBs vary between S-2, S-3, and S-4.
• For S-3, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-3].
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-4].

! Position (back face) [S-2]

1
2

6. Electrical parts
5 6
G068429

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-2]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 AFC/scanner control PCB J390879 ☞ 65000
2 AFC/scanner driver PCB J390768 ☞ 65010
3 LED driver PCB J390999 ☞ 65020 The part in
(J390995) parentheses is no
(J390870) longer available.
4 Multi power supply (scanner) PS3 I038373 ☞ 65060
5 Scanner power supply 1 PS1 I038379
6 Scanner power supply 2 PS2 I038263
7 PM driver (film feed motor) PMD1 I043111 ☞ 65070

62000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

62000
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-3]

! Position (back face) [S-3]

1
7

4 6 5
G077179

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-3]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 AFC/scanner control PCB J390879 ☞ 65000
2 AFC/scanner driver PCB J390768 ☞ 65010
☞ 65020

6. Electrical parts
3 LED driver PCB J390999
4 Multi power supply (scanner) PS3 I038373 ☞ 65060
5 Scanner power supply 1 PS1 I038379
6 Scanner power supply 2 PS2 I038263
7 PM driver (film feed motor) PMD1 I043111 ☞ 65070

62000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

62000
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-4]

! Position (back face) [S-4]

1
6

3 5 4

G078475

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-4]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 AFC/scanner control PCB J390879 ☞ 65000
2 AFC/scanner driver PCB J391106 ☞ 65010

6. Electrical parts
3 Multi power supply (scanner) PS3 I038373 ☞ 65060
4 Scanner power supply 1 PS1 I038379
5 Scanner power supply 2 PS2 I038263
6 PM driver (film feed motor) PMD1 I043111 ☞ 65070

62000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2]

The location of the electrical parts in each of the following scanners is unique: S-2, S-3, and S-4.
• For S-3, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-3].
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-4].

! Position (front face) [S-2]

2
3

6. Electrical parts
5 6

G068445

Scanner section (front face) [S-2]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
1 Film ready lamp LED1 W410409
2 ND filter solenoid SOL2 Inside of LED light source unit
3 Film carrier lock sensor SE51
4 LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
5 LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
6 LED light source unit Refer to ☞ Details of LED light source
unit.
Refer to ☞ Operation specification.

Details of LED light source unit

• LED light source unit type is checked in the System Version Check display. ☞ 35500_1
$ indicates that it is possible to change in LED light source unit.

62050 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

− indicates that it is not possible to change in LED light source unit.

LED light source unit Replacement parts

LED light source unit (Type LED light source unit (Type LED light source unit (Type 2)
0) 1)
(Type 0) $ Replace in LED light source kit Replace in LED light source kit
1*1 2*1
Z022495 (Type 1) → − $ Replace in LED light source kit
2*1
Z024047 (Type 2) → − − $
Z022937(no longer
available)→

*1. Details of LED light source kit

Details Part No.

LED light source kit 1 LED light source unit type 1 (Z022495) Z022489 (No longer available)
LED driver PCB (J390995)
Cable
LED light source kit 2 LED light source unit type 2 (Z024047) Z024049
(Z022937)(No longer available) Z022939 (No longer available)
LED driver PCB (J390999)
Cable

NOTE
• For details about how to remove the LED light source unit, refer to the following.
☞ 20620
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1 LED, R2 LED, IR LED
and LED thermosensor are built in the LED light source unit.

6. Electrical parts
• The heater of the LED light source unit can be changed in the three levels for (H), (M) or (L).

! Position (back face) [S-2]

G068446

62050 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-2]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
7 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN5 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
8 Control box cooling fan 2 FAN6
9 Power supply cooling fan FAN4

Operation specification
Name Symbol Operation condition
LED light source unit - Controlled temperature: 45.0±1°C
LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 When the LED thermosensor is 45.4°C or more: Fan ON
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF
Power supply cooling fan FAN4 When scanner power supply 2 is ON, the fan is always ON.
Control box cooling fan 1 FAN5
Control box cooling fan 2 FAN6

NOTE
• All the fans above are OFF while the program timer activates.

6. Electrical parts

62050 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-3]

! Position (front face) [S-3]

2
3

6. Electrical parts
5 6

G068445

Scanner section (front face) [S-3]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
1 Film ready lamp LED1 W410409
2 ND filter solenoid SOL2 Inside of LED light source unit
3 Film carrier lock sensor SE51
4 LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
5 LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
6 LED light source unit Z024051 ☞ Operation specification
(Type 3)
Z023408
(no longer
available)

NOTE
• For details about how to remove the LED light source unit, refer to the following.
☞ 20620
• LED light source unit type is checked in the System Version Check display. ☞ 35500_1
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1 LED, IR LED, IR LED
and LED thermosensor are built into the LED light source unit.
• The heater of the LED light source unit can be changed in the three levels for (H), (M) or (L).

62050 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

! Position (back face) [S-3]

8
G077199

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-3]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
7 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
8 Power supply cooling fan FAN3

Operation specification
Name Symbol Operation condition
LED light source unit - Controlled temperature: 45.0±1°C
LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 When the LED thermosensor is 45.4°C or more: Fan ON
When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF

6. Electrical parts
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2
Power supply cooling fan FAN3 When scanner power supply 2 is ON, the fan is always ON.
Control box cooling fan 1 FAN4

NOTE
• All the fans above are OFF while the program timer activates.

62050 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-4]

! Position (front face) [S-4]

2
3

6. Electrical parts
5 6

G078479

Scanner section (front face) [S-4]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
1 Film ready lamp LED1 W410409
2 ND filter solenoid SOL2 Inside of LED light source unit
3 Film carrier lock sensor SE51
4 LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
5 LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
6 LED light source unit Z023547 ☞ Operation specification
[S-4]

IMPORTANT
• S-4 LED light source unit(s) cannot be used with the S-2 or the S-3.

NOTE
• For details about how to remove the LED light source unit, refer to the following.
☞ 20620
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Cooling Fan, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1
LED, IR LED and LED thermosensor are built in the LED light source unit.
• The heater of the LED light source unit can be changed in the three levels for (H), (M) or (L).

62050 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62050
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)

! Position (back face) [S-4]

8
G078478

Scanner Section (Back face) [S-4]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
7 Control box cooling fan FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
8 Power supply cooling fan FAN3

Operation specification
Name Symbol Operation condition
LED light source unit - Controlled temperature: 45.0±1°C
LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 When the LED thermosensor is 45.4°C or more: Fan ON

6. Electrical parts
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF
Power supply cooling fan FAN3 When scanner power supply 2 is ON, the fan is always ON.
Control box cooling fan FAN4

NOTE
• All the fans above are OFF while the program timer activates.

62050 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

62100
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)

! Position

The advance unit which is removed and turned

over
3
6
1

7
4
10

5
G051054

135/240 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Connecting PCB 1 J390756 ☞ 65200

6. Electrical parts
2 Connecting PCB 2 J390482 ☞ 65210
3 Connecting PCB 3 J490255 ☞ 65220
4 Driver PCB 1 J390368 ☞ 65230
5 Driver PCB 2 J390519 ☞ 65240
6 Sensor PCB J390757 ☞ 65250 The PCB cannot be
replaced.
7 Power PCB J390755 ☞ 65260
8 Magnetic head PCB J391050 ☞ 65270 Type R/W only
(J390497) The part in parentheses is
no longer available.
J391051 Type R only
(J390784) The part in parentheses is
no longer available.
9 Connecting PCB 4 J390579 ☞ 65280
10 Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit*1 W411413 ☞ 65380 Type R/W only
W411414 Type R only

*1. Unnecessary when using the magnetic head PCB (J390497) (J390784).

62100 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62150
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position
2 13

8
3
4
10 11
9
12
5 5
27
14

12

13

21
3
7 1 22

20
7
Magnetic head unit
2

10 1
11 4
23 15

6. Electrical parts
8 9
16
When the magnetic head unit is opened When the rear cover is opened

24 18

17

19

26 25

6
G057595

135/240 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 135 loading sensor SE52
2 135 ready sensor SE53
3 135 perforation sensor SE54
4 240 ready sensor SE55
5 240 perforation sensor SE56

62150 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

62150
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

6 VEI sensor SE57
7 240 loading sensor SE62
8 135 DX sensor 1 SE147 Uses for Film Detection as well.
9 135 DX sensor 2 SE148
10 135 DX sensor 3 SE149 Uses for Film Detection as well.
11 135 DX sensor 4 SE150
12 240 DX sensor 1 SE151 Uses for Film Detection as well.
13 240 DX sensor 2 SE152
14 Rewinding sensor SE78
15 135 lane limit switch LM1
16 240 lane limit switch LM2
17 IPI sensor SE79
18 Cartridge limit switch 1 LM4
19 Cartridge limit switch 2 LM5
20 Panorama shutter solenoid SOL5
21 Film feed motor PM1
22 Light lock door motor PM2
23 Spool key motor PM3
24 Read head (camera track) Type R
24 Read head (camera track) Type R/W
25 Read head (photo finishing track)
26 Write head (photo finishing track)
27 Film feed motor cooling fan FAN31 Exhaust

6. Electrical parts

62150 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

62200
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)

! Position

G051055

120 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Connecting PCB J390371 ☞ 65290

6. Electrical parts
2 Sensor PCB J390385 ☞ 65300

62200 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62250
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

2
4
1

G051034

120 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks

6. Electrical parts
1 Loading sensor SE64
2 Ready sensor SE65
3 Film sensor SE66
4 Film feed sensor SE67
5 Film feed motor PM10

62250 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62300
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

110 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)

! Position

6. Electrical parts
G052691

110 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Connecting PCB J390372 ☞ 65310
2 Sensor PCB J390394 ☞ 65320

62300 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62350
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

110 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

2
3

6. Electrical parts
3

G052690

110 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Loading sensor SE90
2 Ready sensor SE91
3 Perforation sensor SE92
4 Film feed motor PM10

62350 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62400
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs)

! Position

2
1

6. Electrical parts
G052688

135/240 MMC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 MMC connecting PCB J390483 ☞ 65330
2 MMC sensor PCB J390389 ☞ 65340

62400 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62450
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

8
4
6

6. Electrical parts
9

2
3
G052686

135/240 MMC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Mount carrier home sensor SE68
2 Mount sensor SE70
3 AF sensor SE72
4 Mount carrier sensor (upper) SE73
5 Mount carrier sensor (lower) SE74
6 Mount insertion cover sensor SE77
7 AF motor DM9
8 Mount carrier slide motor PM11
9 Mount insertion cover open switch SM3

62450 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62500
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

2
1

G058784

6. Electrical parts
135/240 AMC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 AMC connecting PCB J390700 ☞ 65350
2 MMC sensor PCB J390389 ☞ 65340

62500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62550
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position
6
9 14
1

12

15

10

11

13

6. Electrical parts
3
7,8

5
G060697

135/240 AMC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Mount carrier home sensor SE156
2 Loading sensor 1 SE157
3 Loading sensor 2 SE158
4 Mount elevator sensor SE159
5 AF sensor SE160
6 Mount sensor (inlet) SE161
7 Mount carrier sensor (lower) SE162
8 Mount carrier sensor (upper) SE163
9 Mount sensor SE164
10 Ejection sensor SE165
11 Mount insertion motor DM14
12 Mount elevator motor DM15
13 AF motor DM16
14 Mount carrier slide motor PM17
15 Mount ejection solenoid SOL26

62550 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62600
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)

! Position

6. Electrical parts
G057668

135 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 135 AFC connecting PCB J390779 ☞ 65360
2 135 AFC sensor PCB J390709 ☞ 65370

62600 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62650
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

135 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

3
4,5
2
6,7

9
8

6,7

6. Electrical parts
2

4,5

10

G057597

135 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 135 loading sensor SE52
2 135 ready sensor SE53
3 135 perforation sensor SE54
4 135 DX sensor 1 SE147 Uses for Film Detection as well.
5 135 DX sensor 2 SE148
6 135 DX sensor 3 SE149 Uses for Film Detection as well.
7 135 DX sensor 4 SE150
8 Rewinding sensor SE78
9 Film feed motor PM1
10 Panorama shutter solenoid SOL5

62650 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62660
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Position

6. Electrical parts
G071630

MFC
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No.
1 Connecting PCB 1 J390783 ☞ 65390
2 Connecting PCB 2 J490291 ☞ 65400

62660 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

62670
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)

MFC (position and description of electrical parts)

! Position

3
5
2

10
9
8
7
6

6. Electrical parts
1 4

G071629

MFC
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Table home sensor SE116
2 Table slide motor PM20
3 Film pressure magnet MH1
4 Film pressure switch SW8
5 Film viewer L8
6 Attachment Detection Switch 1 LM21 These switches are positioned at
7 Attachment Detection Switch 2 LM22 connecting PCB 2. ☞ 65400
8 Attachment Detection Switch 3 LM23
9 Attachment Detection Switch 4 LM24
10 Attachment Detection Switch 5 LM25

62670 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

63200_1
Description of PCB (processor section)
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N]

Description for each specification

Additional PCBs are in this section depending on machine specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor section (position of PCB) [SM].

! Position

1 2 4 5

6. Electrical parts
8

G078387

Processor section
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
*1
1 Processor control PCB J390878 ☞ 66200
2 Processor I/O PCB J390798 ☞ 66210_1 *1
*3
3 Main relay PCB J390976 ☞ 66220

63200_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

63200_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks

4 Transistor PCB J404493 Cooling water
solenoid valve
(option) *1
*2
5 Sub relay PCB J390935 ☞ 66230
*2
6 Processor power supply 1 PS7 I038320 ☞ 67400
*2
7 Processor power supply 2 PS2 I038286
*4
8 Processor power supply 3 PS3
*1. To check these electrical parts, processor cover 1 and PCB cover 1 need to be removed.
☞ 20021_1
*2. To check these electrical parts, processor top cover 2 needs to be removed.
☞ 20022_1
*3. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover and PCB cover 2 need to be removed.
☞ 20024_1
*4. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover, processor cover 2, PCB cover 2 and the hose receiver mounting plate
need to be removed.
☞ 20025_1

6. Electrical parts

63200_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

63200_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor section (position of PCB) [SM]

! Position

1
G070039

SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 SM I/O PCB J390330 ☞ 66600

6. Electrical parts

63200_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM].

! Position (front face)

13
38

1 to 12

14
15 to 20

21

22
24 to 26

6. Electrical parts
23

27 to 29

30 to 36 37

G077200

Processor section (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level Option
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level Option
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level Option

63250_1 1/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4
STB2 refilling water level Option
5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5
STB3 refilling water level Option
6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level Option
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 CD heater H1
11 BF heater H2
12 STB heater H3
13 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS2
14 Sub relay PCB cooling fan FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
18 STB2 circulation pump P6
19 STB3 circulation pump P7
20 STB4 circulation pump P8
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN6 Intake ☞ Operation specification of

6. Electrical parts
the fan
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
23 Hour meter HM1 Option (standard equipment inside
Japan) *3
24 CD replenisher pump RP1 *1

25 BF replenisher pump RP2

26 STB replenisher pump RP3
*1
27 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
28 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
29 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
30 CD-W refilling water pump P9 Option
31 BF-W refilling water pump P10
32 STB1-W refilling water pump P11
33 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
34 STB3-W refilling water pump P13
35 STB4-W refilling water pump P14
36 Cleaning pump 1 P15 Option
37 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4 Option
*4
38 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
*1. It is different from [N] specification for other specifications.
*2. To check these electrical parts, processor top cover 2 needs to be removed.
☞ 20022_1
*3. To replace these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover, processor cover 2 and 3, and the hose receiver mounting plate need
to be removed.
☞ 20025_1
*4. The attaching position of the interlock switch (dryer cover) differs depending on the machine. Refer to ☞ 63260_1.

63250_1 2/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

! Position (back face)

1 3 17 6 2 5 4

15 (rear side)

16

13
12
9
10
14 (near side) 11

6. Electrical parts
8
G078402

Processor section (back face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
*2
2 Rack stopper sensor LS14
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
*2
*2
4 CD effluent float switch FS7
5 BF effluent float switch FS8
6 STB effluent float switch FS9
7 Main relay PCB cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*1
8 Processor power supply 3 cooling fan FAN30 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*1
9 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 *2

10 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2

11 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1
12 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2

63250_1 3/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

13 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
*3
14 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2
15 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3
16 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4
17 Drive motor cooling fan FAN28 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2
*1. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover need to be removed.
☞ 20024_1
*2. To replace these electrical parts, processor top cover 4 needs to be removed.
☞ 20026
*3. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover, the dryer cover and the maintenance cover need to be removed.
☞ 20023_1
Operation specification of the fan
Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN6 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is ON. When the CD or BF processing solution
temperature is less than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is OFF.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN4
Sub relay PCB cooling fan FAN1 The fan is always ON.
Main relay PCB cooling FAN29
fan
Processor power supply 3 FAN30
cooling fan
Exhaust fan FAN3 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always ON.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is OFF.
Dryer fan FAN2 When printing (heater is activated): Fan ON

6. Electrical parts
Drive motor cooling fan FAN28 When printing (drive motor is activated): Fan ON

NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are OFF while the program timer activates.

63250_1 4/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM]

! Position (front face)

13
24
1 to 12

15 to 20 14

21
22

6. Electrical parts
23

G078381

Processor section (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level Option
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level Option
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level Option
4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4
STB2 refilling water level Option
5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5
STB3 refilling water level Option

63250_1 5/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level Option
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 CD heater H1
11 BF heater H2
12 STB heater H3
13 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS2
14 Sub relay PCB cooling fan FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
18 STB2 circulation pump P6
19 STB3 circulation pump P7
20 STB4 circulation pump P8
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN6
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
23 Hour meter HM1 Option (standard equipment inside
Japan) *2
*3
24 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1

6. Electrical parts
*1. To check these electrical parts, processor top cover 2 needs to be removed.
☞ 20022_1
*2. To replace these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover, processor cover 2 and 3, and the hose receiver mounting plate need
to be removed.
☞ 20025_1
*3. The attaching position of the interlock switch (dryer cover) differs depending on the machine. Refer to ☞ 63260_1.

63250_1 6/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

! Position (back face)

1 3 17 6 2 5 4

15 (rear side)

16

13
12
9
10
14 (near side) 11

6. Electrical parts
8
G078402

Processor section (back face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
*2
2 Rack stopper sensor LS14
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
*2
*2
4 CD effluent float switch FS7
5 BF effluent float switch FS8
6 STB effluent float switch FS9
7 Main relay PCB cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*1
8 Processor power supply 3 cooling fan FAN30 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*1
9 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 *2

10 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2

11 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1
12 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2

63250_1 7/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

13 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2
*3
14 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2
15 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3
16 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4
17 Drive motor cooling fan FAN28 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan*2
*1. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover need to be removed.
☞ 20024_1
*2. To replace these electrical parts, processor top cover 4 needs to be removed.
☞ 20026
*3. To check these electrical parts, the dryer top cover, the processor rear cover, the dryer cover and the maintenance cover need to be removed.
☞ 20023_1

! Position

25 2 26 3 21 13 22 23

29

24 6

4 28

6. Electrical parts
27

19

12

18
10
17

20

9 16

14

15 11

8 7
G070041

SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35

63250_1 8/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63250_1
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
16 Replenishment package sensor P-2 LS7
17 STB1-W refilling water pump P11 Option
18 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
19 STB3-W refilling water pump P13
20 Cleaning pump 1 P15
21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9

6. Electrical parts
29 STB replenisher pump RP10

63250_1 9/9
Distributed by: [Link]

63260_1
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)

Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts)

! Position

2 1
3

6. Electrical parts
7 8

9
6

G078403

Dryer section, order classification section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch) SW1
2 Print full sensor SE32
3 Conveyor motor DM3
*2
4 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
5 Print sensor SE52
6 Dryer thermosensor TH4
*1
7 Dryer safety thermostat STH1
*1
8 Dryer heater H4
9 Dryer fan FAN2 Refer to ☞ Operation
specification of the fan63250.

*1. For replacing the dryer safety thermostat and/or dryer heater, refer to ☞ 27250_1.
*2. The attaching position of the interlock switch (dryer cover) differs depending on the machine. Refer to ☞ 63250_1.

63260_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64110_1
Description of PCB (printer section)
Description of PCB (printer section)

Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645)

G057402

! Function
• Connects the operation keyboard.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position

6. Electrical parts
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

64110_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64130
Description of PCB (printer section)

Colorimeter control PCB (J390801)

May not be mounted depending on conditions

G068401

! Function
• Controls the colorimeter unit.
• Relays the communication between the colorimeter and PC.
• Communicates with the PC.

6. Electrical parts
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61110
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
☞ 35100
! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.

! Unused connector
• None

64130 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64130
Description of PCB (printer section)

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+12 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC+24 V input check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible DC+5 V, DC+12 V
TP5 Ground Possible DC+24 V
TP7 Unused Impossible
TP9 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF

6. Electrical parts

64130 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64140_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer control PCB (J391071)

Printer control PCB (J391071)

P2203

P2200 P2201
TP14

Unused Unused depending on the conditions

6. Electrical parts
G078463

Printer control PCB (J390944)

Unused Unused depending on the conditions

G078406

64140_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64140_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

! Function
• Controls the printer I/O PCB.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Controls turning on of the buzzer and PC power switch (only for J391071)
NOTE
• The printer control PCB performs the functions above since the BZ −PC I/O PCB, which controls turning on the buzzer and
PC switch, is not installed.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• When replacing the printer control PCB (J390944) to (J391071), change the connecting position from the BZ−PC I/O PCB to the
printer control PCB (J391071) after removing the connector J/P2200, 2201 and 2203 from the BZ−PC I/O PCB.
The cable connecting J/P 2202 on the BZ−PC I/O PCB and J/P 207 on the Printer Control PCB (J390944) is not used.
Unused Change the connecting position of printer control PCB.

J/P2202
J/P2203
J/P2200

6. Electrical parts
X1

J/P2201 BZ−PC I/O PCB

LED1
G077189

IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not miss out on IN and OUT.
• This PCB has connectors J212(OUT), J213(IN), J214(OUT), J215(IN), J216(OUT) and J217(IN) which are connected
to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then
work properly. ☞ 68100_1

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Carry out paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB (J390944)*2, (J391071).

64140_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64140_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P203 Controls the dual paper magazine unit. Only the specific models are not used.
P206 Unused
P218 Paper magazine code sensor B Only the specific models are not used.
P219 Unused For J391071 only: P219 is not installed.

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 to TP6 Ground Possible For J391071 only: TP3 to TP6
are not installed.
TP7 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible
TP8 to TP13 Unused Impossible For J391071 only: TP8 to TP13
are not installed.
TP14 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible Mounted only for J391071

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2
3
4
DS2 1 OFF Unused For J391071 only: DS2 is not
2 installed.
For J390944, turn it OFF.

6. Electrical parts
3
4
DS3 1 OFF Unused For J391071 only: DS3 is not
2 installed.
For J390944, turn it OFF.
3
4

64140_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64150_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Laser control PCB (J391081)

Laser control PCB (J391081)

Unused

6. Electrical parts
G078462

Laser control PCB (J390919)

Unused
G068356

64150_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64150_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives the image data from the PC-laser interface PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
NOTE
• The laser control PCB (J391081) does not include unnecessary test point, connector and memory that are included in the laser
control PCB (J390919).

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

IMPORTANT
• The shapes of the connectors (J/P1501, J/P1502 and J/P1503) of laser control PCB are the same. Be careful not to
connect to the wrong connector.

IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors J1517 (IN) and J1516 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read
the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100_1

6. Electrical parts
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1509 Unused
P1510 Unused
P1518 Unused
P1521 Unused
CN1 Unused For J391081 only: CN1 and CN3 are not installed.
CN2 Unused
CN3 Unused

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP401 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP402 to 407 Ground Possible For J391081 only: TP403 to
TP407 are not installed.
TP408 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP409 Ground Possible
TP410 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible

64150_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64150_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP411 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP412 DC+5 V-0 voltage measurement Possible
TP413 DC+5 V-1 voltage measurement Possible
TP414 Ground Possible
TP415 DC+5 V-2 voltage measurement Possible
TP416 Ground Possible
TP417 Unused Impossible For J391081 only: TP417 to
TP418 Unused Impossible TP419 are not instlled.
TP419 Ground Possible

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS201 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused

6. Electrical parts

64150_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64160_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390939)

6. Electrical parts
Unused depending on the May not be mounted depending on conditions

G074520

! Function
• Controls the exposure advance unit.
• Supplies power of 5 V, 24 V, 36 V to printer I/O PCB 2, printer I/O PCB 3 and the dual paper magazine PCB.
• Supplies the power of 24 V to the BZ−PC I/O PCB or the printer control PCB.
• Turns the power supply ON/OFF with the interlock switch (printer doors 1, 2).
• Controls the counter and magazine lamp A.
• Supplies power to the printer power supply cooling fan, inner cooling fan and the printer control box cooling fan.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Since the shape of several connectors on the PCB are the same, replace the PCB with much care.

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

64160_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64160_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P237 Paper magazine lamp A Only the specific models are not used.
P238 Counter
P246 Supplies the power to the dual paper magazine
PCB.

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F32 T2.0 A/125 V DC+5 V power supply
protection
F33 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 1 power supply

6. Electrical parts
protection
F34 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 2 power supply
protection
F35 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 3 power supply
protection
F36 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−2 power supply
protection
F37 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−1 power supply
protection
F38 T3.15 A/125 V +24 V power supply protection

64160_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64170
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390940)

G074498

! Function

6. Electrical parts
• Controls the electrical parts of paper supply unit A.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

64170 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64180_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 3 (J390941)

Unused
G078407

! Function
• Controls the electrical parts of paper advance unit.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position

6. Electrical parts
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P268 Unused

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

64180_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64190
Description of PCB (printer section)

Dual paper magazine PCB (J390942)

G074500

! Function
• Controls paper supply unit B.
• Controls magazine lamp B and printer door 3 sensor.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Dual paper magazine PCB.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

64190 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64200
Description of PCB (printer section)

Laser I/O PCB (J390945)

Unused May not be mounted depending on conditions

G074589

! Function
• Controls the interlocks of B-AOM driver, G-AOM driver and R-AOM driver.
• Controls the laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, and paper advance section cooling fan 2.
• Relays the control signal of the polygon mirror driver and the R laser.

6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each PCB.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

64200 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64200
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+12 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 2
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
2 and laser I/O PCB
TP2 Ground Possible Ground when TP1, TP3, TP9, TP11, TP12, and TP13
are measured.
TP3 DC-12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (−12 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 2
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
2 and laser I/O PCB
TP4 DC+5 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 2
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
2 and laser I/O PCB
TP5 Ground Possible Ground when TP4 and TP10 are measured.
TP6 DC+5 VP voltage Possible When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 2
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
2 and laser I/O PCB
TP7 Ground Possible Ground when TP6 is measured.
TP8 DC+24 V-1 voltage Possible When the normal value (+24 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 1
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
1 and laser I/O PCB

6. Electrical parts
TP9 R laser temperature Possible When the normal value (+1 V) is not detected:
control standard voltage • Failure in the laser control PCB
check
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of thermosensor
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP10 DC+24 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+24 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply 1
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
1 and laser I/O PCB
TP11 R laser temperature Possible When the normal value (more than 0 V to less than 1 V)
control section status is not detected:
check • 0 V means the thermosensor is broken.
• 1 V or more means the thermosensor is short-
circuit.
You can check the thermosensor status by the resistance
between pins 7 and 8 on the connector (J1532)
connected to the laser I/O PCB.
• ∞ Ω means the thermosensor is broken.
• 0Ω means the thermosensor is short-circuit.
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP12 Peltier drive control Possible When the normal value (0 V to 5 V) is not detected:
voltage check • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of cable for Peltier
drive
Replace the laser unit for the Peltier drive failure.

64200 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64200
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP13 R laser light intensity Possible When the normal value (+5.3 V) is not detected:
adjustment voltage check • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Failure in the laser unit
• Disconnection or short-circuit of the cable for R
laser
Replace the laser unit for the cable of R laser
TP14 Ground Possible Ground when TP8 is measured.
TP15 Unused Impossible
TP16 Unused Impossible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V−1 power supply
protection
F2 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−2 power supply
protection
F3 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−3 power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts

64200 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64210
Description of PCB (printer section)

B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1)

B and G laser drivers are different depending on the type A1 and B1 of laser unit.
• For the laser unit (type B1), refer to ☞ B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1).

B laser driver G laser driver

Unused
G074521

! Function

6. Electrical parts
• Controls B laser and G laser.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

! Component parts table

• None

64210 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64210
Description of PCB (printer section)

B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1)

B laser driver G laser driver

Unused
G068362

! Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.

! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

! Component parts table

• None

64210 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64230
Description of PCB (printer section)

AOM driver (I124020)

B-AOM driver G-AOM driver R-AOM driver

G058738

IMPORTANT
• Since there is a compatibility between the AOM drivers of (I124020), (I124019), and (I124012), it is possible to use them
by mixture.

NOTE
• The white label is attached to the back side of AOM driver (I124020).
• A blue label is attached on the back of the AOM driver (I124019) which is no longer available.
• A white label is attached on the back of the discontinued AOM driver (I124012).

! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.

6. Electrical parts
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Carry out initial setup.

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ B-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ R-AOM driver.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

64230 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64240
Description of PCB (printer section)

CVP PCB (J390943)

May not be mounted depending on conditions

G066110

! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position

6. Electrical parts
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ CVP PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ CVP PCB.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible

64240 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64240
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is OFF.
protection

6. Electrical parts

64240 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

64245_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

BZ−PC I/O PCB (J391024)

J/P2202
J/P2203
J/P2200

X1

J/P2201

LED1

G077189

! Function
• Controls the buzzer and PC power switch of ON
NOTE
• The BZ−PC I/O PCB which only has the function above has been equipped, because D-ICE control PCB controlled the
buzzer and PC power switch of ON has not been equipped.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1

6. Electrical parts
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• BZ−PC I/O PCB is no longer available.
• When there is no stock of the BZ−PC I/O PCB, replace the type of printer control PCB from old one to new one.
For details, refer to ☞ 64140_1.

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4202 ☞ BZ−PC I/O PCB*1.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 Relay X1 of BZ−PC I/O PCB turns ON and start Relay X1 operation check
the PC.

64245_1 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

64250_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Power supply (printer section)

6. Electrical parts
Unused

G077190

! Function
Symbo Name Parts Function Remarks
l No.
PS3 Printer power supply 1 I038320 Supplies power to the printer DC+5 V
control PCB and printer I/O PCB
1.
PS10 Printer power supply 2 I038286 Supplies the power to printer I/O DC+24 V
PCB 1.
PS12 Printer power supply 3 I038287 Supplies power to printer I/O DC+36 V
PCB 1 and the CVP PCB.
PS17 Laser power supply 1 I038286 Supplies power to printer I/O DC+24 V
PCB 1 and the laser I/O PCB, the
colorimeter control PCB and the
PU control PCB.

64250_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64250_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

Symbo Name Parts Function Remarks

l No.
PS16 Laser power supply 2 I038146 Supplies power to the laser I/O DC+5 V, DC+12 V,
PCB, the laser control PCB, the B DC-12 V
laser driver and the G laser
driver.

IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the machine and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 61000_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
Symbo Power supply Precautions for replacement
l
PS3 Printer power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
PS10 Printer power supply 2 shipping.
PS12 Printer power supply 3
PS17 Laser power supply 1
PS16 Laser power supply 2

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

6. Electrical parts
• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symbo Power supply Reference
l
PS3 Printer power supply 1 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3).
PS10 Printer power supply 2 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10).
PS12 Printer power supply 3 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12).
PS17 Laser power supply 1 Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply 1 (PS17).
PS16 Laser power supply 2 Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply 2 (PS16).

! Unused connector
Symbo Power supply Connector No. Purpose Remarks
l
PS3 Printer power supply 1 None
PS10 Printer power supply 2 None
PS12 Printer power supply 3 None
PS17 Laser power supply 1 None
PS16 Laser power supply 2 CN4 Unused

64250_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

64250_1
Description of PCB (printer section)

! Component parts table

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
Printer power supply 2 supply protection
Printer power supply 3
Laser power supply 1
Laser power supply 2

6. Electrical parts

64250_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65000
Description of PCB (scanner section)
Description of PCB (scanner section)

AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879)

Unused, or unmounted depending on the Unused depending on the conditions

conditions

6. Electrical parts
May not be mounted depending on conditions

G068413

! Function
• Controls each AFC
• Controls the scanner unit and LED light source unit.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors J20 (OUT) and J21 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100_1

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400

65000 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65000
Description of PCB (scanner section)

• Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for each AFC.

135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC

Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment Adjustment
☞ 35000 ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020 ☞ 35060

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB4200
• [If using S-4], refer to ☞ 4190

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P7 For the LED light source unit type 0: Unused
For the LED light source unit types 1, 2 and 3:
Connects to the R LED relay connector J/P168.
S-4: Not used
P11 S-2/S-3: Not used
When using S-4: Used to display scanner type (S-
4) during system version confirmation.
P14 Unused For only J390879-04 or later: P14 Unmounted
J10 Unused

! Component parts table

6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC12 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 DC3.3 V input check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Unused Impossible
TP2 DC+5 V−1 voltage measurement Possible
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP10 DC24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP11 DC12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP12 DC3.3 V voltage measurement Possible

65000 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65000
Description of PCB (scanner section)

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS2 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused

6. Electrical parts

65000 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3]

The AFC/Scanner Driver PCB performs different functions in S-2/S-3 and S-4.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4].

6. Electrical parts
Unused, or unmounted depending on the Unused depending on the conditions
conditions
May not be mounted depending on conditions

G068414

! Function
• Controls motors of the scanner section and relays sensors.
• Supplies the power to the film carrier and the film cleaner.

IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-03 or later) and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-02 or
earlier) are different, they are compatible with each other.

65010 1/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.

! Unused connector

IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-03 or later) and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-02 or
earlier) are different.
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P31 Unused For only J390768-03 or later: Unmounted
P32 Unused

6. Electrical parts
P33 Unused
P36 Unused
P37 Unused
P39 Unused
P43 Film cleaner Option
P44 Unused

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-03 or later) and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-02 or
earlier) are different.
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 Unused
LED2 DC+36 V−2 (AFC) output check ON when the power is supplied to AFC.
LED3 DC+36 V−1 input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 DC+24 V−1 input check ON when power is supplied.
LED5 DC+5 V−1 input check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+36 V−1 voltage Possible
measurement
TP2 DC+24 V−1 voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+5 V−1 voltage measurement Possible

65010 2/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP4 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F26 T6.3 A/125 V DC+36 V−1 power supply
protection
F27 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−1 power supply
protection
F28 T3.15 A/125 V DC+5 V−1 power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts

65010 3/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4]

P143 P56 P64 P38 P29 P43

P33 P57 P44 P40 P28
P42
TP4 TP5 TP3 TP2
P142
P41

LED7

TP6 P46
P144 LED3
F3

TP9 TP7

TP13 F2 P65
TP15
LED2 TP10

LED4 LED5 LED6

TP12 P37
TP14 F1
LED1 TP11
P140 P30

P26
P27 P141 P70 P66

6. Electrical parts
LED8
TP16 TP1
F4

Not mounted

G081994

! Function
• Controls motors of the scanner section and relays sensors.
• Supplies the power to the film carrier and the film cleaner.
• Controls the LED electric current, temperature, filter solenoid of LED light source unit.

IMPORTANT
• AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) can only be used with S-4 and is not compatible with S-2/S-3 scanner driver
PCBs.
• S-4 contains no LED driver PCB because its AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) has the functionality of the LED
driver PCBs in S-2 and S-3.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

65010 4/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• [If using S-4], refer to ☞ 4190

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• [If using S-4], refer to ☞ 4240

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC+36 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 Heater high range check ON when heater high range is set
LED5 Heater middle range check ON when heater middle range is set
LED6 Heater low range check ON when heater low range is set
LED7 Used when verifying DC+36V (AFC) power ON when the power is supplied to AFC.
output
LED8 DC+36 V input check ON when power is supplied.

IMPORTANT

6. Electrical parts
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 G heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 18 V (When the LED4 is
goes on in standby state)
TP3 B heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4 is
goes on in standby state)
TP4 R eater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4 is
goes on in standby state)
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP9 Ground Possible
TP10 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP11 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP12 Ground Possible
TP13 Ground Possible
TP14 DC−12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP15 Ground Possible
TP16 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+5 V power supply
protection

65010 5/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65010
Description of PCB (scanner section)

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F2 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
F3 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply
protection
F4 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts

65010 6/6
Distributed by: [Link]

65020
Description of PCB (scanner section)

LED driver PCB (J390999)

LED driver PCB (J390999)

6. Electrical parts
G068415

LED driver PCB (J390870), (J390995)

G076394

65020 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65020
Description of PCB (scanner section)

z Function
• Controls the LED electric current, temperature, filter solenoid of LED light source unit.
IMPORTANT
• S-4 contains no LED driver PCB because its AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) is equipped with equivalent
functions.
☞ 65010

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 62000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Depending on the type of the LED light source unit, the PCB is different.

LED light source unit LED driver PCB

Type 0 J390870 (No longer available)
Type 1 J390995 (No longer available)
Type 2 J390999

Details of LED driver PCB

9 indicates that it is possible to change in LED driver PCB.
− indicates that it is not possible to change in LED driver PCB.

LED driver PCB Replacement parts

J390870 (Type 0) J390995 (Type 1) J390999 (Type 2)

6. Electrical parts
J390870→ 9 Replace in LED light source kit Replace in LED light source kit
1*1 2*1
J390995→ − 9 Replace in LED light source kit
2*1
J390999→ − − 9

*1. Details of LED light source kit

Details Part No.

LED light source kit 1 LED light source unit type 1 (Z022495) Z022489 (No longer available)
LED driver PCB (J390995)
Cable
LED light source kit 2 LED light source unit type 2 (Z024047) Z024049
(Z022937)(No longer available) Z022939 (No longer available)
LED driver PCB (J390999)
Cable

NOTE
• There are two ways as described below to identify the type of the LED driver PCB or LED light source unit which is equipped as
described below.
• Checking the number sticker which is attached on the top of LED light source unit ☞ 20620
• Checking on the System Version Check display ☞ 35500_1

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4200 ☞ LED driver PCB.

65020 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65020
Description of PCB (scanner section)

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4250 ☞ LED driver PCB.

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+24 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC+36 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 Heater high range check ON when heater high range is set
LED5 Heater middle range check ON when heater middle range is set
LED6 Heater low range check ON when heater low range is set

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 G heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 18 V (When the LED4
is goes on in standby state)
TP3 B heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4
is goes on in standby state)
TP4 R eater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4
is goes on in standby state)
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible

6. Electrical parts
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP9 Ground Possible
TP10 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP11 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP12 Ground Possible
TP13 Ground Possible
TP14 DC−12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP15 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+5 V power supply
protection
F2 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
F3 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply
protection

65020 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65060
Description of PCB (scanner section)

Power supply (scanner)

G068416

! Function
Symbol Name Parts [S-2/S-3] Functions [S-4] Functions
No.
PS1 Scanner power I038379 Power supply to AFC/scanner Power supply to AFC/scanner DC+36 V
supply 1 driver PCB and LED driver PCB. driver PCB.
PS2 Scanner power I038263 Power supply to AFC/scanner Power supply to the AFC/scanner DC+24 V

6. Electrical parts
supply 2 control PCB, AFC/scanner driver control PCB, AFC/scanner driver
PCB and the LED driver PCB. PCB.
PS3 Multi power supply I038373 Power supply (DC+5 V) to Power supply to the AFC/scanner DC+5 V,
(scanner) AFC/scanner control PCB, control PCB(DC +5 V), DC+15 V
AFC/scanner driver PCB and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (DC+5
LED driver PCB. Power supply V, +15 V), and scanner
(DC+15 V) to scanner unit. unit(DC+15V).

IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the machine and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
Power supply Precautions for replacement
Scanner power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Scanner power supply 2 shipping.
Multi power supply (scanner)

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

65060 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

65060
Description of PCB (scanner section)

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Power supply [S-2/S-3] Reference(s) [S-4] Reference(s)
Scanner power supply 1 Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 Refer to ☞ 4190.
(PS1).
Scanner power supply 2 Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 2
(PS2).
Multi power supply (scanner) Refer to 4200 ☞ Multi power supply
(scanner) (PS3).

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
Scanner power supply 1 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Scanner power supply 2 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Multi power supply (scanner) F1 T2.5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection

6. Electrical parts

65060 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

65070
Description of PCB (scanner section)

PM driver

PMD1

G068412

! Function
Symbol Name Parts Function Adjustments and Remarks
No. precautions for PCB
replacement
PMD1 PM driver (film feed I043111 Controls the film feed Do not touch each All connectors are
motor) motor. potentiometer which has used.
been adjusted by the
manufacturer before
shipping.

! Position
☞ 62000

! Symptom due to the poor connection of wiring

6. Electrical parts
• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4200 ☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1).
• [If using S-4], refer to ☞ 4190

65070 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65200
Description of PCB (film carrier section)
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 1 (J390756)

G057586

! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB, the sensor PCB and the magnetic head PCB.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• The flat cables connect to connectors P1001 and P1002 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when

6. Electrical parts
handling the flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

65200 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65210
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 2 (J390482)

G051012

! Function
• Changes the sensor of the film feed route when 135 and 240 lanes are switched.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT

6. Electrical parts
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1010 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible The test point may not be
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible mounted.
TP3 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible

65210 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65220
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 3 (J490255)

G051013

! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and driver PCB 2.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1009 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

6. Electrical parts
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

65220 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65230
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Driver PCB 1 (J390368)

G051014

! Function
• Controls the light lock door motor and the film feed motor cooling fan.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Status
TP1 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible The test point may not be
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible mounted.

65230 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65240
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Driver PCB 2 (J390519)

Unused
G068378

! Function
• Controls the spool key motor.
• Inputs the limit switch of 135 or 240 lane.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100

6. Electrical parts
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1032 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1035 Unused

! Component parts table

• None

65240 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65250
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Sensor PCB (J390757)

G051016

! Function
• Amplifies the input signal of the film feed route and relays the other sensors.
• Writes the magnetic data.

! Handling the PCB

IMPORTANT
• This sensor PCB cannot be replaced.
Because the wires connected to each DX sensor and the LED PCB are being soldered and the wiring is complicated
and difficult to return it to the original condition.
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1014 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

6. Electrical parts
! Position
☞ 62100

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

65250 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65260
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Power PCB (J390755)

Unused
G068379

! Function
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.
• Controls the panorama shutter solenoid.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100

6. Electrical parts
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1051 Unused
P1052 Unused The connector may not be mounted.

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible The test point may not be
mounted.

65260 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65270
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051)

When the magnetic head unit is not equipped the magnetic preamplifier PCB, refer to ☞ Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784).
J391050 [135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only], J391051 [135/240 AFC-II (R) only]

Part No.

J39105#-00

G075908

IMPORTANT
• Although the form of J391050 and J391051 is the same but it is not compatible. Confirm the parts number and be sure to
judge the PCB type.

! Function
• Reads and writes the magnetic data.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position

6. Electrical parts
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1040 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

65270 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65270
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784)

When the magnetic head unit is equipped the magnetic preamplifier PCB, refer to ☞ Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051).
J390497 [135/240 AFC and 135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only]

G051018

J390784 [for 135/240 AFC-II (R) only]

6. Electrical parts
G057590

! Function
• Reads and writes the magnetic data.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• This magnetic head PCB needs to be replaced at the same time with the magnetic head unit. Refer to ☞ 20760.
It is because manufacture of PCB is stopped and it is incompatible with a substitute PCB (☞ Magnetic head PCB
(J391050/J391051)).

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

65270 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65270
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

! Component parts table

• None

6. Electrical parts

65270 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

65280
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 4 (J390579)

Unused
G068380

! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and connecting PCB 2.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement

6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1004 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1005 Unused

! Component parts table

• None

65280 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65290
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB (J390371)

G051020

! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and 120 AFC sensor PCB.
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

6. Electrical parts
• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible The test point may not be
mounted.

65290 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65300
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Sensor PCB (J390385)

G051021

! Function
• Relays the input signals of the film feed route.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible The test point may not be
mounted.

65300 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65310
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB (J390372)

G052692

! Function
• Relays the sensor signals of the 110 AFC.
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62300
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

6. Electrical parts
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

65310 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65320
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Sensor PCB (J390394)

Unused
G068381

! Function
• Detects the sensor of the 110 AFC.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62300

6. Electrical parts
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1084 Unused

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

65320 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65330
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

MMC connecting PCB (J390483)

G052687

! Function
• Detects the MMC sensor.
• Controls (other than output checks) and drives of the AF motor.
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +24 V.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 62400
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible

65330 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65340
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

MMC sensor PCB (J390389)

G052689

! Function
• Relays the signal to the AMC or MMC sensor.
• Relays the output signal to the AMC or MMC motor.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
135/240 MMC
☞ 62400
135/240 AMC
☞ 62500
! 2. Precautions for replacement

6. Electrical parts
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible

65340 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65350
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

AMC connecting PCB (J390700)

TP3

P1301 P1305 P1299 P1304 P1298 P1297 P1296

P1292

P1303 TP4 TP2 TP1

P1300 P1302 P1293 P1294 P1291 P1295

G060696

! Function
• Relays the signal to the AMC sensor.
• Relays the output signals to the AMC motor.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62500

6. Electrical parts
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+20 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible

65350 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65360
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779)

G057589

! Function
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.
• Controls the sensors (emission side) of the film feed route and relays the input signal.
• Controls the panorama shutter solenoid.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62600
! 2. Precautions for replacement

6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1292 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

• None

65360 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65370
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709)

G057666

! Function
• Amplifies the input signals of the film feed route.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62600
! 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1295 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the

6. Electrical parts
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible The test point may not be
TP2 Ground Possible mounted.

65370 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65380
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414)

For W411413 (135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only)

G071640

For W411414 (135/240 AFC-II (R) only)

G071641

! Function
• Amplification of the magnetic head signal

IMPORTANT
• W411413 corresponds to reading of both a camera track and a photo finishing track, and W411414 corresponds only
to reading of a camera track.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
W411413
• None
W411414
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1041 Unused Not mounted

! Component parts table

• None

65380 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65390
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 1 (J390783)

Unused
G071631

! Function
1. Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and DC+12 V.
2. Controls the film pressure magnet.
3. Controls the film viewer.
4. Relays the sensors and switches.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position

6. Electrical parts
☞ 62660
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1320 Unused

! Component parts table

• None

65390 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

65400
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 2 (J490291)

G071632

! Function
1. Detects each attachment.
2. Relays the film pressure magnet.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 62660
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

6. Electrical parts
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
• None

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Switch No. Name Purpose
SW1 Attachment Detection Switch 1 Detects each attachment. ☞ 62670
SW2 Attachment Detection Switch 2
SW3 Attachment Detection Switch 3
SW4 Attachment Detection Switch 4
SW5 Attachment Detection Switch 5

65400 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor control PCB (J390878) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM].

6. Electrical parts
Unused May not be mounted depending on conditions

Unused depending on the conditions

G070014

! Function
• Controls the processor section.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• Check the connector for jumper.

IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read
•

the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100_1

66200 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

66200
Description of PCB (processor section)

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
• Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P512 Digital flowmeter Option
P520 Unused

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC+24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC+12 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

6. Electrical parts
TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 Unused Impossible
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP6 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP7 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage Impossible
measurement
TP11 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 2.5 V
measurement
TP12 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 1.0 V
measurement

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF

Jumper No. Setting Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set to open.

66200 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

66200
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM]

6. Electrical parts
Unused depending on the conditions May not be mounted depending on conditions

G068364

! Function
• Controls the processor section.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• Check the connector for jumper.

IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read
•

the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100_1

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600_1
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400

66200 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

66200
Description of PCB (processor section)

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P512 Digital flowmeter Option

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC+24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC+12 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 Unused Impossible
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP6 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP7 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible

6. Electrical parts
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage Impossible
measurement
TP11 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 2.5 V
measurement
TP12 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 1.0 V
measurement

Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF

Jumper No. Setting Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set Open.

66200 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

66210_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM].

Unused Unused depending on the conditions

May not be mounted depending on conditions

G078420

! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.

6. Electrical parts
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P671 Unused
P672 Unused
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 Unused
P676 Unused
P684 Unused

66210_1 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

66210_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Connector No. Purpose Remarks

P685 Refilling water pump and cleaning pump Option
P691 For chilling unit Option
P692 For cooling water unit Option
P693 Unused
P695 For 3300: Not in use
For 3301SD/3302SD: conveyor unit (standard)
P696 Unused
P700 Unused
P701 Unused

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 SSR18 operation check (CD replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED2 SSR19 operation check (BF replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED3 SSR20 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED4 Unused
LED5 Unused
LED6 Relay X13 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation

6. Electrical parts
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 Unused
LED13 Unused
LED14 Unused
LED15 Conveyor motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 Refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown in the
LED17 operation check table.*1
LED18
LED19 DC+24 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED20 DC+5 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.

*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED16, 17 and 18.)

CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED16 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED17 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
LED18 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

Cleaning
pump
LED16 ON
LED17 ON
LED18 ON

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 AC24 V voltage measurement Possible

66210_1 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

66210_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP2 AC24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible
measurement
TP4 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F14 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F15 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts

66210_1 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

66210_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM]

Unused Unused depending on the conditions

May not be mounted depending on conditions

G078395

! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P671 Unused
P672 Unused
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 Unused
P677 Unused
P683 Unused
P685 Unused
P688 Unused
P691 For chilling unit Option
P692 For cooling water unit Option
P693 Unused
P695 For 3300: Not in use
For 3301SD/3302SD: conveyor unit (standard)
P696 Unused

66210_1 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

66210_1
Description of PCB (processor section)

Connector No. Purpose Remarks

P700 Unused
P701 Unused

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 to 4 Unused
LED5 CD circulation amount check ON when CD circulation amount has decreased.
LED6 Relay X13 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 to 14 Unused
LED15 Conveyor motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 to 18 Unused
LED19 DC+24 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED20 DC+5 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 AC24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 AC24 V voltage measurement Possible

6. Electrical parts
TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible
measurement
TP4 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F14 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F15 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection

66210_1 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

66220
Description of PCB (processor section)

Main relay PCB (J390976)

6. Electrical parts
Unused
G074522

! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies the power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, drive motor and printer section
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• Check the voltages of P659.
IMPORTANT
• Replace the connector so that the voltage described on the connector lower part matches the applied one.

66220 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

66220
Description of PCB (processor section)

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4203 ☞ Main relay PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4253 ☞ Main relay PCB.

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.

! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater) ON during operation
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater) ON during operation
LED4 SSR4 and 5 operation check (dryer heater) ON during operation
LED5 SSR6 operation check (dryer heater) ON during operation
LED6 SSR7 operation check (dryer heater) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X34 operation check (printer main relay) ON during operation
LED8 Relay X31 operation check (processing solution ON during operation
float switch safety thermostat)

6. Electrical parts
LED9 Relay X32, 33 operation check (dryer safety ON during operation
thermostat)
LED10 DC24 V-1 voltage check ON when power is supplied.
LED11 DC24 V-3 voltage check ON when power is supplied.

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

FL1 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL2 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL3 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL4 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
F41 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F42 T3.15 A/250 V STB heater
F43 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F44 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F45 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F46 T10 A/250 V Dryer heater
F47 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F48 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F49 T15 A/250 V Dryer heater
F50 T15 A/250 V Dryer heater

66220 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

66230
Description of PCB (processor section)

Sub relay PCB (J390935)

6. Electrical parts
May not be mounted depending on conditions

G074501

! Function
• Controls the power of 24 V (dryer fan, drive motor)
• Turn the power supply ON/OFF with the interlock switches (processor top cover, dryer cover), dryer safety thermostat and the
processing solution float switch.
• Relays the signal of the main relay PCB and the processor control PCB.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• None

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1

66230 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

66230
Description of PCB (processor section)

! 2. Precautions for replacement

• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

• Refer to 4203 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4253 ☞ Sub relay PCB.

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 Relays X28, 29 operation check (processing ON during operation
solution float switch)
LED2 Relay X25, 30 operation check (dryer cover) ON during operation
LED3 Relay X26 operation check (processor top cover) ON during operation

6. Electrical parts
LED4 Relay X27 operation check (dryer fan) ON during operation
LED5 Processor power supply 1 check ON when power is supplied.
LED6 Processor power supply 2 check ON when power is supplied.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Processor power supply 1 DC24 Possible
V voltage measurement
TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Processor power supply 2 DC24 Possible
V voltage measurement

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F61 T5 A/250 V Drive motor
F62 T5 A/250 V Dryer fan
F63 T3.15 A/250 V Processor power supply 2
F64 T3.15 A/250 V Sub relay PCB 24 V-3 protection
F65 T5 A/250 V Processor I/O PCB 24 V
protection
F66 T5 A/250 V Processor I/O PCB 24 V
protection

66230 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

66600
Description of PCB (processor section)

SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM]

Unused
G070013

! Function

6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB.
☞ 27830

! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P606 Unused

! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.

66600 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

66600
Description of PCB (processor section)

LED No. Purpose Status

LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED7 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check ON when power is supplied.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check ON when power is supplied.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
TPG2 Ground Possible

VR No. Purpose Remarks

6. Electrical parts
VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment

66600 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

67400
Description of PCB (processor section)

Power supply (processor)

G074433

! Function
Symbol Name Parts Function Remarks
No.
PS7 Processor power supply 1 I038320 Supplies power of DC + 5 V to the DC+5 V

6. Electrical parts
processor control PCB and the
processor I/O PCB.
PS8 Processor power supply 2 I038286 Supplies power of DC + 24 V to DC+24 V
the processor control PCB, the
processor I/O PCB and the sub
relay PCB.
PS9 Processor power supply 3 Supplies power of DC + 24 V to DC+24 V
the sub relay PCB.

IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the machine and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Position
☞ 63200_1
! 2. Precautions for replacement
Symbol Power supply Precautions for replacement
PS7 Processor power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
PS8 Processor power supply 2 shipping.
PS9 Processor power supply 3

! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

67400 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

67400
Description of PCB (processor section)

! 4. Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symbol Power supply Reference
PS7 Processor power supply 1 Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS7).
PS8 Processor power supply 2 Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS8).
PS9 Processor power supply 3 Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS9).

! Unused connector
• None

! Component parts table

Fuse
Symbol Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
PS7 Processor power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
PS8 Processor power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
PS9 Processor power supply 3 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection

6. Electrical parts

67400 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

68050
Description of PCB (processor section)

Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan)

• Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.
To set the power supply specification, wire between terminal strips TA1 and TA2 of the processor power supply section, and change the
connection of jumper connector (J659) on the main relay PCB.

TA1

TA2
G074440

! Change procedure

1. Wiring change
Wiring Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V Three phases, three wires (AC 200 Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V
No. to AC 240 V) V to AC 240 V) to AC 415 V)
A L1 − 1 L1 − 1 L1 − 1
L2 − 2 L2 − 2 L2 − 3

6. Electrical parts
B
C L3 − 6 L3 − 4 L3 − 5
D N−6 N−6 N−2
F 1−3 1−5 6−6
H 2−4 2−3 2−4
J 3−5 6−6 6−6

2. Check the connection of the connector of dryer heater (J659).

Check that the connector (J659) on the main relay PCB is connected to its input voltage.
3. Check the connection of the connectors for transformer.
Change the connection of the connector (J642) on the main relay PCB so that it is connected to its input voltage.
4. Checking the description on the tag
Check the tag attached around the circuit breaker to see if the description on the tag matches with the power supply
specifications.
If the power supply specification is changed, change the description on the tag.
5. Indication change of the power supply specification
In the Machine Specification mode, change the power supply specification. ☞ 35800

68050 1/4
Distributed by: [Link]

68050
Description of PCB (processor section)

! Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Main relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G074442

68050 2/4
Distributed by: [Link]

68050
Description of PCB (processor section)

! Three phases, three wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Main relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G074443

68050 3/4
Distributed by: [Link]

68050
Description of PCB (processor section)

! Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V to AC 415 V)

Main relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G074444

68050 4/4
Distributed by: [Link]

68100_1
Cables
Cables

Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable

! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
ARCNET-HUB PCB J133 (OUT), J134 (IN) ☞ 88000 Option
J135 (OUT), J136 (IN)
J137 (OUT), J138 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
AFC/scanner control PCB J20(OUT), J21(IN) ☞ 65000
PC-scanner interface PCB J71(OUT), J72(IN) ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB J73(OUT), J74(IN) ☞ 88000
Printer control PCB J212 (OUT), J213 (IN) ☞ 64140_1
J214 (OUT), J215 (IN)
J216 (OUT), J217 (IN)
Laser control PCB J1516(OUT), J1517(IN) ☞ 64150_1
Processor control PCB J518(OUT), J517(IN) ☞ 66200
PU control PCB P300 (OUT), P299 (IN) ☞ 88000 Option

! Precautions when handling the optical fiber cable

• Do not bend the optical fiber cable by R25 mm or less. The cable may break. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50
mm. When inserting, removing, or laying the cable, do not use force. Do not secure the cable with mini-bands, clamps or the like.

Optical fiber cable

6. Electrical parts
G051006
• When the optical fiber cable is to be removed from the PCB, pull the cable straight out while pressing part A in the direction
indicated by the arrow. When the cable is to be connected, push it straight as far as it will go.

Part A Optical fiber cable

Connector on the PCB

G051007

IMPORTANT
• If pulling the optical fiber cable out forcibly without pressing part A, the sheath of the cable is broken and a part of
the sheath remains in the connector, resulting in the communication error.

68100_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

68100_1
Cables

• Since the optical fiber cable is provided with IN and OUT ends, be careful to connect them correctly. If part A of the connector on
the PCB is white, the cable end should indicate OUT. If part A is black, the cable end should indicate IN. The OUT cable end is
marked using a white tape. There is no marking on the IN cable end.
OUT

Part A (White) Optical fiber cable

Connector on the PCB

Marking on the cable

The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the connector.

G051008

IN
Part A (Black) Optical fiber cable
Connector on the PCB

No marking on the cable

The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the PCB.

G051009

6. Electrical parts
• If the optical fiber cable is damaged, it cannot be reused even after the damaged part has been cut off. A communication error
occurs.
Optical fiber cable
Connector on the PCB

Do not reuse this cable even if the damaged part

has been cut off.
Damaged part

G051010
• Do not place an excessive load on the optical fiber cable or let a hard or heavy object fall on it.
• Do not damage the sheath of the optical fiber cable. A dent or flaw on the sheath is however small, means the optical fiber cable
cannot be used.
• Never touch the end face of the optical fiber cable with bare hands. Communication will not be possible if oil or dust adheres to
the cable end, or if the cable end is scratched.

! PCBs and unit to which the LVDS cable has been connected
PCB name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
Laser control PCB P1513 ☞ 64150_1
Scanner unit P60 -
PC-scanner interface PCB J436 ☞ 88000
PC-laser interface PCB J445 ☞ 88000

68100_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

68100_1
Cables

! Precautions when handling the LVDS cable

Do not bend the LVDS cable by R20 mm or less. The cable may break. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm. When
inserting, removing, attaching the ferrite core, or wiring the cable, do not use force.

LVDS cable

G063561

6. Electrical parts

68100_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

68200
Cables

Handling the flat cable

! PCBs to which the flat cable has been connected

For the connector is insertion type
PCB name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
Connecting PCB 1 P1002 ☞ 65200 135/240 AFC-II
Connecting PCB 3 P1009 ☞ 65220 135/240 AFC-II
Driver PCB 2 P1032 ☞ 65240 135/240 AFC-II
Magnetic head PCB P1040 ☞ 65270 135/240 AFC-II
Connecting PCB P1074 ☞ 65290 120 AFC-II
Sensor PCB P1080 ☞ 65300 120 AFC-II
Connecting PCB P1074 ☞ 65310 110 AFC-II
Sensor PCB P1080 ☞ 65320 110 AFC-II
MMC connecting PCB P1172 ☞ 65330 135/240 MMC-II
MMC sensor PCB P1181 ☞ 65340 135/240 MMC-II 135/240 AMC-II
AMC connecting PCB P1303 ☞ 65350 135/240 AMC-II

For the connector is sandwich type (A)

PCB name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
Connecting PCB 1 P1001 ☞ 65200 135/240 AFC-II
Connecting PCB 2 P1010 ☞ 65210 135/240 AFC-II
Connecting PCB 4 P1004 ☞ 65280 135/240 AFC-II
Sensor PCB P1014 ☞ 65250 135/240 AFC-II
135 AFC connecting PCB P1292 ☞ 65360 135/240 AFC-II

6. Electrical parts
135 AFC sensor PCB P1295 ☞ 65370 135/240 AFC-II

! Precautions when handling the flat cable

For the connector is insertion type
1. Connect the flat cable straight.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.

Contact section
Flat cable

Connector

G052634
2. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable inserted
insufficiently, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Check the insertion direction of the flat cable and then proceed.

68200 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

68200
Cables

For the connector is sandwich type (A)

1. When removing the flat cable, open the lock plate of the connector, and then remove the flat cable. If the flat cable is pulled out
while the lock plate is not opened, the lock plate is damaged.
Flat cable (The connection side is downward.)

Lock plate
Release

Fix.

Connector

G054665
2. When connecting the flat cable to the connector, do not allow the cable to be tilted.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go and lock it with a lock plate. If the main power supply of the machine is turned
on with the cable being locked insufficiently, the PCB and cable are damaged.
4. Insert the flat cable with the connection side downward.

6. Electrical parts

68200 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

68500
Power ON/OFF
Power ON/OFF

System starting

! How to start the system when normal operation

! According to the program timer

1. At the time set on the Program Timer, the processor temperature adjustment starts.
2. The signal for start is sent from the processor control PCB and the computer starts.
3. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.

! In the program timer mode

1. Press the start switch of the computer.

2. The processor temperature adjustment starts.
3. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.

! How to start the system after the maintenance (the circuit breaker is turned off.)

! According to turn on the circuit breaker (when the circuit breaker is turned off while operating)

1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on and the temperature adjustment starts.
3. Press the start switch of the computer.

6. Electrical parts
4. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.

! According to turn on the circuit breaker (when the circuit breaker is turned off in program timer mode)

1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on to activate the program timer.

68500 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

68550_1
Power ON/OFF

When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper)

! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied during operation.

! Status
• Power supply (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased, pressing the manual sorter switch for two seconds or
longer does not supply the power (from 200 V to 240 V ).

! Position of the starter jumper

Main relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Starter jumper
G078422

68550_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

68550_1
Power ON/OFF

! Diagnosis

Are the personal computer, monitor, and each unit operating?

Not operating Yes, they are operating.

No problem.

Is LED9 on the main relay PCB ON?

ON OFF
Mend or
replace. Check the connector imperfect contact and cable
connection.
J/P646 (main relay PCB) ↔ J/P355 (relay) ↔ J/P123
(relay) ↔ J/P161 (relay)
There is a J/P682 (power PCB 2) ↔ J/P55 (power supply)
problem.
Check the main relay PCB.

No problem.

Check the connector imperfect contact and cable connection.

J/P656 (main relay PCB) ↔ J/P797 (processor power 3)
J/P656 (main relay PCB) ↔ J/P798 (processor power 3)

There is a Check the blown fuse.

problem. F14 (125 V/6.3 A) (main relay PCB)
Check the main relay PCB.

6. Electrical parts
No problem.

Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of
main relay PCB. Make the main relay between 200 V and 240 V turn ON forcibly.

Check the version of processor via System Version Check.

Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.

Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the main relay PCB is ON.
ON

OFF

Processor control PCB failure

68550_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

7000

7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) .....................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) ..............................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ............................................................................................70022_1
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..............................................70040
Processor setting check [N] ...............................................................................................................................70050
Checking the processor setting [SM] ...............................................................................................................70050

7 Setup for service personnel

7000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature

adjustment)

! Procedures

1. No.1319:Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. may appear onscreen when
the machine is turned on.

If the attention message shown above appears onscreen, scanner-related data will be initialized after the system is restarted.
For details, refer to ☞ 41318.

2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No.6331:Line
scanning communication error. or No.6900:Main control system error. may appear.

When the error above occurs, release the error and upgrade the system using the CD so as not to display this error message.

3. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start [Link] in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of scanner section/printer section/processor section
may not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software in Installation procedure of the QSS
software ☞ 88000.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the data of the machine as explained in To
upgrade the QSS software.

4. Preparation of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk Type B

7. Setup for service personnel

• Scanner adjustment chart
• For 135 AFC
• For 240 AFC
• For 120 AFC
• For 110 AFC
• For MMC, AMC
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. Refer to Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

5. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.

6. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.

7. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.

70010 1/5
Distributed by: [Link]

70010
Setup for service personnel

" Auto film carrier

Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
" Cleaning the laser unit
Cleaning the laser dustproof glass
" Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.
• For details about how to clean, refer to Maintenance Manual.

8. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the Menu
display.

(1) Press F to select Menu.

(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

9. Reading the initial data

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are four initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor

7. Setup for service personnel

INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data

10. Installing the Capacity Booster Software

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, refer to ☞ 88000.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.

11. Registering and checking the machine specification

Register all the items.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment ☞ 33600

70010 2/5
Distributed by: [Link]

70010
Setup for service personnel

• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030

• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

12. Installing the optional software

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
• Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
• For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the
Image Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.

13. Check the registration of the options.

Check if the equipped options are registered.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Option Registration

14. Check the processor setting.

☞ 70050
15. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.
Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.
The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020 DX Sensor Standard

7. Setup for service personnel

Adjustment Adjustment
☞ 35000 ☞ 35060
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

16. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.

(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position.
When using S-2/S-3, if the difference of the displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis
Adjustment is required.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
2 120 AFC ±28 pixels

70010 3/5
Distributed by: [Link]

70010
Setup for service personnel

Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Difference of G values when adjusting the

light axis
3 110 AFC ±28 pixels
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.

(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position.
The Swing and Tilt of S-2/S-3 must be adjusted if the difference between the values displayed exceeds that shown in
the table.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 27/54 step
2 120 AFC 27/54 step
3 110 AFC 24/54 step

*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 37000.

17. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.

7. Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 37010.

18. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 37020.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment

19. Scanner light source update

NOTE
• After carrying out the focus adjustment of the scanner unit, be sure to carry out light source update.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 37030.

70010 4/5
Distributed by: [Link]

70010
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update

20. Paper Sensor Adjustment

Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each
sensor.
☞ 36000
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
The work to do until the processing solution temperature is adjusted is now completed. After the temperature adjustment of the
processing solution has been completed, proceed to the next item 70020 Works after completing the temperature adjustment.

7. Setup for service personnel

70010 5/5
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature

adjustment)

! Procedures

1. Process control strip.

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For the processing procedure, refer to Control strip processing in the Operator's Manual - Basic Operations -.

2. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Functions → Test Print (Paper Magazines A/B) and make test prints and
correct zigzagging so that the zigzagging amount (A-B) is within ±0.3 mm for both two test prints.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36060.

Line A
A

7. Setup for service personnel

B

Line B

G074514

3. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment→Functions→Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B) and confirm
following two points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.

70020 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment

Paper advance direction Paper Front End to 0 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value

A
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm

For checking 0 mm-line to 254

mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value

Rear end

G074524

(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36080.
(2) Check the 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.

7. Setup for service personnel

Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36080.

4. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction

Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm the four points above. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
NOTE
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or more.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment

70020 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

Center line

For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)

For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)

For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)

For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

7. Setup for service personnel

G074526

(1) Check the Exposure Magnification Correction.

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance of 130 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36020.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out for any one of magazine A or B, it is complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36030.
(3) Checking the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check with the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 130 line to see if lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are in a straight line.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A or B, it is
complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36040.

70020 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A and B.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36070.

5. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Check that the setup switch is set to ON.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 32510.

6. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup

7. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.

8. Print Channel Setting [Prints from the film]

7. Setup for service personnel

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Set the print channel to print from each film.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

9. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

70020 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

10. Checking the print color and density [Master Data]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 135F negative•positive which is frequently
used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
135 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
135 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).

• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.

Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

11. Checking the print color and density [Reference Slope, Scanner Slope]
NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 240 negative•positive, 120 negative•positive,
and 110 negative•positive, which are frequently used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→Reference Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
240 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→240→Scanner Slope, then correct N (normal),

7. Setup for service personnel

U (under), and O (over).
110 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→110→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
110 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→110→Scanner Slope, then correct N (normal),
U (under), and O (over).
120 negative (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Each film size→Scanner Slope, then correct
6×8, 6×9) N (normal), U (under), and O (over).
120 positive (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Each film size→Scanner Slope, then correct
6×8, 6×9) N (normal), U (under), and O (over).

• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.

Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

12. Checking the print color and density [DX Slope]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) If color and density corrections are necessary for each negative size (135F, 135H, 135P, 135HD, 240) by each
manufacture•film sensitivity, correct them in the following mode.
Negative Input mode
135F negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135F→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).

70020 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

Negative Input mode

135H negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135H→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135P negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135P→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135HD negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→135HD→DX Slope, then correct N (normal),
U (under), and O (over).
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

13. Letter blur check

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the
colors around the letters on the print is blurred too much, adjust it if necessary.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 32510.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup

14. Banding check

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction → Functions→Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/B) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36090.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation

7. Setup for service personnel

Correction

15. Monitor setup

In the case of specifications other than DLS

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 32530.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
For DLS specification
Adjust the monitor.
• For details about Monitor adjustment, refer to ☞ 88000.
Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.

16. DSA setting [Negative•Positive (135, 240, 120, and 110)]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

70020 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70020
Setup for service personnel

(1) If DSA correction is necessary after making prints of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the
negative•positive (135, 240, 120, and 110), set TYPE 1, 2 and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

17. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set TYPE 1, 2
and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

18. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.
This floppy disk is used to save the internal data of the machine after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk

7. Setup for service personnel

19. Saving the backup data
Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 18.
This completes the works.

70020 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer]

! Procedures

1. Preparation of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk Type B
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. Refer to Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

2. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.

3. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.

4. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
" Cleaning the laser unit
Cleaning the laser dustproof glass
• For details about how to clean, refer to Maintenance Manual.

5. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the Menu

7. Setup for service personnel

display.

(1) Press F to select Menu.

(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

6. Upgrading the system program

Upgrade the system program.
IMPORTANT
• When the system upgrade was not carried out, the machine may not work properly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software in Installation procedure of the QSS
software ☞ 88000.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the data of the machine as explained in To
upgrade the QSS software.

7. Reading the initial data

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).

70022_1 1/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are four initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data

8. Installing the QSS−3300 PRO Master CD Software

• For procedures about installing the QSS−3300 PRO Master CD Software, refer to ☞ 88000.

9. Registering and checking the machine specification

Register all the items.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment ☞ 33600
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

7. Setup for service personnel

10. Installing the optional software
• Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
• For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the
Image Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.

11. Check the registration of the options.

Check if the equipped options are registered.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Option Registration

12. Check the processor setting.

☞ 70050
13. Paper Sensor Adjustment
Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each
sensor.
☞ 36000

70022_1 2/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment

14. Process control strip.

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For the processing procedure, refer to Control strip processing in the Operator's Manual - Basic Operations -.

15. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Functions → Test Print (Paper Magazines A/B) and make test prints and
correct zigzagging so that the zigzagging amount (A-B) is within ±0.3 mm for both two test prints.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36060.

Line A
A

7. Setup for service personnel

B

Line B

G074514

16. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment→Functions→Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B) and confirm
following two points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment

70022_1 3/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

Paper advance direction Paper Front End to 0 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value

A
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm

For checking 0 mm-line to 254

mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value

Rear end

G074524

(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36080.
(2) Check the 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36080.

17. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification

7. Setup for service personnel

Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction

Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm the four points above. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
NOTE
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or more.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment

70022_1 4/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

Center line

For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)

For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)

For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)

For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

7. Setup for service personnel

G074526

(1) Check the Exposure Magnification Correction.

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance of 130 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36020.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out for any one of magazine A or B, it is complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36030.
(3) Checking the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check with the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 130 line to see if lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are in a straight line.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A or B, it is
complete.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36040.

70022_1 5/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A and B.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36070.

18. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Check that the setup switch is set to ON.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 32510.

19. Initial Setup

Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup

20. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.

21. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

7. Setup for service personnel

(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

22. Letter blur check

Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the
colors around the letters on the print is blurred too much, adjust it if necessary.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 32510.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup

23. Banding check

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction → Functions→Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/B) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 36090.

70022_1 6/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70022_1
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction

24. Monitor setup

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 32530.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup

25. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]

(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set TYPE 1, 2
and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

26. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.
This floppy disk is used to save the internal data of the machine after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Bringing up the display

7. Setup for service personnel

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk

27. Saving the backup data

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 26.
This completes the works.

70022_1 7/7
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

Other works after installation (Language setting except English and

Japanese)

The English messages are displayed on the monitor on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.
It is necessary to set the Regional Options and install the translated message data so that the messages in the local language are displayed
and text in that language can be input.
Change the setting according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Prepare the following data in advance.
• Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
• Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)

! To bring up the Windows display

Bring up the Windows display when setting each item such as the dictionary function relating to the Windows system.
Switch the display according to the following procedure.
1. Bring up the Close Down Checks display.
Bringing up the display
Click F via Order Display. → Menu → Extension → Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display

S0009-00-UM02

2. Click F: Functions.
The F: Functions display appears.

7. Setup for service personnel

F: Functions display

S0009-00-UM62

3. Click Quit The Application.

The confirmation window to end the application appears.
4. Click YES: Execute.
The confirmation window appears again.
5. Click YES: Execute.
The Windows display appears.

! To install the message file

Build the translated local language's message file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following
procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click [Link] in the floppy disk.
Installation starts.

70040 1/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050657

4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

7. Setup for service personnel

G050660
Installation of the message file is complete.
Next, install the HELP file.

! To install the HELP file

Build the translated local language's Help file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.

1. Insert the CD-ROM in which the HELP file is saved into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [Link] file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
Installation starts.

70040 2/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G056142

4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

7. Setup for service personnel

G056143
Installation of the HELP file is complete.
Next, make setting for the language.

! Setting the language

1. Select Start → Settings → Control Panel.

Example: Windows display

G050628

70040 3/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

2. Double-click Regional Options.

Select the items in the following order.
Example: Control Panel display

G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the region (country) and language.
(1) Select the appropriate language and check the box in the Language settings for the system list.
Example: Regional Options display

7. Setup for service personnel

G050662

70040 4/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

(2) Click and click the appropriate locale (location).

Example: Regional Options display

G050612

4. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Click Add.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663
7. Setup for service personnel
(2) Select the Input locale.
Example: Add Input Locale display

G050666

70040 5/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

(3) Select the Keyboard layout.

Example: Add Input Locale display

G050666

(4) Click OK.

The display returns to the Regional Options display.
(5) Select the language as default use.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

(6) Click Set as Default.

The language is registered as the default.
Example: Regional Options display

7. Setup for service personnel

G050663

5. Click Apply.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

70040 6/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

6. Click OK.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

7. Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-R or CD-R/W into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050664
The file copy starts. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
8. Click No.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050667

9. Restart the machine.

7. Setup for service personnel

(1) Click Start and click Shut Down.
Example: Windows display

G050604

70040 7/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

(2) Click , and click Shut down.

Example: Shut down Windows display

G050605

(3) Click OK.

Windows is quit and monitor display disappears.
(4) Confirm that the power lamp goes off.
Power lamp

G073865

(5) Turn off the circuit breaker.

(6) Turn on the circuit breaker in 10 seconds after it was turned off.
The power turns ON and after a while, the power supply of the display monitor turns ON automatically and then the

7. Setup for service personnel

message Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality. appears.
This completes the operation.
10. Select the appropriate language on the Machine Specification display.
Select the appropriate language and set it.

(1) Bring up the Machine Specification display.

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
(2) Click and select Language.
Example: Machine Specification display

S3066-00-SM00

70040 8/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70040
Setup for service personnel

(3) Click and select HELP Language.

Example: Machine Specification display

S3066-00-SM00

(4) Click YES: Enter.

7. Setup for service personnel

70040 9/9
Distributed by: [Link]

70050
Setup for service personnel

Processor setting check [N]

Description for each specification

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Checking the processor setting [SM].

! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed

1. Check the measured value of the pump output amount.

Measure the pump output amount and check if the measured value is the same as the registered value.
If the measured value is different from the setting value, register the measured value.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting

7. Setup for service personnel

70050 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

70050
Setup for service personnel

Checking the processor setting [SM]

! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed

1. Initial replenishment operation of the pump

Prepare the containers to receive the solutions from CD-A, CD-B, CD-C and STB replenisher pumps, and carry out the initial
replenishment operation.
To measure the accurate pump output amounts, this operation is carried out only for these pumps.
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 27810.
NOTE
• When the initial replenishment is executed, all the replenisher pumps and water supply pumps operate simultaneously.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Initial Replenishment Operation

7. Setup for service personnel

70050 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

70050
Setup for service personnel

This page is intentionally blank.

7. Setup for service personnel

70050 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

8000

8. Appendix

Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................. 80110

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Scanner Section) ..................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) ....................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] ........................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] .....................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N] ..........................................................................................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM] .......................................................................................80110
Positions of paper jam release labels .............................................................................. 80210_1
Positions of paper jam release labels .............................................................................................................80210_1
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] ...........................................................................................................................80310
Service personnel tool list [SM] ........................................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................. 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ...........................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) .............................................. 81020
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ...........................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................ 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] ....................................................................................81510
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ................................................... 88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ................................................................................88000
Table of wiring diagrams ................................................................................................. 89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams ...............................................................................................................................89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89010
Wiring diagram table [S-4] ................................................................................................................................89010

8 Appendix

8000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Scanner Section)

The list below shows the checks and replacement of parts that need to be performed regularly by user and service personnel to keep the
normal machine operation.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, check them regularly and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need replacing according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement timing
varies depending on the operating condition of the machine.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you do not always have to replace the parts on the specified timing.
• As to the periodically replaced parts, replace the parts when the processing time or the number of prints processed
reaches the specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values described below do not indicate any warranty periods.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.

! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

! LED light source unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the dust U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - If dust is not removed
prevention glass in the If the dust cannot be removed, wipe closing from the dust prevention
LED light source unit it using a cleaning cloth. down glass, it may adversely
affect the print quality.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Scanner unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace

8. Appendix
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the scanner dust U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - If dust is not removed
prevention glass If the dust cannot be removed, wipe closing from the dust prevention
it using a cleaning cloth. down glass, it may adversely
affect the print quality.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Main body frame unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the brush for the U Use a vacuum cleaner and so on. - At - - It damages the film. Be
film cleaner closing sure to remove dust.
down

80110 1/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the film carrier U Wipe it using a cloth. - 1-week - - To prevent dust
mount rail and the accumulates on the lens
peripheral area unit of the film carrier
and the dust prevention
glass in the LED light
source unit.
Cleaning the air filter U Remove the air filter at the bottom - - - If the air does not flow
of the scanner section, and vacuum smoothly due to the dust
the dust using a vacuum cleaner. accumulated on the air
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn filter, the temperature in
the side with dust down and wash it the control box may
with running water. increase and it may
cause malfunction of the
PCBs.
Cleaning the discharge U Clean the discharge terminal - - - If dust accumulates at
terminal section of the section with a cotton swab. Remove the discharge terminal
film cleaner the dust by rubbing both brushes. section, it makes
impossible to remove
static electricity and the
dust cannot be removed
in result.
U: user, S: service personnel

! 135/240 AFC-II, 135 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the film path U Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - At - - If dust is not removed
surface damp cloth. closing from the film path, it
Dry it up after wiping each part. down may adversely affect the
1-week print quality as dust
appears on the print or

8. Appendix
the image data. It also
damages the film. Be
sure to remove dust.
Cleaning each sensor U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - The error related to the
closing sensors of the film
down carrier such as Film has
stopped at the Film
Carrier. may occur.
Cleaning the film advance U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At - - Remove the dust on the
roller closing film path, otherwise the
down film advance rollers
Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - 1-week may slip and a black
damp soft cloth while rotating the margin may appear on
roller. the printed image. Also,
Dry it up after wiping each part. the message Film has
stopped at the Film
Carrier. may occur.

80110 2/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the magnetic U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At - - Attention message No.
head *1 closing 1404: The IX frame
down data is incomplete.
Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - 1-week may occur.
damp cloth.
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using a cotton swab dipped in
isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning the dummy head U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At
*1
Wipe it using the firmly squeezed closing
damp cloth. down
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using a cotton swab dipped in
isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning the brush (upper U Clean it using the blower brush. - - - It damages the film. Be
and lower ones) sure to remove dust.
Cleaning the slot at the U Clean by the blower brush. If dust - - - If dust is not removed
scanner opening cannot be removed, wipe it with the from the light path, it
maintenance stick. may adversely affect the
Cleaning the film inlet U Clean it using the blower brush. - print quality.
Cleaning the rewinding U Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - - - Be sure to remove dust
unit damp cloth. since it may damage the
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe film or may cause
it using a cotton swab dipped in defective winding.
isopropyl alcohol.
Dry it up after wiping each part.
Cleaning the lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - - - Remove the dust from
blower brush or air spray. the light path,
otherwise, it may
adversely affect the
print quality as dust
appears on the print or
the image data. Also, it
may cause unevenness

8. Appendix
of the scanner light
source at updating the
light source.
Cleaning the bottom side U Wipe it using a cloth. - 1-week - - It is to prevent dust
of AFC accumulates on the dust
prevention glass in the
LED light source unit.
Maintenance stick U Wash the rubber section under - Whene - - Dust adheres on the
running water or with neutral ver light path, and it may
detergent, and firmly squeeze and necessa adversely affect the
dry it completely. ry print quality.
*1. Not equipped with 135 AFC-II 120 AFC-II 110 AFC-II.
U: user, S: service personnel

80110 3/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! 135/240 AMC-II 135/240 MMC-II

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Loading stocker*1 U Clean the inside of it using the - At - - It is to prevent dust
Ejection stocker*1 U firmly-squeezed damp cloth or the - closing accumulates on the each
blower brush. down section of the mount and
Mount ejection roller*1 U Clean it using the firmly squeezed - the film carrier.
damp cloth.
Mount carrier*1 U Clean it using the blower brush. -
Ejection stocker mount*1 U -
Cleaning the reflection U Clean it using a moistened cotton - The message No. 6423
mirror swab with water or a blower brush. Auto focus error. may
Wipe it using a dry cotton swab not occur.
to make unevenness.
Cleaning each sensor U Clean it using the blower brush. - If each sensor may get
dirt, Mount detection
error or Mount
operation error may
occur.
Lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust from
blower brush or air spray. the light path,
otherwise, it may
adversely affect the
print quality as dust
appears on the print or
the image data. Also, it
may cause unevenness
of the scanner light
source at updating the
light source.

*1. Not equipped on 135/240 MMC-II.

U: user, S: service personnel

8. Appendix

80110 4/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! MFC
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Film viewer U Clean it using the blower brush. If - At - - It is to prevent dust from
Surface of the move table U the dirt cannot be removed, wipe it - closing adhering each part.
using the firmly-squeezed damp down
*1
cloth.
Lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust from
blower brush or air spray. the light path,
If the dust cannot be removed, wipe otherwise, it may
it using a cleaning cloth. adversely affect the
print quality as dust
appears on the print or
the image data. Also, it
may cause unevenness
of the scanner light
source at updating the
light source.
Cleaning the attachment U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust,
(film setting side, film blower brush or air spray. otherwise it may
pressure side) adversely affect the
print quality as it
appears on the print or
the image data.

*1. Wipe the part or item once a week using the firmly-squeezed damp cloth.
U: user, S: service personnel

! List of periodically replaced parts

None

! List of consumable parts

None

8. Appendix

80110 5/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer

Section)

The list below shows the checks and replacement of parts that need to be performed regularly by user and service personnel to keep the
normal machine operation.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, check them regularly and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need replacing according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement timing
varies depending on the operating condition of the machine.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you do not always have to replace the parts on the specified timing.
• As to the periodically replaced parts, replace the parts when the processing time or the number of prints processed
reaches the specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values described below do not indicate any warranty periods.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.

! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

! CRT monitor unit A

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the display U Wipe the tube face gently using a - Whene - - The dirt on the display
monitor soft cloth. If the dirt cannot be ver monitor makes difficult
removed, wipe it using the firmly necessa to judge correctly at
squeezed damp soft cloth with a ry correcting scanned
neutral detergent and water. image color and density,
and that may adversely
affect the print finish.

U: user, S: service personnel

8. Appendix
! Flatbed scanner
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the flatbed U Wipe the glass surface using a soft - Whene - - The dirt on the glass
scanner cloth. ver surface may adversely
necessa affect the scanning
ry image.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 6/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Table peripheral section

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the operation U Clean it using the blower brush, a - Whene - - Dust coming into the
keyboard or the computer vacuum cleaner, the firmly- ver product may cause a
keyboard squeezed damp cloth, etc. necess machine failure.
ary

U: user, S: service personnel

! PC control unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the floppy disk U Clean it using a commercially - Whene - - Data may not be read
drive available floppy disk for cleaning. ver properly from the media
necess drive.
ary
Cleaning the MO drive U Clean it using the optional MO head - 3-
cleaner. month

U: user, S: service personnel

! Colorimeter unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the calibration U At Start Up Checks Z021441 At 2-year 1 Since the dirty
plate*1 If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe starting calibration plate makes
it using a firmly squeezed damp soft up the registration with the
cloth. After that, wipe it using a dry 1- incorrect standard value
cloth. month at the setup, it may

8. Appendix
At monthly check adversely affects the
Wipe the measurement area using a print finish.
firmly squeezed damp soft cloth
with a neutral detergent diluted with
water. Then, wipe and dry it up
using a dry soft cloth.
Cleaning the advance U Clean with the cleaning sheet for - 6- - - The measurement of the
roller colorimeter month setup prints may fail.

*1. Periodically replaced parts: It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality
(including calibration data FD).
U: user, S: service personnel

80110 7/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Paper magazine section

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning inside the paper U Remove the paper dust using a - Whene - - It may damage the
magazine and paper outlet vacuum cleaner. ver paper, or may fail the
Cleaning the paper U Wiping it using the firmly squeezed - necessa paper loading.
advance roller in the paper damp cloth ry
magazine
Cleaning the paper U Pull out the magazine mount and - 3- - - The messages No.1004,
magazine code sensors A clean the sensors using the blower month No.1005: Attach the
and B brush. Paper Magazine.
Paper Magazine A, B
No. 1010, No. 1011:
Change the Paper
Magazine. Paper
Magazine A, B may
occur.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Paper supply unit A

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the advance U Pull out the unit and check if it is - Whene - - The paper advance
roller not dirty. ver length may vary. Also,
Cleaning advance rollers U If it is dirty, clean it using the necessa the message No. 6012,
A and B blower brush and wipe it using the ry 6013: Paper did not
firmly squeezed damp cloth, if the load. Paper Magazine
dirt cannot be removed. A, B may appear.
Arm unit 1 U Set the cleaning sheet (for cleaning - 3- - - The message No. 6101:
the pressure roller) to the paper month Paper Hold Motor
magazine and clean it. operation error. may
Clean it once in three months or appear.

8. Appendix
every 180,000 prints (whichever
comes first). Cleaning sheet is an
user's periodically replaced parts.
Paper end sensor A or B U Pull out the unit and clean it using - The message No. 6021:
Paper loading sensor U the blower brush. Paper remains in the
printer section. may
Paper supply end sensor U
appear.
Paper hold sensor U The message No. 6101:
Paper Hold Motor
operation error. may
appear.
Slide shaft of arm unit 1 U Pull the unit out and apply a grease. - 6- - - If arm unit 1 does not
month move smoothly, it will
cause paper meandering
or paper jam.
Paper cutter unit S Check if it cuts well and replace it if 3301: 2-year - 1 The dull paper cutter
not. Z020657 may cause the paper end
Maintenance parts 3300, everted.
Replace it approx. every 1,500,000 3301SD:
prints by the print counter. Z023228

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 8/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Exposure advance unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Laser dustproof glass U Clean the laser dustproof glass by - - - Line may be printed.
moving the brush unit back and At
forth slowly. If it does not work, it starting
is possible to wipe the laser up
dustproof glass off by the cleaning
cloth.
Refer to White line appears on the
prints. in the Troubleshooting
Manual.
Cleaning the exposure U Check if it is not dirty by pulling - Whene - - The message No. 6017:
advance inlet drive roller paper supply unit A out. ver Paper has jammed in
Cleaning the exposure U If it is dirty, clean it using the - necessa the printer section.
advance inlet pressure blower brush. ry may appear.
roller If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using the firmly squeezed damp
cloth.
Brush unit Remove the brush unit and remove - 1-week - - Line may be printed.
dust on the brush using the vacuum
cleaner.
Focal plane regulating Remove the focal plane regulating - - -
guide guide and clean the guide using the
blower brush.
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using the firmly squeezed damp
cloth.
Cleaning the pressure U Set the cleaning sheet (for cleaning - 3- - - Line appears on a print.
roller the pressure roller) to the paper month Also, it may occur that
magazine and clean it. the paper meanders in
Clean it once in three months or the exposure advance
every 180,000 prints (whichever unit, or it may not
comes first). Cleaning sheet is an correctly execute
user's periodically replaced parts. Exposure Start
Position Correction or
Exposure Advance

8. Appendix
Motor Speed
Correction.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 9/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Paper advance unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Drive roller in the turn U Pull out the unit and check if it is - Whene - - The message No. 6017:
unit not dirty. ver Paper has jammed in
Pressure roller of arm unit U If it is dirty, clean it using the - necess the printer section.
2 blower brush. ary may appear.
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using the firmly squeezed damp
cloth.
Pressure roller in the turn U Set the cleaning sheet (for cleaning - 3- - -
unit the pressure roller) to the paper month
Drive roller of arm unit 2 U magazine and clean it. Clean it once -
in three months or every 180,000
prints (whichever comes first).
Cleaning sheet is an user's
periodically replaced parts.
Paper advance pressure U Pull out the unit and clean it using - 3- - - The message No. 6144:
change sensor the blower brush. month Paper Advance
Pressure Change
Motor operation error.
may appear.
Selection sensor *1 U - The message No. 6145:
Lane Select Motor
operation error. may
appear.
Turn sensor U - The message No. 6147:
Turn Motor operation
error. may appear.
Arm sensor U - The message No. 6146:
Elevator rail *1 U Pull the unit out and apply a grease. - 6- - - Paper Advance Arm
month Motor operation error.
may appear.
Selection rail *1 U - The message No. 6145:
Lane Select Motor
operation error. may

8. Appendix
appear.

U: user, S: service personnel

*1. Not for 3300.

! Processor loading unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Advance roller U Check if it is not dirty by removing - Whene - - The message No. 6017:
the upper guide. ver Paper has jammed in
If it is dirty, clean it using the necessa the printer section.
blower brush. ry may appear.
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using the firmly squeezed damp
cloth.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 10/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! CVP unit (option)

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Dot head unit S Check the imprinting condition and I086167 3-year - 1 Although the ribbon
replace it if any dots are missing. cassette is replaced,
(One of the maintenance parts. imprinting may not
Replace it when the print counter perform correctly.
reaches 2,700,000 approximately.)

U: user, S: service personnel

! Printer door 1 (3301, 3302) *1

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Cleaning air filter (1) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A073538 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: user, S: service personnel

*1. Not for 3300, 3301SD and 3302SD.

! Printer control box 1

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Cleaning air filter (2) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A077931 1- - 1 If the air does not flow

8. Appendix
(For the single magazine) cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
Cleaning the air filter U If the dirt cannot be removed, turn A077890 1 accumulated on the air
(When the dual paper the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
magazine unit has been with running water. the control box may
attached) (Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 11/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Printer control box 2 (3301, 3302)

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Cleaning air filter (3) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A077828 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Printer fan box (3300, 3301SD, 3302SD)

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Remarks
ard ty
replac
ement
timing
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A128749 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Laser control box

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q' Reason for
ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing

8. Appendix
Cleaning air filter (4) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A077934 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: user, S: service personnel

! List of periodically replaced parts

For the procedure of replacing the maintenance parts by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

80110 12/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Colorimeter unit
Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Calibration plate unit B*1 U Z021441 1 2-year Since the dirty or deteriorated
calibration plate makes the registration
with the incorrect standard value at the
setup, it may adversely affects the print
finish.

*1. It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality (including calibration data FD).
U: user, S: service personnel

! PC control unit
Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Battery pack*1 S I085024 1 3-year If the battery pack deteriorates, the PC
may not shut down properly when
power goes out temporary, and the
HDD may be damaged.
USB A TO A (FEMALE) U I068443 1 Every 1500 orders If the cable unit connecting USB
CABLE ASSEMBLY memory deteriorates, data may not be
read properly from the media drive.

*1. Within three years from the date shown on the battery replacement label (for required two battery packs for high-spec PC)
U: user, S: service personnel

! Exposure advance unit / Paper advance unit

Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Cleaning sheet U A071740 1 Every cleaning (Clean Line appears on a print. Also, it may
it every three months.) occur that the paper meanders in the
exposure advance unit, or it may not
correctly execute Exposure Start
Position Correction or Exposure
Advance Motor Speed Correction.

8. Appendix
U: user, S: service personnel

! List of consumable parts

For the procedure of replacing the consumable part, refer to Maintenance Manual.

! Paper supply unit A

Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Reference value of Reason for
consumption maintenance/replacement
Ink ribbon cassette U H086044 1 100,000 prints If ink runs out, back print may not be
printed properly.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 13/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Processor Section) [N]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM].
The list below shows the checks and replacement of parts that need to be performed regularly by user and service personnel to keep the
normal machine operation.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, check them regularly and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need replacing according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement timing
varies depending on the operating condition of the machine.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you do not always have to replace the parts on the specified timing.
• As to the periodically replaced parts, replace the parts when the processing time or the number of prints processed
reaches the specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values described below do not indicate any warranty periods.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.

! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

! Upper guide
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
ard maintenance/replac
replac ement
ement
timing
Upper guides (Nos. 2 to 6) U Automatic cleaning every close - At - - The print may get
and squeegee unit down checks. closing damaged, dirty or
down uneven. The message
Cleaning upper guide U Clean it using a soft sponge with - 1-week - - No. 5535: Paper has
(No.1)*1 running lukewarm water. After jammed in the
processor section.

8. Appendix
that, dry it up and reattach it as it
was. may appear.
Cleaning upper guide (No. U Clean it with pouring warm water
2) and squeegee unit*1 and a soft sponge. Then soak it in a
bat filled with water.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft sponge
(Nos. 3 to 6)*1 with running lukewarm water.
After that, dry them up and
reattach them as they were.
Cleaning the guides of U Clean them using a soft sponge
processing racks (Nos. 1 with running lukewarm water.
to 6)*1 After that, reattach them as they
were.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft sponge - 1- - -
(Nos. 1 to 6) and squeegee with running lukewarm water. month
unit Then check its damage or wear.

80110 14/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
ard maintenance/replac
replac ement
ement
timing
Turn roller (4) (Nos. 3 to 6 S Check its damage or wear. If it is A078747 2-year 2-year 8 The print may get
upper guides) damaged or worn, replace it with a bent, damaged, dirty
Squeegee roller assembly S new one. A041042 3 or uneven. The
(Nos. 1 and 7 upper Check it every six months after message No. 5535:
guides) two years has passed. If necessary, Paper has jammed in
replace it with a new one. the processor section.
Turn roller (6) (No. 7 S A061850 2
may appear.
upper guide)
Turn roller (6) (No. 2 S A078801 2
upper guide)
Turn roller (7) (No. 2 S A078802 2
upper guide)
Pressure bushing (13) S Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 3-year 2700 30 The message No.
Pressure bushing (12) S damaged or worn, replace it with a A032742 hours 30 5535: Paper has
new one. jammed in the
Idle gear (38T) S A035162 2
Check it every six months after processor section.
Double gear S three years has passed. If A047651 7 may appear.
necessary, replace it with a new
one.
(As standard replacement timing,
replace it every three year when it
works for three hours per day.)
*1. Perform it at the close down checks on the day for the weekly regular checks.
U: user, S: service personnel

! Processing rack section [N]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Remarks
ard
replac
ement
timing
Processing racks (Nos. 1 U Wash it using a soft sponge with - 1- - - The print may get
to 6) running lukewarm water (30 to 40 month bent, damaged, dirty
degrees centigrade) so that any or uneven. The

8. Appendix
crystals are dissolved. message No. 5535:
Lower turn belt (For CD U Wash it using a soft sponge with A035148 2 Paper has jammed in
and BF) running lukewarm water. Check its the processor section.
damage and scratch. If necessary, A050029 may appear.
Lower turn belt (3) (For U 4
STB) replace it with a new one.
Side roller (3) (For 45 S Check its damage or wear. If it is A070749 19*1
seconds) (Nos. 1 and 2 damaged or worn, replace it with a
processing racks) new one.
Side roller (3) (For 25 Check it every six months after 11*1
seconds) (Nos. 1 and 2 two years has passed. If necessary,
processing racks) replace it with a new one.
Side roller (4) (For 45 S A078745 37*1
seconds)
Side roller (4) (For 25 29*1
seconds)

80110 15/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Remarks
ard
replac
ement
timing
Gasket S Check its damage. If it is damaged, A035127 2-year 2-year 6 Since the gasket is
replace it with a new one. attached to prevent the
Check it every six months after processing solution
two years has passed. If necessary, evaporated, the
replace it with a new one. processing solution
may be deteriorated
faster if the gasket is
damaged.
Bearing (1) (For 45 S Check its damage or wear. If it is A035075 3-year 2700 8 The message No.
*1
seconds) damaged or worn, replace it with a hours 5535: Paper has
Bearing (1) (For 25 new one. 6*1 jammed in the

seconds) Check it every six months after processor section.

three years has passed. If *1 may appear.
Bevel gear (22T) (For 45 S A035155 34
necessary, replace it with a new
seconds)
one.
Bevel gear (22T) (For 25 For standard replacement timing, 26*1
seconds) replace it every three years if it
Bevel gear S works three hours per day. A050695 6
Idle gear (23T) S A047719 6
Center bushing (For 45 S A216227 56
seconds) *1

Center bushing (For 25 40*1

seconds)
Bevel gear (2) (For 45 S A220062 34
*1
seconds)
Bevel gear (2) (For 25 26*1
seconds)
Bushing (1) S B010247 12
Bearing (3) assembly S A051198 6
*1. The quantity is different from [N] specification for other specifications.
U: user, S: service personnel

! Tank section [N]

8. Appendix
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
ard maintenance/replac
replac ement
ement
timing
Float switch U Push and sink the upper of the - 3- - - The crystallized
float with a stick and check that month processing solution on
the float moves up and down. the float may make the
float immovable
vertically. It may
damage on the
automatic refilling
function as the change
of the processing
solution amount
cannot be detected
correctly, and the
processing solution
may be deteriorated
faster in result.

80110 16/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
ard maintenance/replac
replac ement
ement
timing
Cleaning the processing U Wash it using a brush with water. - 1-year - - The print may get
solution tanks damaged, dirty or
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with water. - uneven.
solution block (For 25
seconds)
Filter cartridge U Check that it is not clogged or H029037 2-week 2- 6 If the filter cartridge is
deformed. In that case, replace it week dirty, it affects print
with a new one. quality. It affects the
circulation of the
solution as well, and
the message No. 5500,
5501, 5502: The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may appear
in result.
U: user, S: service personnel

! Frame section
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Automatic cleaning pipe U Check whether or not crystals stick - 2-week - - If crystals are stuck on
on the opening of the automatic the opening of the
cleaning pipe. If necessary, automatic cleaning
remove the pipe and wash it with pipe, water cannot be
such as a toothbrush. spouted to wash the
upper guides and the
print may get
damaged, dirty or
uneven, accordingly.

8. Appendix
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum - 1- - - If the air flow is
cleaner. month interfered by the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash filter, it cannot cool
it with running water. down the processing
tanks and the message
The processing
solution temperature
is above the safety
range. CD, BF, STB
may appear.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 17/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Replenisher section [N]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Remarks
ard
replac
ement
timing
Refilling water and water U Check the water amount. - At - - The message No. 500,
supply tanks closing 603, 801: Add water
down to the Refilling
Water Tank. may
appear.
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. (Replace it H056009 1- 1-year 3*1 The replenishment
pump strainer with a new one when it has been month solution cannot be
seriously damaged.) replenished correctly
Poppet valve (Fluoro S Check its damage. If it is I091040 3-year 3-year 2*1 and the processing
rubber CP-47L, VPII, damaged, replace it with a new solution may be
QLII, ACPII) one. deteriorated faster in
result. The pump may
Poppet valve (EPDMCP- I091003 4*1
Check it every six months after be damaged as well.
47L, VPII, QLII, ACPII)
three years has passed. If
Poppet valve (EPDM 6*1
necessary, replace it with a new
Chemicals other than the
one.
above)

*1. The quantity is different from [N] specification for other specifications.
U: user, S: service personnel

! Effluent section
Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Effluent tank U Collect the effluent. - At - - The message No. 503,
closing 610: Empty the
down Effluent Tank. may
Whene appear during the
ver printing.
necessa
ry

8. Appendix
U: user, S: service personnel

! Dryer rack section

Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the dryer rack U Check the dirt and damage of each - 1- - - The print may get
part. month damaged, dirty or
If the roller is dirt, wipe it using uneven.
the firmly squeezed damp cloth.

80110 18/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning print sensors U Wipe it using a cotton swab. - 3- - - The message No. 5535:
(left and right). month Paper has jammed in
the processor section.
may appear.
Dryer drive chain U Lubricate the lubricating felt. - The pressure on the
After lubricating, turn the knob to drive increases and that
spread the oil to the drive chain adversely affects the
fully. paper advance. It may
wear and damage the
parts related to the drive
as well.
Ejection roller S Check its damage or wear. If it is A058598 2-year 2-year 4 It adversely affects the
damaged or worn, replace it with a print alignment. The
new one. print may get bent,
Check it every six months after damaged, dirty or
two years has passed. If necessary, uneven. The message
replace it with a new one. No. 5535: Paper has
jammed in the
processor section. may
appear.
Pile cloth S Check its dirt and damage. If it is H039107 3-year 3-year 2 The print may get bent,
dirt or damaged , replace it with a damaged, dirty or
new one. uneven. The message
Check it every six months after No. 5535: Paper has
three years has passed. If jammed in the
necessary, replace it with a new processor section. may
one. appear.
Center roller bushing S Check its damage or wear. If it is A066056 3-year 2700 36 The message No. 5535:
Inlet roller bushing S damaged or worn, replace it with a A065831 hours 6 Paper has jammed in
new one. the processor section.
Pressure bushing S A221212 4
Check it every six months after may appear.
Squeegee bushing S three years has passed. If A125698 6
Advance roller (1) S necessary, replace it with a new A070912 5 The print may get bent,
Advance roller (2) S one. A070914 7 damaged, dirty or
(As standard replacement timing, uneven. The message
Advance roller (3) S A070935 1

8. Appendix
replace it every three year when it No. 5535: Paper has
Lower turn roller S works for three hours per day.) A070919 6 jammed in the
processor section. may
appear.
U: user, S: service personnel

80110 19/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Print sorter section (3301, 3301SD)

Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the print full U Clean it with a dry cloth (rag). - Whene - - Although the print does
sensor ver not exist, the message
necess No. 505: Remove the
ary prints from the Print
Sorter Unit. may
appear.
Cleaning the print U Check its dirt and damage. If - Whene It adversely affects the
conveyor necessary, wipe it with the firmly- ver print alignment. The
squeezed damp cloth. necess print may get dirty as
ary well.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Print sorter section (3300)

Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the print full U Clean it using the blower brush. - Whene - - Although the print does
sensor ver not exist, the message
necess No. 519: Remove the
ary prints from the Print
Conveyor Unit. may
appear.
Cleaning the print U Check its dirt and damage. If - Whene It adversely affects the
conveyor necessary, wipe it with the firmly- ver print alignment. The
squeezed damp cloth. necess print may get dirty as
ary well.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Option

8. Appendix
Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning Y-type strainer U Clean it using a toothbrush with - 1- - - The clogged strainer
(cooling water pluming running water. month would affect the flow of
unit) the cooling water, and
the message No. 5500,
5501, 5502 The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may occur.

U: user, S: service personnel

! List of periodically replaced parts

None

80110 20/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! List of consumable parts

None

8. Appendix

80110 21/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Processor Section) [SM]

Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N].

! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

! Processing rack section [SM]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Remarks
ard
replac
ement
timing
Side roller (3) (Nos. 1 and S Check its damage or wear. If it is A070749 2-year 2-year 11 Maintenance parts
2 processing racks) damaged or worn, replace it with a
Side roller (4) S new one. A078745 29
Check it every six months after
two years has passed. If necessary,
replace it with a new one.
Bearing (1) S Check its damage or wear. If it is A035075 3-year 2700 6 Maintenance parts
Bevel gear (22T) S damaged or worn, replace it with a A035155 hours 26 For standard
new one. replacement timing,
Center bushing S A216227 40
Check it every six months after replace it every three
Bevel gear (2) S three years has passed. If A220062 26 years if it works three
necessary, replace it with a new hours per day.
one.

U: user, S: service personnel

! Tank section [SM]

Parts or checking U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Reason for
items ard maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing

8. Appendix
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with water. - 1-year - - The print may get
solution block damaged, dirty or
uneven.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 22/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Replenisher section [SM]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timing Stand Q'ty Remarks
ard
replac
ement
timing
Cleaning the probe U Clean with the specified cotton - Whene - - The adhered solution
Cleaning the probe holder U swab dipped in water (Perform at - ver crystallizes and
the replacement of the necess damages the probe in
replenishment package.) ary result, or soils around
the machine.
Cleaning the U - The replenishment
replenishment solution solution cannot be
sensor detected correctly, and
although it still
remains, the message
No. 700, 705: Replace
the Replenishment
Package with a new
one. may appear.
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. (Replace it H056009 1- 1-year 7 The replenishment
pump strainer with a new one when it has been month solution cannot be
seriously damaged.) replenished correctly
Poppet valve S Check its damage. If it is damaged, I091040 3-year 3-year 8 and the processing
(Except for STB) replace it with a new one. solution may be
(Fluoro rubber) Check it every six months after deteriorated faster in
three years has passed. If result. The pump may
Poppet valve S I091003 2
necessary, replace it with a new be damaged as well.
(Except for STB)
(EPDM) one.

U: user, S: service personnel

! List of periodically replaced parts

! Replenisher section [SM]

Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement

8. Appendix
Probe (2) assembly (CD-C S A054659 1 1-year The replenishment solution cannot be
only) replenished correctly and the
Probe (1) assembly S A054658 5 1-year processing solution may be deteriorated
(Except CD-C) faster in result. That causes the solution
leakage and makes dirty in the area
around as well.
Poppet valve (STB only) S I091040 2 1-year The replenishment solution cannot be
replenished correctly and the
processing solution may be deteriorated
faster in result. The pump may be
damaged as well.

U: user, S: service personnel

80110 23/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N]

This list is to check Maintenance parts/Periodically replaced parts depending on the period for service personnel.
Description for each specification
This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM].

! Biennial
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Printer section ☞ Paper supply unit A Paper cutter
Processor section ☞ Upper guide Turn roller (4)
Squeegee roller assembly
Turn roller (6)
Turn roller (6)
Turn roller (7)
☞ Processing rack section [N] Gasket
Side roller (3)
Side roller (4)
☞ Dryer rack section Ejection roller

! Triennial
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Printer section ☞ PC control unit Battery pack Periodically replaced
parts
Processor section ☞ Upper guide Pressure bushing (13)
Pressure bushing (12)
Idle gear (38T)
Double gear
☞ Processing rack section [N] Bearing (1)
Bevel gear (22T)
Bevel gear
Idle gear (23T)

8. Appendix
Center bushing
Bevel gear (2)
Bushing (1)
Bearing (3) assembly
☞ Replenisher section [N] Poppet valve
Processor section ☞ Dryer rack section Pile cloth
Center roller bushing
Inlet roller bushing
Pressure bushing
Squeegee bushing
Advance roller (1)
Advance roller (2)
Advance roller (3)
Lower turn roller

80110 24/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

! Quadrennial
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Printer section ☞ CVP unit (option) Dot head unit

8. Appendix

80110 25/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80110
Periodically replaced parts

List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM]

Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N].

! Annual
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Processor section ☞ Replenisher section [SM] Probe (2) assembly Periodically replaced
Probe (1) assembly parts
Poppet valve

! Biennial
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Processor section ☞ Processing rack section [SM] Side roller (3)
Side roller (4)

! Triennial
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Processor section ☞ Replenisher section [SM] Poppet valve
(Except for STB)
☞ Processing rack section [SM] Bearing (1)
Bevel gear (22T)
Center bushing
Bevel gear (2)

8. Appendix

80110 26/26
Distributed by: [Link]

80210_1
Positions of paper jam release labels
Positions of paper jam release labels

Positions of paper jam release labels

! Explanation
The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of the printer door.

G079267 8. Appendix
The paper jam release label is put at the back of printer door 1 of the dual magazine unit.

G068231

80210_1 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

80210_1
Positions of paper jam release labels

The paper jam release label is put on the place from which the dryer top cover was removed.

G079268

8. Appendix

80210_1 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

80310
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list

Service personnel tool list [N]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Service personnel tool list [SM].

Tool Part No. Explanation

Scanner adjustment chart (135) Z019786-01 Used for the scanner adjustment such as swing and tilt adjustment,
Scanner adjustment chart (240) Z019039-01 light axis adjustment and focus adjustment (with the card case).*1
Scanner adjustment chart (120) Z019787-01
Scanner adjustment chart (110) Z019041-01
Scanner adjustment chart (mount) Z019668-01 Used to adjust the focus (with the color soft clear case).*1
Scanner adjustment chart (crop card) Z022046-01 Used to adjust focus for the crop card attachment of MFC
Height adjustment jig A064841-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 AMC.
Height adjustment jig A060553-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 MMC.
AMC emission adjustment chart Z808669-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 AMC or MMC.
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A066490-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Service personnel floppy disk F000472-01 Used to enter the service personnel password.
Head adjustment jig A037410-01 Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Socket wrench unit (13 mm) *2 Z020482-01 This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit.
Positioning pin A063588-01 Used to position when replacing the laser unit. Two pins are
necessary.
Loupe H099039-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
Noritsu-eNET system program unit Z019675-01 Used for remote service.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal there.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, refer to 50520 ☞ How
to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 Used to suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to
the ARCNET cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, refer to 50520 ☞ How to

8. Appendix
use the aspirator.

*1. Since the scanner adjustment chart is very thin, keep it in the case when handling.

80310 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

80310
Service personnel tool list

*2. It is unnecessary if the socket wrench (width across flats of socket: 13) for 41 mm or more including nut has already prepared. When removing the two
places of rear side, use the ratchet type socket wrench because there is a personal computer control unit.

PC control unit

Nut (M8) for fixing the laser unit

Laser unit
41 mm

G057544

8. Appendix

80310 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

80310
Service personnel tool list

Service personnel tool list [SM]

Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to
☞ Service personnel tool list [N].
(Processor section)
Tool Part No. Explanation
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM machines)

8. Appendix

80310 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list
Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.

QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Remarks

F F1
REPT F2
ORDER F3
N F4
Y F5
M F6
C F7
D F8
-1 F9
+1 F10
PASS F11
NO/STOP F12
YES/START ENT
← ←
→ →
↑ ↑
↓ ↓

Operation keyboard

8. Appendix
G050097

81010 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

81020
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification)
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification)

Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification)

Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.

QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Operations on the DLS software
F F1 Not in use
REPT F2 Not in use
ORDER F3 Order number changing
N F4 Correction value input (Normal) N
Y F5 Y correction
M F6 M correction
C F7 C correction
D F8 D correction
-1 F9 Correction value input (-1)
+1 F10 Correction value input (+1)
PASS F11 Passed frame setting
NO/STOP F12 Not in use
YES/START ENT Same as Start Job
← ← ←
→ → →
↑ ↑ ↑
↓ ↓ ↓

Operation keyboard

8. Appendix
G050097

81020 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM]

This list indicates the information relating to the suffix numbers in the No. 0700 and 0705 Replace the Replenishment Package with a
new one. P-# attention messages.
☞ 40700☞ 40704
• 0 indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in DARK status.
• - indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in LIGHT status.
Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message
number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
01 0 - - - - - P-1 -
02 - 0 - - - - P-1 -
03 0 0 - - - - P-1 -
04 - - 0 - - - P-1 -
05 0 - 0 - - - P-1 -
06 - 0 0 - - - P-1 -
07 0 0 0 - - - P-1 -
08 - - - 0 - - P-1 -
09 0 - - 0 - - P-1 -
10 - 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
11 0 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
12 - - 0 0 - - P-1 -
13 0 - 0 0 - - P-1 -
14 - 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
15 0 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
16 - - - - 0 - - P-2
17 0 - - - 0 - P-1 P-2
18 - 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
19 0 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
20 - - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
21 0 - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
22 - 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
23 0 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2

8. Appendix
24 - - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
25 0 - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
26 - 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
27 0 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
28 - - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
29 0 - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
30 - 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
31 0 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
32 - - - - - 0 - P-2
33 0 - - - - 0 P-1 P-2
34 - 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
35 0 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
36 - - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
37 0 - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
38 - 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
39 0 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
40 - - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
41 0 - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2

81510 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message

number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
42 - 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
43 0 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
44 - - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
45 0 - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
46 - 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
47 0 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
48 - - - - 0 0 - P-2
49 0 - - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
50 - 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
51 0 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
52 - - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
53 0 - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
54 - 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
55 0 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
56 - - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
57 0 - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
58 - 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
59 0 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
60 - - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
61 0 - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
62 - 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
63 0 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2

8. Appendix

81510 2/2
Distributed by: [Link]

88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume)
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume)

Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume)

The Service Manual of this machine consists of the QSS Service Manual and the PC Service Manual.
The QSS Service Manual does not contain the explanations related to the PC.
The QSS Service Manual consists of the following chapters.
To view the PC Service Manual, click the button below. (This button is valid only when viewing the CD manual.)

G068163

Item Manual No.

# 1. ☞ Cautions for work 10000
# 2. ☞ Replacement and adjustment of parts 20000
# 3. ☞ Mode 30000
# 4. ☞ Troubleshooting 40000
# 5. ☞ Operation sequence 50000
# 6. ☞ Electrical parts 60000
# 7. ☞ Setup for service personnel 70000
# 8. ☞ Appendix 80000

8. Appendix

88000 1/1
Distributed by: [Link]

89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams
Table of wiring diagrams

Table of wiring diagrams

Block No. Item Diagram No.

- System connection diagram J309689

! Scanner section
Block No. Item Diagram No.
S 1-1 AC power supply connecting (type 2) J308862
AC power supply connecting (type 3) J309559
S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 2) J308863
DC power supply connecting (type 3) J309560
S 1-3 Around scanner mount (type 2) J308864
Around scanner mount (type 3) J309561
S 1-4 Around scanner unit (type 2) J308865
Around scanner unit (type 3) J309562
S 1-5 Around AFC/scanner driver PCB (type 2) J308866
Around AFC/scanner driver PCB (type 3) J309563
S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB (type 2) J308867
Around LED driver PCB (type 3) J309564
S 1-8 135/240 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309073
S 1-9 135 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309074
S 1-10 120 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309075
S 1-11 110 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309076
S 1-12 135/240 AMC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309077
S 1-13 135/240 MMC-II power supply circuit diagram J309078
S 1-14 MFC power supply circuit diagram J309739
S 4-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308868
S 4-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308869
S 5-1 135 AFC-II J308870
S 6-1 120 AFC-II J308871
S7-1 110 AFC-II J308872
S 8-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308873
S 8-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308874

8. Appendix
S 9-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308875
S 9-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308876
S 10-1 MFC (circuit diagram) J309740
S 12-1 Scanner mount section/cooling fan (type 2) J308877
Scanner mount section/cooling fan (type 3) J309707
S 12-2 Scanner unit J308878
S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1) (type 2) J308879
Around LED light source unit (1) (type 3) J309703
S 12-4 Around LED light source unit (2) (type 2) J308880
Around LED light source unit (2) (type 3) J309704
S 12-5 Around LED light source unit (3) (type 2) J309456
Around LED light source unit (3) (type 3) J309705
S 12-6 Around LED light source unit (4) (type 2) J309457
Around LED light source unit (4) (type 3) J309706
S 13-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308881
S 13-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308882
S 13-3 135/240 AFC-II (3) J308883

89000_1 1/3
Distributed by: [Link]

89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams

Block No. Item Diagram No.

S 13-4 135/240 AFC-II (4) J308884
S 13-5 135/240 AFC-II (5) J308885
S 13-6 135/240 AFC-II (6) J308886
S 13-7 135/240 AFC-II (7) J308887
S 13-8 135/240 AFC-II (8) J308888
S 14-1 135 AFC-II (1) J308889
S 14-2 135 AFC-II (2) J308890
S 15-1 120 AFC-II J308891
S 16-1 110 AFC-II J308892
S 17-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308893
S 17-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308894
S 17-3 135/240 AMC-II (3) J308895
S 18-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308896
S 18-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308897
S 19-1 MFC (1) J309741
S 19-2 MFC (2) J309742

! Printer section/Processor section

Block No. Item Diagram No.
LPP 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J309535
LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) J309369
LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram (3) J309536
DC power supply circuit diagram (3) J309870
LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram (4) J309537
LPP 1-6 PC power supply circuit diagram J309573
LPP 2-1 System diagram J309538
System diagram J309871
LPP 2-2 PC connecting J309539
PC connecting J309872
LPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit A J309540
LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit J309541

8. Appendix
LPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit J309542
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type A) J309543
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type B) J309544
LPP 2-7 Around colorimeter unit J309382
LPP 2-8 Correction value print unit J309545
LPP 2-9 Around pricing unit J309546
LPP 3-1 Frame section J309654
Frame section J309873
LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit J309655
LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1) J309387
LPP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2) J309656
LPP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1) J309389
LPP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2) J309390
LPP 3-7 Exposure advance unit (3) J309391
LPP 3-8 Paper advance unit (1) J309657
LPP 3-9 Paper advance unit (2) J309658
LPP 3-10 Dual paper magazine unit J309394
LPP 3-11 Laser unit (1) J309395

89000_1 2/3
Distributed by: [Link]

89000_1
Table of wiring diagrams

Block No. Item Diagram No.

LPP 3-12 Laser unit (2) J309396
LPP 3-13 Laser unit (3) J309397
LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4) J309398
LPP 3-14 Laser unit (4) J309399
LPP 3-15 Correction value printing unit J309400
LPP 4-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) J309547
LPP 4-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan) J309548
LPP 4-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan) J309549
LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [N] J309711
LPP 4-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [SM] J309712
LPP 5-1 Around processor I/O PCB J309550
LPP 5-2 Main relay PCB around J309556
LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [N] J309551
LPP 5-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [SM] J309552

LPP 5-4 Around SM I/O PCB [SM] J309610

LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1) [N] J309262
LPP 6-1 Temperature control block (1) [SM] J309263
LPP 6-2 Temperature control block (2) J309667
LPP 6-3 Processor section J309266
LPP 6-4 Replenisher section (1) [N] J309659
LPP 6-5 Replenisher section (2) [N] J309660
LPP 6-6 Effluent block J309271
LPP 6-7 Drive section J309272
LPP 6-8 Dryer section (1) J309273
LPP 6-9 Dryer section (2) J309662
LPP 6-10 Dryer section (3) J309663
LPP 6-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit J309664
LPP 6-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] J309277
LPP 6-13 SM replenisher section (2) [SM] J309278
LPP 6-14 SM replenisher section (3) [SM] J309665
LPP 6-15 SM replenisher section (4) [SM] J309280

8. Appendix
LPP 6-22 Cooling water plumbing unit J309287

! Accessories
Block No. Item Diagram No.
KIDS 1-1 Keyboard Expansion Kit J404678
BRAVO II 1-1 BRAVO II J404680

89000_1 3/3
Distributed by: [Link]

89010
Table of wiring diagrams
Table of wiring diagrams

Wiring diagram table [S-4]

! Scanner [S-4]
Block No. Item Diagram No.
S 1-1 AC power supply connecting J309799
S 1-2 DC power supply connecting J309800
S 1-3 Around scanner mount J309801
S 1-4 Around scanner unit J309802
S 1-5 Scanner driver PCB area J309803
S 1-6 Around AFC/scanner driver PCB J309804
S 1-8 135/240 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309879
S 1-9 135 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309880
S 1-10 120 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309881
S 1-11 110 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309882
S 1-12 135/240 AMC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309883
S 1-13 135/240 MMC-II power supply circuit diagram J309884
S 1-14 MFC power supply circuit diagram J309885
S 4-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J309886
S 4-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J309887
S 5-1 135 AFC-II J309888
S 6-1 120 AFC-II J309889
S7-1 110 AFC-II J309890
S 8-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J309891
S 8-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J309892
S 9-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J309893
S 9-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J309894
S 10-1 MFC (circuit diagram) J309895
S 12-1 Scanner mount section/cooling fan J309896
S 12-2 Scanner unit J309897
S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1) J309898
S 12-4 Around LED light source unit (2) J309899
S 12-5 Around LED light source unit (3) J309900

8. Appendix
S 12-6 Around LED light source unit (4) J309901
S 13-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308881
S 13-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308882
S 13-3 135/240 AFC-II (3) J308883
S 13-4 135/240 AFC-II (4) J308884
S 13-5 135/240 AFC-II (5) J308885
S 13-6 135/240 AFC-II (6) J308886
S 13-7 135/240 AFC-II (7) J308887
S 13-8 135/240 AFC-II (8) J308888
S 14-1 135 AFC-II (1) J308889
S 14-2 135 AFC-II (2) J308890
S 15-1 120 AFC-II J308891
S 16-1 110 AFC-II J308892
S 17-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308893
S 17-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308894
S 17-3 135/240 AMC-II (3) J308895
S 18-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308896
S 18-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308897

89010 1/2
Distributed by: [Link]

89010
Table of wiring diagrams

Block No. Item Diagram No.

S 19-1 MFC (1) J309741
S 19-2 MFC (2) J309742

8. Appendix

89010 2/2